Contact Us
If you still have questions or prefer to get help directly from an agent, please submit a request.
We’ll get back to you as soon as possible.
If you still have questions or prefer to get help directly from an agent, please submit a request.
We’ll get back to you as soon as possible.
Article
Last Month
Check that FotoWeb is responding If you are just getting started using the API, check the following: (Note that this section applies to the FotoWeb REST API, not to the legacy APIs (ArchiveAgent, etc.)) Connect to FotoWeb using a browser to make sure the server is set up correctly and answering. The problem might not be related to using the API at a
View Content Statistics You can double-click a Content Item and see its statistics in the tab navigation. The actions shown here are only from Picturepark, not other API clients. The available statistics on Content Items are: Downloads Total (includes open the detail view) Downloads from a Share (includes open the detail view) Downloads from an Embe
Schedules can trigger Business Rules. Prerequisites Business rules you want to trigger via a schedule. Example: Business Rule: Notification for contents expiring in 10 days Specific Definitions Property Value Name (required) Choose a name that will be obvious to both yourself and any other admins - e.g. Content Items license expiration warning, Ever
You are in the Content Browser, where you find all your Content items. It is the go-to place for all users. Here, you will find the dedicated content channels and all the content you need. Picturepark Academy courses help understand basic Picturepark Content Platform functionality for end-users or light editors. The training videos are available via
Collections are a group of content items that have been collected by a user and saved for further refinement, review, or processing (sharing, editing, etc.). You create a collection in the Content Browser or the Content Browser toolbar. You can also prepare collections for using in the Content Picker in integrations or via Relationship field. Create
The condition Content Relation Item Unassigned checks if a specific content item or any content item has been unassigned in a relationship field e.g. Check if the draft version of a text has been removed before making content available to the company or check if the Press Kit Logo was removed, then unpublish the Press Kit (remove permissions).
Soft Crop settings In the Color Factory Settings app, expand the relevant channel and select Metadata. The General tab opens. In the Reading Metadata section, you can choose how Color Factory should handle soft crop information in the metadata. Select one of the following: Read and Apply Soft Crop data - the high-resolution image is cropped accordi
Summary Add original filename and replace extension and underlines for images. {{data.fileMetadata.fileName | replace: data.imageMetadata.fileExtension , "" | replace: "_" , " " | replace: "-" , " " }} Access File Name You find the filename on File Metadata (File Types > File) and all other file types. You must update all file types individually.
In the Miscellaneous section of the program configuration you can control whether FotoStation should use FWP or SMB when delivering files to an external application via drag and drop. By default, when a user drops a file from FotoStation into an external application, the file is downloaded over FWP and then delivered as a drop to the application. Th
Activation keys for Fotoware partners issued after June 2015 cannot be deactivated using the activation wizard. The process will fail if you attempt to run the Windows or Mac activation wizard to return an activated product key. Because partner keys provide access to the entire Fotoware suite of products, the activation must always be deleted when a
Folder hierarchy to metadata mapping In Color Factory Settings, expand the relevant channel and select Metadata. Open the Folder hierarchy to Metadata tab. This feature can be used to store folder hierarchy information (based on the input folder hierarchy) in metadata fields. First, choose the number of subfolder levels to include. Note that level
Summary Show the translated text from a text field with different translations in the Display Pattern. Add some color with CSS and truncate longer text, showing three dots. < font color = "#ff5576" > {{data.corporateInformation.title.en | translate | truncate: 5, ‘...’ }} < /font > Setup in Picturepark Layer: Corporate Information Text f
URL http://servername/ArchiveAgentPath/GetLargeLogo Parameters None Return value An image file in JPEG, GIF or PNG format representing the logo of the company running the agent.
Instead of only using the Picturepark IDS, you can connect an OpenID Provider, which will serve as an Identity Provider to the Picturepark IDS. The selected Identity Provider (IdP) must support the standardized Open ID Connect protocol, which itself allows a flexible implementation that varies in required metadata or ACR values. Choose Identity Pro
There are two available options when managing groups with SAML. These are described below and can also be combined. SAML has no concept of groups, instead groups are assigned based on SAML attributes and attribute mapping controls which SAML attribute is used for group assignment. Typically, this is an attribute which can have multiple values, but
Filters can be used to filter for content. You can create filters for tagboxes, number fields or date fields. Please keep in mind that it is not possible to add filters for text fields and that filters for date fields can only be displayed in defined date ranges. To get the most accurate results, we recommend you to combine filters with the Picturep
Feature This article explains how to install, configure, and use the Optimizely Fotoware add-on (version 5.0 or later). The export widget will work without Server API License but will not synchronize metadata; it will only download the image to Optimizely. Before you start This article is technical and requires knowledge of the Optimizely ecosyste
Overview Managing consent for the use of pictures and other media is central to many organizations and is often time-consuming. In Fotoware you can get quickly see a complete overview of who has or has not given consent and you can easily keep track of consent form statuses and usage rights. By creating consent templates directly in Fotoware, linkin
The API descriptor provides the following endpoints for the order API: 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 { ... "order": { "config": "/fotoweb/order-config", "cart": "/fotoweb/me/cart", "history": "/fotoweb/me/orders/", "admin": { "history": "/fotoweb/orders/", "pending": "/fotoweb/orders/pending/", "approved": "/fotoweb/orders/approved/",
Lists are lists of keywords or tags. Lists are primarily used to serve for tagging content. A list is your controlled vocabulary, your taxonomy, used for tagging with multidimensional information. That means a list can only have tags with a name or tags that have further information, such as synonyms, translations, broader terms, narrower terms, etc
Summary Show the trigger date in your current date format in the Display Pattern to see when the keywords where assigned. {% if data.autoTagging.assignMatches.triggeredOn %} {{data.autoTagging.assignMatches.triggeredOn | local_date: "%d.%m.%Y %H:%M:%S"}} {% endif %} Setup in Picturepark Layer: Corporate Information Trigger Field: Assign Matches This
Overview This topic explains how to define the content of taxonomies you've enabled using the Pro interface. If you don't have access to the Pro interface, you can edit taxonomy content i n the main interface. Adding new terms to a taxonomy Note: You must have the Manage taxonomies permission enabled to edit taxonomies. Navigate to an archive tha
How to remove files from an album First open the album: Click on the Albums link in the top banner and then open the album you want to remove files from. Next, select the assets you want to remove from the album and click on the Remove in the action bar to remove the files. Note: Removing files from an album does not delete the original files from t
With Microsoft Office installed on a Windows PC, users can place files from FotoWeb into a Word document or PowerPoint presentation directly from a side panel in those applications. Normally the plugin is automatically registered so it will be shown on the Insert ribbon in Word and PowerPoint when these applications are run. Because the Office plugi
Prerequisites Make sure the system requirements, network requirements, and other settings are met. For more information, see FotoWeb system requirements and Before you install FotoWeb. Note: We do not support Fotoware software installations on a domain controller (DC) server. Starting the installation Download FotoWeb from Downloads section of the C
Summary I want to display the Permission applied to an image as a thumbnail overlay (thumbnail pattern on file type images). {% if contentPermissionSetIds contains 'a16d98ceebe342c28fc5fc089a0f2ac4' %} Archived {% elsif contentPermissionSetIds contains 'c0b46e3b39154f12a1d1c9ab8fd365f0' %} Public {% elsif contentPermissionSetIds contains 'fb0fa99c03
Business Rule Trigger Update means the modification of a Content Item through metadata or content edits in single edit, batch edit or through Excel or API. This action does not cover file replacements!
Select Set todays date on copied file to stamp all processed files with the date of the time of processing. If this option is not selected, the files' original file date will be retained.
Apache web server support has been discontinued. No additional updates or security enhancements will be provided for the Apache web server. If you are currently running Fotoware on the Apache web server, we recommend getting in touch with Fotoware Support to receive assistance with the change to Internet Information Services, which is currently the
For the creation of a filter, only two things must be checked, highlighted in red. Other settings could be useful but can be left as is or empty. Field Leave as is! You can change this to another field if you have changed your mind and wish to add a different field to the Filters. Edits here could be accessing specific field information e.g. field.e
A workflow can be configured so that when a user selects an asset marker or runs assets through an action, FotoWeb opens a separate browser tab and navigates to a URL defined by the content of a metadata field as part of the URL string. Note: Getting the entire URL from metadata in a workflow action/marker is potentially dangerous and should only be
The user who creates a content item or schema is the owner of that content item or schema. The owner of a schema has the schema view, manage items and manage schema permissions - regardless of any other permission sets applied. The owner of a content item has the content permissions view, access original, edit, replace the file, manage and delete pe
Installing and using another certificate from a trusted source When accessing the Operations Center Status app on a secure connection with a self-signed certificate (by typing in https://servername:7001 in your web browser's address field) your browser will display a warning that the certificate is not trusted. That's because it is self-signed and n
Overview Explains how you can regroup your archives. Moving an archive to another group When you create an archive, you can also define the group that it belongs to on the archive properties page. To change the group that the archive is part of, you can open the archive's properties by right-clicking it and choosing Properties. However, you can also
Using SmartFolders SmartFolders are used to let you perform advanced searches in archives without having to know anything about the underlying search syntax used by the system. The managers of the archive may have set up a rich hierarchy of clickable nodes that you can find in the left hand side panel, with meaningful names that help you see what re
Generally, there is no need to change port numbers, but if you need to do so, go to Operations Center Settings > General. You can manually set the port number in the Server port section. Select Save after you make your changes. Note: When changing the communication port you need to manually restart the Fotoware server applications that run on the
Giving users access to configure the server When Operations Center Settings is installed, a local Fotoware Administrators group is created on the server. By default, members of the local Administrators group on the server are automatically members of this group. All users with server access, with RDP (Remote Desktop Protocol), for example, can acce
Layer Corporate assigned, but no events tagged in the Corporate Layer. { "kind": "AndFilter", "filters": [ { "kind": "TermFilter", "field": "layerSchemaIds", "term": "CorporateLayer" }, { "kind": "NestedFilter", "path": "corporateLayer.events", "filter": {
There are numerous technical reasons why the Fotoware Process account requires local administrator access on the server. The process account needs access to start and stop services, open sockets for network communication, manage temporary storage areas on the server, and manage interprocess communications - all these require special privileges that
To add contact information to a user, open the user management by opening the Tools menu (cogwheel) and choosing Manage Users/Groups. Choose Edit on the user whose contact info you'd like to modify and go to the Details tab to change contact information fields. Description Enter a basic description of the user and URL for the user’s / company’s web
In this tutorial, you learn how to integrate Content Platform with Microsoft Entra ID (formerly Azure Active Directory). Integrating Content Platform with Azure AD provides you with the following benefits: You can manage who has access to Content Platform in Microsoft Entra ID. You can enable your users to be automatically signed in to Content Platf
Goal: On the execution of a trigger field, a permission set should be assigned to publish the content to other users. Analysis Condition: depending on the trigger field’s date changing Action: assign a specific permission set Business Rule Setup Trigger The trigger point (check Triggers in Business Rule Settings): Should trigger on content modifica
Name: Enter the name of the channel. Description: Enter a more detailed description, if necessary. State: The state determines whether the channel should actively look for files to transfer or be turned off. A disabled channel can be enabled by selecting Enabled here or by enabling it in the Operations Center Settings. Source: From the drop-down
How Fotoware searches Fotoware performs searches in the connected pools. The backend search engine receives a search string and parameters from Fotoware, performs the search, and returns the results to the user in Fotoware. Fotoware provides some parameters to configure these searches on three levels – the first being preparing the search string by
Category mapping In the Color Factory Settings app, expand the relevant channel and select Metadata. The General tab opens. When receiving images from external agencies you might want to change the category abbreviations used to the in-house standard. For instance, you may have decided to categorize all sports images using SPO as an abbreviation wh
Color Factory runs as a Windows Service, so its processes run in the context of a user account that needs access to both local and network folders as defined in the channels you configure. In fact, all Fotoware services that run on the server share a common user account, referred to as the Fotoware Process Account. This account is not set in Color F
The condition Content Permission Set Assigned checks if a permission set is assigned, which will give access to specific user roles e.g. Check if permission set "SocialMedia-AllAccess" is assigned to ensure that publication information (platform, date, tags, post) is updated. Triggers the moment the selected Content Permission Set is assigned to any
Microsoft Entra ID integration Note: Microsoft ended support for Azure Active Directory Authentication Library (ADAL) in June 2023. All 8.0 versions of FotoWeb On-Premises use the Azure Active Directory Authentication Library (ADAL) for Single Sign-on (SSO) with Microsoft Entra ID. FotoWeb 8.1 uses the newer Microsoft Authentication Library (MSAL) a
Where are the QuickLists stored? The easiest way to locate the QuickList location in FotoStation is to select a file in the grid, open the metadata editor (Ctrl-T), and go to File > Manage QuickLists. This opens the folder containing the default QuickLists, where you can create your own by making new plain text files and following the naming conv
Processing sequence Open file Unique ID processing IPTC Processing conversion and stripping Curves before Color Management for CMYK file only Color Management for CMYK files only Apply soft crop etc. Flip mirror Resize Pixel edit Contrast (Includes SmartColor and SmartClean) Filter Unsharp Mask etc. Curves before Color Management for RGB and Graysca
Business Rule Trigger Replace File means the replacement of a file item using the replace file functionality in the toolbar of the Content Item or via API. This action does not cover virtual content updates!
Solange Sie die nötige Berechtigung haben, können Sie alle Inhalte von Picturepark auf Ihren lokalen Desktop herunterladen. Sie können auch mehrere Inhalte auf einmal herunterladen, indem Sie diese im Content Browser anwählen oder alle Inhalte eines Shares oder einer Kollektion herunterladen. Wenn die Formate über die API erstellt werden, muss defin
The condition Content Permission Set Unassigned checks if a permission set is unassigned, which removes access e.g. Check if permission set "PartnerAccess" is removed to inform partners about usage restrictions for this specific content. Triggers the moment the selected Content Permission Set is unassigned from any Content Item. Use Permission Set
How to sign up When accessing a site with online user registration enabled, you can sign up for an account by following the Register link in the login box. Signups by email invitation: The FotoWeb administrator may also have sent an invitation to sign up to your email address. In this case, follow the link in the email to start the registration proc
Active Directory is deprecated Note: Active Directory integration via LDAP in FotoWeb is set to End of Life from January 1st, 2024, and will be removed from our software in a future version. We strongly recommend switching your identity provider as soon as possible. Fotoware currently supports a variety of other identity providers, such as Microsoft
Index Manager search input In Color Factory Settings, expand the relevant channel and select Input & Output Options. Open the Remote Input tab. The following dialog appears. Here you can set up the channel so that Index Manager notifies Color Factory when an index has been updated. Color Factory will then send a search request to the Index Mana
This feature is only available when using Extended Pro Actions. It is only available to users with a FotoWeb Pro User license and can only be used in the FotoWeb Pro user interface. Actions can be configured to allow a user to crop the images that are sent to a destination. If the system administrator also assigns a processing profile to the workflo
The Detail Pattern displays summary information in Content Item Detail View and List Item Detail View.
When troubleshooting issues with Index Manager, it will often be you can query the service to tell if it's operative using an http GET request. Web debuggers such as Fiddler or Postman can be used for this. (External links) Send this GET request to the Index Manager service: 1 http(s)://<ServerName:PortNumber>/Fotoware/im/1.0/GetServiceStatus.
This topic is meant to give you some initial ideas on how to structure content when you're building or restructuring an archive. It deals briefly with how to automate the structuring of your content using an ingestion workflow and how files that are submitted to the system can be picked up by Color Factory and routed to a subfolder while metadata is
This article describes all dynamic tags which expand to properties of the current user. Note: These tags can be used in actions, search expressions, and in most contexts where there is a current user, but cannot be used in archive auto searches as auto searches use legacy DTSearch FWX commands. In the context of an action, the current user is the u
The implementation of a fully functional DAM system often involves migrating files from various locations and organizing them in a folder structure before additional processing can be applied. In such a scenario, some challenges are quite common and can be overcome using various workflow features in Color Factory Both high resolution and low resolu
Overview This topic explains what to do if you are locked out of FotoWeb and have administrative access to the server. This can happen if you enable SSO for a site and disable the regular login with a username and password. Users will then be forced to log in using SSO; if the SSO configuration is incomplete, it will be impossible to log in. Solutio
The condition Content Relation Item Assigned checks if a specific content item or any content item has been assigned in a relationship field to another content item e.g. check if the Press Kit has a Logo (or the correct Logo) and a Hero Shot (or the correct Hero Shot). Triggers the moment an item is assigned in the provided Relationship Field, eithe
The condition Content Permission Sets Changed checks if there have been changes made to the Permission Set of a Content Item. This does not include any change to the Permission Set itself. Triggers the moment any Content Permission Set is assigned or unassigned from any Content Item. Specific Definitions Select the condition. Property Value kind Co
By default, Fotoware SaaS uses only strictly necessary cookies. These cookies are necessary to comply with EU privacy regulations. Privacy regulations vary from region to region, and it is your responsibility to ensure you comply with the regulations in effect for your location. Best practices Inspect your Fotoware site regularly - which cookies is
The condition Content Relation Item Unassigned checks if a specific content item or any content item has been unassigned in a relationship field e.g. Check if the draft version of a text has been removed before making content available to the company or check if the Press Kit Logo was removed, then unpublish the Press Kit (remove permissions). Trig
The condition Content Relation Items Changed checks if any Content Items were removed or assigned from a specific relationship field e.g. check if Press Kit material changed and trigger validation of the new material (assign Review Layer, note with order and appropriate permissions). Triggers the moment anything changed in the provided Relationship
Each archive in FotoWeb represents a set of files that you want to make available to one or more users. An archive connects to a storage pool and can contain anything from a few files up to several million files. The files themselves are stored in a cloud data center. The indexing service handles crawling of the folders on the network drive and upd
Here, you can choose which fields to display when you hover over a thumbnail in the user interface for Office plugins and Adobe CS/CC Extensions. Go to Tools (cogwheel icon) > Site Configuration > Metadata > Metadata Views. Select Add Metadata View. Open the Thumbnail view tab. Select values from the Label, First line, and Second line drop
Fotoware Protocol (FWP)-based sub actions The following sub actions can be executed without downloading the assets to the local client: Process in Color Factory via FWP Apply Metadata Macro/Template Copy via FWP Move via FWP Check required metadata fields Rename file Attach license Clear licenses These operations can all be combined without requirin
The Condition Layer Assigned checks if a layer with a specific ID is assigned to a content item e.g. Check if layer with ID "ProductInformation" is assigned to find all product related content. Triggers when a Content Item is available which has the selected Layer assigned. Use Layer Assigned inside AND/OR to check if multiple Layers are assigned.
The Name Pattern displays information in item detail view as a header and as titles below thumbnails in the Content Browser. It is used as the tagbox preview in view mode.
To change the order in which archives appear to users, open the Tools menu and choose Manage site. Go to the Archives node on the left hand side and use the = icons to click and drag archives to the desired position.
The condition Field Value Change checks if a value in a specific field changed e.g. Check if the checkbox "LegalConcerns" changes which may require the removal of the content. This does not cover any changes to the field itself. Triggers the moment the value in the fieldpath changed to any value (leave "expected value" empty) or a specific value (pr
Assets exported for use on a CMS are by default stored in C:\ProgramData\Fotoware\FotoWeb\Operations\Embed\YOURSITENAME. This is a cache folder, and it should reside on a fast disk to speed up the serving of published assets to the website. The folder cannot be moved, but you can create a junction to another drive in case of I/O or space concerns. A
Schemas help capture information in a strictly structured way. A schema is a group of fields that can store different data (similar to a form). Create a Schema Each schema type has some schema-specific settings and also requires different follow-up tasks. Please check each schema type for details. Select Schemas Press + (Create) Choose the desired t
Date Math Transformation The DateMathTransformation allows us to pick a value from a variable and add/subtract something to it. The Date Math Transformation feature in our Business Rule Configuration represents a powerful tool that automates data manipulation and optimization. It's an incredibly versatile feature that enables you to add or subtract
This will find all Content Items where the value "Basic Information" is not present in the field that stores all assigned layers "layerSchemaIds". -layerSchemaIds:BasicInformation To check if a field or layer is not available you negate the value with a dash The syntax is based on Elastic Search Boolean Operator Logic: https://www.elastic.co/guide/e
Enabling HTTPS in FotoWeb Firstly, you need to configure FotoWeb to use the HTTPS protocol. Open the FotoWeb Settings app. Select Add. Select HTTPS. Select OK to save your changes. Enabling secure communications in IIS In IIS 7, you should start by installing the server certificate before you set up the HTTPS binding to the website: Creating or in
Some actions are only applicable for Content Items, like actions related to Permission Sets, AI Tagging, Layers. You cannot use Permission Sets, AI Tagging, or Layers for List Items. Nonetheless, actions are not filtered by the Trigger Point Document Type. That means that you can create a Business Rule for List Items with an Action that should assig
The AssignLayerAction assigns a specific layer to content if the condition is met. This requires the layer to be available to the specific content type (Available For in Layers). Specific Definitions Type-ahead and select the Layer from the dropdown. The Layer ID is used in the Business Rule, so you can update the name anytime. Property Value kind
Temporarily storing a selection on a separate tab The Pro interface has been made with flexibility in mind, and lets you drag assets to the area above the grid to create isolated selections that you can reduce further. Typically you start off by performing a search and filtering that search before making your selections. Then you may want to pin the
The AssignValueAction assigns a specific value to the field specified e.g. update copyright source with creators from Dublin Core. This requires the layer where the field is found to be assigned already, therefore combine with "AssignLayerAction" and/or "LayerAssignedCondition". The Business Rules are not executed after one another. If one Business
The UnassignTagboxItemsAction unassigns a specific tagbox item from the tagbox field specified e.g. remove flagged content tags from public keywords. This requires the layer with the field and the tag to be present on the content, therefore combine with "LayerAssignedCondition". The Business Rules are not executed after one another. If one Business
A Business Rule can execute actions when certain conditions are met. For each business rule you define general information (name, id, tracing, status), one or more trigger points (update or creation of content items, replacing of a file or via schedules), conditions (what should the business rule check e.g. metadata changed), transformations (e.g. t
Connecting FotoStation to Index Manager FotoStation clients can connect to Index Manager server over the FWP protocol. This is accomplished by creating an archive in FotoStation and pointing it to the Index Manager server, at which point all the available indexes on the Index Manager server will be shown and you can choose which index FotoStation sh
No special settings for all vector files are available. The following output format settings are available for all file types . Property Description sourceOutputFormats Which output format should be used as a source for rendering. This allows you to render small thumbnails from formats other than the original to save rendering power and time. See
When managing groups with SAML (Security Assertion Markup Language), there are two options available, both of which are described below. These two options can be combined. Default groups When users log in with SAML SSO, they are added to all default groups (and get their permissions and user licenses accordingly). These groups are configured in Fot
The Produce Notification Action produces a Content Platform toast notification when the Business Rule conditions are met, e.g., inform about new images, inform about new Content Items with approved copyright information, or recalled Content Items. The Business Rule will execute, and if conditions are met, a notification toast is created. If the use
To add a note to an asset, select the asset and open the Asset information panel (Keyboard shortcut T). By first selecting several assets you can add the same note to the whole selection. Activate the Information tab, click in the Note field and type in the note. Finally click on the checkmark next to the field to save the changes. Tip: Pressing Shi
When running a public website you may be obliged by law to include contact information, terms of use, and your company's privacy policy on the site. Even if this is not the case, it's good practice to provide a simple way for website visitors to get in touch. Adding terms and conditions to your website From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon) go to Site
List Item Ids and Content Item Ids are not available in the search index, you can add them in the channel configuration as “Extended simple search fields”. This query does not work as long as you haven’t added those fields to the channel. By default Ids from List Items or related content in Relationship fields are not present in the search index and
Finds all contents that are tagged with dogs but are especially interested in large dogs. Use the boost operator ^ in the simple search to make one term more relevant than another e.g. boost large: large^2 dogs Apply the boost operator to multiple terms using quotation marks: "large dogs"^2 Boosting in the search helps you define the relevance of yo
This will find all Content Items where the field is available but has no value, where no Permission Sets are applied. -_exists_:permissionSetIds This will find all items of the specific Permission Set. permissionSetIds:787eb87f4c914ec5ba359cc8d8a1d0af The Permission Set Id is shown in the URL in the Permission Set Detail View:
Searching for the description, which is a translated text field, in advanced search mode: _exists_:productInformation.description.en
The templates are used throughout the system. Their names give you an indication of their use. For example, Reset Password is the template sent out when a user resets the password. To test the template, you must execute the corresponding action, for example. reset your password on the login screen. The following templates are available: New User Reg
You want to find all Items that have the Product Code: F_1000 applied. Search: 1000 finds a product F_1000 finds a product F 1000 does not find a product The results depend on the Analyzers used. A use case for this might be product images in Picturepark and corresponding product numbers are stored in an analyzed string field. The string field cont
Get a collection of product content from a list of product codes. Copy all product codes from e.g. Excel or Google Sheets into the search Open Picturepark channel that contains your products and switch the search mode to "OR" Paste all product codes from excel into the search Find all matching content that contains the product codes.
This will find all Content Items where the field is not present, but also those without the Layer assigned, so you must additionally check if the Layer present. -_exists_:fieldpath To check if a field is not available use exists and a dash in front of it: -exists (not exists) This functionality is similar to the NOT Filter with the Exists Filter Fin
Will find all Content Items which have the Layer "Corporate Information" assigned, but there is no English value for the Title available aka this syntax finds all Content Items with an empty Title in the Layer. -_exists_:fieldpath AND layerSchemaIds:LayerId corporateInformation.title.en is the fieldpath to the English value of the translated text o
Overview How to search for assets on the FotoWeb server using FotoWeb for iPad Searching To search for files, tap in the search field in the top bar and type in a search word. If you type in several words, FotoWeb will search for files that contain all of the words, but not necessarily in the exact order that they were typed (also known as an AND-se
Will find all Content Items which have the exact date time value "2022-02-15T23:00:00Z". You can find this value in the JSON of the Content Item. This query only works with an exact match. corporateInformation.embargoDate:"2022-02-15T23:00:00Z"
When are Fotoware Plugins needed? A client installation of the Fotoware Plugins suite is required for the following functionality: Check Out/In Check out and open assets in locally installed associated application Image Edit, Crop, and Upload Placing assets in Microsoft Office Opening and editing assets in Photoshop/Illustrator/InDesign Fotoware Pl
Incremental numbering In Color Factory Settings, expand the relevant channel and select File Name Options. Open the Incremental Number tab. The following dialog appears. Color Factory can be configured to add an incremental number to the filename of all files processed in the channel. The filename length will still be limited to the maximum number
Browse tabs vs Search tabs When a user clicks on an archive in FotoWeb to view its contents, that archive's content is shown in a Browse tab. If the user wants to find specific content in that archive, he can use the search bar at the top of the screen and type in one or more words, then choose the in this archive checkbox. The search result will th
Version: 11.13.0 Status: Released Release: Einshorn Release Release date: November 27, 2024 Release Notes: 11.13 Previous Version: 11.12.0 Breaking changes Feature Endpoint/Contract Title Description Reference Schema fields Schema New field type FieldTreeView A new field type FieldTreeView has been introduced. Deserializing schemas from pl
Choosing when a user account expires If you need to set an expiry date for some user accounts, you can do so on a per-user basis or you can set an expiry date for a selection of users. You can find the account expiry setting by opening the properties of a user in the user management console: Log in to Fotoware, open the Tools menu and choose Manage
RGB / Lab processing options In Color Factory Settings, expand the relevant channel and select Color Management. Open the RGB/Lab tab. The following dialog appears. If you select Don’t Color Manage from the Convert RGB/Lab drop-down list, the color space remains unchanged. If you select To Grayscale, you can select Advanced Options button to choose
The setting "ID" is available for various things in Picturepark e.g. users, fields, schemas, business rules and is the unique Identifier The ID is created automatically from your name entry. Picturepark removes spaces and special characters to ensure that the ID is valid. You use the ID in all technical references to this entity e.g., in display pat
Overview How to reorder the assets in an album in the Pro interface. Sorting the assets in an album To sort the assets in an album, first drag the album from the right side panel to the tab area above the grid to create a new tab for it. To be able to drag the album, click on the corrugated left bar in the album and drag. With the Grid view active (
To use extended search, select the (...) icon to the far right in the search field. In the dialog that opens, you can specify the precise criteria to search for. You can search in specific fields, within a specific time interval, etc. When you have made your selection, select Search to pass the search to the server and retrieve the results. Which fi
Certain views and dialogs in FotoStation let you choose metadata fields from a dropdown list. This is the case with the data mining feature and Search dialog, among others. If you only need certain fields in these dropdown lists, you can remove the fields you don’t need by selecting Drop down menu filter in the Metadata node in the configuration win
Users can comment on content and notify other users, e.g., by reviewing metadata before it is published or having questions about the content. Users now can comment on (master) content and notify users, e.g., for reviewing metadata or the content before it becomes available or to request access to the original content item if no such permission was
You upload file-based content like documents, videos, images, and audio. Drag and drop files or folders to Picturepark Content Platform for uploading. It does not need to be on a special menu. Wherever you are in Picturepark, drop your files and folders, and then the upload will start. Uploading requires appropriate permissions. If you are not able
Filter for Content Items that have any tag in a tagbox "Events" assigned. { "kind": "NestedFilter", "path": "detailInformation.eventDetails.events", "filter": { "kind": "ExistsFilter", "field": "detailInformation.eventDetails.events" } } Exists check if there is a value existing. The nested filter is needed for multi tagbox
You create file-less content like press kits. Open the Content Browser in the main menu. Select + (Add). Select Create. Choose a suitable template (with a predefined set of fields, you can search too). Insert the values of the content item. 👉 See the creation of Virtual Type Items Use Cases Virtual Items Press Kits for a press portal: https://press.
Picturepark supports a wide range of file types. Upload: You can upload any file type to Picturepark; there are no specific file format restrictions. However, system limitations like bandwidth and storage capacity may apply. A preview/thumbnail is displayed for most file types; if a thumbnail cannot be displayed, a file format icon will be shown ins
Upload vs Ingest (Staged Upload) Content Platform uses a staged upload process. Files are first uploaded (available to Content Platform (Storage)) and then ingested (Content Platform starts Rendering & Data Extraction). The process stage is visible in the notification where you see upload in progress, ingest in progress, and ingest completed mes
A Layer is a group of one or more fields. A Layer contains all metadata of a Content Item, the so-called metadata profile. Examples: Basic Information (title, description), Product Information (product name, family, etc.). The fields contained in a Layer become available when added to a content item. If the Layer is later removed, the fields it prov
To set where files are copied when they are processed in an action, too the Destination asset tab in the action configuration. Destination type Assets can be copied to file system destinations, Windows network shares, to FTP/FTPS destinations and as email attachments to one or more recipients. If you choose an FTP server as your destination, you wil
With Microsoft Office installed on a Windows PC, users can place files from FotoWeb into a Word document or PowerPoint presentation directly from a side panel in those applications. Normally the plugin is automatically registered so it will be shown on the Insert ribbon in Word and PowerPoint when these applications are run. Because the Office plugi
Kollektionen sind Gruppen von Inhalten, die von einem Benutzer gesammelt und zur weiteren Verfeinerung, Teilung oder Bearbeitung gespeichert wurden. Sie können eine Kollektion erstellen, indem Sie oben rechts zu “Kollektion” wechseln und auf das Pluszeichen klicken. Um Bilder zu Ihrer neu erstellten Sammlung hinzuzufügen, können Sie auf den Stern ob
Virtual Types or Lists enable users to more easily work with content in Picturepark that adheres to a defined structure, without having to worry about the output format of the content. Common to Lists or Virtual Types is a defined structure. Structure for Virtual Types Virtual Type Structure Press Release Headline; Subhead, Body; Footer Landing Pag
Basic guidelines Try to keep taxonomies less than four levels deep This may not be possible in all cases; certain disciplines may require a more comprehensive layout, but generally speaking, a wide/shallow taxonomy is easier to navigate than a narrow and deep taxonomy. Have at least two entries in every sub-category If a subcategory only contains a
Overview Learn how to map input categories from your wirefeeds to something that makes sense for your internal use. Scenario description In environments that receive wirefeeds from different sources, the categories that are used by vendors may vary. This can make it hard for your users to know which categories to search for to find the assets they'r
The filter editor can help you create very precise advanced search queries. You can access it next to the search bar via the filter icon. Your browser does not support HTML5 video. Available for: Channels Tagbox Filters Not available for: Dynamic View (as it includes liquid syntax) No mobile support, the icon will be hidden on mobile devices
Named user license The Named user license software license for FotoStation Client grants the customer access to the services provided by Server Products. The customer can install FotoStation Client on two devices for each Named user license to accommodate, for example, a home office. However, the two instances cannot be used simultaneously. FotoStat
Overview Learn how to create complete web pages with the pictures in your collections without writing any HTML. What does the web export feature do? The Web export wizard is used to create complete web pages with your selected pictures on them. Although you can design your own custom web templates, this topic only deals with how you can create pages
After configuring the server settings, open the Folders tab and select Add folder to define a new account for retrieving emails. Enter the following information, as necessary: Name: Enter the account name. This is used to identify the account when you add it to a channel later. Description: Enter more information about the account, if necessary. Ty
This topic explains how to deactivate a Fotoware server product. Deactivation is necessary when planning to move the server software to another server. For information on deactivating FotoStation, see Moving your copy of FotoStation to another computer. Note: The Fotoware Application Activation Wizard has been superseded by the fwlicensetool for man
To enable SmartFolder navigation on an archive, open the archive management (Tools - Manage site - Archives), open the properties of the archive and go to the General tab on the properties sheet. Then enable the SmartFolder navigation option. This will allow all users of the archive to navigate its contents using the SmartFolders that you have crea
Creating a public album link When you're viewing an album on a tab in the FotoWeb Pro interface, click on Get link in the top right corner. This will create a public link to the album that can be shared via email, instant messaging or by any other means, and anyone who gets the link can access the album. If you have permission to grant download righ
As a rule, any file that has a defined pixel size will allow 100% zoom (1 to 1 pixel mapping on screen) using the original file.This is true for most image file formats. It is also worth noting that using this feature has significant performance impact for the FotoWeb server. This is also the case for RAW files. Fotoware also supports zooming into P
Overview Learn how to add metadata to pictures in FotoStation's image editor. Adding metadata Click on the Metadata button to open the metadata editor and add information to the image. The Metadata function in the image editor is identical to the one that can be accessed from the toolbar in the main program window. Learn all about adding metadata t
What are RAW+JPEG bundles? If your camera has been set up to shoot both RAW and JPEG files, you can set FotoStation up to join the RAW and the JPEG file in a "bundle". Thus the files will be seen as a single file in FotoStation, but when applying metadata or when copying it to an output, for example, both files are included in the operation. Note: T
For the connector “Remove.bg” it makes sense to enable users to filter for transparent images that the connector created, whether or not they are related to the original. This can be achieved with the following filter. Useful for Remove background connector Show Items with an alpha channel (ARGB) uploaded by a connector service user. Will filter for
Overview Note: The Fotoware Application Activation Wizard has been superseded by the fwlicensetool for managing activations. For information on how to obtain this tool and use it to manage software activation from the command prompt, see Command line activation of Fotoware applications using fwlicensetool. When troubleshooting activation, if you fin
This feature is only available when using Extended Actions. Extended Actions are only available to Fotoware Main Users and Fotoware Pro Users. When do I need this? This option will hide the asset from view directly after processing. If you've configured an action that moves an asset to another folder, for example, you may find that the file does not
You can open fields and values and test the behavior. There is no autosave. To change values, you must select Save (bottom right). Edits (updates) are only applied to the Content Items you see. If you plan to edit 50 items, filter by a Layer so you only see 20 items and then edit - you will only update the visible, filtered 20 items. Only the items
Problem: If the new channel is not visible in the UI in the Channel Dropdown then you may have not entered the correct grantedUserRoleIds for the User Role you are logged in as. Open the Channel Edit Settings Check "View for All" Validate if you can see it - then adapt the User Roles.
Will find all Content Items which were created or modified in March 2020 audit.creationDate:[2020-03-01 TO 2020-03-31] audit.modificationDate:[2020-03-01 TO 2020-03-31] corporateInformation.embargoDate:[2021-01-01 TO 2023-01-01] Will find all Content Items which have an embargo date value inside this range. There is a Picturepark limitation in place
Symptom You have received an offline activation response file (.fwar), but when you try to activate the Fotoware product with the file, it still fails to activate. Cause The license key you are trying to use may have expired. The automated system that handles offline activation requests does not recognize this and returns an activation response file
Scenario description Pictures delivered from photographers to a newsdesk are often tagged with a photographer code using a prefix in the filename when the picture is written in the camera. When files are ingested into the workflow, Color Factory can isolate that prefix and populate a number of metadata fields from a database that holds information a
Version: 11.1.0 Status: Released Release: Eggishorn Release Release date: December 4th, 2021 Release Notes: picturepark.com/releasenotes Previous Versions: 11.0.0 Breaking changes Feature Endpoint/Contract Title Description Reference Content ContentFileUpdateRequest File replacement check When updating the file of a Content, it is (under certain cir
Storing a search for later use If you find yourself performing the same search very often, you may want to save this search. This will be especially useful when the search you are performing contains several different strings and image attributes. To create a search, open the Search dialog box and enter the search you would like to save. Then, click
You can use webhooks to configure the Fotoware system to send notifications when assets change in an archive. From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon), go to Site Configuration > Integrations. Select Webhooks. Three asset events are available for notifications: Asset ingested - Used to post a notification when an asset enters the system via the Fot
When FotoWeb's online signup has been configured to require administrator approval of new users, users with rights to approve pending signups who log on to FotoWeb see a notification of pending sign-ups. as shown in the screenshot below: Select Pending Sign-ups from the Tools drop-down to open the following view: To see all the information entered
Adaptive Metadata means to focus on the information required for the specific content. If your content model defines that your basic information should always include the address, then where does your product category live? You must define the lowest common denominator - like in mathematics but easier. What type of content will you manage? Input 1:
Here, you can find a Postman collection that can be imported to Postman to pass OAuth requests to Fotoware. It can be used as a baseline for testing your OAuth integration. Click here to download the Fotoware OAuth API request collection for Postman. You must download Postman separately. (External link)
Basic guidelines Try to keep taxonomies less than four levels deep This may not be possible in all cases; certain disciplines may require a more comprehensive layout, but generally speaking, a wide/shallow taxonomy is easier to navigate than a narrow and deep taxonomy. Have at least two entries in every sub-category If a subcategory only contains a
This is where you define your workflows or modify their expected behavior. When you set the maximum age for assets to be deleted, you configure the purging action.
The Overview Dashboard provides predefined widgets that can be used alongside HTML code to enhance the dashboard template. Currently, the supported widgets are Search Box, Banner, and Card. This section describes how to use and configure the predefined widgets and how to override predefined styles to customize them. Examples Find some complete code
To get from FotoWeb Pro to FotoWeb, select the Fotoware name and logo. Note: The Fotoware logo may have been replaced with a custom company logo. To get from FotoWeb to FotoWeb Pro, select the Pro icon. If you cannot see a Pro link in the top menu, your user account is not licensed to use the Pro interface.
The Picturepark Content Platform uses a secure authentication system build on Open ID Connect, which allows users to log in to one or multiple different Picturepark Content Platforms with the same Picturepark account, they already use with Picturepark. The Picturepark login is also the preferred method to connect your users with Picturepark Apps, Pi
Performing activation Open the Windows Start menu and start typing Fotoware License Tool, then start it. A command prompt opens and shows you the syntax for performing the activation. To activate a product key, enter the following and press Enter to execute the command: fwlicensetool -a <licensekey> Activating FotoStation For more information
With the Guest Portal feature, you can easily make selected content publicly available on the dashboard. Users can view, browse, filter, search, and download (when suitable) this content without logging in to Content Platform. The Guest Portal can eliminate the need for microsites or third-party portals if you don't have strict branding requirements
Enabling persistent logins Persistent logins can be enabled on the Fotoware site by an administrator. This way, when a user logs in, FotoWeb will set a permanent cookie in the user's browser so that they are remembered when returning to the site and do not have to log in manually again. From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon), go to Site Configuration &
The Tagbox field allows you to tag content, similar to tagging in social media, but with the option to configure the available tags. Tags work as a grouping of content. Tags are structured information because users cannot make typos when selecting from a predefined list. You can use Tags for regions, locations, moods, colors, product categories, cou
Sie können dateibasierte Inhalte wie Dokumente, Videos, Bilder und Audio hochladen. Ziehen Sie Dateien oder Ordner per Drag & Drop auf die Picturepark Content Platform, um sie hochzuladen. Dies muss nicht über ein spezielles Menü erfolgen. Wo immer Sie sich in Picturepark befinden, ziehen Sie Ihre Dateien und Ordner in den Content Browser, und d
Selecting files with the Carousel The Carousel is a visual tool to help you separate your best pictures from the rest. It's very useful after you import several pictures from a memory stick, for example. To use the carousel, you first need to make an initial selection. If you've just imported many pictures from a memory card, you can select all the
Where to get it? When you install a Fotoware product (FotoStation, or any server product with Operations Center), Fotoware License Tool is automatically installed. Look for the Fotoware License Toolin your list of installed applications. Alternatively, you can find fwLicenseTool in the Fotoware Customer Portal in Utilities in the Downloads section.
View Content Statistics You can double-click a Content Item and see its statistics in the tab navigation. The actions shown here are only from Picturepark, not other API clients. The available statistics on Content Items are: Downloads Total (includes open the detail view) Downloads from a Share (includes open the detail view) Downloads from an Embe
Public documentation of the Fotoware endpoints with Swagger (OpenAPI) is available at https://api.fotoware.com. Using this site, you can authorize the site's connection to your Fotoware Veloz tenant and explore the entire API. If you're using Fotoware Veloz Go to https://api.fotoware.com Add your Fotoware tenant's URL to the Site field at the top of
Installation alternatives FotoWeb Desktop can be installed in different ways depending on the scale of the deployment. The basic modes of installation are: Automatic installation on the client when the user logs on to FotoWeb. Manual or scripted installation on the client using the FotoWeb Desktop installation available on the Fotoware Update Center
Enabling annotations in an archive This is set up on the General tab of the Archive properties. When enabled, all users with access to the archive will be able to see the annotations that have been created on assets. Giving users or groups access to create annotations in the archive access list This is done by adding the Annotate permission in the a
Browsing a memory card When importing files from a memory card you can simply browse the card directly from FotoStation and make selections there: After inserting the memory card in your computer's memory card reader, use the Desktop side panel to locate the memory card. Clicking on it will display all the pictures (and video files) on it. Note: Som
This information only applies to accounts managed in Picturepark. If your Picturepark uses federated authentication, like log in with your company account, you must have a working company account that only your company can give you. Try to log in to find out. The Picturepark Content Platform admin interface is not available without a login, so yo
Watermark uses Area Affects Archive properties sheet, on the Export tab Lets you set an archive-specific watermark that affects all users. Watermarks set for Quick Renditions on an archive Physically watermarks all user-generated previews made through Quick Renditions. Watermarks set on a processing profile Applies a watermark to files processed by
Using ImageMagick When file formats not natively supported by Color Factory enter a processing channel, they are normally processed as unknown files. However, it's possible to enable processing of HEIC files, for example, by using an external processor such as ImageMagick. Download ImageMagick. You need the 64-bit Windows version with 8-bit process
Extensions and prefixes In Color Factory Settings, expand the relevant channel and select File Name Options. Open the Extension/Prefix/Suffix tab. The following dialog appears. Although Color Factory is not dependent on a file's extension in order to determine its file type, you may want to add an extension to the output files for other programs to
When viewing an album, click Get link in the top right corner. This will create a public link to the album that can be shared via email, instant messaging, or any other means. Anyone who gets the link can access the album. If you have permission to grant download rights to the users you share the album with, users who access the album will also be a
Picturepark uses accounts and an Identity Server to identify users. Accounts control only whether the account holder may connect to Picturepark to access and edit that user's profile. Once connected, the Roles and Permission Sets of the account determine access to content and other parts of the system. Pictureparks Identity Server handles the accoun
Note: This feature requires a Fotoware Main user license. It is not available to FotoWeb Legacy users. Administrators can configure archives to allow users or groups to crop and size pictures directly in the browser before downloading them. The original file in the archive is left untouched. This feature relies on the Crop & Download permission
Accessing the Pro interface When a user logs in to FotoWeb, he will be taken to the Pro interface by default if he has a Pro license. To get from the Pro interface to the Main interface, click on the FotoWeb logo in the top left corner. Then, to get back to the Pro interface click on the Pro link in the top menu in the main interface. The Pro interf
There are various states associated with an Account. Picturepark accounts are always in one of the following states: Step State Required Action Details 1 Registered User to confirm the signup When a user has completed the signup form to request a new account, the account is created but not yet visible in Picturepark in the Users area. The account is
A picture with annotations can be printed complete with the annotations to any connected printer, or e.g. to a PDF output. How to Print On the Asset Details page, click on the Print button above the preview and choose Print with annotations. Next, choose which annotations to include in the printout by checking off the correct ones. Finally, the syst
To add annotations to a picture, click on it in the thumbnail grid and then go to Preview mode (keyboard shortcut P) or Filmstrip mode (keyboard shortcut F). Annotation tools When hovering over the preview, select the Annotations icon to add annotations to the image. Several tools are available to allow users to highlight precisely the part of the p
Setting up Index Manager archive searches To create a new input source based on an Index Manager archive search, select the Index Manager server you have created and select the green Plus icon to create a new search. When you do this, Connect retrieves the available archives from the Index Manager server automatically. By default, the FWP protocol i
The JavaScript Object Notation (JSON) is an open-standard file format or data interchange format that uses human-readable text to transmit data objects consisting of attribute-value pairs and array data types (or any other serializable value). JSON knows numbers, strings (text), boolean, arrays and objects; as well as NULL. Find more about JSON on W
Access requirement: To work with version control you need access to the index(es) and you must create an archive that points to the index(es) for which version control is enabled. At times you may want to create a duplicate of a certain version of an asset. Duplicating a version creates a new file from that version, it does not create a new versi
Guest user A guest user is an unauthenticated user with limited access to the site via the guest portal. Archives still have to be configured for guest access by granting Everyone access. Feature Description Consumers Editors General use Browse and search for content Download content Download assets via the web browser interface. Suppor
Enabling or disabling an index When you have created an index, you may notice that the index is, by default, marked as [OFF] in the list of indexes. You can enable it in the Index Manager Settings app. Open the General tab for the specific index by selecting Enable Indexing. Otherwise, even if you start the indexing service, this index will not be i
If you have been given privileges to delete assets in an archive, you can select the files and open the Asset Information panel (keyboard shortcut T) where you find the Delete icon that looks like a trash can on the Information tab. Click it to delete the selected asset(s). You need to click it twice to confirm the delete operation. Depending on how
Learn how to extract metadata from assets in a workflow in such a way that the field identifiers are also stored in the text file. This allows you to "reverse" the process and apply metadata to assets using the text files as metadata templates in a separate channel. Operators In the examples below, we will assume we'll be working with the following
The following settings for an audio still image are additionally available. This still image is used for thumbnails and static previews, which for audio is the voicegram of the audio file. Property Description kind AudioStillFormat extension This property should not be overwritten, except for extensions that are identical like jpg vs. jpeg. No spe
Go to the archive management (Tools - Manage site - Archives), open the properties sheet of an archive and go to the General tab. In the Navigation pane section you can then enable taxonomy navigation. By enabling Taxonomy navigation you can define metadata that's exposed in the side panel in the user interface and allow users to tick the metadata t
You are in the Content Browser, where you find all your Content items. It is the go-to place for all users. Here, you will find the dedicated content channels and all the content you need. Picturepark Academy courses help understand basic Picturepark Content Platform functionality for end-users or light editors. The training videos are available via
Roles are assigned to registered users and define what a user is in general allowed to do in the Content Platform. Bear in mind that the role permission "Manage Content" is not sufficient as the Role also needs to be permitted to apply Layer or create Virtual Items. The role permissions are global access privileges. Super Admins are always present.
Adding the text analyzer to the fieldpath allows finding values contained in the text field, ignoring capitalization. You can now also search for the plural values or stems e.g. berries, berr. corporateInformation.title.en.language:berries The fieldpath extension language tells Picturepark to look for the value from the language analyzer, usually us
Dust and scratches filter In Color Factory Settings, expand the relevant channel and select Image Filters. Open the Dust filter tab. The following dialog appears. Color Factory has a dust and scratches filter than can greatly enhance the quality of dated scanned negatives or other sources that would otherwise require manual effort. This is accompli
Instead of only using the Picturepark IDS, you can connect an OpenID Provider, which will serve as an Identity Provider to the Picturepark IDS. The selected Identity Provider (IdP) must support the standardized Open ID Connect protocol, which itself allows a flexible implementation that varies in required metadata or ACR values. Choose Identity Pro
Will find all Content Items which have the exact term "red berry" in the English translation of the translated text field. basicInformation.title.en.language:"red berry" For (product) numbers in translated text fields you must search without quotes. This works with or without the analyzer: basicInformation.title.en.language:2106445_1 basicInformatio
I would like to have a hierarchical filter that displays for example keywords grouped by the classification tagbox field. You can add a tree view field to your layer e.g here I have added one to the Basic Information field: [ { "fieldId": "keywords", "allowRecursion": false, "levels": [ { "fieldId":
How multilanguage XMP works The XMP specification makes it possible to create language specific metadata fields so that users may input metadata in several different languages. Technically, an individual field is created for every language that is added to allow metadata input in that field, and users may then search fields-specifically in a given l
Learn how to define the content of taxonomies you've enabled using the main interface. If you're a Pro user and have access to the Pro interface, learn how to create taxonomy content using the Pro interface. Adding a new term to a taxonomy Note: You must have the Manage taxonomies permission enabled to edit taxonomies. Navigate to an archive that h
Select the Get assets node to choose the pool from where to retrieve the assets and enter a search query. The following actions are available: Send assets to - select the pool and folder to which the assets are sent. Apply metadata macros - Select Delete assets to delete assets. This action permanently removes selected assets from your pool. You
The following settings for .jpg are additionally available. Property Description quality Compression quality. Must be in range [0,100] and defaults to 80. chromaSubsamplingEnabled Whether to use chroma subsampling or not. extension This property should not be overwritten, except for extensions that are identical like jpg vs. jpeg. Bear in mind that
Note: Event logging is performed on a best-effort basis and is not transactional. There is no guarantee that every action will be logged, as Activity Exports logs the event after it has been processed. However, this risk is minimal and if it does occur, it is most likely due to a larger background failure that affects more parts of the Fotoware syst
Learn how to define the content of taxonomies you've enabled using the main interface. If you're a Pro user and have access to the Pro interface, learn how to create taxonomy content using the Pro interface. Adding a new term to a taxonomy Note: You must have the Manage taxonomies permission enabled to edit taxonomies. Navigate to an archive that h
Overview This topic explains how to define the content of taxonomies you've enabled using the Pro interface. If you don't have access to the Pro interface, you can edit taxonomy content i n the main interface. Adding new terms to a taxonomy Note: You must have the Manage taxonomies permission enabled to edit taxonomies. Navigate to an archive that
Legacy note: This feature was discontinued on July 1, 2021. Versions released after that date don't contain this feature. What is a FotoWeb Screen? A screen is a shared display of one or more images or a slide show to which users can add and remove images using smart phones or tablets. Any user who can access the FotoWeb home screen through a browse
This page lists banned IP (Internet Protocol) addresses to help you monitor and manage security risks. You can review these IPs and allow access when needed, providing an easy way to control access and maintain system security. Go to Settings > FTP Defender. The list includes the IP address, the time it was banned, and its score. To grant access
Note: The FFmpeg library required to decode video formats is not included with the Fotoware installers. For information on how to install it manually on the Fotoware server, see How to install FFmeg for FotoWeb, Index Manager, and Color Factory. What if your codec or container/format isn't listed? If you are uncertain if your video files are support
Access requirement: To use this feature, a user needs to have Restore revisions access set in the archive properties. When reviewing asset revisions on the Revisions page, you can restore a revision by clicking on the Restore link next to the revision in the list. Selecting the Restore link will open a dialog box to confirm the revision to restore.
Output file naming In Color Factory Settings, expand the relevant channel and select File Name Options. Open the File Name Options tab. The following dialog appears. In mixed computer environments (Windows/Mac/Unix), different file naming conventions govern the various systems. To cater for this, Color Factory provides preferences for fine-tuning a
These rights are granted to users (user rights) by assigning users to the role. User rights are sorted alphabetically. Permission What does this mean? Notes Create and configure identity providers Required to set up and configure identity providers for authentication via ADFS or Azure AD. Additional information about configuring ADFS authentication
In this scenario we try to accomplish the following When you've spent months, maybe even years, building your archive of digital assets, the task of doing a one-off to update the metadata of your files can seem pretty endearing. This is what we're trying to achieve: We have a hierarchical folder structure of x number of files that we want to update
Permission sets assign multiple user roles to content or schema and allow you to control the level of access the user roles have on content or schemas. Permission sets applied to content/schemas are additive, all of them apply. Default content permission sets that are added to a content item on creation can be added by Picturepark Staff. Permission
Find the album you want to delete in the right side panel and click on the trashcan next to its title. You will be asked to confirm deletion of the album. If you're viewing the album on a separate tab you can also click on the trashcan icon next to the album's title. Users with access to the album will no longer be able to open it and view its conte
Understand the requirements First off, make sure you understand the requirements for using the Archive Agent API Enable the Archive Agent interface The Archive Agent API has to be enabled for a group of users in the Fotoware Operations Center before they can start making requests to it. Understand how user authentication works A separate article out
The following settings for images are available. Property Description kind ImageFormatBase colorProfile Color profile to use. Colorspace is derived from the chosen profile. colorTransformationIntent The method of conversion for color spaces (e.g. CMYK to RGB). Further information can be found here: http://www.colourphil.co.uk/rendering_intents.shtm
Server and client system requirements Make sure that your server and/or client hardware and software comply with the system requirements for the software you are installing. If you're installing more than one Fotoware server application on a single server, the hardware requirements must be combined to ensure the system has enough resources to run al
Creating a metadata macro To apply a metadata macro, you first need to create one. Once created, you can copy and edit a macro, as well as rearrange the order of macros if necessary. Macros are applied in sequence, beginning with the first on the list. If you have a large workflow with several macros, you may need to rearrange the order so that spec
This XMP field reference only lists the fields defined in the XMP configuration that comes with a default Fotoware system installation. Using the Metadata Configuration you can create additional namespaces and fields. XMP field codes Note: Fields in the Fotoware Reserved namespace should not be used for custom content - these are required by Fotowar
FotoWeb actions can be configured to prompt users to add metadata during the operation.The metadata can be added to the original asset, a copy of the asset that is transferred to a destination using the action, or both. Metadata editing is enabled on the Action properties page, where metadata updates to the original asset are configured on the Sour
Send assets to Configure the Send assets to node to specify the folder and pool to which the uploaded images should be saved. Select the pool where you want to store your assets. The available folders in the selected pool are listed. Select a folder; you cannot save to the root folder. Overwrite existing assets: Enable this option to allow new uplo
The condition Content Relation Items Changed checks if any Content Items were removed or assigned from a specific relationship field e.g. check if Press Kit material changed and trigger validation of the new material (assign Review Layer, note with order and appropriate permissions).
The Dashboard provides an overview of all workflows created on your tenant. Here, you can search, filter, rename, and delete existing workflows and start creating new workflows. Heading Description Name The name of the workflow. Last modified by The name of the person who last modified this workflow. This value is updated automatically when changes
About crop profile sets The crop profile sets are used with FotoWeb Desktop. Fotoware users can be granted permissions to crop images in the archives. To assist users in this process or to enforce company standards, you can create crop profile sets that can be linked to the archives. These crop profile sets are basically collections of pre-defined c
Choosing the right server for the Fotoware license server When online activation is not an option, Fotoware software can validate its licenses with an in-house server that runs the FlexNet license software. Fotoware recommends installing the license server on a central Active Directory server to allow all clients convenient access to the licenses. I
This article lists the functionality for Fotoware 8.1 as well as the individual Fotoware 8.0 Feature Releases and the new functionality introduced with each release. Updates are available to all customers covered by an Agreement. Fotoware tests upgrading from the previous two On-Premises releases to the current release, and we offer support for the
Overview Use this sub action to crop files to which you have applied a soft crop frame. Settings This sub action is used to perform the actual cropping of an image that has previously been soft-cropped. If an image without a soft crop frame is dropped on an action that involves applying a soft crop, the image is simply copied to the folder specified
By default, all client communications with FotoWeb run over standard, unencrypted HTTP on port 80. This topic and its associated subtopics explain how to configure FotoWeb to use a secure connection and/or non-standard port numbers for communications. By configuring FotoWeb for secure communications, all clients connections to the server can run in
When working in FotoWeb Pro, you can open a complete overview of all available keyboard shortcuts by pressing the ? key on the keyboard.
Will find all Content Items which have the Layer "Corporate Information" assigned, but there is no English value for the Title available aka this syntax finds all Content Items with an empty Title in the Layer. -_exists_:fieldpath AND layerSchemaIds:LayerId corporateInformation.title.en is the fieldpath to the English value of the translated text o
Important points to consider before migrating FotoWeb 7.0 to version 8.0 When updating a FotoWeb 7.0 to version 8.0, several concepts are different. Make sure you study this document carefully to understand the implications of migrating to FotoWeb 8.0. FotoWeb 8.0 requires faster hardware Before commencing an update to FotoWeb 8.0, study the system
When a user searches for assets in FotoWeb, they can define additional search parameters to create very specific queries. To use the extended search, select the three dots to the far right in the search field: NOTE: Extended search is only available to registered users. Unauthenticated guest users can only use standard search functionality. The over
This article describes all dynamic tags that expand to the properties of the current user. These tags can be used in actions, search expressions, and most contexts where there is a current user. In the context of an action, the current user is the user who sent the assets to the action. In the context of a search, the current user is the user who r
Removing files from an album If you are viewing the album's content on a separate tab in FotoWeb Pro, you can simply select the files you want to remove and press the Delete key on the keyboard to remove them. An alternative way is to hover over the files in the album list in the right side panel and click on the little X that appears over the thumb
Views There are many ways to view and organize your files in the archives in FotoStation. The toolbar in the image window contains different functions for viewing, searching for, and selecting files/images. If the size of the toolbar is very small, the descriptive labels are not displayed for the last four buttons. To see the descriptive labels you
This article describes all dynamic tags which expand to the current date and time. Different tags expand to the current date and time in different formats and time zones or to components of the current calendar date and wall clock time. These tags can be used everywhere where dynamic tags are allowed, including actions and search expressions. Tip: I
Open the marker's properties and go to the Action tab. Tick the Execute webhook checkbox and type or paste in the webhook URL. Then choose the type of data to transfer from FotoWeb - Form data or JSON.
Learn how to export or import metadata to or from text files, such as comma separated .csv files. Learn how to connect FotoStation to a database to import or export text records using ODBC.
No special settings for .svg are available. No special settings for all vector files are available. The following output format settings are available for all file types . Property Description sourceOutputFormats Which output format should be used as a source for rendering. This allows you to render small thumbnails from formats other than the or
The Not Query Filter is an operator where you can add one filter, which must not be fulfilled.
Color Factory can be configured to store the output directly to an Index Manager archive or a Pool. Files are transferred to the server using the FWP protocol. In Color Factory Settings, expand the relevant channel and select Input & Output Options. Open the Remote Output tab. To store the channel's output files directly to an Index Manager arc
Commonly used shortcuts Shortcut Function Arrow keys Move selection in grid Command-Enter Open Preview Command-M / Shift-Command-M Maximize View / Revert to normal view Command-T Open Metadata Editor Command-G Open Carousel View for narrowing down a selection Space Open a full screen preview for making selections Command-J Toggle RAW/JPEG Bundle vie
No special settings for a vector still image are available. No special settings for all vector files are available. The following output format settings are available for all file types . Property Description sourceOutputFormats Which output format should be used as a source for rendering. This allows you to render small thumbnails from formats o
Color Factory can be configured to add information about clipping and working paths, transparency layers, and Alpha channels to metadata. This can for instance be used as the basis for markers in FotoStation and FotoWeb to visually indicate the state of the files. In Color Factory Settings, expand the relevant channel and select Metadata. Open the
This will find all content items with the checkbox legally approved set to true. _exists_:corporateInformation.legallyApproved:true This will find all content items with checkbox legally approved set to false or checkbox not set. _exists_:corporateInformation.legallyApproved:false
Changing the display templates in FotoStation Where: Expand the Display templates node under Metadata in the program configuration. Listed under the Display templates node are the templates used for displaying the metadata of certain fields in the text panel below the image area in FotoStation (Text info, File info and Camera info), as well as the f
The Delete File sub action is used to delete files in a workflow. Settings When using the Delete File action it is possible to choose between sending files to the local recycle bin and deleting them permanently. Important: When working with files on network volumes, files will ALWAYS be permanently deleted! The recycle bin is not used in this case.
What is a webhook? In simple terms, think of a webhook as a notification. A user can trigger a webhook in FotoWeb when selecting an asset marker or executing an action. FotoWeb then sends data about the asset(s) to the external target system. The external system is targeted using a regular web URL in the webhook setup of FotoWeb configuration. The d
Using webhooks you can configure Fotoware to send notifications to third-party systems when an image is published or revoked. Open the site management (Tools - Site Configuration), expand the Integrations node and choose Webhooks where you find the Exports webhooks related to notification of signups. Different webhooks can be issued when an asset is
Overview FotoStation has several mechanisms for rendering RAW files. They differ slightly on Windows and in macOS, so the article has been divided by platform. RAW file support in Windows FotoStation for Windows has two modes for rendering RAW files. These can be combined (installed side by side) without complications. Adobe DNG Converter Improved R
An archived album cannot be modified in any way. If you want to reactivate an album that you've archived, here's how. To reactivate an archived album, locate it by clicking on the Filter button in the Albums section in FotoWeb Pro. Choose the filter My archived albums. Then click on the archived album you want to reactivate to open it on a separate
Prerequisites Make sure the system requirements, network requirements, and other settings are met. For more information, see FotoWeb system requirements and Before you install FotoWeb. Starting the installation Download FotoWeb from the Fotoware Update Center and double-click on the installer. The installer may download additional required software
To rename an asset, first select it in the grid. Then open the Asset Information panel(keyboard shortcut T) and click on the Pencil button at the bottom of the panel to rename the file. The dialog that comes up lets you choose a new name for the asset. Type in the new name and click on Rename to process the asset. Note that the asset's original exte
Building space is where you configure and edit workflows. Here, you can access the different template nodes that make up the workflow. When you create a template, Building space opens automatically after you enter a name and select a workflow template.To open Building space for an existing workflow, select View workflow for the relevant workflow on
Commonly used shortcuts Shortcut Function Arrow keys Move selection in grid Enter Open Preview Ctrl-M Toggle Maximize View Ctrl-T Open Metadata Editor Ctrl-G Open Carousel View for narrowing down a selection Space Open a full screen preview for making selections Ctrl-J Toggle RAW/JPEG Bundle view Ctrl-F Search for assets L Open tile location in Expl
On the Dashboard, you can create, view, and edit workflows. Creating a workflow Creating a workflow is a two-step process: first, you enter the input details (you can choose a predefined template or enter information from scratch) and then set the triggers and actions to generate output. On the Dashboard, select Create workflow. The New workflow d
Actions Actions are user-run processes where assets can be modified and optionally transmitted to an output folder. The processing may involve changing metadata using a preset macro, or the user can be prompted to add information to the asset(s) being processed. Processing profiles can also be applied automatically when a file is sent to an action,
Linking multiple assets with consent forms In Fotoware you can link assets to a consent form from a consent form (as described below) and from an archive. You can quickly view consent status for an asset and keep track of consents on a per asset level. Note: There are some requirements to be met before you can link assets and consent forms. For more
Resetting your password Suppose you have forgotten your password and cannot log in to FotoWeb. In that case, you can easily reset the password if you can access the email address associated with your FotoWeb account. On the FotoWeb login screen, click on the Forgot Password link and enter your email address. An email will be sent to you with a link
Enabling events When performing operations on files in FotoStation, such as editing files or printing them, FotoStation writes a log to the History metadata field. If you want full control over the events that are recorded in the history log, click on the Enable history events. The list of events that can be recorded is shown in the screenshot above
Goal: I want to add a tag to three Content Items in my selection. Your browser does not support HTML5 video. I selected ten items for batch editing. Under Metadata, I see an overview of Assigned Layers and Available Layers for the ten selected items. In the Assigned Layers section, each layer shows the number of items to which it is assigned. I se
Adding metadata from a taxonomy When adding metadata to a single or a whole selection of assets, some fields in the metadata panel may have a taxonomy associated with them. Clicking on the taxonomy icon next to that field opens a view where you can pick predefined metadata from a tree structure. Depending on how the metadata fields have been configu
To facilitate SSO (Single Sign-On) through the web browser when using FotoWeb Authentication or Windows Active Directory Authentication, Windows Integrated Authentication is used. Because this functionality is not available on non-Windows clients, SSO is not available to users of these platforms when using these authentication mechanisms. If using a
RAW file handling Where: Channel | Input File Formats | Images tab Here you may set how incoming digital camera files should be handled. By choosing Normal processing, Color Factory will process the file according to the defined channel settings. By choosing Keep original file, the original raw input file will be stored in the output folder after an
Due to regulations such as GDPR (General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) (Regulation (EU) 2016/679) of the European Union (EU)), we have created the ability to add terms of service to your Picturepark. A default Terms of Service (TOS) is generated when creating your Picturepark. Once a term of service is created, the user will have to accept the t
When browsing archives with documents (Word, PowerPoint, PDF, InDesign), users can go to Filmstrip or Preview views (keyboard shortcuts F and P, respectively) and preview the first page in the document. The preview contains navigation controls that allow the user to flick pages back and forth or type in a page number to jump to that page.
Symptom During software activation, you may receive an error message that the maximum number of activations for the license key has been exceeded. This can happen, for example, if your computer crashes or you reinstall the operating system without deactivating the Fotoware software first. Solution You need to reset your license key to allow another
To set the status asset status, start by selecting one or more assets. Next, open the Asset information panel, keyboard shortcut T. Finally, click on the colored Status bar at the top of the Information tab and choose a status. The status is applied immediately - there's no additional saving required. Did you know: Archive content can easily be fil
A workflow can be configured so that when a user selects an asset marker or runs assets through an action, FotoWeb opens a separate browser tab and navigates to a URL defined by the content of a metadata field as part of the URL string. Note: Getting the entire URL from metadata in a workflow action/marker is potentially dangerous and should only be
Sorting options You can use the Sorting menu to sort the files in your archive by any available file or metadata property. You can sort by File name Modified date (the date the files were last modified) Camera date (the date the image was captured) Rating Status Created date (IPTC) (this date is specified by the user) and a number of metadata, all
Using the album filtering function in FotoWeb Pro you can switch between your personal albums, albums that others have shared with you, albums that you have archived and albums pending deletion. To use the filter, find the Albums section in the right side panel in FotoWeb Pro. Click on the Filter button and choose the album type that you would like
Stop the FotoWeb service. Delete all current logs in C:\ProgramData\Fotoware\FotoWeb\Operations\Logs. Open the FotoWeb Settings app and go to Settings > System logging. From the Application trace files drop-down list, select Debug. Start the FotoWeb service. Repeat the steps in the FotoWeb UI that resulted in the faulty behavior. The following i
Starting with Color Factory 8.0 build 800, the software is 64-bit. Future versions of Color Factory will be 64-bit only, so you will need to make the migration at one point or other. Bug fixes and security improvements will not be offered for the outgoing 32-bit version. This document outlines points to remember that may have a bearing on your plann
A poster image is used on the tile that represents the archive on the home screen in the FotoWeb main interface and helps users identify the contents of the archive. Note: You can only set a poster image for an archive if you have been given certain administrative privileges. Choosing a poster image After logging in, click on the archive you want to
Ways to open files in other software programs When working with files in an archive, you may find it useful to open a file in an application different from FotoStation. This is normally done in one of three ways: You can drag and drop the file from the main FotoStation windows or the Drag and Drop view into the program window of the other applicatio
To duplicate a file in FotoStation, right-click on the file and select Duplicate. You can also select one or more files and use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+U (Command–Shift–D in Mac OS). The file duplication feature in FotoStation is similar to a file copy operation in Windows Explorer or the Mac Finder in that the date and time stamp of the new file
Node type is a predefined dictionary of all possible node types. Example: Trigger, Action, Input, Output.
Albums that are no longer actively used can be archived or deleted. By archiving an album you "close" the project so content cannot be added or removed from it. The album will be hidden from view in your albums list, but you can still open and view its contents on demand by filtering the content on the Albums page to display archived albums. How to
Processing profiles can be used to process pictures before they're transferred to their destination. The processing is only applied to the transferred copies, not to the originals in the archive you're transferring the files from. Open the action properties and go to the Destination asset tab. Then tick the checkbox labeled Apply Processing Profile
The JavaScript Object Notation (JSON) is an open-standard file format or data interchange format that uses human-readable text to transmit data objects consisting of attribute-value pairs and array data types (or any other serializable value). JSON knows numbers, strings (text), boolean, arrays and objects; as well as NULL. Find more about JSON on W
We advise against using APIs that are not officially documented on learn.fotoware.com. This goes for all undocumented API endpoints, usage, or behavior. The behavior of undocumented APIs is subject to change, which may break your integration in the future. We strongly discourage building integrations that depend on undocumented aspects of a specific
FotoWeb is a powerful Digital Asset Management system that runs on a Windows Server and is accessible through easy-to-use web front ends, various plugins, and special interfaces. FotoWeb covers the needs and requirements of all categories of users, whether small workgroups or demanding enterprise customers with thousands of users and millions of fil
Note: To create a consent form template the Fotoware user must be a member of a group that has been granted the Configure consent management group permission. For more information, see Getting started with consent management. Consent form template content Consent form templates typically include: general information such as name, language, and type
Channels are virtual dividers that separate, filter, and isolate content. Channels are like global filters that affect what content users see when working. If the Channel's configuration permits a given piece of content, it can be shown; otherwise, the content is neither findable nor visible in the Content Browser, regardless of the connected user's
Tagging an album When you're viewing an album that you own you can add searchable tags to it to allow users with access to find relevant content. You can also change the album title and description. The labels are displayed above the thumbnail grid in the album view and you can add or remove tags there. When users go to their list of albums by follo
Read this first XMP sorts metadata fields into namespaces. The MDC configuration file contains several predefined namespaces, such as Dublin Core and Adobe Photoshop. The configuration doesn’t contain all fields available for all the included namespaces; only fields that are commonly used are included. You might discover that one or more fields that
Overview Learn how to create an action that renames files and applies a predefined metadata template to the pictures before copying them to a folder on your local hard drive. This action is useful for importing pictures from a memory card and can be expanded to include additional functionality. Creating a new action First off, right-click an empty a
Video file handling Where: Channel | Input File Formats | Video tab Several options are available for the handling of video files. They can They can be treated as an unknown format, meaning that they're moved to the Unknown folder They can be copied to the output folder, including all operations such as routing and metadata features that don't invol
Will find all Content Items which have the date-time value "2022-02-1x". This query does not work with exact match. corporateInformation.embargoDate:2022-02-1* To search for a date you must provide the date-time fieldpath and the date in the format year-month-day e.g. 2022-05-0*
FotoWeb architecture FotoWeb has an architecture designed from the bottom up for stability and performance. The main logic in FotoWeb takes place inside four different services that are installed on your server. These services are started automatically by the operating system after a restart of the server. These services depend on each other in the
The use of Clarifai is now deprecated in Content Platform. Instead, we support auto-tagging using Azure. For more information, see Enqueue Tagging Action (AI Tagging) using Azure. The EnqueueTaggingAction allows to enqueue the auto-tagging. Editors can add the tagging model, language code (for tags to use), and match value (confidence value for ta
Licensing Integration using the FotoWeb API is available when: FotoWeb is installed on-premises with an activated API Licenseor FotoWeb is a SaaS tenant on a plan that includes API access Furthermore, users using the integration must need to have the API Access group permission. An application that uses widgets as well as the API is like a regular A
Will find all Content Items which were created or modified in March 2020 audit.creationDate:[2020-03-01 TO 2020-03-31] audit.modificationDate:[2020-03-01 TO 2020-03-31] corporateInformation.embargoDate:[2021-01-01 TO 2023-01-01] Will find all Content Items which have an embargo date value inside this range. There is a Picturepark limitation in place
This topic explains how to create an integration using the FotoWeb Selection Widget and Export Widget without using features that require additional API access. Licensing Integration using only widgets is available in: Fotoware Veloz for all users with an Editor license Fotoware Veloz for tenants on a subscription plan, which includes API access Fot
This guide explains how to configure markers that indicate the workflow state of the assets in your archive. You will also learn how to make markers interactive, so that you can trigger events in much the same way as with Actions. Markers can indicate the state of an asset and they can be made interactive!
Picturepark supports the following transformations. Below is an overview of possible output for the listed input file type and corresponding actions. For information about supported file formats in Picturepark, see Supported File Formats. Picturepark automatically modifies the following: Rotate Action — You cannot select this rotate action or defin
Preparing the FotoStation installation package Create a distribution point This must be a shared folder on a server that the clients can access to run the installer. Ensure users who need access to this distribution point have Read privileges on the share. Download the latest version of FotoStation It can be downloaded from https://downloads.fotowar
This will find Content Items even if those items do not have the values Joe AND true available. This is a search limitation in Picturepark for multi-value fields from schemas. For the search, the values are flattened, so when a Fieldset of a Content Item contains somewhere a value "true" and somewhere a value "Joe" the search finds this as a result.
The suite includes: The FotoWeb Deskop Uploader, which lets users easily upload files from their local desktop to a FotoWeb archive. User authentication implies that a system administrator can control which archives the user may upload to and what metadata is required when submitting files to a specific archive. A checkout module that lets a user do
Role-based versus group-based access control Groups, permissions, and licenses in Fotoware can be assigned based on assigned roles or group memberships of the user logging on via Microsoft Entra ID (formerly Azure Active Directory) . Both can also be used to determine which users in the directory are allowed to log into Fotoware. Role-based Access C
When you work with your assets, you will likely want to copy or move certain files to other folders or even to completely different archives. The permissions that control which archives you can copy and move to and from are set on the server side, so this topic deals with how you use the main web interface to select and reorganize your files. Import
Background The regular Fotoware software installers download additional required components from the Internet when run. We also supply offline installers on the Customer Portal where most of the required components are included for installation on servers without an Internet connection. We recommend having the Windows Server installation media at ha
The Aggregation Query Filter is used for aggregations (groups of filters aka facets).
How to export an asset to your CMS To export a picture for use on your CMS, select it in the grid and choose Export in the action bar. You can only export a single asset at a time. If multiple files are selected in the grid, the Export button will not show. You can also export a picture from the Details page by selecting Action and choosing Export.
The And Query Filter is an operator, where you can add multiple filters as an array, all filter criteria must be fulfilled.
FTP group permissions Groups have all the necessary permissions required for uploading and managing files. There are no other specific permissions or roles associated with groups. In Flow, you can create, view, edit, and delete FTP groups, as well as add users to groups. Note: Any assets placed in the FTP group will automatically trigger associated
Normal license Normal Fotoware server licenses permit installation on one server only, with a maximum of two re-hosts per year. Fotoware software is not licensed for resale, hosting, or rental unless Fotoware gives written confirmation of such use. Redundancy license A redundancy license offers a backup solution in the event of a system failure or m
Assigning a processing profile to your archive You have the possibility to choose whether files downloaded directly from the archive should be given additional processing before delivery. Processing profiles can also be used to process a file that a user places in an InDesign layout using the FotoWeb Desktop Extension for Adobe Creative Suite. Star
Accessing the Pro interface When a user logs in to FotoWeb, they can access the Pro interface by clicking on the Pro link in the top menu. You can also bookmark the Pro interface in the web browser for direct access: https://<hostname>.fotoware.cloud/fotoweb/views/pro) To get from the Pro interface to the Main interface, select the FotoWeb log
Overview Folder size routing makes it possible to route files to subfolders in the destination folder and limit the maximum number of files or megabytes a folder contains before creating a new one. Creating a folder size routing In Connect Settings, go to Routings and expand the group to which you want to add the routing. Select Add routing. In the
As of December 2020, Fotoware offers WCAG 2.0 AA compliance for both on-premises (FR16 onwards) and FotowareSaaS. Fotoware WCAG adherence is implemented in the Fotoware Main interface. It is available for all operations that users who consume data on the site need to work with the site's content. There is no need to enable anything to make it work
How to change the color space of a picture From FotoStation, select the file(s) you would like to recolor in the image window. Open the Image menu and choose Recolor. You are then given the following choices: No conversion: The color space will not be changed, but you can choose to tag an image with an output profile. By opening the Output Profile d
Changing your password If you need to change your FotoWeb password, log in to FotoWeb and click on your profile picture in the top right corner. Then choose Change password in the menu that appears. Note to AD users: If you cannot see the Change Password option, your login is probably linked to your Windows networking credentials. In that case, you
There are multiple levels at which the system can be backed up. If the FotoWeb server is virtualized, backing up the entire image is a simple solution. Using backup software, it is also possible to make a complete backup of a physical server and then roll back to a previous server state through a restore operation. At a lower level, file-based backu
While each application's service runs under the Local System Account, the Process Account is used for scanning document folders, writing and maintaining indexes, handling FotoWeb requests, and so on. In short, it's a common account that handles the processing carried out by all Fotoware applications on the server. Choosing a process account Note: Th
How to archive an album Find the album you want to archive in the Albums section in the right side panel and click on its title to open the album on a separate tab in FotoWeb Pro. Next click on the storage box to archive the album. You will need to click the storage box twice for confirmation. The album will disappear from your list of albums, and y
In the Version control view, you can compare and manage all versions of an asset. You can compare the current version of the asset with a previous version, or compare any 2 versions. Open the archive where the asset is located and select the version control marker (highlighted in red below) for the relevant asset. The number on the version control m
Channels are virtual dividers that separate, filter, and isolate content. Channels are like global filters that affect what content users see when working. If the Channel's configuration permits a given piece of content, it can be shown; otherwise, the content is neither findable nor visible in the Content Browser, regardless of the connected user's
Choosing events and metadata to log FotoWeb can log all activity that takes place on the site. These logs can be used to extract statistics of different sorts and/or monitor other activities. Tip: Before enabling Activity Logging, you need to configure the site database settings. For more information, see Configuring the site database . From the Too
Consent management archive settings Setting the correct archive permissions is one of several steps involved in setting up the overall Consent Management functionality. This topic explains how to enable consent management for an archive and how to configure user access. General To be able to associate assets in an archive with a consent form, you m
When a quick rendition of an asset is requested, either interactively by a user or via the API, Fotoware delivers the preview along with its metadata. However, in some circumstances, you may want to automatically strip certain information from the file before it's delivered to the client. You can do so by choosing the specific fields that should be
Summary I want to show a message if a user role has access to a Content Item. This is not possible! I cannot access the user role from Permission Sets on Content Items, I can only access Permission Sets. NOT WORKING, only else will show {% if userRoleIds == 'a3431095e9cc401ab65197ba12ecfccf' %} Text for the Press {% else %}For all other users{% end
Overview How to adjust colors in FotoStation's image editor. Color adjustment Click on the Color Adjustment button to bring up the color adjustment palette. You can use this palette to change the colors of the entire image or a selection that you have drawn using the Lasso tool. The top (gray) bar lets you adjust the overall color balance of the ima
In a system with FotoWeb and Index Manager, the Index Manager server continually pushes metadata to the FotoWeb database. This is true also for indexes that don't have FotoWeb archives associated with them - in reality, metadata from all Index Manager's indexes are stored in the FotoWeb database. More information about configuring Index Manager to p
No special settings for all audio files are available. The following output format settings are available for all file types . Property Description sourceOutputFormats Which output format should be used as a source for rendering. This allows you to render small thumbnails from formats other than the original to save rendering power and time. See
The Date Time field allows input of a date or a date and a time, which display and interpretation you can specify as format, e.g., show dates with year/month/day or day-month-year. Date Time Overview Icon Date Time edit mode Date &Time Selection You can click on the date or time in the top area to make your edit. After editing press Apply. Date
Consent markers A consent status marker indicates the consent status of an asset. Most consent status markers are applied automatically as part of the consent management workflow. However, there are 2 consent status markers that you can quickly apply manually to indicate that: the asset does not need any consent (there may be no recognizable faces i
This guide explains the consent management in FotoWeb. It covers: How administrative users can create templates that cover several types of usage consent How to review the consent given by subjects How to issue reminders to subjects to give their consent The methods available for collecting consent, through either the FotoWeb interface or the Fotowa
The benefits of drag and drop To make it easier to drag files from FotoStation to other applications, for example, adding pictures to your PowerPoint presentation or a Word document, you can change the FotoStation window into the Drag & drop window. From this view, shown on the left, you can easily drag and drop images. When dropping a picture i
This topic explains how you can install Fotoware plugins on your local computer to use plugins for Microsoft Office (Word and PowerPoint) and Adobe InDesign. The package also includes an upload utility that can be accessed in the Windows system tray. With this feature, you can check out any type of file from the Fotoware system, edit it locally in a
The content in the FotoWeb archives can be sorted by modification time or filename in ascending or descending order. To change the sorting method use the drop down list labeled Sort by in the top right corner above the thumbnail grid.
At the outset, we have a FotoWeb archive containing pictures of cars from different manufacturers. We will use custom-made fields for tagging these pictures using labels we define in the associated taxonomies. Before you begin, you must use the Metadata Configuration tool to create these fields: Field name Field number (may be different in your con
The Compare View is an aid to making selections in FotoWeb Pro, especially when you're working with a range of visually similar assets and need to reduce the selection. Using the Compare View Start by making a selection of assets in FotoWeb Pro. You can use the Grid View, the Filmstrip View or any other view to make the initial selection. Next press
Configuring global FotoWeb server settings You can configure the global Fotoware server settings in the FotoWeb Settings app. When the configuration wizard ran after the software was installed, you configured a number of settings related to the FotoWeb server. These settings can be verified or changed in the FotoWeb Settings app. Select Sites to di
If you have been given permission to rotate pictures in an archive, you can select one or several pictures and open the Asset Information panel where you find the Rotate buttons near the bottom of the Information tab. These button allow you to rotate the selected picture(s) in steps of 90 degrees. Simply click on one of the rotate buttons to execute
Performance counters Index Manager 8.0 has performance counters - objects in the program that can be used in the Windows Performance Monitor application. The Performance monitor application (PerfMon.exe) is available in all versions of Windows. Tip: If you're not familiar with Performance Monitor, see this Microsoft TechNet article. Which counters a
FotoWeb has different license types to cater for different types of users. Learn how to assign a license to a group or a user. User licenses can be assigned individually by a user administrator (a user who has permission to manage user accounts) or automatically, using group default licenses in combination with either single sign-on (SSO) or self-se
How Quick Renditions work If the site administrator has defined Quick Renditions for an archive, you can request a preview of an image asset at any of the sizes the administrator has predefined. FotoWeb will resize the picture on the fly and deliver it in an overlay window in the browser to allow you to drag it directly to your desktop. Note that th
How to export an asset to your CMS To export a picture for use on your CMS, select it in the grid and choose Export in the action bar. You can only export a single asset at a time. If multiple files are selected in the grid the Export button will show. You can also export a picture from the Details page by selecting Action and choosing Export. Expor
This solution shows how to configure a filter in the field “Dynamic View” based on the creation date. Real-world use case: Show a summary of content marketing created in the last month. Show a summary of all content created by agency A in the last month. Show a summary of all content created by photographer B in the last week. Instructions You add
Hiding detailed error messages from users When FotoWeb encounters an error it can deliver a detailed error message through the user interface. Such an error dump can contain a lot of information that may be more confusing than helpful to a non-administrative user on the system. You can disable such error details for users that are not site administr
How to restart the FotoWeb Upgrade Wizard To restart the site upgrade wizard, press Windows-R to open the Run dialog. Enter the following and press Enter: 1 fwsetup -update If you are using an older version of FotoWeb (pre-Feature Release 16), use the following command: 1 fwsetup -installModeReal The upgrade wizard restarts and you can complete the
File markers are visual, customizable indicators that can be used to draw a user's attention to certain assets in an archive. Configuring file markers File markers are visual, customizable indicators that can be used to alert a FotoStation user about files that meet specific criteria and should be given special attention. In FotoStation, you can con
Log options In Operations Center Settings, open General. Debug logging should only be enabled for troubleshooting purposes. It generates a much more detailed log to allow support personnel to troubleshoot your server. Debug logging should NOT be switched on during normal production, since it generates very large log files containing excessive infor
ODBC setup In the Color Factory Settings app, expand the relevant channel and select Metadata. Open the ODBC tab. This functionality makes it possible to extract text from a database and store it in the files processed in the channel or to store metadata from the files in the connected database. This is done by setting up a data source and mapping
Legacy Notice This topic describes a way to add metadata that has since been replaced with a more powerful metadata editor. While you can still use this method, the updated metadata editor has a number of improvements over the old one. Learn about the new editor experience in the Editing Metadata in FotoStation topic. How to do it Sometimes you may
Der Benutzer, der ein Schema oder ein Content Item hochlädt oder erstellt, ist automatisch der Besitzer dieses Elements und hat das Recht, dieses Schema/Content Item zu sehen, zu verwalten und zu bearbeiten. Der Besitz kann vom Besitzer oder einem anderen Editor/Admin mit der Berechtigung zur Verwaltung der Berechtigungen übertragen werden. Der Besi
Quick Renditions are predefined sizes that you can set as an administrator and will let users download a preview of the image in the DAM system with a single click. Although somewhat similar to processing profiles, Quick Renditions will only create a resized copy of the original asset and deliver it to the client with an optional watermark - no addi
The Include in search field setting determines whether or not the field's values should be considered in content browser simple search operations. If this option is not enabled, the search does not consider the values of the field in search operations. This can be useful, for example, if the field is used for internal discussions or work directives
Uploading assets to FotoWeb First click on Upload in the top banner to display the Upload window. Now drag one or more files from your desktop into the upload area (the dotted blue box) or click on the Browse link to locate the files on your computer. Choose the archive to upload the assets from the dropdown list just above the upload area. This wil
Job Request File settings In Color Factory Settings, expand the relevant channel and select XML & Job Request Files. Open the Job Request Files tab. The following dialog appears. Job request files (JRF) are special files that instruct Color Factory where to pick up files to process, how to process them, and where to store the output files. This
Summary For company events you have start and end dates. Calculate the duration from the two fields (Id: start; Id: end) in a fieldset (Id: duration) and show the values in days or only the start date. {% if data.duration.end %} {% assign end = data.duration.end | date: '%s' %} {% assign start = data.duration.start | date: '%s' %} {% assign duration
Overview How to set picture size and crop frame for pictures exported for use on a CMS. Crop and size for CMS Getting the picture size right is important when exporting a picture to a web CMS. While the original picture in the Fotoware system may be several megabytes in size, if you plan to publish the picture on the web, you will need to change its
Some default system fields are used to aggregate Ids from Picturepark system items e.g. permissionSetIds or layerSchemaIds or contentSchemaId and display them in Filters.
Do I need to activate the license keys on all my computers? Yes, you need to activate the license keys on all computers that run the Fotoware software for which the license is valid. How do I renew an existing license key? Existing license keys do not change on renewal. You need to renew existing license keys on all computers using the Renew option
Enabling consent management in Site Configuration is one of several steps in setting up the overall Consent Management functionality. This topic explains how to activate the consent management option and how to enter some general settings. From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon), go to Site Configuration > Consent Management > General. Turn on th
When deleting a user in the FotoWeb site configuration, the user is marked as deleted and will no longer appear in lists and search results. In addition, this data is affected: Data Description Action Albums User created albums Albums are immediately marked as deleted and will be unavailable. They will be purged after a number of days. Album shares
Using webhooks you can configure Fotoware to send notifications to third-party systems when an image is published or revoked. Open the site management (Tools - Site Configuration), expand the Integrations node and choose Webhooks where you find the Exports webhooks related to signup notifications. Different webhooks can be issued when an asset is
Fotoware has different sets of users that cater to different needs. To see what functionality each license type offers, see the License comparison table. Main user An authenticated user that has all the features available in the main Fotoware user interface. Requires a Main user license for Fotoware. Note: Main user licenses are valid per site. For
When you access your Picturepark for the first time, there are defaults already configured. Picturepark sets these defaults on the creation of your instance, based on definitions and subscription plan. You cannot change this inside your Picturepark. So whenever you lack the option to add something, check these defaults here. Please contact your Pic
Having set your preferences for the export you can store them as a preset for future use. This allows you to quickly add the same effects to pictures you export later. After applying a preset to a new picture you can still modify individual settings to tweak the appearance of a new export precisely how you want. Creating a preset After changing the
By distributing assets that have been exported for use in external systems, such as a CMS, to a content delivery network, users of the external system will get faster access to those resources regardless of their geographic location. FotoWeb has built-in support for the Amazon Cloud Front CDN in addition to any CDN that supports FTP upload and remov
Fotoware supports single sign-on (SSO) when using: Microsoft Entra ID Authentication (formerly Azure Active Directory) SAML Authentication with any SAML-compliant Identity Provider
Overview The default FotoStation metadata schema has a special field, #390, that is of type "bag of struct" - this means that the field has a number of child items that combine to form a struct. By accessing the metadata configuration, you can see that struct in #390 - Location Created has these struct members: In the following, we will add this fie
Feature comparison Note that these features refer to licensed features, not user interface features. Therefore, a user with a Pro license, for example, has access to Pro license functionality regardless of which user interface is being used. For more information about user types, see Fotoweb user types. Feature Guest user Fotoware Main user license
Overview How to add special effects to a picture that's being exported for use on a CMS. Enabling automatic panning effect Click on Behavior to set behavior options for the picture. If you want to add a bit of "life" to the picture you embed in your CMS, you can add a Ken Burns effect, a slow panning motion. Important: This effect will only be avail
Overview How to add enhancement filters to a picture when exporting it for use on a CMS. Enhancement options Click on Enhance to add enhancement filters to your picture. Several enhancement filters are available to make your picture stand out, and you can also add a border around the picture. The enhancement filters allow you to create a grayscale v
Configuring the site so that users must accept terms and conditions when requesting a download From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon) go to Site Configuration > Appearance > Renditions. Select one of the following options in the Downloads section. Never: Never request approval of terms and conditions from users when they download. Once: Users mus
Picking files To pick files to assign to actions or albums, click on the Pick files button below the list of actions in the right side panel. The Albums picker is located below the list of albums. Now, when you pick files (keyboard modifier keys can also be used for multi-file selections) they will be marked with a green checkmark after which you ca
An album owner can choose an image as the album cover to help others with whom it's shared see what it contains. First, go to the Albums by following the link in the top banner. Then click on the album for which you want to choose a cover. Find the asset you want to use as the poster and select it by clicking on the checkmark next to its filename. N
The resize modification resizes formats to a certain size. This is available for all file types (images, video, audio, document). Property Value Details kind ResizeAction width Whole numbers, in pixel Width of the output format. height Whole numbers, in pixel Height of the output format. resizeMode Enum: "Resize" "Fit" "Shrink" Specifies how the
Image Parameter Field Code Pixels per line #PPL Number of Lines #NOL Color as string: B/W, RGB or CMYK #COL Is color - Value 0 for BW, 1 for Color #ISC Resolution in inches #RIC Resolution in cm #RCM Size in inches #SIC Size in cm #SCM Image size, Kbyte or Mbyte uncompressed #IMS File size, Kbyte or Mbyte #FIS File date #FID
The Prefix Query Filter filters on a field which value start with the defined prefix. In a corporate channel you can only show Content Items which title start with the company name - assuming you do have such a strict naming convention for your titles.
Overview Learn about the different ways to select and work with files in FotoStation. Selecting files You can easily select many files in FotoStation. This is useful when, for instance, you want to perform batch processing or compare image previews. You can select files in FotoStation in much the same way as in Windows Explorer or the Macintosh Find
Note: This functionality is only available for Main users. Mac users: to use the Fotoware plugin in Photoshop with Apple Silicon, you must run Photoshop with Rosetta. After installing the Fotoware plugins, you can enable the Adobe Creative Cloud plugins. We support the latest version of Adobe Creative Cloud as well as the previous version. After A
Create a Field Open or create the schema where you want to add a field, such as a list, layer, virtual type, fieldset, or relation. Open schema settings by double-clicking on the schema. Select the Fields tab in the right column of the schema detail view. Add one or multiple fields, remove fields - make the necessary changes. Save your changes. Your
Goal: Show Content Items which have a fieldset in metadata in which you find a trigger field e.g. a status field like approved, checked, reviewed, completed. Now show the items which are not triggered (not approved, not reviewed etc.) Picturepark setup Layer: "Creative Projects" Fieldset: "Requests" with a note field for the task/request, a field
You cannot select this rotate action or define properties, as it is automatically applied with predefined settings in Picturepark. Images are auto-rotated based on their Exif values.
Previews are static formats available for File Types. The standard Windows server fonts are installed on our rendering server and will be applied and rendered to document previews. Any other fonts will be substituted. A file format icon based on the default file extension for that file format, for example, Indd for Indesign files - is shown where no
Changing the size format in the main user interface To switch between them, select on an image to go to the asset Details page. Then go to the File Details tab above the preview to find the Image size (in cm or inches) and Resolution (pixels per cm or inch). Click on the arrows next to the measurements to toggle between metric and imperial view. Cha
You can adjust the order that markers are shown in the web browser user interfaces by using = "handles" to move them up or down the list. While Standard markers always show in the top left corner of the thumbnail, Extended markers can be placed in the top left corner, top right corner, and center of the thumbnail. This should be taken into account w
Rules for creating a workflow When creating a workflow, there are some rules you need to follow to ensure the workflow is valid. Required nodes A trigger node is always required (unless you're using an external FTP input). An input node is always required. You need at least one action or output when using an internal input. You need at least on
The FotoWeb site may have been configured with a number of asset markers. As a user, you need to understand what they are and how they work. What markers are Markers are little icons that show on the thumbnails of assets in archives. They are set by the system administrator and typically reflect the workflow state of individual assets - for example,
You can share content from within Picturepark directly, enabling CDN (Fastly.com) for faster delivery and distribution. More details on Fastly CDN Delivery for Picturepark Content on the website. When creating a share, you can select metadata to be shared too. This shared metadata is displayed in the share viewer to recipients and others who access
Managing webhooks Note: You need the Manage webhooks administrative privilege to manage webhooks. Having logged in to FotoWeb, click on the wrench icon in the top banner and choose Manage webhooks. The webhooks window that opens has three tabs where executed webhooks are listed. Open webhooks The Open webhooks are requests that have not yet gone thr
The metadata panel is shown below the thumbnails in FotoStation's program window and shows an extract of the metadata that is stored in the selected picture. If you select a range of files, FotoStation will show the content of the last file you click. Except for the History button, the content of each of the four buttons to the right of the metadata
Overview This topic explains how you can change the different date stamps on the files in your archives. Why redate files? When working with files it is often useful to be able to sort them by any of the date parameters, for example by their modified date. But sometimes the date stamp on one or more files is not the desired or even expected one. For
Summary The MongoDB database may require a repair after an unclean shutdown. Here's how to perform the repair. Note: The official MongoDB documentation on repairing a MongoDB instance is found here: https://docs.mongodb.com/manual/tuto...cted-shutdown/ We recommend studying the above document before you proceed so you understand the effect of a rep
Why index maintenance is important Index Manager is very much the backbone of the entire Fotoware system. Because it powers updates in your archives and provides search results to clients, if your Index Manager struggles to keep up this will have an adverse effect on the perceived performance of the entire Fotoware system. For this reason, it's impo
The Content Platform enriches your tags with additional contextual information, which is required for search engine optimization inside and outside Picturepark and makes your users happy. Let me show you an example. What do you see here? That's an easy one. A logo of a company called Fine Organic Foods Association, probably selling fine organic food
By using Curl, Color Factory integrates with an external web service that can process the files and store them in the channel output. This can for example be a web service that offers processing of images, such as the automatic removal of the image background. Many different types of services exist that offer interaction via curl. Color Factory will
Permission sets assign multiple user roles to content or schema and allow you to control the level of access the user roles have on content or schemas. Permission sets applied to content/schemas are additive, all of them apply. Default content permission sets that are added to a content item on creation can be added by Picturepark Staff. Permission
Crop sizes are used when users check out files from an archive using FotoWeb Desktop. As an administrator you can choose the sizes and aspects that the user can choose from when cropping pictures. Open the archive properties and go to the Export and Import tab. Locate the Cropping section and choose a crop profile set from the drop-down menu. If you
Fotoware as a Service - May 2024 update Deployment This release is being gradually deployed and will be available on all tenants soon. As mentioned previously, built-in support for external tracking tools, including Google Analytics, Google Tag Manager, and PIWIK, was discontinued on April 1st, 2024. New functionality In the Archives list in Site C
Taxonomy search filter To help users work faster, each taxonomy has a search filter that searches the entire taxonomy recursively. Using the search field, you can enter label or part of a label, and when you select Enter the matches are displayed to allow you to apply the filter. Pinning often used taxonomy items Users who find themselves using the
Customizing the Detailed List Select Detailed list under the Views node in the configuration tree to configure the Detailed list view. The number of columns in the Detailed list view can be changed by changing the value in the Number of columns field. Having added columns you can define their content by clicking on a column with undefined content in
The content in the Fotoware archives can be sorted by modification time or filename in ascending or descending order. To change the sorting method, select from the options in the Sort by drop-down list.
If you have privileges to share bookmarks, you can share these with other users of the Pro interface to give them one-click access to perform common searches on the DAM system. How to share a bookmark When you've created a bookmark, clicking on the share icon on that bookmark makes that bookmark available for other FotoWeb Pro users in the system. T
Each field has a set of attributes that affect how the field behaves. You configure the settings when adding the field to a Layer or Virtual Type, so different instances of the same Field Type can behave differently, depending on their specific settings. Some parameters are common to all the field types. Name (required) The Name setting is availabl
Optimizely This Optimizely plugin integrates Fotoware PicturePark ContentPlatform DAM with Optimizely CMS and Commerce platform. For more information, see Optimizely plugin.
The Content Browser displays all Content Items. Your users will work in this area, searching, downloading, sharing content.
The condition Content Permission Set Assigned checks if a permission set is assigned, which will give access to specific user roles e.g. Check if permission set "SocialMedia-AllAccess" is assigned to ensure that publication information (platform, date, tags, post) is updated. Triggers the moment the selected Content Permission Set is assigned to any
To allow users to make use of the Adobe InDesign Extension, they need to belong to a group which is given the InDesign Editor permission, as shown in the screenshot. Further, users need Place permission on each individual archive from which they should be allowed to place assets into the InDesign layout.
A Metadata Field in Picturepark is field added to Schemas or availalbe on File Types (Content Schemas) which hold metadata values. The fields are displayed as fieldpath which has the syntax layerId.fieldId. For File Types the syntax is fileType.fieldId.
With an API license, FotoWeb can trigger webhooks on a number of system events: When a user signs up When assets are published, e.g. to a CMS, and when such an export is revoked When assets are dragged and dropped to an external system In connection with the Fotoware shopping cart When assets change in the Fotoware system FotoWeb also supports webho
An action can be configured to copy files from its original archive to another archive on the server. This is set up in the site configuration: Go to the Actions tab and create a new action. Then go to the Destination asset tab and choose Archive as the destination type, and choose the destination archive in the drop down list below.
OpenID Connect offers support for multi-factor authentication (MFA), which must be implemented following the required metadata requirements of the OIDC provider protocol of the customer. We have surveyed customers multiple times last year with regard to their preferences and supported technologies, and the final verdict was that OIDC (as the more mo
How index filtering works By default, Index Manager will try to include all files in a document folder that is attached to an index. However, you can use a file name or search filter to control precisely which files are included or excluded from the index. There are two types of filtering available: File name filters are used to include or exclude
Your system may have been configured with various actions that process pictures, transfer files, and perform other workflow operations. This topic explains the basics of such workflows and how they work. Note Workflows are configured individually for each FotoWeb site. Choosing files to process in a workflow To process files in a workflow, start
Legacy note: This feature is deprecated and was discontinued on July 1, 2021. Versions released after that date will not contain this feature. What is a FotoWeb Screen? A screen is a shared display of one or more images or a slide show to which users can add and remove images using smartphones or tablets. Any user who can access the FotoWeb home scr
Overview How to quickly rate and set the status of the assets you've selected. Rating assets Having made a selection of files, you can rate them quickly in several ways: Open the Metadata menu and choose Set Rating on all selected Right-click one of the selected thumbnails and choose Set Rating on all selected Use the keyboard shortcut: Ctrl-1 to Ct
How to use predefined content in a taxonomy when adding metadata to an asset in the main FotoWeb interface. To learn how to add metadata to assets using taxonomies in the Pro interface, see Adding metadata to assets using a taxonomy. Adding metadata using a taxonomy If you have been given permission to edit the metadata of assets in an archive, you
When you select assets in the main FotoWeb interface, the action bar shows everything you can do with the selected assets. The options available will depend on how your system administrator has configured the archive. Below is a list of all the functionality available, with links to the relevant topics that describe the individual features. Availabl
Virtual Types or Lists enable users to more easily work with content in Picturepark that adheres to a defined structure, without having to worry about the output format of the content. Common to Lists or Virtual Types is a defined structure. Structure for Virtual Types Virtual Type Structure Press Release Headline; Subhead, Body; Footer Landing Pag
Managing exports From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon), go to Manage exports. This opens the complete list of all the pictures that have been exported from the archives where you have CMS export privileges. Tip: To manage the various exports of a single picture, select it in the grid to open the Description page. Select Actions and choose Manage Expor
Access requirement: To work with version control you need access to the index(es) and you must create an archive that points to the index(es) for which version control is enabled. In FotoStation, you can restore the version's metadata or restore both content and metadata for a version. You can use this functionality for all versions of an asset e
The CMS Export module in FotoWeb offers the possibility to export any picture or graphics file to a Content Management System. In the process a user can resize, add effects and otherwise customize the appearance of the exported picture. When a user exports a picture for embedding in the CMS, FotoWeb creates a permanent link to a cached version of th
Legacy Notice This topic describes a way to add metadata that has since been replaced with a more powerful metadata editor. While you can still use this method, the updated metadata editor has a number of improvements over the old one. Learn about the new editor experience in the Editing Metadata in FotoStation topic. How to do it Select one file t
Overview How to reorder the assets in an album in the Pro interface. Sorting the assets in an album To sort the assets in an album, first drag the album from the right side panel to the tab area above the grid to create a new tab for it. To be able to drag the album, click on the corrugated left bar in the album and drag. With the Grid view active (
LEGACY NOTE: This guide describes legacy functionality in FotoStation. In new versions of FotoStation configurations are maintained and downloaded to the client over FWP. Please refer to Creating and maintaining centralized FotoStation configurations for updated documentation. When configured to download its configuration from a server, FotoStati
Managing synonyms Where: C:\Programdata\Fotoware\Index Manager\Index Control\THESAUR.XML The thesaurus file is not enabled by default, and after installation, you will find that it is called Sample-THESAUR.XML Renaming the file to THESAUR.XML will enable it, but you will have to completely rebuild your indexes to incorporate the changes. Since it's
Setting asset status Having selected a number of assets, you can set their status in several ways: Open the Metadata menu and choose Status Right-click one of the selected thumbnails and choose Status Use the keyboard shortcut: 1 to 9 to sets the status of the selected assets. Clear the status by pressing 0. Having applied a status to your assets, l
To switch from Fotoware Pro to the Main user interface Select the Fotoware name and logo: Note: The FotoWeb logo may have been replaced with a custom company logo. To switch from Fotoware to Fotoware Pro Select the Pro icon: If you cannot see a Pro link in the top menu, your user account is not licensed to use the Pro interface
The Fieldset field shows a group of fields configured as a Fieldset schema. For example, for an address, you need three fields: Street (text), Zip (number), and City (text), which you can group as one field (*fieldset) Address. This grouping allows you to have a set of fields for adding address information always available as one field (*fieldset).
Filters (sometimes called “facets”) are used to refine Content Items in the Content Browser or List Items in the List Browser. Those filters are shown on the right (sidebar) and help to refine your search for desired content e.g. Filters "Media type" allows the user to filter for all content tagged with a media type or Filter for "Department" allows
When to consider rebuilding the index Generally speaking, an index should never have to be completely rebuilt. When an optimization schedule is set for the indexes on the server, the indexes are automatically pruned to perform their best. However, some situations such as disk failure, for example, can cause an index to become corrupted. In these cas
A Business Rule can execute actions when certain conditions are met. For each business rule you define general information (name, id, tracing, status), one or more trigger points (update or creation of content items, replacing of a file or via schedules), conditions (what should the business rule check e.g. metadata changed), transformations (e.g. t
Available methods Information method GetSmallLogo method GetLargeLogo method Search method FileInfo method Download method Getting Previews
Web application or API This variant of the authorization process is for web applications or web APIs (from now on called web apps) containing code executed on the server side, such as PHP, ASP.NET, Python, or Node.js. A web app is a confidential client because it can securely store a secret on the server side without exposing it to users and user ag
Dieses Admin Training kann an alle Poweruser weitergeleitet werden. Damit sollten sie einen Einblick in die Picturepark Content Platform erhalten und das Know-how für die Arbeit mit der Content Platform aufbauen. Zu jeder Aufgabe ist die entsprechende Seite aus dem Benutzerhandbuch vermerkt, so dass Sie bei Bedarf Themen nachschlagen können.
URL http://servername/ArchiveAgentPath/GetSmallLogo Parameters None Return value An image file in JPEG, GIF or PNG format representing the logo of the company running the agent.
Several services exist that can create an endpoint to which you can send a webhook to inspect and parse it. A freely available service is pipedream. Commercial, supported alternatives include Zapier and Microsoft Azure Logic Apps. Note: Zapier customer data is sent to and stored in the United States.
The condition Number Compare checks if a specific metadata field contains a number that is less, less or equal, equal, greater, greater or equal to a specific value e.g. Check weather the resolution is greater or equal 300 dpi to meet the website requirements before pushing content to the website (handled via separate integration). A field value of
Supported user types This functionality is available in both the Standard and Pro FotoWeb interfaces. Authenticated FotoWeb users require a Plus or Pro user license in FotoWeb, and they need Place permission in the archive from which they are dropping assets. Bear in mind that the following instructions are generic - users need to understand how Fot
When to use the rescan feature On very rare occasions, and depending on how the system has been configured, it may be that Index Manager's indexing engine does not automatically detect files in the document folders in an index. This can happen if, for example, there's a lot of I/O on the drives that the server is indexing, so that the service that n
If you have been given permission to rotate pictures in an archive, you can select one or several pictures and use the Rotate buttons in the action bar to rotate them in steps of 90 degrees. You don't have to worry about quality loss in JPEGs since the rotation is based only on EXIF data. This makes it possible to rotate even very large files quickl
How SmartReplace works FotoStation offers SmartReplace, a code replacement feature that lets you define short codes for quick input of metadata. This is especially useful if you cover sports events, for example. Using SmartReplace you can quickly insert a player's jersey number in any metadata field and have FotoStation fill in the player's name and
Fotoware software allows storing of soft-crop information in metadata. This way, it is possible to create a suggested crop without physically altering image data or stripping information away from a file. Hence, a workflow can be configured to crop a copy of the file, while the original file remains untouched with the suggested crop intact. Soft cro
How to export an asset to your CMS To export a picture for use on your CMS, select it in the grid and choose Export in the action bar. You can only export a single asset at a time. If multiple files are selected in the grid the Export button will show. You can also export a picture from the Details page by selecting Action and choosing Export. Expor
Legacy note: This feature was discontinued on July 1, 2021. Versions released after that date don't contain this feature. Creating a screen To create a screen, first go to your FotoWeb site. If you see the login page, click on the Screens icon in the lower right corner and then choose Create screen: If you see the Home page with archives and albums,
Changing taxonomy item properties Navigate to the item you want to edit and select the Edit taxonomy item (pencil) icon. Enter new values in the following fields, as required: Label -This is the label that the user sees in the taxonomy tree when navigating. Value -Enter a value for the taxonomy item. Description -Optional field. You can enter a
How to delete an album in the main interface First, open the album you want to delete. Click the trashcan icon in the left side panel and then click it again to delete the album. This will mark the album as deleted. Users with access to the album will no longer be able to open it and view its contents, and the album itself will be permanently purged
Configuring your application Bear in mind that the following instructions are generic; integrators are advised to create documentation for system administrators based on the points below. That way thay can receive full instruction on the configuration of the third-party application also to make the integration work as expected. FotoWeb uses a URL Re
Overview How to re-obtain the link to a previously made export to your CMS. Obtaining the link to an exported picture To obtain the link to a picture that has already been exported, click on the blue Clipboard icon in the list. Then either select the link and use Ctrl-C to topy it to your clipboard, or click on the little "book" icon to automaticall
Your system may have been configured with various actions that process pictures, transfer files, and perform other workflow operations. This topic explains the basics of such workflows and how they work. Note Workflows are configured individually for each FotoWeb site. Choosing files to process in a workflow To process files in a workflow, start
Configuring SSO with Microsoft Entra ID Note: It can be useful to set up a local FotoWeb account as a FotoWeb Administrator with full access to Site Configuration. This account is needed to log in to your Fotoware site if the application key has expired and/or SSO does not work anymore. You need a local FotoWeb Administrator account to be able to re
To set the status asset status, start by selecting one or more assets. Next, open the Asset information panel, keyboard shortcut T. Finally, click on the colored Status bar at the top of the Information tab and choose a status. The status is applied immediately - there's no additional saving required. Did you know: Archive content can easily be fil
How to brand a Fotoware site You can make simple branding changes to the Fotoware interface using industry-standard CSS. You can change the color scheme, fonts, and other design elements to fit your corporate profile. You can also replace the Fotoware logos on the site with your company logos and select a header image for the home page and you can c
Changing the FotoStation project server By default, Operations Center uses its own internal SQL database for hosting FotoStation projects. However, if you're already running a SQL server in your network you can change the configuration to use the external SQL server instead: Open Operations Center Settings and go to the Project Server node. Select U
Overview Learn how to browse the folder structure of a FotoWeb archive using FotoWeb for iPad. Folder browsing When you've opened up an archive a folder icon will show in the top bar next to the FotoWeb logo. Tapping on this opens up the folder menu where you can drill into the folder hierarchy. When browsing folders you only see files in the exact
About the print layout templates A print layout template allows for very flexible customization of the page layout when printing your pictures from FotoStation. You can freely change the number of labels (placeholders for image and text) on a page, the position of the image within the label, add up to 256 text fields in a label with field values, an
Hue and saturation adjustment In Color Factory Settings, expand the relevant channel and select Color & Contrast. Open the Hue & Saturation tab. The following dialog appears. On this tab you can change the hue, saturation, and luminance globally or for a specific color.
NOTE: This feature requires a FotoWeb Enteprise license. To configure the site so that users must accept terms and conditions when requesting a download: Go to Tools (cogwheel icon) > Site Configuration > Appearance > Renditions. In the Downloads section, select one of the following options: Never: Never request approval of terms and condi
Creating a group and adding users to it To create a group, open the Tools menu (cogwheel icon) and choose Manage Users/Groups. Select Add new group button. Name the group and choose the default license to apply to users imported into it. Using the Access drop-down menu, you can also make the group a member of another group. Users and groups can be r
The Enqueue Create Embed Action automatically create embeds for sharing content. This is especially useful for integrations, e.g., a CMS requires an embed link for a specific content , and for marketing operations, e.g. so users can easily pick embed links for distribution of files in ads, social media or mailings. The Business Rule will execute, an
Quick Search FotoStation has a search field in the main program window that lets you enter search strings in a quick and straightforward manner. This field is called the Quick Search field. Searching in this field is often useful when working with smaller archives or when you don’t need to perform a highly specific search. However, it is possible to
Symptom When logging on to FotoWeb with a user account that has a FotoWeb Pro user license, Internet Explorer only shows a blank page. Cause When accessing FotoWeb on an intranet, Internet Explorer defaults to Compatibility View for intranet sites, which effectively makes it impersonate Internet Explorer 7. FotoWeb Pro does not support Internet Expl
All requests in the shopping cart API are made on behalf of a customer (who is also the request user) and therefore require authentication as that user. Every user (except the Guest user) has a personal shopping cart and a personal order history. When adding items to the shopping cart, the user must have "Order" permission on the assets being added.
Connecting to an Index Manager archive Note: FotoStation Client 8.0 requires Index Manager 8.0. It cannot connect to Index Manager 7.0.Thus, in environments where you need to update both server and client to version 8.0 you should first update the Index Manager server and then migrate the FotoStation clients. FotoStation 7.0 clients will be able to
Legacy note: This feature was discontinued on July 1, 2021. Versions released after that date don't contain this feature. Overview How to pick files in FotoWeb for iPad and display them in a slideshow on a FotoWeb screen. What are screens? Using a computer in your network you can access your FotoWeb server (it has to be the same server that your iPa
The alpha handling modification handles alpha channels (transparency) in images, so transparency in PNG is handled when converted into JPG (which has no transparency). Property Value Details kind AlphaHandlingAction alphaHandling Enum: "DiscardAlpha" "ReplaceAlpha" "ReplaceInvertedAlpha" Discard Alpha – alpha channel is discarded from the output
Markdown reference Formatting Entered text Published text Bold This is how you **bold** text. This is how you bold text Italics This is how you *italicize* text. This is how you italicize text Bulleted lists * Bullet one (don't forget a space after the asterisk) * Bullet two Bullet one (don't forget a space after the asterisk) Bullet two Numbered li
An SQL database is needed only when using the reporting feature. FotoWeb uses a SQL database for storing activity logs. The topic deals with configuring a working connection to the database. Tip: If you do not wish to use activity logging, you can omit using an SQL server altogether. In this case, you should disable all activity logging in the site
Access Requirement: The administrator user needs the Manage archives permission to access the Apply Metadata Macro option in archives. For more information, see Assigning administrative privileges to a group . About updating asset metadata on ingestion Updating asset metadata on ingestion is a quick and easy way of automatically adding metadata to
What are actions? Often when you work with a number of files, you perform the same tasks repeatedly. For example, it could be that you want to resize several images and add new metadata before you upload the resized images to a web server using FTP. In FotoStation it is possible to create an action that can perform these and many other tasks in a si
You can toggle between light and dark mode after logging in to Fotoware. Select the User menu icon. In the menu that opens, select Dark, Light, or Autoin the Interface Style section. Select Auto to make Fotoware match the light/dark mode set globally in your operating system.
Overview This topic discusses how your FotoWeb can be implemented in your network and the effect this has on security. Implications of securing a web server Running a web server on the Internet requires knowledge about many security issues. FotoWeb has been designed to fit into the security model of Windows. The concepts for managing security in Fot
Picturepark Open ID Connect provider supports Authorization Code Flow with PKCE, an OpenId Connect flow designed to authenticate users in native or mobile applications. PKCE, pronounced “pixy” is an acronym for Proof Key for Code Exchange, which does not require users to provide a client_secret. The standard Authorization Code flow would require thi
This is not working as Geo Point fields are not available in the search , but only in filters. You will also not find a setting for "search" in the geo point field configuration. The code itself is correct. corporateInformation.location.lat:47
Webhooks make it possible for third-party integrations to be notified and perform additional automated actions triggered by certain events in FotoWeb. The following events related to orders and the shopping cart can trigger webhooks: Changes in the shopping cart Submission of the shopping cart to an order Approval of an order Webhooks are triggered
On the Login and Sessions page, you can manage how a user logs in to a session. From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon) go to Site Configuration > Security > Login and Sessions. Enter a username or email address in the Search field to find a specific user. Details for the user are displayed underneath. To end the session for the selected user,
This will find all Content Items where the value "Basic Information" is not present in the field that stores all assigned layers "layerSchemaIds". -layerSchemaIds:BasicInformation To check if a field or layer is not available you negate the value with a dash The syntax is based on Elastic Search Boolean Operator Logic: https://www.elastic.co/guide/e
Follow the steps below to manually create a user in FotoWeb. If you would prefer to import users and groups from your existing active directory, see Configuring Authentication Providers and Single Sign-On in FotoWeb. Adding a user Go to the User Management console: Open the Tools menu (cogwheel icon) and choose Manage Users/Groups. In the view that
Index Manager When installing a Fotoware DAM system, at the very least you will need to install and configure Index Manager, and a type of client software - typically FotoWeb or FotoStation, or both. As the System architecture guide explains, Index Manager is the file system crawler that extracts metadata and "feeds" metadata to the other components
Property Description Status Content & List Items Content search Index List Item search index The Status shows if the metadata, display pattern, and all content and list items, the information used for searching and displaying values are up-to-date. The red icon indicates that the index is not up to date. Searches cannot work properly. A full re-
When a user has been given access to show albums on other users' homepage, when sharing the album he can choose to show the album on the homepage that users see after logging in to FotoWeb. If the FotoWeb site allows guest access, unathenticated users will have access to this in the same way as an authenticated user, and web search engines such as G
About FotoWeb sites A FotoWeb server can host a number of sites. Each site is configured to respond to a host name and IP address that you configure. For example, you may have one site that hosts your company's internal assets while another site is used to showcase content to the public. It is also possible to host this content on the same site and
Relying Party (short: RP) is an app that outsources the authentication of users, which is Picturepark itself. Picturepark does not handle authentication but outsources authentication to the Picturepark IDS or any trusted Identity Provider configured in the system.
Will find all Items with multiple specific values in text fields. corporateInformation.note.simple:(lorem OR ipsum OR tmp) corporateInformation.note is the fieldpath > layer CorporateInformation, field note The fieldpath extension simple tells Picturepark to look for the value from the simple analyzer, usually the default for non-translated text.
At the outset, we have a FotoWeb archive that contains a collection of pictures of cars from different manufacturers. We will be using custom-made fields for tagging these pictures using labels that we define in the associated taxonomies. Before you begin, these fields must be renamed in Site Configuration > Metadata > Metadata Setup. Field n
Articles Clearing server credentials Configuring a proxy connection for network requests How to connect to an Index Manager archive
Overview Practical examples that illustrate how to and how not to configure actions. Do's and Don'ts As described in a preceding topic it is important to make sure that the order in which the sub actions are performed is correct. If a sub action chain is not valid, a warning will normally appear when you try to use the action. Note that even if a su
💡 Permission on Content Items (who can download, edit, view) Content Permission Sets are applicable to all Content Items. Users can only apply these if their user roles are listed with at least Apply permission in the Permission Set Permissions of each permission set and if they have sufficient access to the content item. Permission What does it mea
Run schedule settings In Color Factory Settings, expand the relevant channel and select Input & Output Options. Open the Run Schedule tab. The following dialog appears. By default, once a channel has been activated it will process files in the input folder the moment they arrive. However, if you want to configure the channel to run at a specifi
This guide provides a complete overview of how to enable taxonomies for metadata fields, define the content of taxonomies, and use taxonomies for navigation, metadata input, and when searching for assets in your DAM system. Enabling taxonomies for fields and assigning them to archives requires administrator access. Once taxonomies have been enabled
The condition Content Relation Items Changed checks if any Content Items were removed or assigned from a specific relationship field e.g. check if Press Kit material changed and trigger validation of the new material (assign Review Layer, note with order and appropriate permissions). Triggers the moment anything changed in the provided Relationship
The condition Content Schema checks if the content schema is matching a specific schema e.g. Check if for audio and video files the permission set is assigned that gives access to the multimedia team or check for Content Schema "Images" to find all images. Triggers the moment the selected Content Schema is found. Use Content Schema inside AND/OR to
Overview How to use jobs to keep track of pictures from individual photo shoots. About jobs Jobs are groups of files acquired from a source using the Acquire function in FotoStation. A uniquely named job is created every time you acquire files, and these collections are made available for viewing in the Jobs side panel. When accessing the Jobs side
You cannot select this rotate action or define properties, as it is automatically applied with predefined settings in Picturepark. Images are auto-rotated based on their Exif values.
What is optimization? While an index is being used, files are removed from the document stores and new files are added, making it necessary to write to the index files constantly. When files are removed, the existing index entries that refer to those files are marked as unused, and these unused entries can easily add up over time, causing the index
When running a public website you may be obliged by law to include contact information, terms of use, and your company's privacy policy on the site. Even if this is not the case, it's good practice to provide a simple way for website visitors to get in touch. Adding terms and conditions to your website Go to Tools (cogwheel icon) > Site Configura
Quick Renditions are predefined sizes that you can set as an administrator. They allow users to download a preview of the image in the DAM system with a single click. Although somewhat similar to processing profiles, Quick Renditions only creates a resized copy of the original asset and delivers it to the client with an optional watermark - no addit
Fotoware as a Service - September 2024 update Deployment This release is being gradually deployed and will be available on all tenants soon. Improvements You can now decline consent at any stage of the process when filling in a consent form. When creating a consent form template, you can define whether or not to give the recipient the option to upl
How FotoWeb handles custom file types FotoWeb has a control file that determines how different file types are interpreted by the system. This file contains a list of all known file extensions, their MIME types, the icons that should be associated with the file type, and other information. By changing this file, you can add support for file types not
With the optional audio and video module, FotoWeb creates proxy files - copies of the original files are encoded to play back on all platforms. Video and audio proxy files are stored in a configurable location on the server. Because the proxy folders can become very big, it's important to place them on a drive that has sufficient storage available.
The Fotoware Extension for InDesign can be enabled by users after they have installed the FotoWeb Desktop suite. For more information, see Enabling the Fotoware plugins for Adobe Creative Cloud on your computer. If following the steps outlined in the article above results in an error, the following steps can be taken to remedy the problem: Using Win
What are SmartFolders? SmartFolders help users perform advanced predefined searches in an archive with a single click. Similarly to the folder navigation that can be enabled on archives, it provides a way to create a meaningful structure of "folders" that, when clicked, in reality execute a predefined search on the server and returns the result. A u
You can import values via Excel. You can export values in Excel. This App was formerly called Data Exchange or Excel Roundtripping App. The Excel Roundtripping App is developed by Picturepark and saves you time when updating content or metadata. You can export data such as Content Items, content metadata, and List Items on a massive scale, editing t
To search for a particular album or albums, go to the Albums page and use the search field in the top menu bar. You can search for the album name, description, and any tags you've added to it. Note: The search results will display only the first 100 album hits.
Assigning a processing profile to your archive You have the possibility to choose whether files downloaded directly from the archive should be given additional processing before delivery. Processing profiles can also be used to process a file that a user places in an InDesign layout using the FotoWeb Desktop Extension for Adobe Creative Suite. Star
When a user registers and has confirmed his email address, an administrator has to review and approve the user. If a user does not get reviewed, he is not able to access the Content Platform. To set a user as reviewed, you have to navigate to the menu “Access” and then to “Users”. In the users tab, you can now filter for the authorization state “To
Editions Color Factory Professional Color Factory Enterprise Architecture: Simultaneous processing in several channels Channel prioritization File support: Image support Adobe PSD layer support Adobe PDF processing Vector graphics and special formats support* * Requires 3rd party software Movie support 16 bit image processing 16 Bits
Overview How to complete the export from FotoWeb so that you can embed the link or iframe in your CMS. Finalizing the export Having chosen your export options, click on the Publish button in the lower right corner of the export module to perform the actual export and generate links to the picture that can be used in your CMS system. When a file is e
In the Text field, you can insert text, numbers, and special characters, which means unstructured information, as the user can write whatever they want - even High Valyrian, Valar morghulis, which almost nobody understands. Text fields, therefore, should have a clear label indicating their purpose, for example, Public social media description (avoid
What is FotoWeb Desktop? FotoWeb Desktop is a suite of desktop applications that extend the functionality in FotoWeb to Windows and Mac platforms. The suite includes: The FotoWeb Deskop Uploader, which lets users easily upload files from their local desktop to a FotoWeb archive. User authentication implies that a system administrator can control whi
To easily tell how many users FotoWeb is licensed for and how many sites are in use, open either the FotoWeb Settings app or the Operations Center Status app. Select License information (under Fotoware FotoWeb in the Operations Center Status app) to display licensing and site information. Note: Users that are deactivated (disabled) still count as li
Searching for a value inside the description, which is a translated text field, works in advanced search mode with the syntax: productInformation.description.en:Blueberry* You can provide the whole value as an exact match (including letter casing) or work with wildcards (value*). Be aware the first character of the value must match (b!=B) as you can
Overview How to change the expiry date of a picture exported for use in a CMS. Changing the expiry date of an exported picture Sometimes it may be practical to be able to change a picture's expiry date. For instance, you may be using purchased pictures on your web site for which you only have usage rights in a certain period of time before the licen
The Open ID Connect implementation for Azure AD suits the Picturepark implementation. Azure AD is officially tested and supported.
Archive navigation Open the relevant archive and select Settings. In the Archive details view, open the General tab. Turn on the Taxonomy navigation toggle. All the metadata fields created on the system are listed. Turn on the toggle for the fields you want to expose for navigation in the archive. Select Save. What's next? Now you can define conte
Bitmap file handling Where: Channel | Input File Formats | Other Formats tab By default, bitmap files will be moved directly to the global UNKNOWN folder, but you may also copy the file to the output folder, applying all processing not including manipulation of the image data. Hence, files may be routed, captioned (as the caption is stored in a tag)
Overview This how-to explains how you can use slide shows to make image selections. Selecting images during a slide show During the slide show, you can select images. Press Spacebar on the keyboard to select the image that you are currently viewing. The selection is illustrated by a frame around the image. By using this functionality you can select
This is the recommended way of connecting FotoWeb to an on-premises Active Directory and allowing users to sign in to FotoWeb with their Active Directory accounts. Setting up and managing Active Directory and Active Directory Federation Services (ADFS) efficiently and securely can be demanding. This approach is recommended for organizations that alr
Connecting Fotostation and Fotoware Veloz You can manage your assets, upload and download large files, and work with metadata efficiently by connecting Fotostation and Fotoware Veloz. Fotostation supports various workflows, including pre-ingestion work, metadata editing, and integration with the Fotoware Veloz taxonomy. For information about connect
The image editor is a general-purpose tool for editing and adjusting images. It has some quite effective tools for filtering out dust and reducing image noise. It can also be used to crop, rotate, and perform many types of color correction and processing that are useful for producing a good result. The toolbar and menus give access to all operations
This query looks for the fieldId "fullName" from the connected List in a Tagbox (persons) that is on the Layer Corporate Information. You must use this syntax to get a specific value from the tag assigned: layer.tagbox.listfieldid:value corporateInformation.persons.fullName:Joe* You can access values from nested documents following the same approach
Using the Acquire wizard to import pictures The file acquire wizard makes it easy to import files to FotoStation. This feature is particularly useful when importing files from a digital camera, since many operations can be automated, such as renaming of files and the application of a text template or a macro. To import files, click on the Acquire bu
Settings This sub action is used to check if text has been entered into one or more specified metadata field(s). It may, for instance, be used before an image is archived to make sure that information has been added to selected fields. This is necessary if, at a later stage, you would like to search for metadata that has been entered into this field
Mit Hilfe eines Shares können Inhalte mit externen Benutzern geteilt werden. Um auf ein Share zugreifen zu können, wird kein Benutzerkonto auf der Picturepark Content Platform benötigt. Sie können Inhalte teilen, indem Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf ein Content Item klicken und “Share” auswählen. Sie können aber auch alle relevanten Content Items
The JoinByTransformation allows us to concatenate values with a separator e.g. join the n-grams from the N-Gram transformation. If you get a string back that you want to use for tagging you should join the values by a comma. PRO TIPP: If you get various values and want to join them differently, you should do this in the assign value action. Variab
Changing taxonomy item properties Navigate to the item you want to edit and select the Edit taxonomy item (pencil) icon. Enter new values in the following fields, as required: Label -This is the label that the user sees in the taxonomy tree when navigating. Value -Enter a value for the taxonomy item. Description -Optional field. You can enter a
Administrators can create custom icons with links to resources that Fotoware users can click on to access. Button visibility can be customized so they're even available for guests. Note: Custom links are available in both the main Fotoware interface and the Fotoware Pro interface Where is this configured? Go to Tools (cogwheel icon) > Site Config
To add a note to an asset, select the asset and open the Asset information panel (Keyboard shortcut T). By first selecting several assets you can add the same note to the whole selection. Activate the Information tab, click in the Note field and type in the note. Finally click on the checkmark next to the field to save the changes. Tip: Pressing Shi
This will find all Content Items where the field is available in the Layer and has a value. _exists_:fieldpath To check if a field is available use exists This functionality is similar to the filter query Exists Filter _exists_:corporateInformation.title.en
Adding the text analyzer to the fieldpath allows finding values contained in the text field, ignoring capitalization. You can now also search for the plural values or stems e.g. berries, berr. corporateInformation.title.en.language:berries The fieldpath extension language tells Picturepark to look for the value from the language analyzer, usually us
As an administrator responsible for installing Fotoware software in your organization you have probably noticed that when installing some of our software you may also get other third-party products installed on the system. These additional components are required to make Fotoware software work as intended. The system requirements for all Fotoware ap
The condition Number Compare checks if a specific metadata field contains a number that is less, less or equal, equal, greater, greater or equal to a specific value e.g. Check weather the resolution is greater or equal 300 dpi to meet the website requirements before pushing content to the website (handled via separate integration). A field value of
A number sequence is used for the creation of increasing customized identifiers for easier referencing of your content and is used in conjunction with a Business Rule. Click number sequence solution here for an example of how a number sequence is used in a Business Rule. Specific Definitions Property Value ID (required) The unique identifier for thi
Schemas help capture information in a strictly structured way. A schema is a group of fields that can store different data (similar to a form). Create a Schema Each schema type has some schema-specific settings and also requires different follow-up tasks. Please check each schema type for details. Select Schemas Press + (Create) Choose the desired t
FotoWeb can be integrated with desktop applications such as editorial systems to enable users to drag and drop assets into an external app. The desktop application receives the asset and all its metadata and can create a local rendering. Single assets can be dropped, as well as selections of multiple assets. FotoWeb provides the functionality and AP
The following settings for .pdf are additionally available. Property Description jpegQuality Specifies compression quality used for ReduceFileSize. fastWebView Whether to linearize the output for fast web viewing. reduceFileSize Whether to apply measures to decrease output size or not. extension This property should not be overwritten, except for e
A custom footer can be added to the site to include information that you want to be visible at the bottom of each page on the site. Although extensive contact information can be added to an overlay window on the site, you may want to add certain information in the page footer. Adding a custom footer Go to Tools (cogwheel icon) > Site Configuratio
This article describes all dynamic tags that can be used in metadata macros and dynamically generated file names in actions and marker actions. These tags cannot be used in search expressions. Tags in the namespace task refer to the currently running action or marker action. Tags in the namespace asset refer to the current asset being processed (for
What groups are for Users can be arranged in groups to make it easier to control access to your archives and workflows. The Everyone and Registered Users groups are system default groups and cannot be deleted or modified. Each Fotoware user is a member of the Everyone and Registered Users groups, except for Guest users, who are not considered regist
Scenario description In many workflows it will be useful to make a record of the original filename of each file that enters the system. There could be renaming operations in place in Color Factory or another system further down the line which means that the file that comes out the other end of the workflow has a different name altogether. With Color
Searching for a value inside the description, which is a translated text field, works in advanced search mode with the syntax: productInformation.description.en:Blueberry* You can provide the whole value as an exact match (including letter casing) or work with wildcards (value*). Be aware the first character of the value must match (b!=B) as you can
How to sign up When accessing a site with online user registration enabled, you can sign up for an account by following the Register link in the login box. Signups by email invitation: The FotoWeb administrator may also have sent an invitation to sign up to your email address. In this case, follow the link in the email to start the registration proc
When you log in to Fotoware, the site's home page is displayed. There is a large search bar at the top of the screen. When you access an archive, the search bar is located on the top banner: If you are using Fotoware Pro, see Searching for assets in Fotoware Pro. Performing a basic search To perform a basic search, start entering words in the search
Creating an index In Index Manager Settings, open Indexes. Expand the group you would like to an index to and select Add Index. The index properties are then configured on the associated pages, (General, Document Folders, Access list, Filters, Fields,and Advanced). If you like you can also group collections of indexes by creating a group and draggin
Showcasing an album When sharing an album, a user with permission to show albums on other users homepages can choose to show the album on teh homepage that users see when they log in to FotoWeb. If the FotoWeb server has a portal license, portal (guest) users will have access to this, just like authenticated users, and web search engines such as Goo
The String Contains Condition checks if a string (text, multiline text field) contains a specific value e.g. so users can easily check if a string (text, e.g. filename) contains parameters to use for auto tagging. The Business Rule will check if the string contains the specified value, then executes the action. Prerequisites Existing Content Item wi
Picturepark supports a wide range of file types. Upload: You can upload any file type to Picturepark; there are no specific file format restrictions. However, system limitations like bandwidth and storage capacity may apply. A preview/thumbnail is displayed for most file types; if a thumbnail cannot be displayed, a file format icon will be shown ins
How it works The Fotoware extension for Photoshop lets you check out files from a Fotoware archive, edit them in Photoshop, and then upload your changes to the server when you're done. You can also create new content in Photoshop and upload it to the Fotoware server using the plugin; you don't need to log in to Fotoware separately to upload newly cr
Transcoding pending This symbol indicates that FotoWeb has queued the asset for transcoding. You can adjust the transcoder settings to control the speed of transcoding. Transcoding in progress The asset is currently being transcoded. Once the process is completed, FotoWeb will replace the thumbnail with a proper video thumbnail. Transcoding failed
Index Manager provides search and metadata services to both FotoStation and FotoWeb. When configuring a system that involves both FotoWeb and Index Manager, it is possible to run Index Manager and FotoWeb on separate network servers. This is usually the preferred way to configure the system to achieve the best possible performance. Note: A single Fo
How to create an album and add files to it Start by selecting the assets you want to add to the album. Then drag them over to the Albums section in the right side panel. You can either create a new album by dropping the assets into the area that says "Drop here to create new album" or simply drop them on top of an existing album to add them to that.
Overview When managing your CMS exports, filtering helps you find the precise content you're looking for. Filtering exports Using the filter buttons at the top of the window you can filter the exports by Publish date, Publication, Source, Photographer, Archive and Status. Clicking on either of these and combining settings from different columns make
The templates are used throughout the system. Their names give you an indication of their use. For example, Reset Password is the template sent out when a user resets the password. To test the template, you must execute the corresponding action, for example. reset your password on the login screen. The following templates are available: New User Reg
Disabling leading search characters Search strings that begin with a wildcard character (#, *, and?) often result in very long search times and, in turn, cause the system to appear less responsive. You can configure Index Manager to ignore search queries that begin with a wildcard character. This means that any search that starts with a wildcard c
Overview Learn how you can use Previews to work more efficiently with your pictures and organize them. What are previews? Viewing images using thumbnails in FotoStation’s image window is useful when you want to get an overview of your archive. However, if you want to take a closer look at an image, you will need to view a larger representation of th
Connect is a file flow server application and as such may require some planning before you start configuring it. However, it has been made to make it easy to get started by letting you dynamically change the server and folder locations of your channels if that is called for. However, since setting up a channel is a process that involves several step
Channel Filter: Show Images with Copyright Information Channel Filter: Show Items not Triggered in a Fieldset Channel Filter: Show Items that have Product Layer Assigned Channel Filter: Show Items with any Tag in a Tagbox Channel Filter: Show Items with Two Specific Tags Channel Filter: Show New Items Only (based on EXIF) Channel Filter: Show only t
Client requirements Fotoware interface requirements The most up-to-date versions of Microsoft Edge, Mozilla Firefox, Apple Safari, and Google Chrome have been tested and verified to work. Screen resolution 1280 x 1024 or higher Operations Center requirements These are the requirements for accessing the Operations Center settings apps to configure
To use extended search, click on the (...) icon to the far right in the search field. The overlay that shows lets you fine tune the precise criteria to search for. You can search in specific fields, within a specific time interval, etc. Having made your choices, click on Search to pass the search to the server and retrieve the results. Which fields
If you're using the Pro interface,see Navigating archives using taxonomies in the Pro interface. Where are the taxonomy trees located? When taxonomy navigation has been enabled for an archive and the taxonomy has been built, users can use the taxonomy nodes for navigation and filtering in the archive. In FotoWeb, taxonomies are displayed in the left
Auto-tagging can be configured as an action with an Execute webhook source or as an asset ingested webhook. Both use the same URL format to call auto-tagging, and configuration settings are provided as part of the URL in both cases. The webhook URL requires an autotag ID and secret, which Fotoware will provide. The system administrator can set the
When working with assets in the FotoWeb interface in your browser, there are some keyboard shortcuts that can help you perform operations more quickly. If you're using FotoWeb Pro, there are other keyboard shortcuts for that interface. Modifying a selection Keyboard key What it does Ctrl-click (Command-click on Mac) Select individual file in grid Sh
Nach dem Hochladen, Hinzufügen von Metadaten und Prüfen einer Datei möchten Sie die Datei möglicherweise veröffentlichen, damit auch Benutzer mit Leseberechtigung dieses Content Item sehen können. Sie können dies tun, indem Sie die Detailansicht eines Content Items öffnen oder den Batch-Editor öffnen und zur Registerkarte “Berechtigungen” wechseln.
When FotoStation (or FotoWeb) is connected to an index, the fields that it can sort content by are limited to File name and Modification date, in ascending or descending order. However, it is possible to enable clients to sort by the content of additional metadata fields by changing the properties of the index. In Index Manager Settings, open the Fi
Selecting folders in the folder tree The Folders tab next to Archives makes it possible to expose the folder structure in the currently selected archive. Click on the + next to each folder level to expand it and view the underlying folder structure. Clicking on a folder displays the files in that folder. Note: The system administrator controls wheth
To set the status of an asset, select one or more assets on the thumbnail grid page (tip: use Shift and Ctrl-keys to make multi-file selections) and then click on the Set Status button in the Action bar. Finally, click on a status in the overlay to apply it to the selection of files. Setting status on the Details page When viewing an asset on the De
The following settings for .tiff are additionally available. Property Description alphaPremultiplied Specifies whether color channels should be premultiplied with alpha (associated alpha) or not (unassociated alpha). compressionType Specifies the compression type to use. includeUnspecifiedTiffExtraChannels Preserve (including size affecting changes
The user who uploads or creates a schema or content item is automatically the owner of that item and has the permission to view, manage, edit and change the permission of that schema/content item. The ownership can be transferred by the owner or any other editor/admin with the permission to manage the permissions. The ownership can be transferred in
When browsing an archive, or after you have performed a search, you will want to select files to do something with them. Selecting individual files Below each thumbnail is a filename and a checkmark. click on that checkmark to select an individual file. To select multiple individual files, you can press the Ctrl-key while clicking all the files you
Categories of consent From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon), go to Site Configuration > Consent Management > Categories. The Consent categories page opens displaying all existing consent categories. To select which columns to display on this page, select the Column settings icon and select from the options listed. The categories of use that you
Sometimes, it may be necessary to assign a common access list for a number of created archives. From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon), go to Site Configuration > Archives. Select the archives to which the access list should apply and select Set access list. Assign access as usual. Remember that the access you specify overrides any existing access o
When are shared configurations needed? In a corporate environment, FotoStation can be configured to load centrally located configurations from a server. A server administrator can use FotoStation to create individual configurations for different users or groups and assign configurations to these. When a user starts FotoStation, they will be asked to
User sessions time out after a configurable amount of time of inactivity, even if a user has FotoWeb browser tabs open. This prevents potential abuse of open user sessions when users leave their workplace without logging out. You can allow users to choose to stay permanently signed in, also known as a persistent login. This means that when a user l
Actions can be configured to allow a user to crop the images that are sent to a destination. If the system administrator also assigns a processing profile to the workflow, that processing profile is always applied and cannot be changed by the user running the workflow. Enabling Crop in an action Create a new action or edit an existing one. On the Ge
The Dynamic View field allows relating content to other content based on metadata or other criteria, for example, relating content with the same document number or relating content with the same product number or the same event. This is especially useful for creating language versions of documents, product packages, or other content collections. Dyn
Show only Virtual Type "Press Kit" with Layer "Publishing Information" in a Channel. { "kind": "AndFilter", "filters": [ { "kind": "TermFilter", "field": "contentSchemaId", "term": "PressKit" }, { "kind": "TermFilter", "field": "layerSchemaIds", "term": "Pub
The Content Platform enriches your tags with additional contextual information, which is required for search engine optimization inside and outside Picturepark and makes your users happy. Let me show you an example. What do you see here? That's an easy one. A logo of a company called Fine Organic Foods Association, probably selling fine organic food
An album that's marked as deleted will be purged permanently after 72 hours. Within this timeframe, it is still possible to recover it as follows: Start by clicking on Albums in the top banner. This will take you to the Albums page. By default, you will not see deleted albums, so you must click on the trashcan filter icon at the top right to display
This will find all Users created in the last 60 days which are not Support Users. Adapt the date range to your specific case. audit.creationDate:[now-60d TO now] AND isSupportUser:false The following attributes exists in the search: ✔isLocked:false ✔isSupportUser:false The following attributes do not exist in the search: ❌isReadOnly:false ❌isFeder
Text fields in Picturepark have an additional option to render Markdown , a well-known syntax supported by various systems. Using Markdown in text fields allows basic formatting of descriptions, press kit content, or product descriptions to highlight specific areas or structure longer text areas. Picturepark uses the following component: https://
This will find all Users where the field is empty aka users where no Identity Provider is added. _exists_:identityProviderId This will find users of a specific Identity Provider. identityProviderId:a3431095e9cc401ab65197ba12ecfccf The ID is shown in the list of Identity Providers
Adding a note You can add a note to a single file or a whole range by making a selection and clicking on the Set note button in the action bar. Then, enter the information you want to attach and select Save. How can you tell that an asset has a note attached to it? When assets have a note attached to them, a little yellow triangle in the corner not
Printing pictures Before you open the Print window, select one or more images that you would like to print. Note that the order in which you select the images will be reflected when you print them. Select Print in the toolbar to open the Print window, or use the print shortcut (Ctrl+P / Command–P). Before you select OK to start printing, there are s
Resizing images in FotoStation When you are working with images you will often discover that you need to manipulate the size or resolution of the image. FotoStation can change the image’s size and resample it by using the Resize option. Open the Resize dialog window by right-clicking on a thumbnail and selecting Resize from the context menu. (It can
Overview See how you can rotate a whole range of large files in a single, quick operation with minimal strain on your computer's CPU. How FotoStation rotates pictures When working with image files you will sometimes see that the image does not have the correct rotation. Typically, this problem will occur if the photographer has captured images with
If you have been given privileges to delete assets in an archive, you can select the files and click on the Delete button in the action bar. To avoid unintentional deletion of files, you have to click the button twice. Depending on how the FotoWeb server has been configured the files are either deleted immediately or simply moved to an isolated area
Adding metadata to an album To add metadata to an album, you first have to open it for viewing on a tab in the FotoWeb Pro interface: Locate the album in the right side panel and click its title to open it on a separate tab in FotoWeb Pro. The album metadata will be shown above the grid, and you can change its title and description and add any addit
Enabling version control impacts storage capacity. The required storage increases with the size of the metadata (normally 2-10 kb) for each metadata change and a full copy of the file for every content change (when you upload a new version). By default, version control is not enabled and when you enable it, you can select the archives to which it sh
Learn how to find assets in the Fotoware DAM system and use them in your documents and presentations using plugins for Microsoft Word and PowerPoint. Creating slide masters in PowerPoint: PowerPoint uses Slide Masters to let you create templates for your presentations. Slide Masters use so-called placeholders for storing content; this topic discusse
When files are uploaded to FotoWeb, three metadata fields are always filled in based on the uploader's user credentials: Field ID Field name Content #360 Uploaded by User name (login name) of uploader #361 Uploaded by (full name) The full name of the person uploading #362 Upload time Date and time of upload This information can be utilized by Color
Note: The FotoWeb Reports module/Fotoware Custom Report Generator tool is deprecated and will be set to End of Life on April 1st, 2024. Note: This article describes functionality available in feature release 17 and earlier. For a description of this functionality in release 8.1 and onwards, see Configuring site behavior. FotoWeb always writes logs t
General information There are two authentication methods available when connecting to a SQL Server: SQL Server Authentication: A user that only resides inside SQL Server, you have to provide a username and password. Windows Authentication: Authenticate by OS, the user is a Windows or a Domain user. For more detailed information, see http://msdn.micr
How FotoWeb searches FotoWeb performs searches in the indexed archives through Index Manager. Index Manager receives a search string and parameters from FotoWeb. It then performs the search and returns the results to FotoWeb. FotoWeb provides some parameters to configure these searches on three levels: preparing the search string by making required
In Color Factory, you can configure automati file purging preferences to help automate the purging of outdated files in the output folders. You can set up a purging schedule and choose to delete the files or move them to a location for backup. You can configure a purging schedule can be configured and file filtering to manage which files are purged.
Uploading assets to FotoWeb Select Upload in the top banner to display the Upload window. Drag one or more files from your desktop into the upload area (the dotted blue box) or select the Browse link to locate the files on your computer. Choose the archive to upload the assets from the dropdown list just above the upload area. This will list all the
Actions used for workflows can be configured to allow users to add metadata to preset fields. This way, the metadata the user enters is applied to all the selected assets. The system administrator may have configured actions allowing users to edit the metadata of the assets they're processing. Both the source asset and the destination asset can be u
Prerequisite Before adding a site to FotoWeb, you must create a new website in IIS. For more information, see What does Fotoware configure in Internet Information Services. Creating a new site You can create new sites in the FotoWeb settings app. Open the app and select Sites. Select Add. Enter the site details. Select OK. Making the site available
Note: Active Directory integration via LDAP in FotoWeb is set to End of Life from January 1st, 2024, and will be removed from our software in a future version. We strongly recommend switching your identity provider as soon as possible. Fotoware currently supports a variety of other identity providers, such as Microsoft Entra ID (formerly Azure Activ
Where: Go to File menu (FotoStation Pro menu on the Mac), Preferences > Language . FotoStation comes in a number of language varieties. When starting the program for the first time, you are given the option of choosing the program language, but if you change your mind later, it is easy to change to another language. When FotoStation is configured
This article describes legacy dynamic tags which exist for backward compatibility. We do not recommend using these tags anymore, but they will remain available in future versions of FotoWeb. For new configurations, use the tags listed in Reference of date/time variables instead. If your configuration already uses any legacy tags, the tags in the Rep
Disclaimer Please read this disclaimer ("Disclaimer") carefully before using the http://picturepark.com Website (“Website”) operated by Fotoware Switzerland AG (“Picturepark”, "us", 'we", "our"). The content displayed on the Website is intellectual property belonging to us. You may reuse, republish, or reprint such content under the CC BY-NC-SA 4.0
Overview How to remove red eyes using FotoStation's image editor. Using the red eye reduction filter To remove red eyes in an image, use the lasso tool to make the selection, then click on the Fix red-eye button to have FotoStation apply its automatic red-eye reduction filter.
Access requirement: To work with version control you need access to the index(es) and you must create an archive that points to the index(es) that version control is enabled for. When browsing content in FotoStation, you can review an asset's versions by selecting the version control marker for the relevant asset. The Version control dialog opens
Overview This topic explains how to make curve adjustments in the image editor. Adjusting curves Click on the Curves button on the toolbar to open the Curves dialog. Essentially, both Curves and Levels can be used to adjust the image contrast and set black and white points; which method you choose is largely a matter of preference. The X axis in the
Adding the FotoWeb application to your SAML provider Example: Okta setup Okta is an Identity Provider (IdP) which is used as an example to illustrate how to configure FotoWeb to work with an IdP. The procedure may vary slightly depending on the type of IdP being used. Create an application in your SAML provider's management console and set the foll
Upload vs Ingest (Staged Upload) Content Platform uses a staged upload process. Files are first uploaded (available to Content Platform (Storage)) and then ingested (Content Platform starts Rendering & Data Extraction). The process stage is visible in the notification where you see upload in progress, ingest in progress, and ingest completed mes
The Enqueue Transfer Ownership Action transfers the ownership of a Content Item to the configured user of Picturepark. The Business Rule will execute and if conditions are met the ownership is transferred. Prerequisites Existing user in Picturepark. Open Settings Open Business Rules Add a new business rule Name: All content ownership transferred to
In Business Rules, you can transform values, e.g., you get the EXIF values and extract a specific value like geo point and transform this into a tag you can assign from a list. You can request values from the Content, the metadata, or audit information. You request those values from implicitly defined variables. You can use these variables in transf
If you have permission to download files from FotoWeb, select one or more files and open the Asset Information panel (keyboard shortcut T). Then, select one of the available download profiles in the Download section on the Information tab. When you download more than one file, the files are processed and delivered in a single zipped archive. Note:
Drag&Drop folders onto Picturepark and Picturepark will upload all files inside the folder and keep the folder names available in the file metadata. Ensure that the file path of the folder and the files do not exceed 160 characters (a known Windows limitation).
This feature is available as an option in Color Factory Professional and Enterprise Editions With this feature, Color Factory can crop images using image analysis with artificial intelligence. To use it you must have obtained a license to use the Imagga service that Fotoware uses and the API information needs to be added to the corresponding fields
Overview Explains the use of templates to add metadata to a selection of files. When are templates useful? If you often add the same metadata to files, you may want to use a template to automate this process. Templates are a great way to predefine content that can quickly be applied to a single or multiple files. Note: Depending on what you are tryi
Nachdem Sie eine Datei hochgeladen haben, erscheint das folgende Fenster. Sie können nun entweder auf “Metadatenlayer hinzufügen” klicken, um die hochgeladenen Dateien direkt zu bearbeiten, oder Sie können diese Inhalte später bearbeiten. Um die zuletzt hochgeladenen Inhalte oben im Inhaltsbrowser zu finden, können Sie die Sortierreihenfolge auf Ers
From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon) go to Site Configuration > Server Configuration > Trash Can. Options for handling of deleted files Users can be given access to delete files by setting that permission in the access list on the archive properties page. As an administrator you can manage how FotoWeb treats files that are deleted - they can be
To mange the order that actions are shown in the web browser user interfaces, move them up or down using the = "handles" on the left hand side in the list. This also affects the order of Quick Buttons for workflows in the main Fotoware user interface.
Selecting files using the mouse When making selections with the mouse, you can use modifier keys to make a multi-file selection. The modifier keys work the same way they do in the Explorer in Windows/Finder on Mac and adjust automatically based on which platform your web browser runs. Selecting individual files To select individual files, select Ctr
About side panels Where: Expand the Side panels node in the program configuration. In the side panel configuration you can set up the various side panels in FotoStation and define their content. A side panel can be configured to contain different content, such as archives, actions, and projects. In its default configuration, FotoStation has Desktop,
After logging in to FotoWeb or FotoWeb Pro you'll see the SmartFolders in the left hand side panel. Creating a SmartFolder entry Tip: Most users can only see the SmartFolders that have been configured. To change or add new entries, you have to have SmartFolder permissions on the archive in question. Click on the Add link to create a new entry. Label
Goal: Looks for a Product Code in the Filename (needs to be at the beginning and 14 char long, needs to start with either F-, G- or V-). If found the Product tag gets assigned. Condition For images only MatchRegexCondition produces a dictionary of groups matching in the regex (key could be name or number), this is the input to the transformation. Tr
Applying status and rating filters Above the grid are two controls that let you apply filters for status and rating. These filters can be combined and applied to an archive or a search result. Important: These filters do not change the rating and status of the assets in your archives, they only control which files you actually see based on the filte
To control the order that markers are shown in the web browser user interfaces, move them up or down using = "handles" in the list of markers. While Standard markers always show in the top left corner of the thumbnail, Extended markers can be placed in the top left corner, top right corner and centered of the thumbnail. This should be taken into acc
Settings This sub action makes it possible to clear all usage rights licenses from a file. The use of this functionality is described in detail in the topic Applying Creative Commons and Plus licenses to your assets..
The following settings for .avif are additionally available. AV1 Image File Format (AVIF) is an image file format specification. AVIF supports animations, live photos, and more through multilayer images stored in image sequences. It offers better support for graphical elements, logos, and infographics, whereas JPEG has limitations. It provides bett
What can this be used for? FotoStation lets you export metadata from files in your archive to a comma or tab-separated text file. The exported metadata can be stored in the Fotoware import format or in the format used by Cumulus. You can also create your own custom tab or comma-separated format for compliance with other systems. When importing metad
Rating files To quickly rate a number of files, right-click your selection and choose Set rating on all selected from the context menu. If you have a one-button Mac, you can use Ctrl-click to bring up the context menu. The rating uses the same metadata field and values as Adobe products.
Webhook requests sent by FotoWeb SaaS and Fotoware On-Premises have a timeout of 10 seconds. If a webhook request takes longer than the timeout to complete, then the webhook will be shown as timed out in the webhook log. Note that even if a webhook request has timed out, the webhook request handler may still have completed successfully, which is not
Summary To build the preview of a virtual item you can use various formatting options and use field values as headings and normal text. The styling from Picturepark will be applied except when you add additional CSS styles. <h1>{{data.pressKit.name | translate}}</h1> <h2> {% if data.pressKit.subline %} {{data.pressKit.su
After uploading a file, the following window pops up. You could now either press on “Add metadata Layers” to edit the uploaded files directly or you could edit this content later. To find the most recent uploaded content on top of the content browser, you could change the sort order to creation date descending. Single edit To edit single content ite
These settings are configured under Site Configuration > Server Configuration > Database Server. These settings allow a FotoWeb system administrator to configure the connection to the SQL database and schedule automatic backups of SQL and MongoDB databases. Important: FotoWeb can only back up the database on the embedded MS SQL Server that is
In the process of securing the server from unauthorized access, FotoWeb also encrypts vital information that is sent to clients. To this end, FotoWeb uses an encryption secret that should be unique and ensures that different sites cannot decrypt each others' data. This key is randomly generated upon installation and is different for each site on you
Elements in the main window Main menu The main menu is located beneath the Title bar (above the Title bar on the Mac). The main menu and its submenus contain all functions used in FotoStation. Main toolbar In the Main toolbar, you find buttons for quick access to some of the most commonly used functions. Hover over one of the buttons to display the
FotoWeb requirements Other topics that outline software and hardware requirements for FotoWeb server and client software: FotoWeb server - hardware requirements FotoWeb server - software requirements MongoDB disk and memory requirements Client requirements - web browsers FotoWeb Desktop suite client requirements Fotoware Mobile requirements
Picturepark lists are lists of tags or values. These lists are linked to layers via tagbox fields. The main benefit of lists is that you are able to make lists with multiple rows, so you could store more information behind one tag. Another benefit is that they are tagged via their ID, so if you want to change the name or any other information of a l
Metadata scalability The ability to define and use custom metadata fields in your configuration makes your DAM system endlessly configurable with regard to metadata. There's virtually no limit to the number of custom fields you can create and you can define their content types to control the types of metadata users can input. This topic aims to give
Overview How to add a caption and tooltip to a picture being exported for use on a CMS. Adding text Select Caption to add text to your picture If you would like image text to appear as an overlay on your published picture, enter the text in the Caption field. Use the drop-down list to select any text stored in the file as metadata. The list displays
Signing a consent form on behalf of another As a parent or legal guardian, you can sign a consent form on behalf of your child. If both parents (or 2 guardians) need to give consent, each needs to sign a consent form and both consent forms can then be linked to the relevant asset. The consent form you sign must be based on a template that has the Si
Overview How to set publication expiry and add the URL where the picture was published. Adding publication information Click on Publication to set publication and expiry options. FotoWeb lets you set a publication expiry date by which the picture should no longer be available. This is useful, for instance, if the usage rights for your picture expire
The intent of adding directory integration with FotoWeb is primarily to facilitate user and permissions management by allowing FotoWeb to import this information directly from an authentication provider. There are two main purposes for the directory service integration with FotoWeb: manage users and groups in one place let the directory authenticat
This will find all Users where the field is empty (not exists) aka users where no roles are added. -_exists_:userRoles.userRoleId This will find all Users where the field is not empty (exists) aka users where roles are added. _exists_:userRoles.userRoleId This will find users of a specific role. userRoles.userRoleId:49c5052617c849cf95de3a98d6408f
The Execution Scope MainDoc, means the document (similar to a database table) in ElasticSearch that carries all information about an item e.g. types, permission, actions, like the CV of the item.
Items with all Layers assigned. { "kind": "TermsFilter", "field": "layerSchemaIds", "terms": [ "CorporateLayer", "MediaLayer", "GeneralLayer" ] } Exclude Images, Videos, Virtual Press Kits. { "kind": "NotFilter", "filter": { "kind": "TermsFilter", "field": "contentSchemaId", "terms": [ "PressKit",
To quickly preview an asset in full-screen mode, double-click the thumbnail in the grid. Now you can scroll through previews full-screen, select assets, and toggle the metadata display. Keyboard navigation Key Function Right and left arrow keys Browse through previews Spacebar Select/deselect asset T Toggle metadata display panel (read-only) Escape
Alerts, or search agents, as they're commonly called, are user defined queries that are stored and repeated at a set interval. This way, FotoWeb can be set to look for new content in an archive and give users a heads-up via email when new content that matches the search arrives in the archive. Alerts are issued by email to the registered user's emai
You create file-less content like press kits. Open the Content Browser in the main menu Select + (Add) Select Create Choose your desired template (with a predefined set of fields, you can search too) Insert the values of the content item. 👉 See the creation of Virtual Type Items Use Cases Virtual Items Press Kits for a press portal: https://press.by
Permissions sets control the level of access a user role has on content or schemas. These permissions sets can be assigned to lists, layers or content and are additive. The content and schema permission sets can be changed in the menu under “Access”. To change a permission set, you can double-click on one and open the detail view. Once the detail vi
All requests in the order management API are made on behalf of an administrator and require authentication as a user that has the Approve Orders permission. You can use the non-interactive OAuth to do so. Alternatively, any other authentication mechanism can be used, as long as the authenticated request user has the Approve Orders permission. All re
When viewing an album, click Get link in the top right corner. This will create a public link to the album that can be shared via email, instant messaging, or any other means. Anyone who gets the link can access the album. If you have permission to grant download rights to the users you share the album with, users who access the album will also be a
When browsing archives with documents (Word, PowerPoint, PDF, InDesign), you can click on a thumbnail to go to the Asset Details page and preview the first page in the document. Hover over the preview to display navigation controls, use the arrow icons to open the next or previous page, or enter a page number to open a specific page. Getting an ove
After uploading, adding metadata and reviewing a file, you may want to publish the file, so read-only users are also able to view this content item. You can do that by opening the detail view of a content item or opening the batch edit and switching to the tab “Permissions”. To publish a content item, you could now click on “Add” in the top right an
Configuring automatic routing In Color Factory Settings, expand the relevant channel and select AutoRouting. The following dialog appears. Using AutoRouting Color Factory can be configured to store files in subfolders within the output folder. Routing can be based on a number of criteria, as described below. Adding a routing entry (general procedur
The Picturepark search offers 3 search modes. When to use which search mode is explained below. AND search The AND search finds content that contains all search terms entered. For example, if you search for “Stock shot” the Picturepark translates it to Stock AND shot and searches for images that contain these two values. OR search When using the OR
Example 1: Publishing pictures on a website This video explains how to configure an action that resizes and captions the selected pictures and uploads them to a web server via FTP. Example 2: Sending pictures to several destinations This video explains how to create an action that sends a selection of pictures to several destinations, such as Window
Find the ID of the role in the URL when opening the role in role detail view Go to users > switch to advanced search mode Add this code (adapt the ID) -userRoles.userRoleId:1b611edb400c403498113523f1127580s Then you may batch edit the users and assign the role they did not have before. The ID is shown in the URL in the Role Detail View. VIDEO: Ho
Media Optimization (IO) enables you to crop, resize, sharpen, change transparency or rename images using the media editor, requiring permission to edit images (role permission). Theimages can then be integrated into websites, e-commerce stores, or other apps. Content Delivery Networks (CDN) further improve global delivery and availability. If you
You can search for terms that are similar but a bit "fuzzy". Therefore you can use the "fuzzy” operator which is a Tilde following your search term in the advanced search. quikc~ brwn~ foks~ The fuzzy search uses the Damerau-Levenshtein distance to find all terms with a maximum of two changes. Changes are added, removed, or replaced single character
You can download every content item from Picturepark to your local desktop if you like. You can download file-based content items in the desired output format, e.g., suitable for website or social media usage. Those are pre-configured for the system. Picturepark exports file-less content items as JSON. Picturepark generates (renders) static (preconf
Activation with a license server In certain environments where software activation over the Internet is not possible, Fotoware may deliver a license file that is hosted on a license server. FotoStation connects to this license server when starting up to check out an available license from this server. This document does not deal with the actual setu
Invitations for users to sign up can be managed using the invitation management console. From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon), go to Manage Invitations. The invitation management console contains all open invitations to individual users, organizations, and public links that anyone can use. Note that individual user signups disappear from the list o
When you work with your assets, you will likely want to copy or move certain files to other folders or even to completely different archives. The permissions that control which archives you can copy and move to and from are set on the server side, so this topic deals with how you use the main web interface to select and reorganize your files. Import
Asset storage and discovery Assets in the Fotoware system are stored on a SAN (Storage Area Network) or on drives on a Windows server. Access to the folders can be controlled using NTFS (New Technology File System) disk permissions and/or sharing permissions. The Index Manager server connects to these folders (either locally or across the Windows
Performing a basic search To perform a basic search, simply start typing words in the search box. This will execute a full-text search across the entire definition of metadata fields. Example: beautiful beach By default this, will be construed as the precise string "beautiful beach". How FotoWeb interprets searches that contain several words without
If you receive pictures uploaded from the FotoWeb Desktop uploader for Windows and Mac you can turn on a feature that enforces client-side conversion of all pictures to JPEG before upload. Not only can this be cost-saving when uploading files over mobile networks, but it can also be an effective way of ensuring format consistency in your workflow. F
Lists are lists of keywords or tags. Lists are primarily used to serve for tagging content. A list is your controlled vocabulary, your taxonomy, used for tagging with multidimensional information. That means a list can only have tags with a name or tags that have further information, such as synonyms, translations, broader terms, narrower terms, etc
The display pattern and filters are written in Liquid Syntax, which is the Shopify templating language. It has objects (the field values), filters (manipulations like uppercase) and tags (if/else operations). Please make yourself familiar when you plan to update the display pattern with specific patterns. {% if %} {{data.layerid.fieldid | filter}} {
Will find all Content Items which have the exact term "red berry" in the English translation of the translated text field. basicInformation.title.en.language:"red berry" For (product) numbers in translated text fields you must search without quotes. This works with or without the analyzer: basicInformation.title.en.language:2106445_1 basicInformatio
The following settings for .mp4 are additionally available. Property Description resizeAction Allows resizing of the video. audioCodec Gets or sets the encoding audio codec. preset Gets or sets the encoding codec preset. extension This property should not be overwritten, except for extensions that are identical like jpg vs. jpeg. MP4 is the correct
No special settings for all videos are available. The following output format settings are available for all file types . Property Description sourceOutputFormats Which output format should be used as a source for rendering. This allows you to render small thumbnails from formats other than the original to save rendering power and time. See Rende
The following output format settings are available for all file types. Property Description sourceOutputFormats Which output format should be used as a source for rendering. This allows you to render small thumbnails from formats other than the original to save rendering power and time. See Rendering Chain for details. format This is information
You can open a consent form in the Consent Forms view. From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon), go to Site Configuration > Manage Consent Forms. The Consent Forms view opens. Open a consent form either by double-clicking the relevant photo in the Photo column or by selecting the link in the Assets column. The selected consent form opens. The informa
You can extend any search to document fulltext and/or metadata. You wish to find all of your companies' literature where a certain product is mentioned or any documents that mention the CEO, then simply add the searchType to the URL as a query string parameter. //search in fulltext &searchType=FullText Documents contain text. You can do so becau
The Status shows if the metadata, display pattern and all Content and List items are up-to-date. You must check the status after updating schemas and display pattern, which is indicated with a red badge in the main menu. Status Changes The Status information per schema appears when the search and filter information is outdated and required reindexin
No special settings for all vector files are available. The following output format settings are available for all file types . Property Description sourceOutputFormats Which output format should be used as a source for rendering. This allows you to render small thumbnails from formats other than the original to save rendering power and time. See
Please read this disclaimer ("Disclaimer") carefully before using the Picturepark - Content Automation Hub for DAM, PIM & MDM. Website (“Website”) operated by Fotoware Switzerland AG (“Picturepark”, "us", 'we", "our"). The content displayed on the Website is intellectual property belonging to us. You may reuse, republish, or reprint such content
The Date Math Transformation feature in our Business Rule Configuration represents a powerful tool that automates data manipulation and optimization. It's an incredibly versatile feature that enables you to add or subtract a specific interval from a date field in your data sources, for example adding 10 years to the creation date of a content item.
Property Description Used in (Available for) Add You can see here for which File and Virtual Types the Layer is available for. For example, if a Layer is only relevant for Videos you would select Videos here and this Layer would only appear to be added to content items that have a video file type. General Settings for all Schemas Property Descript
Upgrading from FR 19 to FR 20 Note: This is a draft article that is subject to change. Prerequisite Backup customer data before starting the upgrade. For more information, see Backing up the FotoWeb databases. Uninstalling Feature Release 19 Uninstall Feature Release 19 software using the standard installer, for example, in Windows Control Panel. T
The following settings for .webp are additionally available. WebP offers file sizes that are around 30% smaller than JPEG without a quality gap. It also provides transparency (alpha channel) like PNG, and the ability to animate images like the GIF format. Picturepark only renders the first frame as a preview and does not create animated webp format
Fotoware has different license types to cater for different types of users. Learn how to assign a license to a group or a user. A user can be assigned a license individually and/or based on the group(s) they belong to. This way, you can override a license issued through group membership by assigning a higher license level individually. Note: The lic
Due to regulations such as GDPR (General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) (Regulation (EU) 2016/679) of the European Union (EU)), we have created the ability to add terms of service to your Picturepark. A default Terms of Service (TOS) is generated when creating your Picturepark. Once a term of service is created, the user will have to accept the t
The detail view contains all relevant information, permissions and metadata of a file. When accessing the detail view of a file by double clicking the file or right clicking and selecting “Details” you can choose between 4 sections. Metadata In the Metadata area you can see all layers that have been added to this content item. Layers are constructs
How to do it In the Color Factory Settings app, expand the relevant channel and select Metadata. Open the Resources tab. Promote working path to clipping path if clipping path is missing: If an input image has no defined clipping path but a working path is found within the file, the first working path will be promoted to the clipping path. Note tha
These are dynamic operators that can be used to refer to fields and insert their content in Color Factory's templates or macros, and when creating search queries for channels that search in Index Manager archives. These dynamic operators can be used to create search queries, for example, when configuring auto searches in FotoStation or FotoWeb. For
Input options In Color Factory Settings, expand the relevant channel and select Input & Output Options. Open the Miscellaneous tab. The following dialog appears. Here you can set options pertaining to how Color Factory treats files in the input folder of a channel, including how to deal with subfolders, zipped archives, and file date handling.
You can create an embed by making a right click on a file and clicking “Embed”. Once the embed has been created, click on “Manage”. You should now get redirected to the following page. To adjust the image settings, you can now click on the content item on the right side. The Media Editor should then appear. You can now resize, crop or change the for
If you have the necessary permission, you can download every content item from Picturepark to your local desktop. You can also download multiple content items at once by selecting them in the content browser or by downloading all content items of a share/collection. When the formats get created via API, it must be defined on which format they are ba
Optimizely This Optimizely plugin integrates Fotoware PicturePark ContentPlatform DAM with Optimizely CMS and Commerce platform. For more information, see Optimizely plugin.
Fotoware as a Service - September 2020 update Deployment This release has been fully deployed to all tenants Summary We're continuing our endeavors to streamline the user experience in Fotoware SaaS. This release sees the following improvements: Redesigned user interface for user and group management in a single UI Ability to set access levels on
The following output format settings are available for all file types. Property Description sourceOutputFormats Which output format should be used as a source for rendering. This allows you to render small thumbnails from formats other than the original to save rendering power and time. See Rendering Chain for details. format This is information
The following settings for video sprites are additionally available. Property Description spriteResizeAction Specifies the dimensions of a single frame in the sprite. maxNumberOfSprites Limit for the number of frames to generate. quality JPEG-quality to use for the sprite. extension This property should not be overwritten, except for extensions tha
Check Liquid Syntax for explanations of the syntax used in the following examples. Coding Advice: Push Tags in Display Pattern (Solutions) Display Pattern: AudioStream (Solutions) Display Pattern: Checkbox (Solutions) Display Pattern: Date Time (Solutions) Display Pattern: Fieldset (Solutions) Display Pattern: File Metadata in Layer Fields (Solutio
The Checkbox field is on or off (technically, that means true or false, so-called Boolean). Its meaning depends on the label e.g. Checkbox "PermissionDenied" ✔ means permission denied, whereas checkbox "PermissionApproved" ✔ means permission granted, although the checkbox in both cases has the same value (true), the understanding is different based
If you would like to add a hierarchical filter for date then add a tree view field to the Layer. For example I have three tagbox fields for Year/Month/Day in my Basic Information Layer and have added a Tree View field to display the date: I have entered the below in Levels. The allow recursion will be set to false by default after saving. The fields
What are processing profiles? Processing profiles are used by FotoWeb to apply image processing or third-party processing to files when a user requests a download or sends images to a workflow (action). They can also be used in the FotoWeb Desktop Extension for Adobe InDesign to process a file directly before placing it in the layout. FotoWeb has bu
The condition Content Relation Item Unassigned checks if a specific content item or any content item has been unassigned in a relationship field e.g. Check if the draft version of a text has been removed before making content available to the company or check if the Press Kit Logo was removed, then unpublish the Press Kit (remove permissions). Trig
About watermarks in FotoWeb Using watermarks is a common way to protect assets from illegitimate use. When you assign watermarks to archives in FotoWeb, they are only applied to the thumbnail and/or preview renderings that users see in the user interfaces. The original assets remain unchanged. However, it is also possible to apply watermarks to copi
The following settings for .aac are additionally available. Property Description profile Gets or sets the encoding profile. One of Profile; Enum: "aac_low" "mpeg2_aac_low" "aac_ltp" "aac_main". coder Gets or sets the encoding coder. One of Coder; Enum: "twoloop" "anmr" "fast". bitrate Gets or sets the bitrate of the encoding in kbps. variableBitRa
Storage types Fotoware do not test their software with or recommend specific NAS systems, but many Fotoware customers work successfully with NAS devices. Below are some general guidelines that should be taken into consideration when planning your storage architecture. Fotoware applications depend on a feature in the SMB file sharing protocol that al
In some cases you may want to manually revoke an exported picture immediately. This can be done by opening the exports manager and clicking on the Revoke button. This will immediately remove access to the picture. If you change your mind, you can click on the Publish button to restore access to the picture using the settings which were originally se
Note: The Fotoware Application Activation Wizard has been superseded by the fwlicensetool for managing activations. For information on how to obtain this tool and use it to manage software activation from the command prompt, see Command line activation of Fotoware applications using fwlicensetool. About the Fotoware activation utility All Fotoware s
How Quick Renditions work If the site administrator has defined Quick Renditions for an archive, you can request a preview of an image asset at any size the administrator has predefined. FotoWeb will resize the picture on the fly and deliver it in an overlay window in the browser to allow you to drag it directly to your desktop. Note: The site admin
When to use SAML Customers who already have a SAML identity provider and wish to integrate FotoWeb with this provider. Customers who use Active Directory Federation Services. Customers who have an Active Directory and wish to use FotoWeb with SSO. In this case you can use SAML in combination with Active Directory Federation Services (ADFS) to facili
Generally, any file with a defined pixel size will allow 100% zoom (1 to 1-pixel mapping on screen) using the original file.This is true for most image file formats. It is also worth noting that using this feature has a significant performance impact on the FotoWeb server. This is also the case for RAW files. For file formats that don't have a real
When SmartFolder navigation is enabled in an archive, all users can navigate its contents using the SmartFolders that have been set up. To allow specific users or groups to create and modify SmartFolders, you need to modify the archive's access list: Go to the Access list tab in the archive properties and choose the group or user in the access list
To rate an asset, select one or more assets on the thumbnail grid page (tip: use Shift and Ctrl keys to make multi-file selections) and then select Set Rating in the Action bar. Finally, click on a star rating in the overlay to apply it to the selection of files. Rating assets from the Details page When viewing an asset on the Details page, you can
As a user you may bas asked by Fotoware support to provide crash logs when troubleshooting problems with the installation. Crash dump files can be found at The crash reports will be stored on the Fotoware server in C:\ProgramData\Fotoware\Crash Reports\
About search filters FotoWeb uses Index Manager to process searches. An archive in FotoWeb is connected to an index, and by default, the entire content of that index is displayed to users. However, you can apply two levels of search filtering to a FotoWeb archive: on the archive level and the user/group level in the access list. This makes it possib
When a user places an order via the Shopping cart in FotoWeb, an administrative notification can be sent using a webhook. Administrative users with access to approve orders can also see a list of orders in FotoWeb by opening the Tools menu (cogwheel icon) and choosing Manage orders. When orders are pending, there will be a blue indicator on the wren
Using Remote Layout In Color Factory Settings, expand the relevant channel and select Image ID. Open the Remote Layout tab. The following dialog appears. Here you can configure Color Factory to create low-resolution copies of the images being processed and stamp them with the ID configured on the Image and Owner ID tab. (All images will be stamped
About this usage scenario This scenario is based on a system where a pool of pictures are stored in a production archive. Pictures that are picked from that pool and put to use, for example in a workflow that prepares it for layout, will be tagged with a metadata macro to indicate that it has been used. We want to configure Color Factory to "clean u
A number sequence is used for the creation of increasing customized identifiers for easier referencing of your content and is used in conjunction with a Business Rule. Click number sequence solution here for an example of how a number sequence is used in a Business Rule. Specific Definitions Property Value ID (required) The unique identifier for thi
Settings This sub action makes it possible to attach a usage rights license from Creative Commons or Plus to your pictures. The use of this functionality is described in detail in the topic Applying Creative Commons and Plus licenses to your assets.
You can store file-based content like documents, videos, images, and audio. Additionally, to file-based content, you can create file-less content like press kits. You can download everything back to your local desktop, with file-less content being downloaded as JSON files.
Before you can start using taxonomies throughout Fotoware Veloz, you need to choose which metadata fields should have taxonomies assigned to them. This topic explains how to enable taxonomies for specific metadata fields. Assigning taxonomies to metadata fields From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon), select Site Configuration. Go to Metadata > Metad
Changing the order in which archives appear to users From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon), go to Site Configuration > Archives. Use the = icon to click and drag archives to a different position.
In Picturepark, you have 476 Content Items (videos, images, brochures, etc). Open the Product content channel. You see 28 Content Items. The channel filters all corporate content inside this Picturepark for product content (channel filter). You search for apple. You see 6 Content Items. Picturepark searches through all searchable values (search inde
In the section My Profile you find logout, reset settings and delete. You see your Avatar (image) if you defined something for your email address on gravatar.com. My Profile uses the side-by-side view. You find the user details (name etc.) on the left and other settings (email notifications) on the right. The toolbar functionality is: Log out Reset
The condition Layers Changed checks if there has been changes made on the Layer. This does not include changes to the Layer itself but only to Layer changes on the Content Item.
Property Description Status Content & List Items Content search Index List Item search index The Status shows if the metadata, display pattern, and all content and list items, the information used for searching and displaying values are up-to-date. The red icon indicates that the index is not up to date. Searches cannot work properly. A full r
The Geo Point Field has two number fields for adding longitude and latitude values. Applications like Google Maps use this kind of Geo-Information about a location. In Picturepark you can only use Geo Point values in Query Filters.
FotoWeb, Color Factory, and Index Manager rely on FFmpeg to perform video transcoding. They require manual installation of FFmpeg on your Fotoware servers(s) as described below. As the ffmpeg.org website changes its design from time to time, the following directions may not precisely reflect what you're seeing on the site. Note: Fotoware requires F
In the Browser View, you can select to view content in a Thumbnail or a List view. If you select Thumbnail, you can choose a small, medium, large, or extra-large thumbnail. The List View displays data in a configurable spreadsheet-style format. Using the Fields option in the sidebar, you can dynamically select the fields to display. The fields avail
The String Contains Condition checks if a string (text, multiline text field) contains a specific value e.g. so users can easily check if a string (text, e.g. filename) contains parameters to use for auto tagging. The Business Rule will check if the string contains the specified value, then executes the action. Prerequisites Existing Content Item wi
The NOT Condition is an operator to negate a condition you define e.g. check if Layer is not assigned (NOT LayerAssigned). Triggers when the condition is not true. Add Multiple Conditions To add multiple conditions for your Business Rule. Open Settings Open Business Rules Go to the panel Condition Press Add Select AND or OR condition first to defin
When you install a Fotoware server application, a little helper application is installed and placed in the Fotoware program group in the server's Start menu, called Metadata Configuration. This application reads the contents of the MetadataConfiguration.xml file in the ProgramData\Fotoware\Metadata folder on the system drive and displays them in a t
Every action in Content Platform is displayed in the notification pane at the bottom, a so-called Toast. There, you can see how your upload, ingest, or edit is progressing. The toast also has icons for additional actions depending on the process running, for example, a user can cancel an upload or directly edit ingested files. The available actions
The GeoPoint Within Polygon condition checks if the geoinformation inserted in Picturepark is within a defined polygon e.g. to check if the images shot were created in Aarau or more general to check if images were taken (GPS data from extracted metadata) near the headquarter address (polygon) and then assign the headquarter tag to them (action assig
The Enqueue Transfer Ownership Action transfers the ownership of a Content Item to the configured user of Picturepark. The Business Rule will execute and if conditions are met the ownership is transferred. Prerequisites Existing user in Picturepark. Open Settings Open Business Rules Add a new business rule Name: All content ownership transferred to
Note: The Preview Agent API is deprecated and was set to End of Life on July 1st, 2024. If you have integrations that display previews in real-time, we recommend looking into alternative solutions such as obtaining temporary preview links from the RESTful API. Cause In both cases, the issue is caused by two settings in IIS (Internet Information Serv
Export To export content items, you could either select the desired content items in the content browser, right-clicking and selecting “Export”, or you could click on the 3 dots on top of the content browser and export all displayed content items. When exporting the metadata, you can choose which fields you want to export. If you want to export tagb
Um Ihre Duplikate zu bereinigen, gehen Sie bitte in den Channel "Admin" oder "Administration". In diesem Channel sollte es einen Filter namens "Duplikate (Hash)" geben. Wenn es keinen solchen Filter gibt, können Sie entweder versuchen, diesen Filter selbst hinzuzufügen oder [email protected] kontaktieren. Wenn Sie diesen Filter aufklappen, sol
The condition Match Regex checks the input value for a specific field for a pattern, defined as Regex e.g. Check if the input is a valid email address or product code and otherwise remove access until this information is correct. This condition also applies the Regex to the value in the provided fieldpath and allows to either validate the value (reg
The NGramTransformation can extract n-grams from free text fields e.g. descriptions and use those n-grams (words) in a LookupCache transformation to find the correct tags e.g. take the IPTC description and extract words to check against a keyword list for tagging. Input: "this is the new Breithorn Release of Picturepark" NGramTransformation: Size:
💡 Permission on Content Items (who can download, edit, view) Content Permission Sets are applicable to all Content Items. Users can only apply these if their user roles are listed with at least Apply permission in the Permission Set Permissions of each permission set and if they have sufficient access to the content item. Permission What does it mea
The condition Layers Changed checks if there has been changes made on the Layer. This does not include changes to the Layer itself but only to Layer changes on the Content Item. Triggers the moment any Layers were assigned or unassigned. Use Layer Changed in combination with AND/OR to add more conditions and further limit the number of affected Con
The condition Number Compare checks if a specific metadata field contains a number that is less, less or equal, equal, greater, greater or equal to a specific value e.g. Check weather the resolution is greater or equal 300 dpi to meet the website requirements before pushing content to the website (handled via separate integration). A field value of
Some conditions only apply to Content Items, like actions related to Permission Sets and Layers. Neither Permission Sets nor Layers can be assigned to List Items. Nonetheless, conditions are not filtered by the Trigger Point Document Type. That means that you can create a Business Rule for List Items with a Condition that checks if a Layer is assign
The LookupCacheTransformation uses the input from transformations above to check against a named cache created based on a list of tags (a dictionary). Similar to TakeDictionaryValueTransformation with the difference that this lookup also works for data not directly assigned to the content. Caches You must create the cache upfront to have it availab
The condition Tagbox Items Changed checks for any changes to the Tagbox Items. This does not apply to changes to the tagbox field settings or changes to the List Item in the List Browser. Triggers the moment of any change to the Tagbox. Use Tagbox Items Changed inside AND/OR to check if multiple tagboxes were changed (items assigned or unassigned).
The SplitTransformation can split text (strings) based on any character or value e.g. take the original file name and split underline or dash to then use the output in a JoinByTransformation and concatenate the filename parts with a space. Input: "picturepark-pim-dam-platform.pdf" SplitTransformation: separators: "-", "_" , "." keepEmpty: null trim
Please note the Business Rule settings are only displayed to users that have the system Super Admins role. Property JSON Description Toolbar The remove icon deletes the Business Rule and all settings after you confirm your desire to delete. The JSON is the exact representation of the UI settings. The whole business rule code overview may be
Fieldsets are a group of fields treated as one field e.g a fieldset field "address" with the individual fields street, zip, and city. Relations allow us to link Content Items together and provide context about the relation e.g. linking two images to a document and declaring for one image that it is the hero shot and for the other image that it is th
The condition Tagbox Item Assigned checks if a specific tagbox item ("a tag") is assigned in a specific field e.g. Check if the tag "Twitter" is assigned in the field "SocialMediaPlatforms" on Layer "CopyrightUsages" to then use this image on Twitter. The Business Rule checks if the provided Tagbox Item was assigned to any Content Item and triggers
User-centered conditions such as the “User in User Roles” condition allow you to automate processes based on actions performed by particular users or user roles, such as: Assign default permission when your agency uploads the content. Assign default tags and keywords when your photographers upload. Send out notifications to specific users or user
The JoinByTransformation allows us to concatenate values with a separator e.g. join the n-grams from the N-Gram transformation. If you get a string back that you want to use for tagging you should join the values by a comma. PRO TIPP: If you get various values and want to join them differently, you should do this in the assign value action. Variab
The DateMathTransformation allows us to pick a value from a variable and add/subtract something to it. The Date Math Transformation feature in our Business Rule Configuration represents a powerful tool that automates data manipulation and optimization. It's an incredibly versatile feature that enables you to add or subtract a specific interval from
The OR operator can group different conditions of which any must be fulfilled e.g. Check for a specific Layer OR a Permission Set. Add multiple conditions To add multiple conditions for your Business Rule. Open Settings Open Business Rules Go to the panel Condition Press Add Select AND or OR condition first to define multiple conditions. Define th
The condition Layer Unassigned checks if a layer is unassigned e.g. Check whether an embargo layer ("LegalApprovalPending") is lifted which then allows to use and publish the content. Triggers the moment the selected Layer is unassigned. Use Layer Assigned inside AND/OR to check if multiple Layers are assigned. { "kind": "AndCondition", "conditio
💡 Permission on Schemas (who can view, edit) You can apply Schema Permission Sets only to schemas (List, Layer, Virtual Type, and Fieldset&Relation). Not to File Types. Your role must at least have Apply permissions in the Permission Set Permissions of each permission set and have at least Manage permissions on the schemas. Permission What it me
The condition Tagbox Item Unassigned checks if a specific tagbox item ("a tag") is unassigned in a specific field e.g. Check if the tag "Twitter" is unassigned in the field "SocialMediaPlatforms" on Layer "CopyrightUsages" to then remove this image from Twitter. The Business Rule may check if the tag "Dealer Portal Europe" was unassigned to then e.g
The AssignContentPermissionSetsAction assigns content permission sets to content e.g. give access to suppliers. Specific Definitions Type-ahead and select the content permission set from the dropdown. The Permission Set ID is used in the Business Rule, so you can update the name anytime. Property Value kind AssignContentPermissionSetsAction permiss
The Produce Message Action is only used by Service Providers (via API) who can listen to this message to then further process the information e.g. Content Items with approved tags and copyright information can be sent to an agency for further graphical processing. Specific Definitions Property Value kind ProduceMessageAction "actions": [ {
The UnassignContentPermissionSetsAction unassigns content permission sets from Content Items e.g. remove access for suppliers. Specific Definitions Type-ahead and select the content permission set from the dropdown. The Permission Set ID is used in the Business Rule, so you can update the name anytime. Property Value kind UnassignContentPermissionS
The AND operator can group different conditions e.g. Check for a specific layer AND a tagbox item that is assigned. Add multiple conditions To add multiple conditions for your Business Rule. Open Settings Open Business Rules Go to the panel Condition Press Add Select AND or OR condition first to define multiple conditions. Define the condition det
The Enqueue Create Embed Action automatically create embeds for sharing content. This is especially useful for integrations, e.g., a CMS requires an embed link for a specific content , and for marketing operations, e.g. so users can easily pick embed links for distribution of files in ads, social media or mailings. The Business Rule will execute, an
The TakeArrayValueTransformation allows us to get the value from an array by providing the index (the position the value is stored) e.g. get the first value from array of assigned schemas. Arrays can be updated with values either at the next position (fill next value in position 2) or by updating the existing positions. Ensure you use the correct i
The condition Content Schema checks if the content schema is matching a specific schema e.g. Check if for audio and video files the permission set is assigned that gives access to the multimedia team or check for Content Schema "Images" to find all images. Triggers the moment the selected Content Schema is found. Use Content Schema inside AND/OR to
With the EnqueueTaggingAction you can enqueue the auto-tagging, enable object detection and enable OCR (Optical Character Recognition). Content Platform currently supports images for auto tagging: The file size must be less than 4 MB. Image must be at least 50 x 50 pixels. The file types supported are .jpg, .gif, .png, and .bmp. Azure tagging serv
The AssignTagboxItemsinLayerAction assigns Tagbox Items from the defined cache to the corresponding Layer and the fields where the values are allowed to be added. This requires a cache of type SchemaTagboxFilterLookupNamedCacheConfiguration to be present. Specific Definitions Property Value kind AssignTagboxItemsinLayerAction namedCache Named cache
The AssignTagboxItemsAction assigns a specific tagbox item to the tagbox field specified e.g. update copyright holders with creators from Dublin Core. This requires the layer where the field is found to be assigned already, therefore combine with "AssignLayerAction" and/or "LayerAssignedCondition". The Business Rules are not executed after one anoth
The Get Number from Number Sequence Action is used to create customized identifiers for easier reference of your content. For quick reference, a shorter number may be preferred for users and machine processing. You will need to use this action that creates increasing sequential numbers in conjunction with the Assign Value Action in order to add the
The UnassignLayerAction unassigns a specific layer from content if the condition is met. Specific Definitions Type-ahead and select the Layer from the dropdown. The Layer ID is used in the Business Rule, so you can update the name anytime. Property Value kind UnassignLayerAction layerId The ID of the Layer to check. See Access Layer for details, b
The ProjectionTransformation takes all values of a list and applies the configured transformation to each item e.g. take each tag from auto-tagging and match it against the keyword list to later assign all keywords in the descriptive information. Example input of group: [ "Adult", "Männlich", "Male", "Erwachsen" ] ProjectionTransformation: TakeDic
The TakeDictionaryValueTransformation allows us to get the value of a key-value pair by providing the key e.g. get value from extracted metadata where Metadata is a dictionary and you provide the key xmpMetadata to get the whole xmp metadata values back, followed by another TakeDictionaryValueTransformation to get the Dublin Core values when providi
The Transformation Group allows to group multiple transformations and output one value which can be used in the following transformation group or business rule action. The Transformation Group enables you to loop through large amounts of tags, based on the same condition and triggers, e.g. check if the tag is X - will check the first tag, check the
In Business Rules, you can transform values, e.g., you get the EXIF values and extract a specific value like geo point and transform this into a tag you can assign from a list. You can request values from the Content, the metadata, or audit information. You request those values from implicitly defined variables. You can use these variables in transf
About crop profile sets The crop profile sets are used with FotoWeb Desktop. FotoWeb users can be granted permissions to crop images in the archives. To assist users in this process or to enforce company standards, you can create crop profile sets that can be linked to the archives. These crop profile sets are basically collections of pre-defined cr
Fotoware as a Service - May 2023 update Deployment This release is being gradually deployed and will be available on all tenants soon. Fixed issues Delays and errors when changing and resetting passwords have now been resolved. Known issues You cannot change the character case of a username or email address. For example, if you try to change the
If you have been given privileges to delete assets in an archive, you can select the files and open the Asset Information panel (keyboard shortcut T) where you find the Delete icon that looks like a trash can on the Information tab. Click it to delete the selected asset(s). You need to click it twice to confirm the delete operation. Deleted assets w
Overview This topic explains how you can delete an archive. Deleting an archive To delete an archive, click on the Archives node in the configuration tree, then select the archive to delete in the list to the right and click on the Delete button below. Archives can also be deleted by right-clicking on them in the main program window and choosing Del
Fotoware as a Service - March 2020 update Deployment This release is rolled out on customer sites starting April 1, 2020. Summary With this release we're continuing to improve the self-service experience. You will be able to control even more aspects of your Fotoware yourself, without having to rely on Fotoware Support. Documentation for the new fea
By default, Index Manager lets users search for assets using umlaut diacritics. However, it is possible to configure the search engine so that when a user searches for a word using umlaut, the search will also include a search for assets that contain a "simplified" two letter version of the umlaut in the metadata. The table below illustrates the uml
How a parallel backup index works When creating a union you can attach member indexes to it. Having added a primary index, you can add a secondary one as well and choose the type of backup solution you would like to use. You have three options: Backup, Parallel , and Round Robin. A parallel solution works such that when a search comes in from a clie
Fotoware as a Service - April 2023 update Deployment This release is being gradually deployed and will be available on all tenants soon. New functionality Cookie warnings You can configure and enable the cookie warning bar and the cookie policy to inform users aboutnecessary cookies. For more information, see Configuring cookie warnings. Scrolla
Fotoware as a Service - October 2022 update Deployment This release is being gradually deployed and will be available on all tenants soon. New functionality Asset Linking For more information, see Asset linking. Guardian consent For more information, see Signing a consent form on behalf of another. Consent status markers For more information, se
Fotoware as a Service - May 2019 update Summary With this release, we're introducing self-service management of archives and metadata views . Before this release, managing archives and metadata views required the assistance of Fotoware Support or a Fotoware Partner to set up new archives or tweak their settings. Now, users with the required privile
Fotoware as a Service - June 2024 update Deployment This release is being gradually deployed and will be available on all tenants soon. As mentioned previously, virus scanning functionality was set to End of Life in July 2021 and is now removed. New functionality There is no new functionality in this release. Fixed issues When using the Microsoft
Fotoware as a Service - March 2024 update Deployment This release is being gradually deployed and will be available on all tenants soon. Note: We advise every user to update their FWDT version to avoid issues when using it with integrations such as the Microsoft Office Plugin. New functionality User lockout This is a built-in security improvement f
Fotoware lets you toggle light and dark mode after logging in. This setting can be found by clicking on the user profile in the top right hand corner of the site and choosing Dark, Light or Auto from the Interface Style section. Choosing Auto will make Fotoware match the light/dark mode set globally in your operating system. The setting applies to b
Overview How to automate purging of old or unusable content to avoid filling up drives or wasting space. Automatic purging In any workflow system, files are at different "stations" at different times, and you will need to run cleanup operations from time to time to make sure old or unused content is disposed of. You will of course also want to make
The Get Number from Number Sequence Action is used to create customized identifiers for easier reference of your content. For quick reference, a shorter number may be preferred for users and machine processing. You will need to use this action that creates increasing sequential numbers in conjunction with the Assign Value Action in order to add the
Avoiding duplicates When configuring a workflow system that feeds content into an archive, it's useful to make sure you don't create duplicate content in the system. At times you may want to keep several versions of the same file though, and Color Factory can also help you do that, using the Archive Management feature that can be enabled by switchin
Overview Learn how to adjust image size using the image editor. Changing print size By clicking on the Size button on the toolbar you can change the document size and the physical size of the image. To only change the document size, often referred to as the file’s print size, make sure that the Resample image checkbox is not selected. Then enter new
Applying a general metadata macro In the Color Factory Settings app, expand the relevant channel and select Metadata. The General tab opens. Select General Metadata Macro to define content to add to certain fields in the processed images and, optionally, specify the conditions that must be met before the metadata will be changed. This functionality
Deployment This release is being gradually deployed and will be available on all tenants soon. Note: We advise every user to update their FWDT version to avoid issues when using it with integrations such as the Microsoftt Office Plugin. Fixed issues Pro interface: There was an error when browsing folders and subfolders in an archive with a basic aut
A metadata view representation is a JSON document that describes a set of metadata fields (by their IDs and localized display). It can be used to display metadata values along with their labels and create metadata input masks or editors. Every collection MAY have a metadata view, the URL of which is specified in the metadata.href attribute of the co
Fotoware as a Service - December 2023 hotfix Deployment This release is being gradually deployed and will be available on all tenants by 06.12.23. Fixed issues In the November update, there was a known issue where a preview was not displayed when you selected a thumbnail in a public album. Instead, you were prompted to log in.This is now fixed, a
When processing JPEG input files in Color Factory, here's a trick to avoid unnecessarily recompressing the JPEG at the expense of image quality: On the basic channel settings page, seen below, choose JPEG Copy as the Output File Format. This format should be used in channels that are used for all other things than editing of image data. It will pres
Getting more details about an asset By clicking on an asset in the grid you navigate to the Details page, which holds much more information about the asset in question. To the left of the preview on this page, you can read out the asset title, a preview of the caption, keywords, and credit information, GPS location data (if any), file size informati
Fotoware as a Service - December 2024 update Deployment This release is being gradually deployed and will be available on all tenants soon. Fixed issues The following issues are fixed in this release: Consent Management: When you opened Manage Consent Forms, some consent forms were listed more than once, on different pages. Adding many users cause
A specific event that initiates the execution of a workflow. Options: Hourly scheduler and Frequency.
Fotoware can apply watermarks based on PNG, PSD and TIFF files.To achieve the best possible result, we advise using grayscale graphics for watermarking images. When Fotoware applies watermarks, gray areas (128 in Red, Green and Blue) become completely transparent. To create a watermark, you can for example create use Photoshop to apply an emboss fil
Before you start The basic premise of the this suggested workflow is that both the lowres and the highres pictures have been stamped with a unique image id. If the pictrues in your system already have a unique image id you can simply create resized copies of these by any method you find practical, for instance in a Color Factory channel. As you will
The Pro interface is more workflow oriented than the main interface, although you will find many of the same features in both interfaces. This guide focuses on how you use the Pro interface to accomplish tasks, not how to configure each option. Accessing the Pro interface When you've logged in to FotoWeb, follow the Pro link in the top banner to swi
Overview When you make selections in the Pro interface, there's a multitude of ways that you can temporarily store that selection to isolate it and further narrow it down or contribute files to it. Learn more in this topic. Adding assets to the pin bar Having made a selection of files you can drag the entire selection to the pin bar at the bottom of
All versions of FotoWeb support basic audio and video transcoding and playback for all types of users. Note: In the main FotoWeb user interface, video playback features are available from the Asset Details page. In FotoWeb Pro, some features are available on the video thumbnails, while additional features are available in Filmstrip and Preview mode
Note: This legacy upload API is deprecated and will be set to End of Life on January 1st, 2025. It is replaced with Upload API . Existing integrations must be rewritten to use this new Upload API. Applications and integrations can ingest assets into FotoWeb by using the Upload API. Assets can be added to archives either by copying or moving them fr
FTPS (FTP over SSL/TLS): This protocol adds support for TLS and SSL cryptographic protocols, providing a secure connection. It requires a username and password for authentication.
Regardless of how you prefer to make your selections you will find the different view modes beneficial. You can switch modes using the icons above the grid next to the grid size slider. The available types are Grid (use the slider to adjust the grid size), Filmstrip and Preview. Shortcut View G Activates Grid View F Activates Filmstrip View E and P
In Flow, an FTP group is where the uploaded images are temporarily stored. Each FTP group has an associated temporary storage area where assets are placed before being uploaded to the DAM. This storage can be accessed via SAS URL, which you can use in external applications. When creating workflows, you specify which group you want to create a workfl
SFTP SFTP (SSH File Transfer Protocol): SFTP operates over the Secure Shell (SSH) protocol to provide a secure connection. It also requires a username and password for authentication. While SFTP can use key-based authentication, currently, Flow only supports username and password credentials for SFTP.
To upload a new version of an asset from the local computer, locate the asset in Fotoware and open it to view the Asset Details page. Drop the local file onto the preview to upload it to Fotoware. You can also go to Action > Upload new version. Note: Currently, only revisions less than 2 GB can be uploaded. Note: When users upload an updated vers
If you have permissions to download files from FotoWeb, you can select one or more files and open the Asset Information panel (keyboard shortcut T). Then click on one of the available download profiles in the Download section on the Information tab. When you download more than one file, they will be processed and delivered in a single zipped archive
Fotoware uses SendGrid to send emails from Fotoware Veloz tenants. These emails can be used for invitations, password reset links, album sharing, and more. If your email server refuses to accept emails from Fotoware Veloz or sorts them as spam, you will have to add an SPF record for the SendGrid mail servers to "whitelist" emails sent by Fotoware vi
The following settings for .png are additionally available. Property Description extension This property should not be overwritten, as PNG makes no sense. A use case is extensions that are identical like jpg vs. jpeg. The following settings for images are available. Property Description kind ImageFormatBase colorProfile Color profile to use. Color
To create an FTP server connection, open the Connect Settings app and go to Servers > Default. Select the group to which you want to add the server and select Add server. You must specify some general settings for the server before you can define the folders that you want to use for file transfers. Name: Enter a short, descriptive name for the s
MongoDB replica sets can be configured to maintain the same data sets on two or more mongod processes for fault-tolerance / high-availability schemes. The information in this article explains how to configure FotoWeb and Index Manager to use more than one MongoDB node. If you do not intend to configure MongoDB for high availability by setting up one
Viewing an album To view an album you've created, select it by clicking on the dotted line to the left of the album grid in the right side panel drag it to the area above the grid to create a new tab. When in Grid mode, the album cover photo and metadata will be displayed above the grid to allow you to change these, along with controls for sharing t
Note: The FotoWeb Reports module/Fotoware Custom Report Generator tool is deprecated and will be set to End of Life on April 1st, 2024. Installing Report Designer The Report Designer is usually installed when installing FotoWeb using the Fotoware FotoWeb installer. However, if you decide not to install Report Designer when installing FotoWeb and ins
Settings The Copy file sub action is probably one of the most frequently used sub actions. It offers the possibility to copy files to a predefined folder, or to a folder selected manually. In addition this sub action offers customization of several parameters to ensure correct file flow. Dialog Type When creating a Copy file sub action, you can choo
How to control outputs One way that you can ensure correct file flow and avoid the possibility that files are sent to the wrong destination or processed incorrectly, is to limit access to one or more actions. Essentially, this can be done in two ways. You can limit access to one or more actions on an archive or panel basis. In addition to these two
I want to display a country list with regions. To do so I create a tree view field that references the country tag box: [ { "fieldId": "country", "allowRecursion": false, "levels": [ { "fieldId": "regions", "allowRecursion": true, "levels": [] } ] }
Filtering out metadata Using Metadata filtering you can determine which fields you wish to preserve in the channel's output. In Color Factory Settings, expand the relevant channel and select Metadata. Open the General tab. Select Metadata Filters to see the available options. By default, all XMP data in the input file will be preserved in the outp
Requirements for pushing Index Manager metadata to the FotoWeb database When Index Manager hosts archives for a FotoWeb 8.0 server, it must be configured to push metadata to the database on the FotoWeb server. Open Index Manager Settings and go to General. On the Indexes tab, select Push metadata to FotoWeb server.If Index Manager and FotoWeb are on
The UnassignContentPermissionSetsAction unassigns content permission sets from Content Items e.g. remove access for suppliers. Specific Definitions Type-ahead and select the content permission set from the dropdown. The Permission Set ID is used in the Business Rule, so you can update the name anytime. Property Value kind UnassignContentPermissionS
Merging images with accompanying metadata text files In the Color Factory Settings app, expand the relevant channel and select Metadata. Open the Merge Text - Files tab. Merge with matching template: Select a folder containing templates that should be merged with the files processed in the channel, by comparing the name of the template with the nam
When you have created a union, you may notice that it is marked as [OFF] in the list of unions. You need to enable the index. To do so: In Index Manager Settings, open the General tab for the relevant index. Select Enable index. Select Save and restart theservice to initialize the union. Otherwise, even if you start the indexing service, this union
To add annotations to a picture, click on it in the thumbnail grid and then go to Preview mode (keyboard shortcut P) or Filmstrip mode (keyboard shortcut F). Annotation tools When hovering over the preview, click on the Annotations icon to start adding annotations to the image. Several types of tools are available to allow users to highlight precise
Adaptive Metadata Adaptive Metadata means to focus on the information required for the specific content. If your content model defines that your basic information should always include the address, then where does your product category live? Build Your Information Architecture (Data Model) You can build your data model from scratch, as well as your
Overview Learn how Connect handles failed transfers in channels with several destinations. Considerations for file transfers to multiple destinations When setting up a channel, you can configure Connect to send a single input file to multiple destinations. For example, you have set up a channel to send a file to three different FTP destinations usin
The condition Content Relation Item Assigned checks if a specific content item or any content item has been assigned in a relationship field to another content item e.g. check if the Press Kit has a Logo (or the correct Logo) and a Hero Shot (or the correct Hero Shot).
Icon Permalink Path Name in DisplayPattern Material Design Icons - Icon Library - Pictogrammers mdiAlarm ‘alarm’ Material Design Icons - Icon Library - Pictogrammers mdiClockAlert 'clock-alert' Material Design Icons - Icon Library - Pictogrammers mdiCopyright 'copyright' Material Design Icons - Icon Library - Pictogrammers mdiWeb 'web' Material
Overview How to adjust levels in FotoStation's image editor. Level adjustment To adjust image levels, click on the Levels button on the toolbar. This will bring up the Levels dialog. By choosing a color channel (or Master for all channels combined) and dragging the sliders you can adjust the image levels in the shadows, midtones and highlights. You
What this workflow does When submitting files to an archive, you need some level of metadata governance to make sure that the files can be successfully found later. Color Factory helps you do this, for example using routing by required metadata. This allows you to create a workflow where assets that have sufficient metadata will pass right on throug
To set the status of an asset, select one or more assets on the thumbnail grid page (tip: use Shift and Ctrl-keys to make multi-file selections) and then click on the Set Status button in the Action bar. Finally, click on a status in the overlay to apply it to the selection of files. Setting status on the Details page When viewing an asset on the De
Role-based versus group-based access control Groups, permissions, and licenses in Fotoware can be assigned based on assigned roles or group memberships of the user logging on via Microsoft Entra ID (formerly Azure Active Directory) . Both can also be used to determine which users in the directory are allowed to log into Fotoware. Role-based Access C
Overview How to rotate photos using FotoStation's image editor How to rotate a photo Images can be rotated in steps of 90 degrees using the green buttons to the right on the toolbar. The rightmost rotation button is used for rotating the image 180 degrees. Keep in mind that selections made using the crop tool can be rotated freely by placing the poi
Defining allowed characters Where: C:\Programdata\Fotoware\Index Manager\Index Control\english.abc Index Manager operates with Unicode, as does XMP. Consequently, all special characters will be indexed and searchable. However, there may be reasons why you would want to treat certain characters in a special way. That's where english.abc can help. Eng
To delete a union: In Index Manager Settings, open the General tab for the relevant index. Select Delete union and confirm the deletion. Deleting a union does NOT delete the attached member indexes nor does it delete the contents in the document folders attached to the indexes.
Overview This article contains a "dummy" product key that can be used to test whether MSI deployment packages for FotoStation and FotoWeb Desktop work as intended before swapping the dummy key with fully-working retail keys. How to use the dummy deployment key Fotoware client applications such as FotoStation and FotoWeb Desktop can be deployed in a
Many Fotoware plans include the plugin for Microsoft Office. It lets all registered users open a side panel in PowerPoint or Word and easily search, find, place and optionally crop, size and rotate pictures, graphics and video clips that are stored in Fotoware. On the Team plan and up, all users have access to use the plugin for Microsoft Office.
Using URL Query String The filters in the sidebar in the Content Browser and List Browser will add the filter config as query string parameters to the URL. There you can see an example to then re-use in e.g. tagboxes. ContentBrowser/screenshots?filter=%7B"kind":"AggregationFilter","aggregationName":"product.area._refId","filter":%7B"kind":"NestedFil
How backup indexes work When creating a union, you can attach member indexes to it. After adding a primary index, you can add a secondary one as well and choose the type of backup solution you would like to use. You have three options: Backup, Parallel, and Round Robin. A backup solution works so that when a client search comes in, it is always forw
What access does Index Manager require? The first time you access Operations Center Settings you must provide credentials for the Fotoware process account. The Process account is an account that is used by all the Fotoware applications installed on the server, and in the case of Index Manager it is used when updating index content, writing and read
The TakeDictionaryValueTransformation allows us to get the value of a key-value pair by providing the key e.g. get value from extracted metadata where Metadata is a dictionary and you provide the key xmpMetadata to get the whole xmp metadata values back, followed by another TakeDictionaryValueTransformation to get the Dublin Core values when providi
In Color Factory Settings, expand the relevant channel and select Image Size. Open the Automatic Crop tab. The following dialog appears. This feature is useful for removing excessive canvas and normalizing the size of pictures, for example, for catalog production. Select Crop image with automatic canvas removal for Color Factory to remove all canva
What are metadata sets? A metadata set is a collection of metadata fields and properties that control how those fields behave in user interaction. If you've used FotoWeb 7.0, metadata sets are similar to FotoWeb 7.0 metadata editors. When you have define a metadata set, you assign it to an archive which in turn gives users the possibility to view an
Compatibility with existing configuration The new Index Manager's configuration is compatible with your existing configuration. However, indexes will be built from scratch and stored in a new location. In a system with many assets, this requires you to plan a service window to give the indexes time to build. The old indexes will remain in their fold
Prerequisites If you are upgrading from a previous version, you must stop all Fotoware-related services on the server: Make sure the server meets the system requirements. For more information, see Index Manager system requirements. We recommend backing up your existing configuration before performing the upgrade. If you're running on a virtual serve
More general details about Display Pattern Display Pattern File Type Pattern The following code fragments can be used: <cp-overlay-box-top-left style="..."></cp-overlay-box-top-left> <cp-overlay-box-bottom-left style="..."></cp-overlay-box-bottom-left> <cp-overlay-box-bottom-right style="..."></cp-overlay-box-bottom-
The AND operator can group different conditions e.g. Check for a specific layer AND a tagbox item that is assigned.
Starting or stopping the FotoWeb Server service To start or stop the FotoWeb server, click on the Service actions button in the Operations Center and choose either Start Service or Stop Service. This will start up or take down all the FotoWeb services in the correct order.
Drag&Drop folders onto Picturepark and Picturepark will upload all files inside the folder and keep the folder names available in the file metadata. Ensure that the file path of the folder and the files do not exceed 160 characters (a known Windows limitation).
Each mapping has a set of attributes that determine how the mapping behaves. Mapping direction Determines if Picturepark writes XMP values from a file to a metadata field in Picturepark, from Picturepark to an XMP field or in both directions. You cannot select fields for mapping without selecting the direction first. XMP to Metadata will only wr
To configure client and server authentication, go to Operations Center Settings > Authentication. The Authentication view opens. Here you can select the authentication method used for communications between Fotoware applications. When connecting to an index, for example, a FotoStation user may need to authenticate with a user name and password.
To make system administration easier, Connect makes a distinction between Servers and Folders on the one hand and Channels at the other. The obvious benefit of this is that you can easily change the folder paths on a server or move a workflow from one server to another and automatically update all the channels that use the folder in question. Connec
The FotoWeb Preview Agent is available in FotoWeb with an API license. It provides functionality for dynamically resizing images and delivering them via HTTP in JPEG RGB format. It takes a search string as input and returns a preview in the requested size of the newest file in the search result. Note: The Preview Agent API is deprecated and will be
Overview Learn how Connect handles 0 byte files in its input folders. Handling of 0 byte files Occasionally, Connect will come across files in its source folders that are 0 byte in size. When encountering such files, Connect will check back on those files 30 minutes after first discovering them and then transfer them whether they have increased in s
Archive properties Go to Archives > Create archive. Name, Group, and Path Depending on how you created the archive, the archive name and path may be filled in. You can change the archive name, if necessary. If the path is not already filled in, enter it manually or select Browse to locate the folder. When creating archives of network folders, we
Fotoware as a Service - April 2024 update Deployment This release is being gradually deployed and will be available on all tenants soon. New functionality Cross-Origin Resource Sharing (CORS) support CORS enables integrators to securely use the Fotoware API and widgets in serverless web applications and UI integrations. For more information, see En
All list representations - for example. representations that are list-like in form and contain several elements, such as assetlist, and collectionlist, are paged. Paging uses a request to the server to retrieve only part of the list so the client can gradually scroll or "page" through the content. If the list contains very few elements, the paging
Usage Representation of ... MIME type: Accept: application/vnd.fotoware.collectionlist+json Resource(s): The archive list, the album list and photo streams and folders of archives and search results in archives have this representation. Part of ... Collection (list of sub collections in application/vnd.fotoware.collection+json media type) Example {
Collections are the most important type of resources in the FotoWeb API. A collection contains assets and sometimes other collections called sub collections. For example, an archive on a FotoWeb site is a collection. It contains assets, which represent physical files on disk discovered by an IndexManager server. Every archive has folders, which are
An order representation is a JSON document which represents the contents of an order or a customer's personal shopping cart. Its MIME type is application/vnd.fotoware.order+json 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 { "href": "...", "created": "2016-01-01T00:00:00Z", "modified":
Required permissions Upload requests require the following: If non-interactive application authorization is used, then the client can upload assets to any location where upload is supported. If the client is impersonating a specific user, then that user must have upload permission on the upload location. Note: The maximum file size for upload is 25
There are two ways of using CMS export in integrations: Interactively - by embedding the CMS export widget into a third-party application Automatically - by using the export API. This article describes how to use the export API. Programmatic export using the API Using the export API assumes that all parameters for exporting an asset are either prede
Temporarily storing a selection on a separate tab The Pro interface has been made with flexibility in mind, and lets you drag assets to the area above the grid to create isolated selections that you can reduce further. Typically you start off by performing a search and filtering that search before making your selections. Then you may want to pin the
A folder is a collection which represents one of the following: A document folder of an index in IndexManager A member of a union in IndexManager A sub folder of a document folder or sub folder The photo stream of an archive is also a folder. The asset list of a folder contains all assets which are directly contained in the folder. If the folder is
This article lists possible values for elements in the permissions array in collection or asset representations. Each value specifies a permission that the current user has on the given resource. Permissions The following table lists string values for permissions listed in the API (first column), names of these permissions in the access list in the
Connect can retrieve files on an Index Manager server and send files to an Index Manager server over the FWP protocol. For more information about the FWP protocol, see FWP protocol details. When using Index Manager as a source, legacy Index Manager servers not supporting the FWP protocol still support file delivery to Connect over SMB (Server Messa
These dynamic operators can be used to create search queries, for example, when configuring auto searches in FotoStation or FotoWeb. For information about a similar feature in FotoWeb search queries, see Dynamic tags. Operators specific to FotoStation The operators listed below can be used in FotoStation to create configurations with archives that p
The condition Layer Unassigned checks if a layer is unassigned e.g. Check whether an embargo layer ("LegalApprovalPending") is lifted which then allows to use and publish the content. Triggers the moment the selected Layer is unassigned. Use Layer Assigned inside AND/OR to check if multiple Layers are assigned. { "kind": "AndCondition", "conditio
How to print Select an asset, open the Asset info panel, and select the Print icon.Select Print with annotations. Next, choose which annotations to include in the printout by checking off the correct ones. Finally, the system or browser print dialog will appear, allowing the user to choose the output printer and set additional print options. Print o
OpenID Connect is a leading standard for authentication, specifically identity provisioning and single sign-on. It uses JSON-based identity tokens (JWT), delivered via OAuth 2.0 flows designed for web, browser-based, and native/mobile applications. OpenID Connect allows clients of all types, including Web-based, mobile, and JavaScript clients, to re
An action can be configured to send assets to an email recipient. In the Action properties, go to the Destination asset tab and choose Email with attachment as the destination type. You can either configure the action to send assets to a preset email address or addresses (separate individual addresses with a semicolon), or allow the user to set his
Prerequisites Make sure the server meets the system requirements. For more information, see Connect system requirements. Configure your network to allow communications between the server and client. Install Connect on your server and configure it using Connect Settings. Configuring the server network settings Connect is based on a folder monitoring
Note: This feature is only available when using Extended actions. Extended actions are available only to Fotoware Main users and Fotoware Pro users. For more information on Fotoware user types, see FotoWeb user types. When do I need this? This option hides the asset from view directly after processing. If you've configured an action that moves an as
The audio and video transcoder in FotoWeb converts audio and video files in FotoWeb archives to a format that is playable on most devices. The transcoding is non-destructive - i.e., we use your original files to create proxies and then use those proxies for playback. The originals are safe and unmodified in the storage repositories. Note: The FFmpeg
Fotoware processing profiles allow you to perform color space conversion, and you can import color profiles (aka ICC profiles) that can be used for this purpose. When editing a processing profile, the color space conversion settings on the File Format tab lets you choose an existing ICC profile that can be used for the conversion. To upload addition
Important performance factors Index Manager is a highly I/O and memory-intensive application. The defining factor that affects its performance is where you store the folder that contains the indexes and the location of the cache. Ideally, they should be stored on the fastest local drive your server can offer; preferably a drive with a large cache. S
Filters (1) are groups of query filters. That means that you want to offer Filters to the user based on available metadata values of a content (result set) e.g. Filters "Media type" allows the user to filter for all content tagged with a media type or Filter for "Department" allows the user to filter content tagged with a department. Picturepark off
Renaming a single asset To rename a single asset, first select it in the grid. Then click on the Rename button in the action bar. The dialog that comes up lets you choose a new name for the asset. Type in the new name and click on Rename to process the asset. Note that the asset's original file extension will be preserved. Renaming a whole selection
The following settings for video sprites are additionally available. Property Description spriteResizeAction Specifies the dimensions of a single frame in the sprite. maxNumberOfSprites Limit for the number of frames to generate. quality JPEG-quality to use for the sprite. extension This property should not be overwritten, except for extensions tha
Sie können ein Embed erstellen, indem Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf eine Datei klicken und auf “Embed” klicken. Sobald das Embed erstellt wurde, klicken Sie auf “Verwalten”. Sie sollten nun auf die folgende Ansicht weitergeleitet werden. Um die Bildeinstellungen anzupassen, können Sie nun auf das Content Item auf der rechten Seite dieses Fenster
Please note the Business Rule settings are only displayed to users that have the system Super Admins role. Property JSON Description Toolbar The remove icon deletes the Business Rule and all settings after you confirm your desire to delete. The JSON is the exact representation of the UI settings. The whole business rule code overview may be
Fotoware as a Service - July 2023 update Deployment This release is being gradually deployed and will be available on all tenants soon. Fixed issues Previously, some content was outside the table scope in the Manage webhook view. This is now fixed, and all table content is displayed. In Site Configuration, you could not save a change to the charact
An action can be configured to send assets to an email recipient. In the Action properties, go to the Destination asset tab and choose Email with attachment as the destination type. You can either configure the action to send assets to a preset email address or addresses (separate individual addresses with a semicolon) or allow the user to set their
Powering the best of the internet | Fastly offers reliable, fast, and customizable options to deliver shared content from Content Platform. Fastly offers real-time observability, baked-in security, and programmatic control. The CDN (Content Delivery Network)can be enabled per customer to distribute email shares and embeds via Fastly CDN. Both defaul
Here you can choose which fields to display when you hover over a thumbnail in the user interface for Office plugins and Adobe CS/CC Extensions. Go to Tools (cogwheel icon) > Site Configuration > Metadata > Metadata Views. Select Add Metadata View. Open the Thumbnail view tab. Select values from the Label, First line, and Second line drop-
By default, all client communications with FotoWeb run over standard, unencrypted HTTP on port 80. This topic and its associated subtopics explain how to configure FotoWeb to use a secure connection and/or non-standard port numbers for communications. By configuring FotoWeb for secure communications, all clients connections to the server can run in
How indexing works As FotoWeb has no built-in metadata indexing and search engine or file crawler, it relies on Index Manager to crawl and monitor the file repositories and keep the indexes in check with real-time events in the file system. This way, when a file changes, Index Manager is notified of the change by the file system, reindexes the file'
Resources and Representations Clients of the FotoWeb RESTful API can extract data from a FotoWeb system by requesting representations of resources. A resource can be, for example, an asset, a collection (such as an archive or album) or the list of archives on the site. Each resource has a distinct URL. A representation of a resource is a document of
The Copy via FWP action enables FotoStation to upload files directly to an Index Manager archive over the FWP protocol. That way, the FotoStation Client only needs access to the Index Manager server, and does not require SMB access to Index Manager's document folders to send files to the archives. Transport Layer Security (TLS) can be added by speci
There are numerous technical reasons why the Fotoware Process account requires local administrator access on the server. The process account needs access to start and stop services, open sockets for network communication, manage temporary storage areas on the server, and manage interprocess communications - all these require special privileges that
When users upload, copy, or move files to an archive, assets will be stored in the first document folder in the archive by default. This setting can be customized to allow users to choose a subfolder themselves or to let the administrator define the folder in which assets are stored. The latter alternative can be useful, for instance, when Color Fac
The API entry points are the only parts of the API with well-known URLs. They provide API descriptors that contain information about the API, the available functionality, and the URLs to access it. Usually, the first thing an integration does when accessing FotoWeb through the API is to request an API descriptor from one of the API entry points. The
Overview How to open files in Photoshop directly from FotoStation. Opening a file in Photoshop With Photoshop installed on your computer you can open files directly in Photoshop. To do so, first select one or more files that you'd like to open. Next, open the Image menu and choose Open in Photoshop... Tip: You can also right-click a thumbnail or a p
Describe
The purge feature streamlines your workflow by automating the deletion of assets, saving you valuable time. It also enhances efficiency by helping you maintain a well-organized system, eliminating assets that are unnecessary or unlikely to be used. On the Dashboard, select Create flow. Enter a name for the flow and select Purging from the Template d
By choosing Calendar dates you can sort files according to the date field specified at the bottom of the calendar pane. The date fields you can choose between are Modified date, Camera date, Created date, Created date (IPTC) and Release date (IPTC). If a date in the calendar is in bold type, then one or more files will have that date in the date fie
Revisions, sometimes called versions, are the recording of asset changes so that users may review the iterations of an asset through its lifecycle. Users with the required access can view and compare versions of a visual asset and optionally restore an earlier version while retaining all other versions as well. In Fotoware, revisions constantly moni
Overview This article describes the JSON representation of preview lists, which list available preview images and their attributes. Usage Part of ... Asset Example 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 [ { size: 800, width: 800, height: 534, href: "/fotoweb/cache/5005/Photos/Trollheimen/2014-07-24/DSC01646_1_2_2.t550e64f1.m800.x2
When a user logs in to Fotoware and a feature that requires Fotoware Plugins has been enabled, the web browser checks if Fotoware Plugins are installed. If they aren't, a banner notifies the user that the Fotoware Plugins are required for full functionality and allows the user to download and run the installer. After installation, the Fotoware Plugi
This guide provides a complete overview of how to enable taxonomies for metadata fields, define the content of taxonomies, and use taxonomies for navigation, metadata input, and when searching for assets in your DAM system. Enabling taxonomies for fields and assigning them to archives requires administrator access. Once taxonomies have been enabled
Access requirement: To use this feature, a user needs to have Manage revisions access set in the archive properties. To delete one or more revisions of an asset, locate the asset and select it to navigate to the Asset Details page. Next, open the Revisions tab to list all the asset revisions, and finally click on the Delete link (red trashcan icon)
Overview On a high-resolution computer screen or a dual-screen system it may be useful to be able to open an extra FotoStation window. Benefits of using several windows Using multiple FotoStation windows you can work with the content of several archives at the same time, and you can freely drag and drop files between the windows to copy or move file
Before you can start using taxonomies throughout Fotoware SaaS you need to choose which metadata fields should have taxonomies assigned to them. This topic explains how to enable taxonomies for specific metadata fields. Assigning taxonomies to metadata fields If you are a Fotoware SaaS customer, Fotoware can assign taxonomies to metadata fields on r
Access requirement: To use this feature, a user needs to have Restore revisions access set in the archive properties. When reviewing asset revisions on the Revisions page, you can restore a revision by selecting the Restore link next to the revision in the list. A dialog box opens where you can confirm the revision to restore. Select Restore to crea
Legacy note This document describes a legacy authentication method. Note: API Key Authentication is deprecated and will be set to End of Life on January 1st, 2025. If you have implemented custom integrations with FotoWeb, such as CMS integrations, we recommend updating the authentication methods in use to OAuth, which was introduced in FotoWeb FR12
Overview How to adjust sharpness using the image editor in FotoStation. Adjusting sharpness FotoStation has a special filter for improving image sharpness. The SmartSharp™ filter can be applied by clicking selecting the arrow to the right of Auto levels and choosing SmartSharp™. Essentially, SmartSharp™ analyzes the image to determine whether sharpe
A Shared Access Signature (SAS) URL is a URI that grants restricted access rights to Azure storage resources. It allows you to delegate access to containers and blobs within your storage account without sharing your account keys. With a SAS URL, you can: Manage permissions: Specify read, write, delete, or list access. In Flow, the default permissio
Legacy Notice This is a legacy integration feature. Do not use it for building new integrations. Do you want your users to log in via an external service? Consider using SSO Are you building an interactive app, such as a web, mobile, or desktop app? Consider using OAuth Are you currently using the ArchiveAgent API? Consider using the new Fotoware AP
Resizing pictures In Color Factory Settings, expand the relevant channel and select Image Size. Open the Image Size tab. The following dialog appears. Here, you can adjust image print size and/or preferences for physical resampling of image data. Change Image Size: When enabled, the image's print size may be adjusted using the drop-down box below.
Overview Explains how multi-search views work and can be used to tag files through drag and drop. What are multi-search views? Multi-search views can be considered a generalized classified view, where you view and edit the content of other metadata fields than the Classify state field. There are many things to consider when creating a multi-search,
Access tokens Once an application has been authorized, it has an access token. The access token must be sent with every request to the FotoWeb API. For example, the following request can be used to get the full API descriptor, which is the main entry point of the FotoWeb API: GET https://myfotowebserver.com/fotoweb/me Accept: application/vnd.fotowar
Setting FotoWeb logging preferences Changing any of these will require you to restart the FotoWeb services. All the Fotoware applications on the server pass log information to the Fotoware Log Server service, which is part of the Operations Center. These logs are written to C:\ProgramData\Fotoware\Log Files\FWEvents.log, and can be viewed on the Ope
By enabling API access on a group's Properties page, you can give members of that group rights to use the FotoWeb API, including the Archive Agent and Preview Agent APIs. You can read more about these interfaces in the FotoWeb API guide. Note: The Preview Agent API is deprecated and will be set to End of Life on July 1st, 2024. If you have integrati
What is a site owner? The site owner concept is introduced with Fotoware Feature Release 13, build 870. Only one user account can be assigned as site owner, and that user has access to manage users and groups, which indirectly means that the site owner can assign all privileges on the site. If the Fotoware server has been updated from an earlier ve
How to configure automatic tagging In the Color Factory Settings app, expand the relevant channel and select Metadata. Open the General tab. The following dialog opens. Select Imagga Tagging Select Enable automatic keyword tagging with Imagga. The cloud service that powers image recognition requires a license. Start by entering the API key and API
This sub action uploads the selected assets to a Color Factory server over the FWP protocol and processes them according to channel settings. The output file can be stored in the location specified in the Color Factory channel, or to a custom location specified in FotoStation's action. It's also possible to set additional processing options directly
How do FotoWeb archives relate to Index Manager's indexes? At the heart of most advanced Fotoware DAM systems will be FotoWeb. It provides an interface to your asset collections and lets users contribute content through uploads, share content with each other or external users without an account on the system and reuse assets, for example by placing
Berechtigungsvorlagen steuern den Zugriff, die eine Benutzerrolle auf Inhalte oder Schemen hat. Diese Berechtigungsvorlagen können Listen, Ebenen oder Inhalten zugewiesen werden und sind additiv.Die Berechtigungsvorlagen für Inhalte und Schemen können im Menü unter “Zugriff” geändert werden. Um eine Berechtigungsvorlage zu ändern, können Sie einen D
No special settings for .svg are available. No special settings for all vector files are available. The following output format settings are available for all file types . Property Description sourceOutputFormats Which output format should be used as a source for rendering. This allows you to render small thumbnails from formats other than the or
Migration steps The steps involved in the migration are as follows: Configure FotoStation to log on to the old server share to download its configuration Configure FotoStation to manage configurations via FWP Restart FotoStation and log in as the user whose configuration you want to migrate Upload that user's configuration to Index Manager.Repeat st
Contrast curve adjustment In Color Factory Settings, expand the relevant channel and select Color & Contrast. Open the Contrast Curves Before CM tab. The following dialog appears. On these tabs you can manually adjust contrast curves for Grayscale, RGB, and CMYK images. Note: There are separate tabs for the application of curves before and afte
How to Print Select an asset, then open the Asset info panel and choose the Print icon. Finally select Print with annotations. Next, choose which annotations to include in the printout by checking off the correct ones. Finally, the system or browser print dialog will appear, allowing the user to choose the output printer and set additional print opt
The ADFS sign-in page shows "An error occurred" rather than a sign-in prompt This usually means that either the FotoWeb or the ADFS side is incorrectly configured. Additional information about the error can be seen using Windows Event Viewer on the ADFS server, under "Applications and Services Log" → "AD FS" → Admin. If the error information is not
Photo CD options Where: Channel | Input File Formats | Images tab You may also choose the Photo CD size to extract when such files are to be processed. Any file size from 72kb to 72mb may be selected. If you choose a larger file than the image pack actually contains, the largest possible image will be extracted. To use an input ICC profile other tha
Fields that are synchronized with Microsoft Entra ID First Name Last Name Primary Email Address Preferred Username Names and unique IDs of all groups in Microsoft Entra ID that the user is a direct or indirect member of All of the information about, except for group memberships, is then stored in the user's profile in Fotoware, and it is updated wi
When a user has been given access to show albums on other users' homepage, when sharing the album they can choose to show the album on the homepage that users see after logging in to FotoWeb. If the FotoWeb site allows guest access, unauthenticated users will have access to this like authenticated users, and web search engines such as Google can fin
Administrators can configure archives to allow users or groups to crop and size pictures directly in the browser before downloading them. The original file in the archive is left untouched. This feature relies on the Crop & Download permission set on the archive's access list. When a user chooses to download a file, the Crop window will appear a
The condition Match Regex checks the input value for a specific field for a pattern, defined as Regex e.g. Check if the input is a valid email address or product code and otherwise remove access until this information is correct. This condition also applies the Regex to the value in the provided fieldpath and allows to either validate the value (reg
Search Analyzers define how text is processed or manipulated. These analyzers give you control over how your text data is used in the search. The goal is to standardize text, for example lowercasing or converting special characters (diacrititcs) or handling of singular/plural in translations (e.g. men, man). Search Analyzers are available for string
Note: The Fotoware Application Activation Wizard has been superseded by the fwlicensetool for managing activations. For information on how to obtain this tool and use it to manage software activation from the command prompt, see Command line activation of Fotoware applications using fwlicensetool . Offline activation procedure Fotoware software use
Display Patterns are configurable templates in Liquid Syntax (used in Shopify). In these Patterns, you take metadata and other values and construct a nice piece of information. The thumbnail pattern for a list item (product) with a title and other product attributes. Code for Thumbnail Pattern List Item (Screenshot) {% if data.fruit.shortDescription
Overview When sharing an album, can it be made visible on other users' home pages when they log in? Learn how to do this in the FotoWeb Pro interface. Showcasing an album When sharing an album, a user with permission to show albums on other users' home pages can choose to show the album on the homepage that users see when they log in to FotoWeb. You
Changing date and time In Color Factory Settings, expand the relevant channel and select Metadata. Open the General tab. The following dialog appears. Select Adjust Date and Time to configure date and time stamps. Now, select which date fields to update from the list. In the Shift with field, you can choose how much to shift the date and/or time. E
Subfolder options Subfolder options are only available if the source folder has been set to include subfolder scanning. You can choose to mirror the entire folder structure of the source folder in the output folder and you can choose to add the subfolder name to the filename. When adding the subfolder name to the filename, you can also specify a sep
Working with checked-out files When you check out a file from FotoWeb using the Open item in the web interface, the file is downloaded to your local computer and opened in the locally installed application associated with that file type. Hence, an image file will typically be opened in Photoshop, a document in Microsoft Word, and a presentation in P
Version: 11.5.0 Status: Released Release: Moléson Release Release date: Dec 3rd, 2022 Release Notes: Picturepark Moléson Release | Dec 2022 Previous Versions: 11.4.0 Breaking changes Feature Endpoint/Contract Title Description Reference Schema and Channels TermsRelationAggregator New TermsRelationAggregatorDocumentType enum value added New SchemaPer
The color conversion action is automatically applied in Picturepark when needed. This converts images from CMYK print usage to RGB web usage. Property Value Details colorProfile Enum: "AdobeRgb1998" "AppleRgb" "ColorMatchRgb" "EciRgbV1" "EciRgbV2" "Srgb" "SrgbColorSpaceProfile" "EuropeIsoCoatedFogra27" "EuroscaleCoated" "EuroscaleUncoated" "IsoCoate
Image processing settings Where: Channel | Input File Formats | Images tab Here you can configure how Color Factory handles various image file types. You can choose to treat Grayscale, RGB, and CMYK input images differently. The default setting is normal processing, in which case the input images will be processed according to the channel settings d
Media Optimization (IO) enables you to crop, resize, sharpen, change transparency or rename images using the media editor, requiring permission to edit images (role permission). Theimages can then be integrated into websites, ecommerce stores, or other apps. Content Delivery Networks (CDN) further improve global delivery and availability. If you a
How many assets can a Fotoware system handle? The maximum theoretical number of assets that a Fotoware system can handle is based on an Index Manager configuration with unions. A union can hold up to 32 indexes, each holding up to 3 million assets, so the theoretical maximum limit is 3 million * 32 = 96 million assets. This also scales well performa
With the EnqueueTaggingAction you can enqueue the auto-tagging, enable object detection and enable OCR (Optical Character Recognition). Content Platform currently supports images for auto tagging: The file size must be less than 4 MB. Image must be at least 50 x 50 pixels. The file types supported are .jpg, .gif, .png, and .bmp. Azure tagging serv
When making selections, it can be practical to quickly mark files so they can be reviewed later or to keep a selection of your favorite assets. This can be accomplished using pins. Your pinned assets are personal, so different users can create their own collections of favorite assets. To pin an asset in the thumbnail grid, select the pin icon on the
If you're using the Pro interface, click here to learn how to navigate taxonomies there. Where are the taxonomy trees located? When taxonomy navigation has been enabled for an archive and the taxonomy has been built, users can use the taxonomy nodes for navigation and filtering in the archive. In FotoWeb you find the taxonomies in the left side pane
FotoWeb server licensing FotoWeb is licensed per server. It is installed with Index Manager, the file system crawler that detects changes and updates FotoWeb. Whether FotoWeb and Index Manager are installed on the same or different servers typically depends on the expected server load. Server licenses and add-ons FotoWeb server licenses and modules
Checking out a picture for cropping Select the picture in the grid and choose Crop on the action bar. Depending on your choice of web browser you may have to click on the .fwc file that is downloaded when you execute the command. Cropping an image When checking out a file from FotoWeb for cropping, the Crop & Size window above opens. By clicking
Introduction The FotoWeb 8.0 Selection Widget is an HTML widget designed to be embedded into third-party systems to allow interactive integration between them. Examples of third-party systems are Web CMS systems and publishing systems. The widget's purpose is to provide a compact and rich User Interface for users who use the third-party system as t
Selection Widget The selection widget is typically embedded into an iFrame as follows: 1 <iframe src="..."></iframe> where src is set to the URL of the selection widget, as described in the Creating integrations using embeddable widgets. The iFrame can be shown, for example, as a modal dialog. Once the user has selected an asset, an even
When are Fotoware Plugins needed? A client installation of the Fotoware Plugins suite is required for the following functionality: Check Out/In Check out and open asset in locally installed associated application Image Edit, Crop, and Upload Placing assets in Microsoft Office Opening and editing assets in Photoshop/Illustrator/InDesign Fotoware Plu
Where are the taxonomy trees located? If you're using the main FotoWeb interface, this topic explains how to navigate taxonomies there. When taxonomy navigation has been enabled for an archive and the taxonomy has been built, users can use the taxonomy nodes for navigation and filtering in the archive. In the Pro interface you find the taxonomies in
Working with checked-out files When you check out a file from FotoWeb using the Open item in the web interface, the file is downloaded to your local computer and opened in the locally installed application associated with that file type. Hence, an image file will typically be opened in Photoshop, a document in Microsoft Word, and a presentation in P
If you have permission to download files from FotoWeb, you can simply select one or more files and select Download in the action bar. Note: Batch/bulk downloading (downloading thousands of assets) is not considered a regular user operation and is not supported. Depending on how the archive has been configured, you might be able to choose a processin
Azure storage Azure storage is Microsoft's cloud service for scalable, durable, and secure storage. With Azure Blob Storage, you can upload and store unstructured data like images, videos, documents, and backups. SAS URI A Shared Access Signature (SAS) URL provides temporary, secure access to the Azure Blob Storage resources without sharing your sto
Fotoware lets you toggle light and dark mode after logging in. This setting can be found by clicking on the user profile in the top right hand corner of the site and choosing Dark, Light or Auto from the Interface Style section. Choosing Auto will make Fotoware match the light/dark mode set globally in your operating system. The setting applies to b
This topic explains how a user can install Fotoware plugins on their local computer to use plugins for Microsoft Office (Word and PowerPoint) and Adobe InDesign. The package also includes an upload utility that can be accessed in the Windows system tray and features that allow users to check out any type of file from the Fotoware system, edit it loc
How it works The Fotoware extension for Illustrator lets you check out files from a Fotoware archive, edit them in Illustrator, and then upload the changes to the server. You can also create new content in Illustrator and upload that content to the Fotoware server using the plugin, i.e., there's no need to log in to Fotoware separately to upload new
When browsing archives with documents (Word, PowerPoint, PDF, InDesign), you can select a thumbnail to open Details page and preview the first page in the document. Hover over the preview to display navigation controls. You can display the previous or next page and enter a page number to open that specific page. Getting an overview of all pages in
Access requirement: To use this feature, a user needs to have the View revisions, Copy from, and Copy to access permissions set in the archive properties. Sometimes, you might want to create a duplicate of a certain revision of an asset. To do so: Locate the asset and select it to go to the Asset Details page. Open the Revisions tab and select the V
How the cache works The cache that Index Manager keeps contains thumbnails and previews for the pictures and document types it supports. All assets that are served to clients (FotoStation, FotoWeb or third-party integration clients) have to be cached first. Since on-demand caching is time-consuming, Index Manager does cache warming, meaning that it
Access to view, restore, and manage revisions is set per archive. In the archive Access list, highlight the group or user whose access to revisions you would like to change and choose one of the following permissions: View revisions - Gives the user/group access to view all revisions of an asset and compare them. Users can also duplicate a revision,
Fotoware for InDesign Server Starting with version 1.0.15, Fotoware for InDesign can also be used with InDesign Server. This allows InDesign Servers to look up linked images from Fotoware when they are being processed, such as exported to PDF or sent to a printer. Installing Fotoware for InDesign Server Currently, the installation procedure for Fot
Software requirements Windows Server 2022. 2019 or 2016 - 64-bit Local Administrator privileges for process account (Why is this required?) Office document support In Index Manager 8.1, support for indexing Microsoft Office documents is built-in and requires no additional components. RAW file support Index Manager can use the Adobe DNG converter to
Application registration FotoWeb only allows registered applications to be authorized using OAuth 2.0. Applications are registered by the FotoWeb administrator in the site configuration interface. Some applications provided by Fotoware, such as FotoWeb Desktop and the FotoWeb mobile apps, may use OAuth 2.0 as well. There is no action required to reg
From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon), go to Manage Activity Exports. The Activity Exports page opens, and any existing exports are listed in the Exports list table. Each export is listed for ten days from its creation date. You can choose which fields to display in this table by selecting the Column settings icon and selecting from the options list
Video introduction to the new editor For a quick introduction to the metadata editor experience, take three minutes to watch this video or read on below. Enabling the new Metadata Editor experience This topic explains the features in the new metadata editor in FotoStation. The older version still works, but we recommend using the new editor.To open
Scheduling Open the Connect Settings app and go to Servers. Expand a server to see the folders associated with it. Select a folder. Open the Schedule tab. Configure as required: Scan frequency: This setting determines how often Connect scans the input folder for new files. Select Continuously for Connect to scan the folder several times per minute,
Channel selection Channels are used to group content based on filters and permissions. This practice is well known throughout the Internet; for example, in a Google search, results are grouped into images, news, maps, and shopping. In Picturepark, the system administrators set up the channel, which usually shows company business units, business case
Opening and viewing an album Start by going to the Albums page by clicking on the Albums link in the top banner. This page shows all the albums you have created and albums that have been shared with you. To open and view the contents of album, share it and perform other operations, click on the album's cover art. Filters to help you find albums You
When is the default language used? The Fotoware user interface is normally displayed in the user's preferred language. The preferred language can be configured using browser settings in all supported browsers. If the preferred language is not supported by the Fotoware user interface, then the next best language (according to browser settings) is cho
You want to find all Items that have the Product Code: F_1000 applied. Search: 1000 finds a product F_1000 finds a product F 1000 does not find a product The results depend on the Analyzers used. A use case for this might be product images in Picturepark and corresponding product numbers are stored in an analyzed string field. The string field cont
Export Um Content Items zu exportieren, können Sie entweder die gewünschten Content Items im Content Browser auswählen, mit der rechten Maustaste darauf klicken und "Exportieren" wählen, oder Sie können auf die 3 Punkte oben im Content Browser klicken und so alle angezeigten Content Items exportieren. Beim Exportieren der Metadaten können Sie auswäh
When configuring an action you can go to the Access list tab in the action's properties to add individual users or groups that are given access to use the action Assigning actions to archives This feature is only available when using Extended Actions. Extended Actions are available to Fotoware Main users and Fotoware Pro users. In addition to settin
Deprecated: The Gravatar service is no longer supported in Fotoware from Feature Release 16 onwards.
If you'd like to delete the original asset(s) from the archive when you've processed them, open the action properties and go to the Source asset tab. The settings on this tab relate to what's being done to the original asset in the archive. This can for example be useful if you're creating an action that sends a copy of the file to another archive a
Templates are used for emails sent out from Picturepark e.g. a share or an invite to the system. Additionally, Pages like the Share Page are listed here. Templates are always available in both system languages (English and German). Share pages can also be translated into other metadata languages e.g. Spanish, French. There are two types of templates
How to upload files using the Selection widget After opening the FotoWeb Selection widget from your CMS, click on the Upload tab. Now drag one or more files from your desktop into the upload area (the dotted blue box) or click on the Browse link to locate the files on your computer. Choose the archive to upload the assets from the dropdown list just
Looking for Fotoware On-Premises updates? See Fotoware On-Premises feature releases and hotfixes. The releases are listed in chronological order, with the latest on top. May 2025 update March 2025 update February 2025 update December 2024 update November 2024 update October 2024 update September 2024 update July 2024 update June 20
The Number field contains only numbers. If you are unsure if the expected values may contain text, then use a text field. Otherwise, use the Number field. The benefit is that you can calculate with numbers but not with text. For example, 2+2=4, but "Content" + "tent" is nothing. Number Overview Icon Behavior VIDEO: How Number Behaves Restrictions On
If you have access to the Fotoware site management, you can upload custom watermarks to your site and apply them to archive thumbnails and previews, image processing profiles used in workflows, and Quick Renditions. Tip: When creating a custom watermark, you can achieve transparency by making sure those areas have a color value of 128 in R, G and B
Fotoware Veloz - May 2025 update Deployment This release is being gradually deployed and will be available on all tenants soon. Improvements Manual video re-transcoding functionality has been removed from Fotoware Veloz. There is an automation built in for retranscoding if it is necessary. Fotoware Veloz has been updated to use the new Fotow
Overview This article explains how to manually install and activate an Adobe plugin from the Windows or Mac Command Prompt/Terminal. Note that the preferred way to install Adobe plugins is to start the installation from the system tray icon after installing FotoWeb Desktop. This topic explains how to install a specific version of a Fotoware plugin f
Consent categories Consent categories represent the types of consent available when signing a consent form. Consent categories are created when configuring consent management and are designed to be reused across consent form templates. We recommend creating one consent category for each consent purpose you require. You can then add the relevant con
What does site ownership imply? In Fotoware Veloz, the person who first signs up as an administrator on the site also becomes the site owner. Only one user account can be assigned the Site owner role, and that user has access to manage users and groups. This indirectly means that the site owner can assign all privileges on the site. For sites that a
If you have a large user base in FotoWeb and want to modify some common settings for all of them, you can do so in the User Management console. From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon), go to Manage Users/Groups. Select the relevant users. You can search by username, first name, and last name. Select from the following: Set company - Sets a new compan
Some conditions only apply to Content Items, like actions related to Permission Sets and Layers. Neither Permission Sets nor Layers can be assigned to List Items. Nonetheless, conditions are not filtered by the Trigger Point Document Type. That means that you can create a Business Rule for List Items with a Condition that checks if a Layer is assign
Access tokens have limited lifetime. However, several strategies that can be employed to make sure you always have a valid token for your integration to use. The strategy used depends on the type of integration you're making. Example: You're making an app that performs a search via the API every hour and then executes some automatic metadata updates
Checking out a picture for editing Select the picture in the grid and choose Edit on the action bar. Depending on your choice of web browser, you may have to click on the .fwc file downloaded when you execute the command. Setting image size By clicking on the Size button on the toolbar, you can change the document size and the physical size of the i
Note: Preview generation using InDesign Server executables in Index Manager has been deprecated and will be set to End of Life on January 1st, 2025. How InDesign document indexing works InDesign Server can be installed on any server in the network. Running InDesign Server on the same server as Index Manager gives a performance advantage, but this s
Choosing when a user account expires If you need to set an expiry date for some user accounts, you can do so on a per-user basis or you can set an expiry date for a selection of users. You can find the account expiry setting by opening the properties of a user in the user management console: From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon), go to Manage Users/Gr
Note: This API will soon be deprecated. More information about this will be available in a separate deprecation notice. Information about our new User Management API will soon be available here on Learn and on api.fotoware.com . The users and groups API is for querying and managing users and groups in FotoWeb. It allows API clients to programmatica
What are groups for? Users can be arranged in groups to make controlling access to your archives and workflows easier. The Everyone and Registered Users groups are system default groups and cannot be deleted or modified. Each user in FotoWeb is a member of the Everyone and the Registered Users groups, except for the Guest user, who is not regarded
Invitations for users to sign up can be managed using the invitation management console. From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon), go to Manage invitations. The invitation management console contains all open invitations to individual users, organizations, or public links that anyone can use. Note that individual user signups will disappear from the lis
To enable folder and taxonomy navigation in archives: Open the relevant archive and select Settings. In the Archive details view, open the General tab. Make the required changes (more information below) in the Navigation Pane section. Select Save. See also Enabling SmartFolder navigation. Folder navigation Folder navigation implies that FotoWeb dis
Changing your password If you need to change your FotoWeb password, log in to FotoWeb and click on your profile picture in the top right corner. Then choose Change password in the menu that appears. Note to AD users: If you cannot see the Change Password option, your login is probably linked to your Windows networking credentials. In that case, you
For a user to be able to use the Archive Agent API, the following conditions must be met: FotoWeb must be licensed for API access. More information The authenticated user must have been given access to the archive they are accessing. The user must be a member of a group that has been granted API access privileges.
The Nested Query Filter is required for Tagbox or Fieldsets or Relationship with multiple values, as those values are nested. If you want to access those nested values you must use the Nested Filter and add other filters inside of it.
Channel Filter: Show Images with Copyright Information Channel Filter: Show Items not Triggered in a Fieldset Channel Filter: Show Items that have Product Layer Assigned Channel Filter: Show Items with any Tag in a Tagbox Channel Filter: Show Items with Two Specific Tags Channel Filter: Show New Items Only (based on EXIF) Channel Filter: Show only t
These settings can be changed under Settings - Site Identification in the FotoWeb Site configuration in the Operations Center. Changing site identity settings When a site is first set up, the New Site wizard will help you set the basic properties of the site, such as hostname, base path to the site configuration and appearance profile/color scheme.
To compare assets in FotoStation, start by making a selection in the grid. You can select up to 12 assets for comparison. Then press C to open the full screen Compare view. Use the mouse to click the assets you want to keep or move the selection using the arrow keys and press Spacebar to select an asset.A checkmark appears in the lower right corner
Creating and configuring folders for the FTP server When you have configured the general FTP server properties, you can add folders to the server. These can be either source or destination folders in a workflow. To create an FTP server connection, go to the Servers view in Connect Settings. Open the Folders tab and double-click the folder name to s
Groups can be assigned administrative permissions to manage certain tasks on the site. To set these permissions: From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon), select Manage Users/Groups. Select Edit for the relevant group. The administrative permissions (outlined in red below) are listed on the General page. Turn on the toggle for the administrative permiss
ACR Values are optional parameters provided as a space-separated string. These values specify additional context values which the authorization server shall use to process the client request for authentication. If the client provides a value the IdP understands, it will be respected but if the IdP does not understand it, the authentication request i
Non-interactive applications This variant of the authorization process is for non-interactive applications, i.e., apps in which there is no user interaction. A non-interactive application gets full administrative access to all resources on the tenant; it is impossible to make requests in the context of a user. Note: Refresh tokens are no longer supp
Summary I want to display a red message "Private" on images as a thumbnail overlay (thumbnail pattern on file type images) when no permission sets are assigned. {% if permissionSetIds.size == 0 %} < font color = "#ff5576" > Private </ font > {% endif %} Field Value Access permissionSetIds will access the Permission Sets, so I can check f
Version: 11.12.0 Status: Released Release: Rochers de Naye Release Release date: August 28, 2024 Release Notes: 11.12 Previous Version: 11.11.0 Breaking changes Feature Endpoint/Contract Title Description Reference User User EmailAddress not required EmailAddress can now be null See the change in Contracts.Generated.cs Share ShareUser EmailHash not
The Picturepark Search is visible in all areas in Picturepark. In the Content Browser or List Item Browser, Picturepark offers search suggestions from the filters of the Channel or List settings that have search fields configured. The Picturepark Search supports three modes: AND, OR, Advanced with specific query syntax. You can construct complex adv
How Quick Renditions work If the site administrator has defined Quick Renditions for an archive, you can request a preview of an image asset at any size the administrator has predefined. FotoWeb will resize the picture on the fly and deliver it in an overlay window in the browser to allow you to drag it directly to your desktop. Note: The site admin
You can build your data model from scratch, as well as your permission sets. You are completely free in doing so but we suggest talking to a Picturepark solution specialist to get some best practice advice. If you decide to do it yourself, you should ask yourself several questions before starting to configure the Content Platform. A Simplified Model
Adding a note You can add a note to a single file or a whole range by making a selection and clicking on the Set note button in the action bar. Then type in the information you want to attach and click on Save to store it. How you can tell that an asset has a note attached to it When assets have a note attached to them they display a little yellow t
The InDesign plugin is an extension that allows Editor user types on a Fotoware system place pictures and graphics that are stored in Fotoware into an InDesign layout. The extension opens as a panel in InDesign, and allows users to search for, find, preview and place content into their layouts using the InDesign place gun.
Enabling Activity Exports in Site Configuration is the first step in setting up the overall Activity Exports functionality. Once Activity Exports is enabled, you can configure which events to log and, if relevant, what metadata to log for the selected events. To access this feature, you need to be a member of a group that has been assigned the Manag
From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon), go to Manage Activity Exports. The Activity Exports page opens, and any existing exports are listed in theExports list table. Each export is listed for ten days from its creation date. You can choose which fields to display in this table by selecting the Column settings icon and selecting from the options liste
Overview This how-to explains the steps involved in preparing Group Policy Deployment of the FotoWeb Desktop client software. Before you start In addition to the FotoWeb Desktop MSI package, itself, the clients you distribute FotoWeb Desktop to will need Visual Studio 2010 Tools for Office Runtime and .NET Framework 4 Client Profile. The Visual Stud
Note: The Preview Agent API is deprecated and will be set to End of Life on July 1st, 2024. If you have integrations that display previews in real-time, we recommend looking into alternative solutions such as obtaining temporary preview links from the RESTful API. It is possible to limit the number of users with access to these APIs as access to use
For reasons of security and performance, access tokens have a limited and usually very short lifetime. After an access token has expired, the client has to request a new one to continue using the FotoWeb API. There are 2 ways to do so: Repeat the authorization process Request a new access token using a refresh token Refresh tokens may be obtained to
How to index empty fields In Index Manager Settings, open the Fields tab for the relevant index. Select the fields you want to index as empty. Select Save. The index must e completely rebuilt to make existing content searchable in empty fields. For more information, see Rebuilding an index. Indexing empty fields In many archives metadata is only en
The mechanisms that power Index Manager indexing Four mechanisms are at work to make sure all changes to the file system are recorded. During system startup, these are the Full Recursive Scan and the Folder List Scan. Under normal operation, File System Notifications and Crawlers keep the index in check. These are described in detail below. What hap
Image similarity In the Color Factory Settings app, expand the relevant channel and select Metadata. The General tab opens. Color Factory can analyze images and create a similarity index that is stored as a 'checksum' in an XMP field. This allows FotoStation to sort files by similarity. It should be noted that there is no face or shape recognition
Text fields in Picturepark have an additional option to render Markdown , a well-known syntax supported by various systems. Using Markdown in text fields allows basic formatting of descriptions, press kit content, or product descriptions to highlight specific areas or structure longer text areas. Picturepark uses the following component: https://
As explained in another topic, at the minimum, a Fotoware system typically consists of a Fotoware server that is connected to an Index Manager server. Index Manager is the engine that crawls the folders with assets and exposes the resulting index to Fotoware. In turn, you set up archives in Fotoware that connect to these archives and apply additiona
This is a auto-generated Article of all your definitions within the glossary. Glossary This is a auto-generated Article of all your definitions within the glossary. All
Watch this video for an introduction to sharing albums, or scroll below for written instructions. Controlling access to the album When you have created an album, you may want to share its contents with others. To do so, open the album using the Albums link in the top banner and then click on the Share link in the top right corner. To share the album
This solution shows how to configure a filter in the field “Dynamic View” based on the creation date. Real-world use case: Show a summary of content marketing created in the last month. Show a summary of all content created by agency A in the last month. Show a summary of all content created by photographer B in the last week. Instructions You add t
Watermarking pictures In Color Factory Settings, expand the relevant channel and select Pixel Edit. Open the Watermark tab. The following dialog appears. To add a watermark to the images processed in the channel, select Watermark Image. Choose where to place the watermark – either cornered or centered, in which case you may also scale the watermark
Date Math Transformation The DateMathTransformation allows us to pick a value from a variable and add/subtract something to it. The Date Math Transformation feature in our Business Rule Configuration represents a powerful tool that automates data manipulation and optimization. It's an incredibly versatile feature that enables you to add or subtract
This solution shows configuring a filter in the field “Dynamic View” based on a tagbox. The field dynamic view will show related content based on an assigned tag e.g. tag = project X, related content = all content that also is tagged with project X. This solution shows how to show related projects. Without any project assigned don’t show the dynamic
Overview In addition to templates, FotoStation can use metadata macros for more advanced automated metadata editing. Macros make adding or modifying field content possible while retaining or overwriting the existing metadata in the field. Using macros, you can also specify conditions that must be met before the metadata is modified. Creating a metad
Overview Learn how to use Windows system environment variables that refer to particular system folders when defining archives and actions in FotoStation. Using system environment variables in FotoStation It is possible to use Windows system environment variables that refer to particular system folders and even create your own. This way, you can for
Overview Learn how to create a metadata template to quickly add predefined metadata to your files. About templates Where: Expand the Metadata node, then expand the Text templates node in the program configuration. By clicking on the Metadata templates node (located under the Metadata node) in the configuration tree you can create custom text templat
FotoStation can integrate with FotoWeb so that you can use the FotoWeb taxonomy in the QuickList dialog in FotoStation. FotoStation is a very efficient tool for managing taxonomies - you can add new items, edit existing items, or import a complete FotoStation QuickList into the taxonomy. You can use FotoStation to maintain the taxonomy in FotoWeb so
The layout of emails that FotoWeb sends is controlled by templates. These templates are stored in C:\ProgramData\Fotoware\FotoWeb\Site Settings\<sitename>\Email Templates This folder contains both HTML and plain text emails. When sending emails, FotoWeb sends both versions, and settings in the client's email program determine which version is
XMP field codes Note: Fields in the Fotoware Reserved namespace should not be used for custom content - these are required by Fotoware to provide general functionality in the product. XMP Fields* Namespace Field Code Title Dublin Core #005 Edit Status Fotoware Legacy #007 Status (Urgency) Adobe Photoshop #010 Category Adobe Photoshop #015 Supplement
By default Fotoware will download background images for use on the login screen from a Fotoware repository on the internet. If you would rather use your custom collection of background images that comply with your corporate profile, you can do so by changing the setting in the Fotoware site settings. From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon) go to Site Co
You can remove a site in the FotoWeb Settings app. Note: Stop all FotoWeb services before deleting a site and start them after the deletion process is completed. Open the FotoWeb Settings app and select Sites. Select Remove for the site you want to remove. A confirmation dialog appears. Select Yes. The site is deleted. Note: The following informati
LEGACY NOTE: This guide describes legacy functionality in FotoStation. In new versions of FotoStation configurations are maintained and downloaded to the client over FWP. See Creating and maintaining centralized FotoStation configurations for updated documentation. Updating a configuration To update a configuration after you have made changes to
The Numeric Range Query Filter is a filter on a numeric field, providing a range (from, to). In a Channel, you can show content with filesize in range 0 – 500 to filter for medium-sized files, which are better suited for web usage. In a relationship field you can filter for content with 150dpi or higher, to restrict the selection to print-ready file
I would like to have a hierarchical filter that displays for example keywords grouped by the classification tagbox field. You can add a tree view field to your layer e.g here I have added one to the Basic Information field: [ { "fieldId": "keywords", "allowRecursion": false, "levels": [ { "fieldId":
How to give InDesign users access to place assets from Fotoware in layouts. To allow users to make use of the Adobe InDesign Extension, they need to belong to a group that is given the InDesign editor permission, as shown in the screenshot below. Furthermore, users need Place permission on each archive from which they should be able to add assets to
When FotoWeb's online signup has been configured to require administrator approval of new users, users with the rights to approve pending signups will see a notification of pending sign-ups in the top right corner next to the Tools menu cogwheel icon. Go to Tools > Pending Sign-ups, to see an overview of any signups pending. Here, you can approve
No special settings for all videos are available. The following output format settings are available for all file types . Property Description sourceOutputFormats Which output format should be used as a source for rendering. This allows you to render small thumbnails from formats other than the original to save rendering power and time. See Rende
Overview How to add a click action to a picture that's being exported to a CMS so that you can download the file or navigate to a specific URL. Adding a click action Select Action to add a click action to the picture. The Download file action in CMS export redirects to the preview page of the exported asset, where users can download the asset using
Methods GET Members of a group can be either users or groups (also called sub groups or children). It is not possible to list all user and group members in one representation. The list of users and the list of sub groups can be requested separately as follows: GET href Accept: application/vnd.fotoware.user-list+json Read all users which are member
MIME Type application/vnd.fotoware.user-list+json Example 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 { data: [...], paging: { // can be null next: "...", // can be null prev: "...", // can be null first: "...", last: "..." } } Attributes Name Type Description data Array of user representations Contains all users which are in this part of the user list. The format of each
Is there a preferred way to organize users and groups in Fotoware? In many Microsoft Entra ID hierarchies, administrators group people by the organizational department they're part of. This can (but not always) prove a challenge with FotoWeb since more fine-grained access control is required. The suggestion and example below offer a potential soluti
Using the Picturepark Rendering Chain you can generate a temporary still format for documents or videos and then modify the rasterized still images and use rendering actions, which may not be allowed on videos directly (e.g. Watermark). Find details on the creation of output formats in the API documentation: https://demo.picturepark.com/Docs/Rest/i
To add contact information to a user, open the User Management console (go to Tools (cogwheel) > Manage Users/Groups. Choose Edit for the user whose contact information you'd like to modify and go to the Details tab to change contact information fields. Description Enter a basic description of the user and the URL for their website. Address Addre
With the Activity Export feature, you can configure which activity events you want to log and set up one-time exports based on the selected events. You can then download the export as a CSV file (raw data) and use a third-party tool (such as Microsoft Excel or PowerBI) to visualize the results. You can also define users or groups to receive an email
In Site Configuration, you can add a custom welcome message for users who access the Fotoware site. The custom welcome message is displayed on the site's home page above the list of public archives and albums when a user accesses the Fotoware site. If the site has no public resources and requires users to log in, the home page with the custom welcom
MIME Type application/vnd.fotoware.group-list+json Part of ... User Example 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 { data: [...], paging: { next: "...", // can be null prev: "...", // can be null first: "...", first: "...", } } Attributes Name Type Description data Array of Group representations Contains all users which are in this part of the user list. The format
Note: You must be a member of a group that has the rights to manage workflows. From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon), go to Site Configuration > Workflows > Actions. Select Add action. Enter a name for the action and, optionally, add a description of what the action does. Select an action type. There are three types of actions available: Standar
How it works The plugin provides a decorator for the existing content selector or a button in the TinyMCE toolbar, enabling users to choose content from the DAM. Once selected, the content (or a shared embedding) is downloaded and imported into the default Optimizely media management system. Examples Example of the decorator on a Video content refer
Album permissions When adding a new group or editing an existing one in the Groups tab in the configuration, you find several album-related settings on the General tab in the Group properties: Create Allow members of the group to create new albums. This way, they can select files from all the archives they can access and add them to a new or existin
Note: The User Management API and this documentation are currently in beta state. You are welcome to test both and give us feedback . The User Management API is for querying and managing users and groups in FotoWeb. It allows API clients to programmatically add and modify users and groups and extract information about them. For example, customers c
Registered users As a system owner, you might be interested in knowing the number of users currently registered with the Fotoware solution. From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon), go to Manage Users/Groups. The number of users is displayed at the bottom of the Manage users view. Additional information Select the Column settings icon in the first colu
The photo stream is the root of an archive. It is a collection, so it consists of an asset list and a collection list. The asset list contains all assets in all folders and sub folders of the archive sorted by decreasing modification time. This means that the newest assets can be found at the beginning of the asset list. The collection list contains
To give a group of selected users permission to edit and delete annotations made by other users, assign them to a group of "super users" and assign the Manage annotations administrative permission to it: From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon), go to Manage Users/Groups. Open the Groups tab and select Edit for the specific group. In the Administrative p
MIME Type application/vnd.fotoware.group+json Part of ... GroupList Example 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 { href: "/fotoweb/groups/Employees", name: Employees", description: "..." created: "2015-09-01T11:04:00Z", modified: "2015-09-01T11:04:00Z", ex
Fotoware Veloz has two registered, licensed user types - Consumers and Editors. This article lists the features available to each user type. Availability is dependent on plan. For more information about plans, features, and optional add-ons, contact Fotoware . Guest user A guest user is an unauthenticated user with limited access to the site via th
I am adding a tree view field that references the Controlled Vocabulary broader field in the levels and allows recursion. Setting recursion to true only makes sense if you have a tagbox in a list that references the same list. [ { "fieldId": "broader", "allowRecursion": true, "levels": [] } ] I then add a filter on the L
By enabling API access on a group's Properties page, you can give members of that group rights to use the FotoWeb API, including the Archive Agent and Preview Agent APIs. For more information about interfaces, see FotoWeb API guide.
Roles are assigned to registered users and define what a user is in general allowed to do in the Content Platform. Bear in mind that the role permission "Manage Content" is not sufficient as the Role also needs to be permitted to apply Layer or create Virtual Items. The role permissions are global access privileges. Super Admins are always present.
MIME Type application/vnd.fotoware.user+json Part of ... User List Example 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 { href: "/fotoweb/users/[email protected]", username: "[email protected]",
Installing and using another certificate from a trusted source When accessing the Operations Center Status app on a secure connection with a self-signed certificate (by typing in https://servername:7001 in your web browser's address field), your browser will display a warning that the certificate is not trusted. That's because it is self-signed and
Where to configure : From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon) go to Site Configuration > Security > Single Sign-on. When setting up FotoWeb with SAML SSO, you can define attributes on the Identity Provider (IdP) that are synchronized to FotoWeb when a user is imported. Such attributes can, for instance, include: Group membership Address information
In Fotoware, you can configure and enable the cookie warning bar and the cookie policy to inform users about necessary cookies. The cookie warning bar and cookie policy can be configured and enabled independently, as described below. Note: To configure cookies warnings, you must be a member of a group that has the Change site appearance administra
In the Audio/Video module, you can configure the allocation of system resources to transcoding operations in the Fotoware Settings app. This allows you to manage resource allocation and the qualityof the video proxy files used for playback. Note that the transcoder process priority is set below normal, so even if you have configured the transcoder m
By default, all Fotoware applications install on the system drive. In some environments and under some circumstances it is desirable to install the software on a different drive. This can be accomplished using junctions, links that refer to an alternative location and are handled by the server. (Unlike symbolic links, which are processed on the clie
Question I have a FotoWeb archive that I can view in the browser when logged in as a certain user. Guests do not have access to this archive. If I add .json to the URL of the archive or a sub folder, instead of seeing JSON data, I get "401 Unauthorized". Shouldn't this work? How to get the JSON data of the archive? Answer You are not using the cor
Who can manage consent forms? To manage consent forms, a user must be a member of the Access list for the relevant consent form template. For more information, see Creating a consent form template. Accessing the consent forms page From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon) go to Manage Consent Forms. The Consent Forms page lists all consent forms to which
Overview Prefix routing routes files based on fixed-size or dynamically sized prefixes. Folders can be assigned to each prefix so that a subfolder structure is created in the destination folder. Creating a prefix routing In Connect Settings, go to Routings and select one of the groups. Select Add routing. Enter the following information, as necessa
An export file can be used to review asset logs. This is useful, for example, to verify that an image deletion action was executed at a given time to comply with data retention policies or client contracts. You can create a maximum of 10 exports. Go to Monitoring > Exports. Select Generate export. Enter a start date and an end date. Select Sav
Where are the taxonomy trees located? If you're using the main FotoWeb interface, see Navigating using taxonomies. When taxonomy navigation has been enabled for an archive and the taxonomy has been built, users can use the taxonomy nodes for navigation and filtering in the archive. In the Pro interface, you find the taxonomies in the left side panel
The SplitTransformation can split text (strings) based on any character or value e.g. take the original file name and split underline or dash to then use the output in a JoinByTransformation and concatenate the filename parts with a space. Input: "picturepark-pim-dam-platform.pdf" SplitTransformation: separators: "-", "_" , "." keepEmpty: null trim
The following settings for an audio still image are additionally available. This still image is used for thumbnails and static previews, which for audio is the voicegram of the audio file. Property Description kind AudioStillFormat extension This property should not be overwritten, except for extensions that are identical like jpg vs. jpeg. No spe
The Checkbox field is on or off (technically, that means true or false, so-called Boolean). Its meaning depends on the label e.g. Checkbox "PermissionDenied" ✔ means permission denied, whereas checkbox "PermissionApproved" ✔ means permission granted, although the checkbox in both cases has the same value (true), the understanding is different based
Note: This functionality is only available for extended markers. Only users with a Plus or Pro user license can use this functionality. Open the marker's properties and go to the Action tab. Select Execute webhook and enter webhook URL. From the Content type drop-down list, select the type of data to transfer from FotoWeb. Select Save.
Creating a file type routing In Connect Settings, go to Routings and expand the group to which you want to add the routing. Select Add routing. Enter the following information, as necessary: Name: Enter a name for the routing. Description: Enter a more detailed description, if necessary. Create subfolders automatically: This is the default settin
Having set your preferences for the export you can store them as a preset for future use. This allows you to quickly add the same effects to pictures you export later. After applying a preset to a new picture you can still modify individual settings to tweak the appearance of a new export precisely the way you want. Creating a preset Having changed
Managing exports Having logged in, click on the wrench icon next to the search field above the grid. Then choose Manage exports to bring up the complete list of all the pictures that have been exported from the archives you have CMS export privileges from. Required Permissions To manage exports, a user has to have the Export permission set on the ar
The Exists Query Filter filters on a field to check if the field exists or if the layer exists, using layerSchemaIds.
Removing EXIF data from input files How to remove EXIF data from the input files to avoid distributing files with GPS data and other potentially sensitive information. In Color Factory Settings, expand the relevant channel and select Metadata. Open the General tab. Select Metadata Filters and choose Remove EXIF Information from metadata. Use this f
To rate assets in FotoWeb Pro, select one or more assets. Open the Asset information panel (keyboard shortcut T). Select the number of stars you'd like to assign. The rating is applied immediately - there's no additional saving involved. Tip: To quickly apply a rating to a selection, use the keyboard shortcut: Shift-1 up to Shift-5. To clear the ra
How load balancing works When creating a union, you can attach member indexes to it. Having added a primary index, you can add a secondary index as well and choose the type of backup solution you would like to use. You have three options: Backup, Parallel, and Round Robin. A Round Robin solution works such that when a search comes in from a client,
If you want to make the Fotoware Pro interface the default for your Editor users, you can enable the option to automatically take users directly to the Fotoware Pro interface without having to click on the Pro link in the top menu in the main interface. Note: Only users with an Editor license will be taken to the Fotoware Pro interface; other users
Overview How to capture parts of the screen e.g. for a presentation using the Screen capture function in FotoStation. About screen capture in FotoStation The screen capture feature is a basic utility for capturing the content of the screen for use in, for example,. a presentation. This function is only available in FotoStation for Windows. Using scr
When configuring an action you can go to the Access list tab in the action's properties to add individual users or groups that are given access to use the action. Assigning actions to archives This feature is only available when using Extended Actions. Extended Actions are available to Fotoware Main users and Fotoware Pro users. In addition to setti
Introduction The FotoWeb 8.0 Selection Widget is an HTML widget designed to be embedded into 3rd party systems, to allow interactive integration between systems. Examples of 3rd party systems are Web CMS systems and publishing systems. The purpose of the widget is to provide a compact and rich User Interface for users who use the 3rd party system a
Property JSON Description Toolbar This will delete the Channel and all settings after you confirm your desire to delete. “Edit JSON” The JSON is the exact representation of the UI settings. This may be helpful for duplicating a Channel with adjusted settings. “Edit” This makes the settings editable. Settings ID id The Id of the Channel
You can remove all Powered by Fotoware badges from the user interface so that the site can be completely branded according to company standards (also known as whiitelabeling). Go to Tools (cogwheel icon) > Site Configuration > Appearance > Branding. Open the Corporate Branding tab. Turn off the Show Powered by Fotoware badges toggle. This e
With the Guest Portal feature, you can easily make selected content publicly available on the dashboard. Users can view, browse, filter, search, and download (when suitable) this content without logging in to Content Platform. The Guest Portal can eliminate the need for microsites or third-party portals if you don't have strict branding requirements
Tips to get started using the currently integration technology: Do you want your users to log in via an external service? Consider using SSO Are you building an interactive app, such as a web app, mobile app, or desktop app? Consider using OAuth Are you currently using the ArchiveAgent API? Consider using the new Fotoware API Are you using legacy wi
With Fotoware Feature Release 17 (Fall 2021 release), we are making changes to user password hashing that will have some practical implications that users should be aware of. This improvement makes it more difficult to extract user plain-text passwords from the FotoWeb database, therefore protecting user passwords if a site gets compromised. Users k
NOTE: This feature requires a FotoWeb Enteprise license. To configure the site so that users must accept terms and conditions when logging on: Go to Tools (cogwheel icon) > Site Configuration > Security > Login and Sessions. In the Login section, select one of the following options: Never: Never request approval of terms and conditions fro
Where can dynamic tags be used? This article explains where and how dynamic tags can be used. In metadata macros in actions In search expressions (as independent terms and phrases) In Marker conditions Further details are below. Available tags Every valid dynamic variable is expanded to its value, which is usually used as a literal string. In search
The following settings for .pdf are additionally available. Property Description jpegQuality Specifies compression quality used for ReduceFileSize. fastWebView Whether to linearize the output for fast web viewing. reduceFileSize Whether to apply measures to decrease output size or not. extension This property should not be overwritten, except for e
The Move via FWP action enables FotoStation to move files between archives on the same Index Manager server using the FWP protocol. That way, the FotoStation Client only needs access to the Index Manager server, and does not require SMB access to Index Manager's document folders to move files. Transport Layer Security (TLS) can be added by specifyin
This article describes legacy dynamic tags which exist for backward compatibility. It is not recommended to use these tags anymore, but they will remain available in future versions of FotoWeb. For new configurations, please use the tags listed in Reference of date and time variables instead. If your configuration already uses any legacy tags, the t
Linking multiple assets with consent forms In FotoWeb you can link assets to a consent form from a consent form (as described below) and from an archive. You can quickly view consent status for an asset and keep track of consents on a per asset level. Note: There are some requirements to be met before you can link assets and consent forms. For more
File name options These options are available on the Options tab when you create or modify a channel's properties. Select Enable Filename Processing for access to properties relating to how file names should be handled. Add Prefix: Enter a prefix for the files processed in the channel when they are stored in the destination folder. To keep the prefi
Open the Manage site dialog from the Tools menu and go to the Archives node. Then hover over the archive you want to modify. Three links will appear as shown above that allow the editing of archive properties, cloning of the archive, or removing of the archive altogether. When you clone an archive, the archive will be assigned a new archive id and a
In the Actions node under Workflows in the configuration there are three links to the far right for every action you have made. Choose Clone to duplicate an action with all its settings. The cloned action will be added to the bottom of the list, and you can easily modify it by clicking on the Edit link and change the settings for the action as neede
The unsharp mask action allows unsharp masking based on the specified amount, radius, and threshold. The following values need to be defined: Amount of 1 to 500 percent, Radius of 0.1 to 1000.0 pixels, and a Threshold of 1 to 255 levels. Property Value Details kind UnsharpenMaskAction amount Amount of 1 to 500 percent. Unsharp mask amount (the dif
This will find all Users where the field is empty (not exists) aka users where no roles are added. -_exists_:userRoles.userRoleId This will find all Users where the field is not empty (exists) aka users where roles are added. _exists_:userRoles.userRoleId This will find users of a specific role. userRoles.userRoleId:49c5052617c849cf95de3a98d6408f
To enable SmartFolder navigation on an archive: Open the relevant archive and select Settings. In the Archive details view, open the General tab. In the Navigation Pane section, turn on the SmartFolder navigation toggle. This allows users to navigate the archive contents using the SmartFolders you created. You can change the name of the SmartFolder
Filters (sometimes called “facets”) are used to refine Content Items in the Content Browser or List Items in the List Browser. Those filters are shown on the right (sidebar) and help to refine your search for desired content e.g. Filters "Media type" allows the user to filter for all content tagged with a media type or Filter for "Department" allows
This is the privacy policy for the FotoWeb for Android app. For the complete terms of use, see the End User License Agreement (on fotoware.com). In this privacy policy, we refer to "personal data" as any data that may identify you as an individual. Below is an explanation of each of the app's permissions: Camera: Take Pictures and videos for taking
Asset linking is an integral component of consent management. In Fotoware you can link assets to a consent form both directly from an archive (as described below) and from the consent form itself. You can quickly view the consent status for an asset and keep track of consents on a per-asset level. Note: Before linking assets and consent forms, there
This will find all Users created in the last 60 days which are not Support Users. Adapt the date range to your specific case. audit.creationDate:[now-60d TO now] AND isSupportUser:false The following attributes exists in the search: ✔isLocked:false ✔isSupportUser:false The following attributes do not exist in the search: ❌isReadOnly:false ❌isFeder
Signing a consent form by email You can sign a consent form by opening a link sent to you by email. You can also sign a consent form by scanning a QR code directly on your mobile device. For more information about both options, see Requesting consent for use. If you are signing a consent form as a guardian, there is one extra step where you enter de
The user who creates a content item or schema is the owner of that content item or schema. The owner of a schema has the schema view, manage items and manage schema permissions - regardless of any other permission sets applied. The owner of a content item has the content permissions view, access original, edit, replace the file, manage and delete pe
There are various states associated with an Account. Picturepark accounts are always in one of the following states: Step State Required Action Details 1 Registered User to confirm the signup When a user has completed the signup form to request a new account, the account is created but not yet visible in Picturepark in the Users area. The account is
This guide deals with how version control works in FotoStation. Version control is a feature that keeps any number of versions of an asset when it is updated, making it possible to revisit older versions and, optionally, restore them. Versions are kept both when changes are made to the assets themselves - such as editing an image in Photoshop - as w
The Picturepark Content Platform uses a secure authentication system build on Open ID Connect, which allows users to log in to one or multiple different Picturepark Content Platforms with the same Picturepark account, they already use with Picturepark. The Picturepark login is also the preferred method to connect your users with Picturepark Apps, Pi
The Picturepark Content Platform supports different kinds of metadata concepts, one is unstructured data input like free text and the other is structured data input similar to excel tables. Unstructured Data You can define for each and every content all required information as free text, also putting all information in one single field if you like.
The following settings for .mp3 are additionally available. Property Description quality Gets or sets the encoding quality. This setting and the Bitrate are mutually exclusive. Values can be set in a range of 0 to 9, where a lower value is a higher quality. bitrate Gets or sets the encoding bitrate. This setting and Quality are mutually exclusive.
Registering a user interface integration To register an integration, the logged-in user must be a member of a group that has the Manage users and security permission. From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon), go to Site Configuration > Integrations > Add application. Select Add application to create a new integration. Select Web App/API from the Ty
What are alerts? Alerts are notifications of files that have been added to an archive. They are created by first performing a search and then saving that search as an alert. To check the status of your alerts, tap Alerts on the main screen in the application. Creating an alert To create an alert, perform a search from the main screen. When the list
Displaying search results When you have performed a search you can tap on one of the archives in the search result to display the files that were found in that archive in a grid. Tip: You can switch the orientation of your device between portrait and landscape as you prefer. Thumbnail Grid view Having tapped on one of the archives in the search resu
Fotoware as a Service - November 2024 update Deployment This release is being gradually deployed and will be available on all tenants soon. Improvements Administrators can now define which fields should be visible or even required when declining a consent form. By default, new consent form templates will have the fields for first name, last name, f
not in use in UI { "kind": "ChildFilter", "childType": "", "filter": { filter1 } } Properties kind string, required childType The type of the child document. filter (single) The filter to be applied on the child document. All kinds of filters are accepted.
Flow Note This is a preview release containing new features that are still under development. For more information about Flow, contact [email protected]. Flow is a cloud-native automation tool designed specifically for our SaaS products. By automating workflows, Flow simplifies and enhances asset management, replacing the need for on-premise s
Note: This feature was discontinued on July 1, 2021. Versions released after that date don't contain this feature. What are screens? Sometimes, showing a picture on a bigger screen may be more useful than a handheld device. This is where Screens come in handy. Using a computer in your network, you can access your FotoWeb server (it has to be the sam
To create a custom search for a taxonomy node you need to use Search Expressions syntax. By defining a custom search for a taxonomy item it is possible to expand or narrow the scope of the query to find-tune the results a user sees when selecting a taxonomy item. As an administrator you can use the syntax examples below to adjust a taxonomy query to
The Parent Query Filter allows filtering for all child elements by providing the parent element.
Categories of consent From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon), go to Site Configuration > Consent Management > Categories. The Consent categories page opens displaying all existing consent categories. To select which columns to display on this page, select the Column settings icon and select from the options listed. The categories of use that you
Problem The Index Manager running on Windows Server 2008 or 2012 reports Http AddUrl Failed" in the Operations Center log.Clients connecting to the server cannot extract a list of available indexes. Possible causes The process account does not have built-in administrator privileges. This only applies to Index Manager 7.0. The index name contains in
Legacy note: This feature was discontinued on July 1, 2021. Versions released after that date don't contain this feature. Overview How to pick files in FotoWeb for iPad and display them in a slideshow on a FotoWeb screen. What are screens? Using a computer in your network you can access your FotoWeb server (it has to be the same server that your iPa
In an archive, you can manage consent for one or several assets, as required. You can use manage consent to link assets to consent forms, request a signature, and mark or unmark an asset as not needing consent or needing more consent. In the archive, locate and select the assets you would like to link with a consent form. You can select an individua
Signing a consent form by QR code You can sign a consent form by scanning a QR code directly on your mobile device. You can also sign a consent form by opening a link sent to you by email. For more information about both options, see Requesting consent for use. If you are signing a consent form as a guardian, these steps vary slightly as you need to
The following settings for video still images are additionally available. This video still image is used for generating thumbnails and static previews. Property Description positionInSeconds Specifies the position from which to produce the image. extension This property should not be overwritten, except for extensions that are identical like jpg vs
Will find all Items with multiple specific values in text fields. corporateInformation.note.simple:(lorem OR ipsum OR tmp) corporateInformation.note is the fieldpath > layer CorporateInformation, field note The fieldpath extension simple tells Picturepark to look for the value from the simple analyzer, usually the default for non-translated text.
The condition Tagbox Item Unassigned checks if a specific tagbox item ("a tag") is unassigned in a specific field e.g. Check if the tag "Twitter" is unassigned in the field "SocialMediaPlatforms" on Layer "CopyrightUsages" to then remove this image from Twitter. The Business Rule may check if the tag "Dealer Portal Europe" was unassigned to then e.g
Legacy note: This feature was discontinued on July 1, 2021. Versions released after that date don't contain this feature. What are screens? Using a computer in your network you can access your FotoWeb server (it has to be the same server that your iPad is connected to) and create a "Screen" from the login page. Anyone can then use FotoWeb on their i
Disk requirements The amount of disk space required by MongoDB depends entirely on the number of assets in the system. If the number of assets is stable, or if there is a steady influx/deletion rate in the archive so that the number of assets remains at a certain level, the instance will not grow. Each asset remains in MongoDB for approximately 10 d
This admin training task can be forwarded to all powerusers. Herewith they should get an insight into the Content Platform and get the know-how to work with the Picturepark Content Platform. For each task, the corresponding page from the user guide is noted, so you can get help if needed. Training
Light mode or dark mode The default setting for the Fotoware Mobile app is light mode. However, if you enable dark mode on your device, the app will also be displayed in dark mode. Android: Go to Settings > Display. Select Dark. iPhone: Go to Settings > Display and brightness. Select Dark.
A regular expression (usually called regex or regexp) is a sequence of characters that help you search in text (strings). Various systems use Regex for field validation and find or find & replace operations in text (strings). Regex is common in computer science. See Wikipedia Regex for more details. Regex is used in Picturepark Business Rules or
Register Please open your Picturepark invitation and register accordingly. (User guide chapter 1.1) Log in Now log in with the configured identity provider. (User guide chapter 1.2) Upload Now try to upload a new item in your Picturepark instance. (User guide chapter 4.1) Add new list item Please go ahead and create a new list item for the List “Tra
The FotoWeb setup and configuration wizard, fwsetup.exe, can be run as a command-line application to configure and update FotoWeb programmatically. The command-line interface has extended functionality, which is unavailable in the GUI and may be required in certain situations. Actions At least one action must be selected to control what the setup/up
As a parent or legal guardian, you can sign a consent form on behalf of your child. If both parents (or two guardians) need to give consent, each needs to sign a consent form and both consent forms can then be linked to the relevant asset. The consent form you sign must be based on a template with the Signee type defined as either Guardian or Person
Previewing content When you're in an archive, tap on any thumbnail in the grid to open a preview of that asset. You can now flick through previews by swiping sideways. To get back to the grid, touch the back button with the archive name in the top left corner. Zooming Simply pinch the preview to zoom in or out. When zooming in beyond 100%, the zoom
When a user runs an action that sends files to a destination, you might want to add information about the user that requested the processing.FotoWeb can add this information to specific fields in the metadata of the processed files. In the properties of the action in question, go to the Destination asset tab and turn on the Apply user identity to me
This is the privacy policy for the Fotoware Mobile app for Android. For the complete terms of use, see our End User License Agreement. When we refer to personal data in this privacy policy we mean any data that may identify you as an individual. You can find an explanation of each of the app's permissions below: Camera: Take Pictures and videos for
Updating the FotoWeb installation Note: Before you proceed, ensure you have read and understand the system requirements and have prepared your server for the FotoWeb installation according to the directions in Before you install. Before installing Before upgrading the FotoWeb installation, you must stop all Fotoware-related services on the server:
Signing a consent form by email You can sign a consent form by opening a link sent to you by email. You can also sign a consent form by scanning a QR code directly on your mobile device. For more information about both options, see Requesting consent for use. If you are signing a consent form as a guardian, there is one extra step where you enter de
Roles are assigned to registered users and define what a user is in general allowed to do in the Content Platform. Bear in mind that the role permission "Manage Content" is not sufficient as the Role also needs to be permitted to apply Layer or create Virtual Items. The role permissions are global access privileges. Super Admins are always present.
You create file-less content like press kits. Open the Content Browser in the main menu. Select + (Add). Select Create. Choose a suitable template (with a predefined set of fields, you can search too). Insert the values of the content item. 👉 See the creation of Virtual Type Items Use Cases Virtual Items Press Kits for a press portal: https://press.
The Picturepark Search is visible in all areas in Picturepark. In the Content Browser or List Item Browser, Picturepark offers search suggestions from the filters of the Channel or List settings that have search fields configured. The Picturepark Search supports three modes: AND, OR, Advanced with specific query syntax. You can construct complex adv
Previewing content When you're in an archive, tap on any thumbnail in the grid to open a preview of that asset. You can now flick through previews by swiping sideways. To get back to the grid, touch the back button with the archive name in the top left corner. Zooming Simply pinch the preview to zoom in or out. When zooming in beyond 100%, the zoom
These queries only work in "Advanced Mode". Using these queries allows searching/accessing specific values in specific fields on specific layers. Check the individual syntax per field. Search: Search in Metadata and Document Fulltext (Solutions) Search: Find Users by Identity Provider (Solutions) Search: Find Users by Creation Date Range (Solutions
General settings You can adjust some settings in the Fotoware Mobile app to suit your preferences. Select the Settings icon (circled in red below). You are presented with 4 choices: Manage consent forms - Select this to work with consent forms in the app. For more information about consent management in Fotoware, see Consent management. Compact Mod
Picturepark supports the following languages for metadata or share pages. This list is derived from Picturepark and can be found in Lists > Language. The languages with a two-letter IETF code are supported. Two-letter IETF Code Language af Afrikaans am Amharic ar Arabic az Azerbaijani be Belarusian bg Bulgarian bn Bengali bs Bosnian ca Catalan cs
The following settings for video still images are additionally available. This video still image is used for generating thumbnails and static previews. Property Description positionInSeconds Specifies the position from which to produce the image. extension This property should not be overwritten, except for extensions that are identical like jpg vs
The Metadata node in the configuration window lets you set up and configure all aspects of the handling of metadata in your system. It is extremely important that all Fotoware products in your system use the same metadata configuration. The configuration files, called metadata schema files, can be configured on a computer running e.g. FotoStation us
Displaying search results Tap on one of the archives in the search result to display the files found in that archive in a grid view. Thumbnail view To scroll through the thumbnails in the grid, swipe up or down. To return to the search results, select the back arrow in the upper-left corner (circled in red above). In the Filters drop-down list, you
About workflows FotoWeb's workflows can be used to process in different ways or transfer them to a preset destination. Only destinations without interactivity enabled on the server will be available on your device. Picking files to process from the grid When browsing an archive, for example after you've performed a search, the most conventient way t
Picturepark uses accounts and an Identity Server to identify users. Accounts control only whether the account holder may connect to Picturepark to access and edit that user's profile. Once connected, the Roles and Permission Sets of the account determine access to content and other parts of the system. Pictureparks Identity Server handles the accoun
The challenge At Fotoware, we have an incoming wire feed of photos and videos that allows us to replicate a real-life production system for testing our software. Due to licensing restrictions, we only have rights to publish pictures and videos that are three days old or more on our demo servers. This has been solved by setting up a combination of In
These rights are granted to users (user rights) by assigning users to the role. User rights are sorted alphabetically. Permission What does this mean? Notes Create and configure identity providers Required to set up and configure identity providers for authentication via ADFS or Azure AD. Additional information about configuring ADFS authentication
Overview When starting FotoWeb on your iPad, you must choose a FotoWeb server to connect to and specify your login credentials. Setting site and user credentials When starting FotoWeb for iPad after installing it from the App Store, you must enter a hostname, user name, and password. This information can be obtained from the person responsible for m
Searching To search your asset library, tap the search field (outlined in red below) and enter a search word. You can select Recent, Archives, Albums, or Pins to search a specific location. If you enter more than one word, Fotoware Mobile will search for files that contain all of the words, but not necessarily in the exact order that they were enter
Overview How to rate and set the status of your assets using FotoWeb for iPad Rating an asset The rating control is located in the lower metadata overlay on the asset's preview. To rate the asset, touch the star rating once for every star you wish to add. To clear the rating simply touch until you get five stars and then touch the star rating contro
The display pattern and filters are written in Liquid Syntax, which is the Shopify templating language. It has objects (the field values), filters (manipulations like uppercase) and tags (if/else operations). Please make yourself familiar when you plan to update the display pattern with specific patterns. {% if %} {{data.layerid.fieldid | filter}} {
Please read this disclaimer ("Disclaimer") carefully before using the Picturepark - Content Automation Hub for DAM, PIM & MDM. Website (“Website”) operated by Fotoware Switzerland AG (“Picturepark”, "us", 'we", "our"). The content displayed on the Website is intellectual property belonging to us. You may reuse, republish, or reprint such content
When a quick rendition of an asset is requested, either interactively by a user or via the API, Fotoware delivers the preview along with its metadata. However, in some circumstances, you may want to automatically strip certain information from the file before it's delivered to the client. You can do so by choosing the specific fields that should be
You can manage which groups of users are allowed to review manage annotations; this means that they can edit and delete annotations and annotation comments that other users have created. Open the properties page of a group and, in the Administrative permissions section, tick the option to Manage annotations.
An embed in Picturepark creates embed code for one or multiple Content Items and Virtual Items, which can be embedded into websites or landing pages. Picturepark offers a direct image link or an HTML link. The embed link allows resizing in the embed viewer or by directly updating width and height values in the embed link, e.g. https://demo.picturepa
When you work with your assets, you will likely want to copy or move certain files to other folders or even to completely different archives. The permissions that control which archives you can copy and move to and from are set on the server side, so this topic deals with how you use the main web interface to select and reorganize your files. Organi
Collections are groups of content items that have been collected by a user and saved for further refinement, sharing or editing. You can create a collection by switching over to “Collection” in the top right and clicking on the plus sign. To add images to your newly created collection, you can click on the star sign in the top right of every file. T
URL http://servername/ArchiveAgentPath/Information Parameters None Return value A ‘Portal Agent Information’ XML document: 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 <?xml version="1.0" ?> <PortalAgentInformation> <Company>Fotoware a.s.</Company> <Address>Bryggegata 7, N-0250 Oslo, Norway</Address> <SalesEmail>sales@f
Connect is a file transfer automation server from Fotoware. It monitors multiple inputs and distributes files from local or network folders, FTP sites, FotoWeb and Index Manager servers, or even email mailboxes. It is the ideal tool for centralized archives with a need to distribute files to a number of branch offices, or as an in-house utility to a
Note: If you're using the FotoWeb Pro interface, this article does not apply. For information on how to add metadata in the Pro interface, see Editing metadata in FotoWeb Pro. Editing a single field You can only edit asset metadata if the system administrator gives you access to the archive in question. From the grid, click on a thumbnail to open th
Modyfing the stemming configuration Where: C:\Programdata\Fotoware\Index Manager\Index Control\Stemming.dat By defining stemming rules, you can manage how Index Manager interprets searches for morphological variations of a word. In simple terms, it allows you to, for example, search for a singular form of a noun and have the search engine also retur
Overview This article lists all possible values of the doctype attribute of an asset in the API. This attribute specifies the asset type and determines which fields are present in the attributes subsection. Document types Value Attribute fields Description Image imageattributes, (photoAttributes) A still image file, such as JPEG, TIF, PNG. Movie vid
How to configure an action to delete the original asset in the archive you are working in. If you'd like to delete the original asset(s) from the archive when you've processed them, open the action properties and go to the Source asset tab. The settings on this tab relate to what's being done to the original asset in the archive. This can for exampl
💡 Permission on Schemas (who can view, edit) You can apply Schema Permission Sets only to schemas (List, Layer, Virtual Type, and Fieldset&Relation). Not to File Types. Your role must at least have Apply permissions in the Permission Set Permissions of each permission set and have at least Manage permissions on the schemas. Permission What it me
The Or Query Filter is an operator and allows adding multiple filters as array, any filter criteria must be fulfilled.
Mapping file name to metadata fields In the Color Factory Settings app, expand the relevant channel and select Metadata. Open the File Name to Metadata tab. With this feature, you can add parts of a file’s name to specified fields in the metadata. First, choose the number of parts in which the file names are split. Typically, a separator is used to
FotoWeb supports search for time points and time ranges, numbers, and numeric ranges. This article explains how date/time values and numbers can be used in search queries and how search matches results using date/time and numeric values. Date/time values and numbers can be used as terms in Search Expressions as arguments to search query parameters i
Security checklist Web access to FotoWeb Since access to FotoWeb is often possible over the internet, it's important to configure the firewall to only allow access on http ports - port 80 for unsecured communications and/or port 443 for secured connections. Depending on the required level of security it is possible to configure FotoWeb to only allow
The OAuth 2.0 PKCE (Proof Key for Code Exchange) extension (RFC 7636) is used by applications to prove possession of the authorization code when redeeming the authorization code to request an access token. This prevents interception of the authorization code by malicious applications or websites listening on the redirection endpoint. PKCE is current
Fotoware is committed to performing regular security reviews of our software. Additionally, independent penetration tests are regularly executed by third-party companies on behalf of customers in their own environment. Although we can never guarantee that our software is free of vulnerabilities, any vulnerabilities found are immediately addressed an
This feature is only available when using Extended Actions. Extended Actions are only available to Fotoware Main Users and Fotoware Pro Users. Open the action's properties and go to the Source asset tab. Turn on the Execute webhook toggle and enter the webhook URL. From the Content type drop-down list, select the type of data to transfer from FotoWe
Select Word list from the drop-down list instead of Calendar Dates. Note that if you have many files and/or much metadata in the files, extracting the metadata from the metadata fields might take some time. However, this should not be a problem when working with an archive that is indexed by Index Manager. You can monitor the progress in FotoStation
Go to File > Configuration. Expand the General node and select Security. In the Disabled functions section, select Add. Select View version history. You will not be able to see versions at all. Select Edit versions history. You will be able to see versions but not edit them or make any changes. Select OK to save your changes.
Prerequisites Stop all running Fotoware programs: Go to Start > Windows Administrative Tools > Services. Locate and stop all Fotoware services. We recommend backing up your existing configuration before performing the upgrade. If you're running on a virtual server, you can take a snapshot of the system so that you can revert if necessary. If
A workflow consists of an orchestrated and repeatable pattern of activity enabled by the systematic organization of resources into processes that transform materials or process information. Workflow functionality in Flow refers to a series of automated changes to data or metadata on assets (work items).
You can modify the properties of an existing user in Fotoware in the User Management console. From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon), go to Manage Users/Groups. Use the Search field to locate the user as needed. Select Edit for the user whose properties you need to change. Make the necessary changes. Select Save.
Enabling annotations in an archive From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon), go to Site Configuration > Archives. Select Edit for the specific archive. On the General tab, turn on the Enable annotations toggle. Select Save. All users with access to the archive can see the annotations created on assets. Giving users or groups access to create annotatio
Where to configure this: Fotoware Site Configuration - Security - Authentication Providers Fotoware supports several mechanisms for authenticating users through a web browser. These can be coupled with Single Sign-On (SSO) to give users effortless access to the DAM system without requiring manual input of user credentials. When using Fotoware Authen
The AssignContentPermissionSetsAction assigns content permission sets to content e.g. give access to suppliers. Specific Definitions Type-ahead and select the content permission set from the dropdown. The Permission Set ID is used in the Business Rule, so you can update the name anytime. Property Value kind AssignContentPermissionSetsAction permiss
To access Archive Agent, you need to send an HTTP request following a specific format. The format of the URLs has been standardized, so that you can write client software without knowing anything about the architecture of the archive agent server. The URLs have been designed so that it is possible to develop agents in any web application technology.
From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon), go to Site Configuration > Appearance > Renditions. Thumbnail and preview quality On these pages, you can manage the quality of the thumbnails and previews that Fotoware generates. All asset representations smaller than up to 200 pixels in size are rendered using the Thumbnail settings on this page. Represe
Groups can be assigned administrative privileges to manage certain tasks on the site. To set these permissions, go to the Group management console: open the Tools menu (cogwheel icon) and choose Manage Users/Groups. Edit the properties of a group, and the permissions are listed on the General page under Administrative permissions. Permission Descrip
Overview Fotoware search expressions are a rich query language that can be used by both regular users and API clients to get more fine-tuned search results. Some of its features are: Boolean operators (AND, OR, NOT) Search in specific metadata fields vs. "full text search" Date and numeric ranges Dynamic tag expansion Search expressions can be used
About the logs By default, the log files are written to C:\ProgramData\Fotoware\Log Files The current log file is called FWEvents.log. In the History folder at the same location as mentioned above you can find old log files. A new log file is created every day or when the log's file size exceeds 500 MB. The log file is written in NLog format, so any
Overview After creating a consent form template that contains all the information, categories, and fields you require, you can obtain the user's consent either by using the Fotoware Mobile app or by sending a request to sign from the consent forms management page in the Fotoware web interface. Requesting consent using the Fotoware web interface The
With the Fotoware Extension for InDesign, you can find and place files from Fotoware archives into InDesign layouts. If the extension isn't visible after starting InDesign, open the Window menu and choose FotoWeb Desktop. If the extension isn't visible there, you need to add it using the Adobe Extensions Manager. Logging in When the extension is ac
General behavior Generally, Fotoware handles EXIF fields as read-only fields. This implies that the information can be read out and displayed to users. They can for instance be displayed (but not edited) in FotoStation by adding them to the Display Template shown below the thumbnail grid. Some EXIF fields, however, are mapped to XMP, and as such can
Fotoware as a Service - April 2022 update Deployment This release has been fully deployed to all tenants. Summary Version Control For more information, see Version Control in Fotoware,Setting archive access and permissions, and Notifications when assets change in Fotoware. Support for large file uploads through our APIs and Web Uploader For more in
To log out of FotoWeb, click on your profile picture in the top right corner of the browser window and choose Logout. Note Logging out when you leave your computer is important to avoid unauthorized access to FotoWeb. Also, note that when you're logged in through a web browser, you won't be able to log in through another web browser in the network u
Fields in Picturepark save metadata values or values of the List Item or Virtual Item content. A group of fields serves basically as a form for data entry. You know different types of fields from any form on the internet, where you provide data like your name, email, or phone number. Picturepark offers different Field Types, each suited to particula
Uploading from Azure Storage To upload assets from Azure Storage, you must create a connection between Flow and your Azure Storage. This link is automatically created and sent to your Fotoware storage when you define your workflow template settings. (Does that make sense?) Select the Connect to Azure Storage node. Select Create connection. A SAS URI
The Geo Distance Query Filter works on Geo Point values which are in distance of a defined geo point location. In a channel for regional content you can only show Content Items created within 50km distance.
Elements All the elements of the XML document are required. The BriefDescription and Description elements may contain pure text or valid XHTML. Example 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 <PortalAgentInformation> <Company /> <Address /> <SalesEmail /> <SupportEmail /> <Phone /> <Fax /> <Url /> riefDescrip
FotoStation lets you easily clone an archive to create a copy that you can modify slightly: Right-click (Ctrl-click on Mac) the archive you would like to clone, and choose Duplicate... from the context menu. The Archive properties page opens and lets you choose a new name for the duplicate, as well as adjust any settings as needed. Finally, click OK
An example .NET application, written in C#, that integrates FotoWeb with a custom checkout page using the order API can be found in our Bitbucket repo.
When an asset download is requested, either by a user or via the API, Fotoware delivers the file along with its metadata. However, in some circumstances, you may want to automatically strip certain information from the file before it's delivered to the client. You can do so by choosing the specific fields that should be included when users download
When working with assets in the FotoWeb interface in your browser, there are some keyboard shortcuts that can help you perform operations more quickly. If you're using FotoWeb Pro, there are other keyboard shortcuts for that interface. Modifying a selection Keyboard key What it does Ctrl-click (Command-click on Mac) Select individual file in grid. N
What unions are for If you are running Index Manager Enterprise, you can configure Unions. Unions allow users to search and access files from several different indexed archives through a single entry point. The indexes connected in a union can either be local or on another Index Manager server in the network. Unions can also be used to provide a ba
Where: Expand the Archives node in the configuration tree. In the FotoStation configuration, select the Archives node in the configuration tree. Select New to create a new archive. Other ways to create an archive To create an archive from the main window in FotoStation, right-click a blank area inside the Archives side panel and select Create archiv
If your computer has a HDPI or Retina display, you can enable high-quality thumbnails in the FotoWeb grid: Click on your avatar in the top right-hand corner and choose High Quality Thumbnails. Note that this functionality is available only in the main FotoWeb interface, and only for logged-in users with a Standard license or higher. It will not show
The Execution Scope is the data which the Business Rule will use for validating the conditions and executing the actions, which means the underlying index. The area which the Business Rule will work.
To rate an asset, select one or more assets on the thumbnail grid page (tip: use Shift and Ctrl keys to make multi-file selections) and then select Set Rating in the Action bar. Finally, click on a star rating in the overlay to apply it to the selection of files. Rating assets from the Details page When viewing an asset on the Details page, you can
This topic explains how you can manage the metadata and field names that are displayed in FotoWeb and which fields are included in previews and downloads. You can also assign meaningful labels to custom and unused fields so these can be assigned to archives to allow users to enter custom metadata. Managing metadata handling From the Tools menu (cogw
When Consent Management is enabled for the archive and assets are linked with one or more consent forms, each asset displays a consent status marker. This marker is displayed in the FotoWeb asset grid and on the asset details page and indicates the consent status of the asset. This allows you to easily track whether or not you have consent to use a
Overview How to enable CORS to allow an application to make requests to the Fotoware API. When is CORS needed? A single-page web application (SPA) can make requests to the FotoWeb API directly from JavaScript using "AJAX" (or XHR) requests. This requires that cross-origin resource sharing (CORS) is enabled (unless the application and the FotoWeb si
No special settings for all audio files are available. The following output format settings are available for all file types . Property Description sourceOutputFormats Which output format should be used as a source for rendering. This allows you to render small thumbnails from formats other than the original to save rendering power and time. See
Enabling the FTP server By default, the FTP server is disabled in Flow. To enable the FTP server on your tenant, you need a subscription plan that includes FTP functionality. Once you have the appropriate plan, contact Fotoware to activate the FTP server for your account. Prerequisites There are no extra system requirements or prerequisites other t
If you receive pictures uploaded from the FotoWeb Desktop uploader for Windows and Mac you can turn on a feature in the archive settings that enforce client-side conversion of all pictures to JPEG before upload. Not only can this be cost-saving when uploading files over mobile networks, it can also be an effective way of ensuring format consistency
Note: XMP has been the established industry standard for reading and writing embedded metadata for over two decades and we will continue our efforts to remain the industry leader in XMP capabilities adoption. As most applications and devices now exclusively use XMP as the format for reading and writing embedded metadata, we see that the additional s
This variant of the authorization process is for native applications (or native apps), such as mobile apps, desktop applications, or plugins for native desktop applications, such as Microsoft Office. A native app is a public client because it cannot securely store a secret, as the secret could be retrieved by reverse-engineering the code of the nati
Funkinform Crop Creation XML In Color Factory Settings, expand the relevant channel and select XML & Job Request Files. Open the XML formats tab. The following dialog appears. Select Enable Funkinform Crop Creation XML to process Funkinform XML files. To ignore color management options specified in the XML, select Ignore RGB Color Management Co
Adding assets to a workflow queue The workflow outputs, called actions, are located in the right side panel of the interface. When you have made a selection of files, you can simply then cross to an action to add them to the queue. You can also add more files to the queue if you wish, and you can remove individual files by clicking on the X that app
A single-page application (SPA) in this context means a pure front-end web application that does not communicate with a back-end other than for loading static resources, such as HTML, JavaScript, etc). There are three options: If your web application has a back-end, use the same approach as for web applications and APIs (most secure, requires back-
If your computer has a HDPI or Retina display, you can enable high-quality thumbnails in the FotoWeb grid: Click on your avatar in the top right-hand corner and choose High Quality Thumbnails. Note that this functionality is available only in the main FotoWeb interface and only for logged-in users with a Standard license or higher. It will not show
Input sources The following input sources are available for Flow: FTP Azure storage SaaS
Note: Implicit grant is deprecated in OAuth 2.1 For information about how to register the application, see application registration. Protocol flow The client opens a browser window to the following URL (line breaks are added for readability. All parameter values must be URL-encoded): https://myfotowebserver.com/fotoweb/oauth2/authorize? response_ty
Export To update your lists, you can navigate to “Lists” again and click on the list you want to update. Then click on the 3 dots and select “Export”. You can then choose which fields you want to export. The excel export should then contain all fields, including the Picturepark ID. Update The existing values of this list all have a Picturepark ID as
The are two pages in Flow where you can monitor ongoing actions and exports: System Log and Exports System Log Go to Monitoring > System Log to open a page displaying all activities performed in Flow. This is a read-only page that displays information to help you track changes, audit processes, identify issues, and optimize workflows effectively.
Creating poster frames for FotoStation When Index Manager finds video files in the document stores, it will try to read out the files' metadata and extract a preview of the file to use as a poster frame in FotoStation. To do so, Index Manager uses the DirectShow (Windows Media) framework. You may also need to install additional codecs to correctly e
Note: The Fotoware Application Activation Wizard has been superseded by the fwlicensetool for managing activations. For information on how to obtain this tool and use it to manage software activation from the command prompt, see Command line activation of Fotoware applications using fwlicensetool. License repair Fotoware applications use a software
How comments work Comments are used throughout the system to let you leave a comment on an archive, an album, or an individual asset. Using comments, you can interact with other system users to make suggestions for use, discuss which files in a collection are best suited for use in a certain context, and so on. Fotoware comments are available within
You can rename workflows on the Dashboard. You might need to rename a workflow to better reflect its functions or contents, for example. Select ... for the workflow you would like to rename and select Rename. Enter the new name. Select Save.
When working in FotoWeb Pro, you can bring up a complete overview of all available keyboard shortcuts by pressing the ? key on the keyboard.
Show all Picturepark partners near Berlin, 50km radius. This way your sales people can get an easy overview of partners to visit or to invite for a specific partner event. { "kind": "GeoDistanceFilter", "field": "layerId.fieldId", "location": { "lat": 52.5200, "lon": 13.4050, }, "distance": 50000 // DISTANCE IN METERS }
Using SmartFolders SmartFolders are used to let you perform advanced searches in archives without having to know anything about the underlying search syntax used by the system. The managers of the archive may have set up a rich hierarchy of clickable nodes that you can find in the left hand side panel, with meaningful names that help you see what re
The components in a Fotoware system A Fotoware DAM system consists of several components, some of which are optional. The diagram below illustrates the core and peripheral services of the system. Core services Index Manager is the engine that monitors and indexes watched folders on a server. It extracts metadata and provides search services for
Full feature list FotoStation Pro is designed for individual users and offers powerful metadata capabilities and workflow features. Note: FotoStation Pro is now deprecated, for more information, see Important announcement for FotoStation Pro users - FotoStation FotoStation Client is designed for large and small groups and is only available to use wi
Adding comments to an asset To add a comment to an asset, click on it and open up the Asset information panel (press T). Select the Comments tab and then click on the speech bubble tab. Now you can add a comment to the asset, and it's possible to drop additional assets in to add those to your comment. This way you can for example ask other users of
Overview See how you can spell check the metadata you have entered in the editor. Spell-checking your content If you have Microsoft Word installed on your computer, you can spell-check the metadata text. (On the Mac, spell checking is built in.) Select one or more files and open the metadata editor as described earlier. If you want to check the spel
Index optimization An index, like a file system, becomes fragmented as files are added and removed from it. Index Optimization is a process in which the index is defragmented and optimized to deliver fast search results. As a system administrator, you can configure indexes for automatic optimization at a time of day when users aren't actively access
An archived album cannot be modified in any way. If you want to reactivate an album that you've archived, here's how. To reactivate an archived album, locate it by going to the Albums page through the link in the top banner and then filter by archived albums. Having opened up the archived album, click on the box icon in the panel to the left to unar
How FotoStation works Unlike many database-based asset management systems, FotoStation does not need to import pictures from your drive into a special database for you to be able to work with them. When you use FotoStation as a stand-alone product, without a connection to other Fotoware server applications, you can simply point it to a folder on a l
Prerequisite Make sure your system complies with the system requirements. Mac installation Download FotoStation. Double-click the disk image (.dmg) file to mount it on your desktop. Copy the FotoStation icon onto the Applications shortcut to the hard drive. Double-click the Applications shortcut and then double-click the FotoStation icon to start t
Index Manager is a crawling server and high-speed search engine. A server application for Windows Server, it is the heart of a Fotoware DAM system and works in the background, continuously updating metadata and scanning new content as it moves around the system. Index Manager scans continuously associated file servers and file shares and creates vir
The following settings for .aac are additionally available. Property Description profile Gets or sets the encoding profile. One of Profile; Enum: "aac_low" "mpeg2_aac_low" "aac_ltp" "aac_main". coder Gets or sets the encoding coder. One of Coder; Enum: "twoloop" "anmr" "fast". bitrate Gets or sets the bitrate of the encoding in kbps. variableBitRa
Method 1: Passing credentials in the query string This authentication method is stateless and does not require storing persistent information on the client side. However, user credentials must be sent with every request, which requires the client application to always know the user's password. The following query string can be added to every request
The resize modification resizes formats to a certain size. This is available for all file types (images, video, audio, document). Property Value Details kind ResizeAction width Whole numbers, in pixel Width of the output format. height Whole numbers, in pixel Height of the output format. resizeMode Enum: "Resize" "Fit" "Shrink" Specifies how the
In very complex domain setups, you may experience that the user lookup during login to FotoWeb times out before the user can be located, making it impossible to log in. To this end, it is possible to manage which parts of the domain FotoWeb queries during login by adding the undesired parts of the domain to an exclusion list that will not be queried
There are two permission levels for Flow, these are set in the Site Configuration in Fotoware Veloz. At least one of these permissions needs to be selected to enable Flow. View Flow - Allows users to view all workflows configured for their tenant. Users with this permission can access the Dashboard and see each workflow, but cannot create, edit,
Overview How to adjust image contrast in FotoStation's image editor Using SmartContrast In addition to adjusting levels or curves to improve image contrast, FotoStation has a special filter called SmartContrast that combines several techniques to produce the best possible result. The filter has no settings, it can simply be applied by selecting the
Settings This sub action is used for writing files to a CD or a DVD. The disc is written in standard ISO format, which means it can be read both in Windows and Mac OS. FotoStation uses multi-session writing of CD’s in Windows, which means that files can be added to a CD several times until the maximum capacity of the disc is reached. In Mac OS, the
The watermark modification applies an image overlay. You need to store your watermark image (png, gif, tiff) on an absolute path on the server. Then you can define a distance from the four borders in pixels (margin left, margin top, margin right, margin bottom). You can leave the margins empty. You must set the opacity (0.1 to 1) used for transparen
This will filter for all Content Items which have the Content Schema "Image Metadata" assigned and for all Content Items which have the Layer "Copyright Information" assigned. { "kind": "AndFilter", "filters": [ { "kind": "TermFilter", "field": "contentSchemaId", "term": "ImageMetadata" },
Auto-tagging In Fotoware, auto-tagging refers to the automated process of assigning descriptive tags to images. Using Artificial Intelligence (AI), Fotoware can automatically detect keywords, brands, and faces and extract text content from images. Fotoware uses Azure Cognitive Services for AI. For more information, see Cognitive Services—APIs for A
This topic explains how to activate the auto-tagging feature using an extended action. This allows users to request the asset to be tagged by selecting a button in the user interface. For more information about interactive actions, see Creating and configuring actions. From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon), go to Site Configuration > Workflows >
The MongoDB data folder contains all the information that FotoWeb stores in the MongoDB database. Because this folder can become quite large over time it may be desirable to store it on a different drive than the system drive (C:\)This can be accomplished using a file system junction point which points to another drive. Steps to relocate the MongoDB
Enabling Annotations in an Archive This is set up in on the Metadata tab of the Archive properties in the Operations Center. When enabled, all users with access to the archive will be able to see the annotations that have been created on assets. Giving Users or Groups access to Create Annotations in the Archive Access List This is done by adding the
The alpha handling modification handles alpha channels (transparency) in images, so transparency in PNG is handled when converted into JPG (which has no transparency). Property Value Details kind AlphaHandlingAction alphaHandling Enum: "DiscardAlpha" "ReplaceAlpha" "ReplaceInvertedAlpha" Discard Alpha – alpha channel is discarded from the output
The Geo Bounding Box Query Filter works on Geo Point values which are inside the rectangle of the defined geo bounding box. In a tagbox you can filter for partner events in the DACH region.
Picturepark Listen sind Listen von Tags oder Werten. Diese Listen sind über Tagbox-Felder mit Layern verknüpft. Der Hauptvorteil von Listen besteht darin, dass Listen mit mehreren Zeilen erstellt werden können, sodass mehrere Informationen hinter einem Tag/Wert gespeichert werden können. Ein weiterer Vorteil ist, dass sie über ihre ID getaggt werden
JRFs are Job Request Files, plain ASCII-format instruction files that any third-party application can generate and drop into a Color Factory channel's input to have it pick up a file and process it before storing it in a designated folder. This allows any third-party app to use the processing power in Color Factory to, for example, crop, resize or c
When you select assets in the main FotoWeb interface, the action bar shows everything you can do with the selected assets. The options available will depend on how your system administrator has configured the archive. Below is a list of all the functionality available, with links to the relevant topics that describe the individual features. Availabl
This article describes all dynamic tags that expand to the current date and time. Different tags expand to the current date and time in different formats and time zones or to components of the current calendar date and wall clock time. These tags can be used everywhere where dynamic tags are allowed, including actions and search expressions. Tip: In
Overview This topic explains the possibilities for playing back audio clips in FotoStation. Audio playback in the grid Audio files can be played back in the grid by clicking on the little play icon on the thumbnail. Audio playback in the metadata editor FotoStation groups digital camera pictures with voice annotations in wave format so you see them
How it works The plugin provides a decorator for the existing content selector or a button in the TinyMCE toolbar, enabling users to choose content from the DAM. Once selected, the content (or a shared embedding) is downloaded and imported into the default Optimizely media management system. Examples Example of the decorator on a Video content refer
Fotoware as a Service - April 2024 hotfix 1 Deployment This release has already been deployed to all tenants. Note: We advise every user to update their FWDT version to avoid issues when using it with integrations such as the Microsoft Office Plugin. Fixed issue When using autosearch filters on archives with dynamic date ranges in the Pro interface
The unsharp mask action allows unsharp masking based on the specified amount, radius, and threshold. The following values need to be defined: Amount of 1 to 500 percent, Radius of 0.1 to 1000.0 pixels, and a Threshold of 1 to 255 levels. Property Value Details kind UnsharpenMaskAction amount Amount of 1 to 500 percent. Unsharp mask amount (the dif
Goal: Content Items that have been created in the last month, to only have the newest content produced for tagging and further enrichment. Limitation This channel filter example uses EXIF data (technical (camera) data). Not all files have EXIF data, so use the technical data which is present with your files. Picturepark Setup Layer: Exif Fields:
Picturepark supports the following transformations. Below is an overview of possible output for the listed input file type and corresponding actions. For information about supported file formats in Picturepark, see Supported File Formats. Picturepark automatically modifies the following: Rotate Action — You cannot select this rotate action or defin
Legacy Notice Note: Legacy Widget and API Key Authentication are deprecated and will be set to End of Life on January 1st, 2025. If you have implemented custom integrations with FotoWeb, such as CMS integrations, we recommend updating the authentication methods in use to OAuth, which was introduced in FotoWeb FR12 (version 8.0.850). Legacy authenti
Display a text with different variables when the search returns no results. Variables response.searchString request.filter filterCount "missingResultsDisplayPatterns": { "en": "There is no content found using your search string <b>{{response.searchString}}</b>{% if request.filter %}{% assign filterCount = 1 %}{% if request.filter.kind
You can use Connect to retrieve emails from a Microsoft 365 mailbox using IMAP and access keys. However, you can only receive emails from Microsoft Outlook; you cannot send or forward emails. Accordingly, if you select Microsoft as the hosting provider, you can only specify Source folders for the mail server. Rebex is the vendor of the underlying t
Problem: If the channel is not accessible with a saved bookmark the Channel was probably removed. Open Settings Check if the Channel is there or contact your Picturepark Admin.
Cross-Origin Resource Sharing (CORS) allows UI integrations to make API requests from external domains directly from the UI and allows web-based integrations to make requests directly to the Fotoware API from JavaScript code within a website without using the back end. CORS is disabled by default. To enable CORS: From the Tools menu (cogwheel ico
Customizing multi-search views A multi-search view is slightly similar to a Classify view but can be customized to a greater extent. Files are sorted in columns based on their metadata content, which is determined by a search. For instance, you can set up a limited search for a certain abbreviation in the Category metadata field and sort files accor
The crop modification crops your rectangle dimensions, starting at the x:y coordinates. Property Value Details kind CropAction x Whole numbers, in pixel X-Coordinate of the top-left point of the cropping rectangle. y Whole numbers, in pixel Y-Coordinate of the top-left point of the cropping rectangle. width Whole numbers, in pixel Width of the cr
To log out of FotoWeb, click on your profile picture in the top right corner of the browser window and choose Log out. Note It's important to log out when you leave your computer to avoid unauthorized access to FotoWeb. Also, note that when you're logged in through a web browser, you won't be able to log in through another web browser in the netwo
Goal: When your users will search for something they may expect fuzziness or corrections, which are not yet available to the full degree. Therefore you can help them by displaying a note which explains the correct syntax, as not all users may be fully familiar with ES Query Syntax. See it in Picturepark Make yourself familiar with search analyzers
Note: Your existing license keys are extended when you renew your agreement. Automatic agreement fulfillment and the licensing distribution process What are the implications of automatic fulfillment? Fulfillment is the automated process through which you receive your license keys via email, either on the start date of your agreement or upon its rene
The DocumentType Content means Content Items visible in the Content Browser, this includes File Items and Virtual Items.
If you want to sort your Content Items in the Channel by File Size to easily find the smallest or biggest images you can add the File Size as Sort. Instructions Follow these steps to add the file size as sorting to a channel. Open Schemas > Files > File (/schemas/file-types/FileMetadata) Scroll to Fields Edit the field: FileSizeInBytes Change
How to create a channel In the Connect Settings app, go to Channels. Select the group to which you want to add a channel and select Add channel. You can then choose input and output folders for the channel and, optionally, specify a routing to apply to the channel. Select Save. Channel settings When creating a channel there are many settings to all
Setting up and maintaining ADFS is outside the scope of FotoWeb. Therefore, these instructions are basic and not necessarily suitable and secure enough for production systems. For more information, see Microsoft Active Directory Federation Services documentation or consult your IT administrator. Warning For security reasons, do NOT expose the primar
This article describes all dynamic tags that can be used in metadata macros and dynamically generated file names in actions and marker actions. These tags cannot be used in search expressions. Tags in the namespace task refer to the currently running action or marker action. Tags in the namespace asset refer to one of the following: The current asse
Summary Show a Google Maps link to the company headquarter, using the geolocation values, joined with a comma. {% if data.corporateInformation.headquarterLocation %} {% assign HqLocationLat = data.corporateInformation.headquarterLocation.lat %} {% assign HqLocationLon =data.corporateInformation.headquarterLocation.lon %} {% assign HqLocation = HqLoc
Fotoware as a Service - November 2023 update Deployment This release is being gradually deployed and will be available on all tenants soon. New functionality Activity Exports For more information, see Activity Exports. Fixed issues Previously, if the metadata field value was long, the content extended outside the field and onto the image on the pr
Some actions are only applicable for Content Items, like actions related to Permission Sets, AI Tagging, Layers. You cannot use Permission Sets, AI Tagging, or Layers for List Items. Nonetheless, actions are not filtered by the Trigger Point Document Type. That means that you can create a Business Rule for List Items with an Action that should assig
Summary Show a “Publish Me” message when a date (Id: embargoDate) on a Layer (Id: corporateInformation) is today or before today. {% assign today_date = 'now' | date: '%s' %} {% assign embargo_date = data.corporateInformation.embargoDate | local_date %} {% if today_date => embargo_date %} Embargo lifted! Publish Me! {% endif %} Setup in Picturepa
Summary Calculate the discounted product price based on a number field for product price and another number field for discount percentage. {% assign discount = data.corporateInformation.discountPercentage | divided_by: 100 %} {% assign discountValue = data.corporateInformation.productPrice | times: discount %} {% assign discountPrice = data.corporat
Fotoware does not natively support multifactor authentication (MFA). However, you can enable MFA for Fotoware Veloz and On-Premises by using single sign-on (SSO) with a third-party identity provider that supports MFA. Fotoware SSO works with Microsoft Entra ID, Microsoft Office 365, and any third-party identity provider that supports the SAML 2.0 pr
Note: Microsoft ended support for Azure Active Directory Authentication Library (ADAL) in June 2023. All 8.0 versions of FotoWeb On-Premises use the Azure Active Directory Authentication Library (ADAL) for Single Sign-on (SSO) with Microsoft Entra ID. FotoWeb 8.1 uses the newer Microsoft Authentication Library (MSAL) and is therefore supported by Mi
Summary Add product information from tags to the file name on download of a Content Item, by adding the product tags to the Display Pattern “Download file name”. {{data.productLayer.products | tagbox_name | join: ", " }} _ {{data.productLayer.products.bricks.category.name}} _ {{data.productLayer.products.bricks.campaign.name}} Setup in Picturepark L
Overview Learn how to crop images quickly, with or without resampling the image in the process. About the crop feature The Crop function can be invoked by selecting one or more images and selecting the Crop button on the toolbar (or using the keyboard shortcut Ctrl-K / Command-K). It makes it possible to perform two different types of image cropping
Adaptive Metadata Adaptive Metadata means to focus on the information required for the specific content. If your content model defines that your basic information should always include the address, then where does your product category live? Build Your Information Architecture (Data Model) You can build your data model from scratch, as well as your
Property Description Layers Add Here you see the Layers that can be added to the selected File Type. This way you can prevent multimedia layers being added to images. Reorder You can reorder the Layers, which has currently no impact in Picturepark. It is not possible to add fields to File Types, but you can update settings of available fields. Ge
Summary Show a list of tags, separated by comma, in the Display Pattern {{data.corporateInformation.persons | tagbox_list | join: ", "}} Setup in Picturepark Layer: Corporate Information Tagbox with multiple values: Persons Field Value Access data.corporateInformation.persons | tagbox_name | join: ", " data.corporateInformation.persons | tagbox_lis
Watermark uses Area Affects Archive properties sheet, on the Export tab Lets you set an archive-specific watermark that affects all users. Watermarks set for Quick Renditions on an archive Physically watermarks all user-generated previews made through Quick Renditions. Watermarks set on a processing profile Applies a watermark to files processed by
URL http://servername/ArchiveAgentPath/Download Parameters Id[ 1 ] A valid Id of the file to download. This id must be that returned by the ‘Search’ method. pp[ 1 ] The name of the processing profile to apply when downloading. Remember to url-encode the name if it contains spaces or special characters. Example: ?pp=WatermarkProfile Return value The
FotoWeb can transcode and play back audio and video files in your archives. To play back a video or audio file, you simply click on the Play icon on the thumbnail in FotoWeb Pro. It may be practical to adjust the grid size using the slider at the top right of the screen to get a larger video thumbnail. Additional playback control in Filmstrip and Pr
Goal: I want to update some Content Items in the Batch Editor, only a sub selection of which have a specific layer assigned. Your browser does not support HTML5 video. I select ten items for batch editing. Under Metadata, I see an overview of Assigned Layers and Available Layers for the ten selected items. In the Assigned Layers section, each laye
Creating a search-based purge channel In Color Factory Settings, right-click on Purging Channels and select New Purge Channel - Search. Enter a name for the channel. Select the channel node to configure it. Enable Index Manager Search and use Browse (...) to connect to the server and choose the index that should be searched. Enter the search criteri
Changing global folders This is where you can configure the Base Image folder and folders for files that cause processing errors or are of an unknown format. Upon first startup, a wizard will ask you to select a base image folder in which the folders assigned to each created channel are placed by default. If you want to change the base image folder
Additional input options are available when a channel acts as a secondary (slave) channel to another channel. When a channel is configured to use the input folder of another channel (for more information, see Creating a channel) it takes on the role of that channel’s secondary channel. Color Factory then processes the input files in the primary (mas
Wenn sich ein Benutzer registriert und seine E-Mail-Adresse bestätigt hat, muss ein Administrator den Benutzer überprüfen und genehmigen. Wenn ein Benutzer nicht überprüft wird, kann er nicht auf die Content Platform zugreifen.Um einen Benutzer auf Überprüft zu setzen, müssen Sie zum Menü “Zugriff” und dann zu “Benutzer” navigieren. In der Registerk
Overview How to pixelate parts of an image to mask content using the image editor in FotoStation. Feature By making a selection and choosing the Pixelate tool you can blur details in the picture that you want to obscure. It may for instance be used to remove sensitive information from a picture, such as the number plates of a car. You can choose fro
Summary I want to add red, large music icons for audio files. supported icon sizes are: 14, 18, and 24 <cp-icon name="music" size="24" color="red"></cp-icon> The use of icons is limited. See this list for supported icons in Display Pattern. Use Case: Music Icons for Audio I want to display the music note icon for all audio files. Open
Picturepark generates (renders) static (preconfigured, pre-rendered) and dynamic (on-demand rendered) formats. Both are available in the format selection dialogue which opens up when you download or share. Picturepark rendering is optimized to create formats fast and save rendering resources, reducing rendering times and failures. Picturepark does
LEGACY NOTE: This guide describes legacy functionality in FotoStation. In new versions of FotoStation configurations are maintained and downloaded to the client over FWP. See Creating and maintaining centralized FotoStation configurations for updated documentation. Creating users If you have more than one configuration stored on the network serve
To reset your password, follow the steps below. Open the Picturepark URL Select “need help?” Enter your email address Submit You should now receive an email with a link to reset your password. If you did not confirm your email address in the first place, an email confirmation mail instead of a reset password mail will be sent.
XMP Mapping allows the extraction and import of XMP/EXIF data into Picturepark metadata fields and the exporting of data from Picturepark metadata fields into XMP based on field mappings. The XMP handling happens when importing files into Picturepark or exporting from Picturepark. XMP Mapping must be enabled for the required output formats via API s
The Open ID Connect implementation for Okta OP may suit the Picturepark implementation. Okta OP is not officially tested or supported.
You can prepare your Excel for importing List Items by using the Excel list functionality for data validation. Select your cell and choose Data > Data Validation There you can define a List for data input, which can reference a column in another sheet.
The Produce Notification Action produces a Content Platform toast notification when the Business Rule conditions are met, e.g., inform about new images, inform about new Content Items with approved copyright information, or recalled Content Items. The Business Rule will execute, and if conditions are met, a notification toast is created. If the use
Version: 11.10.0 Status: Released Release: Güpfi Release Release date: March 07, 2024 Release Notes: 11.10 Previous Version: 11.9.0 Breaking changes Feature Endpoint/Contract Title Description Reference Content Search v1/contents/search Search in FullText Performing a search only inFullText and entering a SearchString that only contains fields speci
Version: 11.6.0 Status: Released Release: Blüemlisalphorn Release Release date: Mar 4th, 2023 Release Notes: Picturepark Blüemlisalphorn Release | Mar 2023 Previous Versions: 11.5.0 With the release of Picturepark 11.6, each customer will have their own unique DNS name for API access. To ensure your integration continues to work seamlessly after the
Prerequisites A created Number Sequence Trigger The trigger point (check Triggers in Business Rule Settings): Should trigger on a content creation -> Action Create We want to modify the document -> Execution scope Main doc Condition Goal: All files uploaded or virtual Content Items created in the Content Platform should receive an individual,
Summary You may want to show the file extension or original filename (standard file metadata) in calculated text fields in a layer. You can make those available to the search and have some basic information shown. {{outerData.data.imageMetadata.fileExtension | replace: ".", " " | upcase}} {{outerData.data.documentMetadata.documentTitle}} {{outerData
The Picturepark IDS as Identity Provider is managed by Picturepark, while you manage the users in the user management of your Picturpark. In an enterprise, there is often already a user repository in place (e.g. Active Directory) where all users of your organization are managed. To avoid scattered user management, you can add your existing repositor
Summary You can link to specific areas in Picturepark using relative links. The base URL of your Picturepark will be automatically added so your links don't break. <a href="/ContentBrowser/rulesRegulations">Click here for rules and regulations</a> Use Case I want to show links to channels or other lists as HTML link Open the Display Patt
Show only content created in Aarau. { "kind": "GeoBoundingBoxFilter", "field": "fieldpath", "topLeft": { "lat": 47.4117082, "lon": 8.0569206, }, "bottomRight": { "lat": 47.3854459, "lon": 9.0569206, } } Behavior Creates a rectangle of geo points using TopLeft (1) and BottomRight (2) points and filters fo
Filter for Content Items that have “Main Shot” or “Product Shot” assigned in the tagbox “Media type”. { "kind": "OrFilter", "filters": [ { "kind": "TermFilter", "field": "basicInformation.mediaType._refId", "term": "648b76b163654189be7b6638b31fb243" }, { "kind": "TermFilter",
Show content modified in December 2020. // USING EXACT DATES { "kind": "DateRangeFilter", "field": "audit.modificationDate", "range": { "names": { "fieldId.en":"Dec 2020", "fieldId.de":"Dez 2020" }, "from": "2020-12-01T00:00:00.000", "to": "2020-12-31T00:00:00.000", } } Show content with
FotoStation has keyboard shortcuts that let you quickly copy metadata from one asset and apply the same metadata to a whole selection of assets. You can preset which fields to copy in the control panel. To do so: First select the asset that contains the metadata that you would like to duplicate. Now, select Ctrl-Shift-C (Windows) or Command-Shift-C
Content Items where in the Layer Corporate Events are tagged (_refId exists). { "kind": "NestedFilter", "path": "corporateLayer.events", "filter": { "kind": "ExistsFilter", "field": "corporateLayer.events._refId" } } Basic Filter Show all content where a specific field exists in the metadata profile or content profile. { "kind": "ExistsFilter", "fi
Describes the JSON representation of a collection in the FotoWeb RESTful API. There are two representations, one that contains only information about the collection itself, and one that additionally contains part of the content of the collection, such as assets and sub collections. Usage Representation of ... MIME type: Accept: application/vnd.fotow
Dynamic tags In Flow, you can use the following dynamic tag in the search filter of input nodes. {{utcnow.date}}- Gives today's date in UTC To add days to or subtract days from utcnow.date , add the code +/-P{number of days}D. All dates are in UTC, so there is no support for time zones. Example: Finding assets that have a release date (field 30) b
Hide Stock content; Not the content with Layer Stock Info applied. // Complete example { "kind": "NotFilter", "filter": { "kind": "TermFilter", "field": "layerSchemaIds", "term": "StockInfo" //Layer_ID capitalized } } Basic Filter Not the provided criteria. { "kind": "NotFilter", "filter": { filter1 } } Properties kind string, required Filter only o
Filter for Content with the Migration Layer added and the term “Product” as keyword assigned. { "kind": "AndFilter", "filters": [ { "kind": "TermFilter", "field": "layerSchemaIds", "term": "MigrationLayer" //Layer ID capitalized }, { "kind": "NestedFilter", "path": "migrationLayer.keywords", "filter": { "kind": "TermFilter", "fi
not in use in UI { "kind": "ParentFilter", "parentType": "", "filter": { filter1 } } Properties kind string, required parentType The type of the parent document. filter (single) The filter to be applied on the child document. All kinds of filters are accepted.
Why the cache folder is important Index Manager creates and stores a low-resolution copy of the thumbnails and previews that it serves to the clients. This helps speed up the system since the server does not need to generate a new thumbnail and preview the next time a client requests a file that is in the cache. Caching is a major factor in optimizi
Templates are used for emails sent out from Picturepark e.g. a share or an invite to the system. Additionally, Pages like the Share Page are listed here. Templates are always available in both system languages (English and German). Share pages can also be translated into other metadata languages e.g. Spanish, French. There are two types of templates
Problem: If the new channel does not show Content Items it is probably a wrong Channel Filter. Open the Channel Edit Channel Filter Remove your Query Filter Validate if you can see now all Content in the Content Browser on your Channel. Adapt the Query Filter
Show Corporate or Event Content in a Channel. { "kind": "OrFilter", "filters": [ { "kind": "TermFilter", "field": "layerSchemaIds", "term": "CorporateLayer" }, { "kind": "TermFilter", "field": "layerSchemaIds", "term": "EventLayer" } ] } Basic Filter One or more of the provided criteria must be met. { "kind": "OrFilter", "filters": [ { fil
Show only technical documentation for admins, which based on an existing file naming convention starts with “ADMIN”. We have to use the Nested Filter as the Media Type is a multi tagbox. { "kind": "NestedFilter", "path": "productDocumentation.mediaType", "filter": { "kind": "PrefixFilter", "field": "productDocumentation.mediaT
Software requirements Windows Server 2022. 2019 or 2016 These components will be downloaded during installation. Connect is a 32-bit application but is compatible with 32-bit and 64-bit editions of Windows Server. Hardware requirements Minimum one 2.0 GHz processor, Multi-core / Multi-CPU system recommended Minimum 1 GB of system memory, 4 GB or mor
Administrators can create custom icons with links to resources that Fotoware users can click on to access. Button visibility can be customized so that buttons are even available for guests. Note: Custom links are available in both the main Fotoware interface and the Fotoware Pro interface Where is this configured? From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon)
Version control is a feature that keeps any number of revisions of an asset when it is updated, making it possible to revisit older versions and optionally restore them. Revisions are kept both when changes are made to the assets themselves - such as when editing an image in Photoshop - as well as when changes are made to an asset's metadata.
Finds all contents that are tagged with dogs but are especially interested in large dogs. Use the boost operator ^ in the simple search to make one term more relevant than another e.g. boost large: large^2 dogs Apply the boost operator to multiple terms using quotation marks: "large dogs"^2 Boosting in the search helps you define the relevance of yo
The installation and configuration of the ADFS service are on the sole behalf of the customers and not Picturepark related. Before the configuration of the Identity Provider in Picturepark ADFS must be properly installed and configured. Check Microsoft Docs for details: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/windows-server/identity/active-directory-feder
{% if data.videoStream.format %}Format: {{data.videoStream.format}}{% endif %} {% if data.videoStream.resolution %} - Resolution: {{data.videoStream.resolution}}{% endif %}
The orderData attribute of the order and the itemData field of an ordered item are both arrays that may contain custom order fields containing custom additional information about the order or each individual ordered item. These are key-value pairs that follow a schema that is defined in the site configuration. Custom order data may be entered by a c
What to do if the administrator account gets locked out after enabling SSO for a Fotoware site? This can happen if you enable SSO for a site and disable the regular login with a username and password. Users will then be forced to log in using SSO; if the SSO configuration is incomplete, it will be impossible to log in. Contact Fotoware Support to re
How to duplicate an action that you can make modify as you like. FotoStation lets you easily clone an action to create a copy that you can modify slightly: Right-click (Ctrl-click on Mac) the action you would like to clone, and choose Duplicate... from the context menu. The Action properties page opens and lets you choose a new name for the duplicat
If you have privileges to share bookmarks, you can share these with other users of the Pro interface to give them one-click access to perform common searches on the DAM system. How to share a bookmark When you've created a bookmark, clicking on the share icon on that bookmark makes that bookmark available for other FotoWeb Pro users in the system. T
Overview This topic outlines the options available to control the automatic enhancement of image contrast. Contrast enhancement In Color Factory Settings, expand the relevant channel and select Color & Contrast. The following dialog appears. If you select Enable SmartContrast™, Color Factory will automatically try to choose the best color enhan
Will find all Content Items which have the exact date time value "2022-02-15T23:00:00Z". You can find this value in the JSON of the Content Item. This query only works with an exact match. corporateInformation.embargoDate:"2022-02-15T23:00:00Z"
The Monaco Editor is a browser-based code editor that also powers Microsoft VS Code. Thanks to IntelliSense features, you can get suggestions by pressing Ctrl + Space, which will reveal some code hinting. A red line marks code errors like missing commas or unnecessary ones. The Monaco Editor is used for JSON configurations, e.g. Filter Query configu
Color Factory environment settings Note: This functionality is only available in Color Factory Enterprise. In Color Factory Settings, select Global Options in the console tree and open the Process Environment tab to set certain advanced options governing how Color Factory operates. Allowing multi-processing If running Color Factory on a multi-CPU pl
This will find all content items with the checkbox legally approved set to true. _exists_:corporateInformation.legallyApproved:true This will find all content items with checkbox legally approved set to false or checkbox not set. _exists_:corporateInformation.legallyApproved:false
This is not working as Geo Point fields are not available in the search , but only in filters. You will also not find a setting for "search" in the geo point field configuration. The code itself is correct. corporateInformation.location.lat:47
This will find Content Items even if those items do not have the values Joe AND true available. This is a search limitation in Picturepark for multi-value fields from schemas. For the search, the values are flattened, so when a Fieldset of a Content Item contains somewhere a value "true" and somewhere a value "Joe" the search finds this as a result.
Who can manage consent forms? To manage consent forms, a user must be a member of the Access list for the relevant consent form template. For more information, see Creating a consent form template. Accessing the consent forms page From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon), go to Manage Consent Forms. The Consent Forms page lists all consent forms to which
This will find all Content Items where the field is available in the Layer and has a value. _exists_:fieldpath To check if a field is available use exists This functionality is similar to the filter query Exists Filter _exists_:corporateInformation.title.en
If you would like to add a hierarchical filter for date then add a tree view field to the Layer. For example I have three tagbox fields for Year/Month/Day in my Basic Information Layer and have added a Tree View field to display the date: I have entered the below in Levels. The allow recursion will be set to false by default after saving. The fields
Summary Show a message “This is approved!” when a checkbox (Id: legallyApproved) on a Layer (Id: corporateInformation) is checked. {% if data.corporateInformation.legallyApproved == true %} This was approved! {% endif %} Setup in Picturepark Layer "Corporate Information" Checkbox "Legally approved" Field Value Access data.corporateInformation.legall
The condition Field Value Change checks if a value in a specific field changed e.g. Check if the checkbox "LegalConcerns" changes which may require the removal of the content. This does not cover any changes to the field itself. Triggers the moment the value in the fieldpath changed to any value (leave "expected value" empty) or a specific value (pr
Reuters Video NewsML support In Color Factory Settings, expand the relevant channel and select XML & Job Request Files. Open the XML formats tab. The following dialog appears. Select Enable Reuters Video NewsML support. Reuters video feeds typically transfer an accompanying NewsML file alongside the video file. The NewsML file contains XML-form
A regular expression (usually called regex or regexp) is a sequence of characters that help you search in text (strings). Various systems use Regex for field validation and find or find & replace operations in text (strings). Regex is common in computer science. See Wikipedia Regex for more details. Regex is used in Picturepark Business Rules or
You can extend any search to document fulltext and/or metadata. You wish to find all of your companies' literature where a certain product is mentioned or any documents that mention the CEO, then simply add the searchType to the URL as a query string parameter. //search in fulltext &searchType=FullText Documents contain text. You can do so becau
The following settings for .webp are additionally available. WebP offers file sizes that are around 30% smaller than JPEG without a quality gap. It also provides transparency (alpha channel) like PNG, and the ability to animate images like the GIF format. Picturepark only renders the first frame as a preview and does not create animated webp format
I am adding a tree view field that references the Controlled Vocabulary broader field in the levels and allows recursion. Setting recursion to true only makes sense if you have a tagbox in a list that references the same list. [ { "fieldId": "broader", "allowRecursion": true, "levels": [] } ] I then add a filter on the L
Picturepark knows two types of filters, the sidebar filters (facets) you find in the sidebar of your Content or List Browser (and other areas) and the filter queries that you use in channels and tagboxes to filter for specific Content or List Items. 👉 Sidebar Filters (Filters in the sidebar, aka facets) 👉 Query Filters (Filters for channels or field
Note: To create a consent form template the Fotoware user must be a member of a group that has been granted the Configure consent management group permission. For more information, see Getting started with consent management. The consent form template is the foundation of the document (consent form) that a person signs when giving their approval fo
Get a collection of product content from a list of product codes. Copy all product codes from e.g. Excel or Google Sheets into the search Open Picturepark channel that contains your products and switch the search mode to "OR" Paste all product codes from excel into the search Find all matching content that contains the product codes.
You can enable comments by opening an archive's properties and, on the General tab, selecting FotoWeb in the Other section. FotoWeb comments are available within FotoWeb only, and a user needs to be authenticated to be allowed to comment on assets in the archive. In addition, users need Comments rights in the archive's access list to leave comments
When you want to find content in Picturepark you can try one or all of the following. The channel dropdown, search & suggestions, and the sidebar filters. Open a channel (a filtered set of items, the channels query filter). The channel has a name and a filter, e.g. show only items with Layer A assigned. This channel filter is independent of the
The watermark modification applies an image overlay. You need to store your watermark image (png, gif, tiff) on an absolute path on the server. Then you can define a distance from the four borders in pixels (margin left, margin top, margin right, margin bottom). You can leave the margins empty. You must set the opacity (0.1 to 1) used for transparen
This solution shows how to configure a filter in the field “Dynamic View” based on a multi-tagbox. The field dynamic view will show all content when nothing is found. This solution shows how to show related projects or without related projects don’t show the dynamic view field at all (if no projects are found). Instructions You add the Dynamic View
This article aims to explain how asset storage in a Fotoware Veloz (cloud) solution differs from that of an on-premises installation and the bearing that this has on the way archives are configured in Fotoware Veloz and on the process that users go through when uploading assets to the system and assigning assets to archives. Because Fotoware Veloz u
The AssignValueAction assigns a specific value to the field specified e.g. update copyright source with creators from Dublin Core. This requires the layer where the field is found to be assigned already, therefore combine with "AssignLayerAction" and/or "LayerAssignedCondition". The Business Rules are not executed after one another. If one Business
Creating a channel In Color Factory Settings, expand Global Options and select Process Channels. Select the New channel link below the list of configured channels. You can also right-click on Process Channels and select New Channel (or New Group to create a channel within it), or you can select Color Factory > New Channel. Enter a name for the c
Fotoware uses several technologies to facilitate the management of large volumes of users. These methods can also be combined to cater for internal and external users who require access to the site. Integration with an existing corporate user directory: By connecting FotoWeb to the existing directory structure ( Microsoft Entra ID, SAML), users and
Picturepark supports the following languages for metadata or share pages. This list is derived from Picturepark and can be found in Lists > Language. The languages with a two-letter IETF code are supported. Two-letter IETF Code Language af Afrikaans am Amharic ar Arabic az Azerbaijani be Belarusian bg Bulgarian bn Bengali bs Bosnian ca Catalan cs
Note: The FotoWeb Reports module/Fotoware Custom Report Generator tool is deprecated and will be set to End of Life on April 1st, 2024. Overview This topic deals with the Standard reports in FotoWeb - Royalties, Sales, Searches, and Uploads. Accessing the Reports module To access the Reports module, open the FotoWeb Reports app and choose the FotoWe
Resolution Open the Settings from the Home screen on your device. Go to Privacy in the left panel. Make sure Location services are enabled and that they are also enabled for FotoWeb Desktop specifically. Restart the FotoWeb Desktop app.
This will find all Users where the field is empty aka users where no Identity Provider is added. _exists_:identityProviderId This will find users of a specific Identity Provider. identityProviderId:a3431095e9cc401ab65197ba12ecfccf The ID is shown in the list of Identity Providers
Goal: parse the filename of items on upload and tag the Content Items in Picturepark with the product tag Analysis a layer which can be assigned to the content (“Product information” layer) list of products and their code (“Products” list) “rule” to split the filename into product code and “other” Prerequisites Cache Create a cache for Products. Thi
Overview How to browse an archive using FotoWeb for iPad Viewing the contents of an archive When FotoWeb for iPad has connected to a site, it will display all the archives you have access to on that site. To browse the contents of an archive, simply tap it to open it up. While you're browsing the archive you can: Browse the folder structure of the
RAW files from digital cameras often have a sidecar file accompanying them where metadata that's been added to the file is stored. That is the case, for example, if you've imported pictures from your flash card to FotoStation and added metadata to them there. Other files types that don't support embedded XMP will also be coupled by a sidecar file wh
Overview How to apply digital flash to your pictures in FotoStation's image editor. Understanding the digital flash function The digital flash can be applied by selecting Digital Flash on the toolbar, by selecting Digital Flash in the Levels dialog (Select Levels on the toolbar to open it), or by applying it in an image action. The digital flash fea
Selecting folders in the folder tree The Folders tab next to Archives makes it possible to expose the folder structure in the currently selected archive. Click on the + next to each folder level to expand it and view the underlying folder structure. Clicking on a folder displays the files in that folder. Note: The system administrator controls wheth
Searching To search for files, tap in the search field and type in a search word. If you type in several words, FotoWeb will search for files that contain all of the words, but not necessarily in the exact order that they were typed (also known as an AND-search). FotoWeb will then search all the archives that your logged-in user has access to and re
Using the Picturepark Rendering Chain you can generate a temporary still format for documents or videos and then modify the rasterized still images and use rendering actions, which may not be allowed on videos directly (e.g. Watermark). Find details on the creation of output formats in the API documentation: https://demo.picturepark.com/Docs/Rest/i
Accessing the FotoWeb site When a user accesses the FotoWeb site (http://sitename.com/fotoweb), the system configuration (guest access/single sign-on or manual login) controls the page the user is presented with Single sign-on The user is automatically authenticated when accessing the site and taken to the home page that shows the archives and album
Uploading files using the Selection widget If you're using the Selection widget panel to place assets from FotoWeb in articles in your CMS, you can also upload files directly to FotoWeb from this plugin and then place them in your article. For more information, see Uploading an asset using the Selection widget.
Note: The topic applies to releases earlier than FotoWeb 8.0 Feature Release 12 only. For FotoWeb 8.0 Feature Release 12 and newer, see Branding the site. This topic explains how to configure FotoWeb to display a custom company logo in FotoWeb on iPhone or Android. Note: Implementing custom logos as described below is not available on FotoWeb for i
Uploading files to FotoWeb There are several ways to upload files to FotoWeb: From FotoStation using an HTTP upload (files will always be delivered to the site's upload area) Using a web browser after a user has logged in to FotoWeb From the FotoWeb Desktop Uploader for Windows or Mac OS From FotoWeb for iOS and Android The way to enable uploads is
Requirements - Fotoware for iOS Minimum iOS version required: iOS 13 Screen resolution: Supports all iPhone resolutions. One resolution has a custom layout according to design, and other resolutions have an adaptive layout. Devices: All officially supported iOS devices supported. Orientation: Portrait only Fotoware Server version: Fotoware Veloz (ma
When users upload assets to Fotoware, they are prompted to enter metadata in the fields defined in the metadata set associated with the archive. When a user uploads files using the web interface after logging in to Fotoware, the web upload module cannot determine if metadata already exists in the files placed in the upload queue. Therefore, when a u
Problem When uploading assets to FotoWeb, the information about the uploading user and upload time (fields 360-362) is not added to the uploaded asset(s). Cause The archive's metadata set has been configured to show the fields containing the upload information. Because these fields are exposed during upload, they will be cleared, and no information
Uploading files using FotoWeb Desktop FotoWeb Desktop is an application installed on your local computer that allows communication with the remote FotoWeb system. The upload module in FotoWeb Desktop lets you upload files from your desktop directly to any archive that you have upload permissions to. You can also modify the files' metadata before upl
Uploading assets to FotoWeb First, select Upload in the top banner to display the Upload window. Now, drag one or more files from your desktop into the upload area (the dotted blue box) or click on the Browse link to locate the files on your computer. Previews are loaded for files (.png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .gif) under 200 MB in size. Otherwise, a plac
When you upload a file in FotoWeb (using FotoWeb Desktop, the selection panel, the CMS widget, an app, or FotoWeb itself), FotoWeb automatically stores the user name in metadata field 360. This can be used to create a browseable archive that only shows the browsing user the files that he uploaded. Enable the upload area and give users rights to uplo
Some of our clients have been asking what solutions are best suited to provide a failover mechanism for Color Factory or Connect servers running in the Fotoware system. This way, a backup server running the Color Factory and/or Connect services will be able to take over in the event of main server failure. The best way to address this is to use a W
When uploading assets to Fotoware, the assets' modification date and time stamp will be updated. However, this may not be suitable in cases where data is migrated to a SaaS tenant, and the original date and time stamp should be preserved. To do so, turn on the Preserve modification time toggle in the metadata set and associate the metadata set with
Where to configure this: Fotoware Site Configuration - Security - Single Sign-on Users can sign in to FotoWeb on a web browser by entering their FotoWeb credentials (username and password) or using SSO. When using SSO, users authenticate via an external identity provider that is usually already used in their organization. The same browser-based sign
Often when configuring markers you will need a "reverse" marker that displays when the metadata in a certain field has changed. Cloning markers is an easy way to achieve this. In the list of Markers in the site configuration, simply hover over the marker you'd like to duplicate and click on the Clone link. The cloned marker will be added to the bott
Learn how to find assets in the Fotoware DAM system and use them in your documents and presentations using plugins for Microsoft Word and PowerPoint. Creating slide masters in PowerPoint: PowerPoint uses Slide Masters to let you create templates for your presentations. Slide Masters use so-called placeholders for storing content; this topic discusse
The NGramTransformation can extract n-grams from free text fields e.g. descriptions and use those n-grams (words) in a LookupCache transformation to find the correct tags e.g. take the IPTC description and extract words to check against a keyword list for tagging. Input: "this is the new Breithorn Release of Picturepark" NGramTransformation: Size:
User interface integrations (UII) enable integrators to extend the functionality of Fotoware by allowing the creation of bespoke user interfaces on the Asset Details page in Fotoware. These user interfaces can, for example, present data about an asset using a custom player/renderer or obtain data about an asset from a connected system. Licensing Cre
The Fotoware Event Log stores logs from all Fotoware applications running on the server. It is kept in C:\ProgramData\Fotoware\Log Files. The most recent log entries are stored in FWEvents.log. This files rotated daily (every 24 hours) or when the file size exceeds 500MB. The old log file is then moved into the History subfolder and named according
You need to have selected at least one asset-related event before you can select metadata here.Metadata is not logged by default. Metadata fields and values are only logged if the metadata has changed. The Metadata edit, Workflow, or Upload events can cause metadata to change. We recommend selecting the metadata fields that are likely to change with
No special settings for all document files are available. The following output format settings are available for all file types. Property Description sourceOutputFormats Which output format should be used as a source for rendering. This allows you to render small thumbnails from formats other than the original to save rendering power and time. S
With Microsoft Office installed on a Windows PC, users can insert files from FotoWeb into a Word document or PowerPoint presentation directly from a side panel in those applications. The plugin is normally automatically registered, so it will be shown on the Insert ribbon in Word and PowerPoint when these applications are run. Because the Office plu
Checking out files from FotoWeb When you work in FotoWeb, there are three menu choices that relate to FotoWeb Desktop. These are located in the Action bar when you have made a selection. Open This will check out the file from FotoWeb, download it to your local machine and open the file in the local application that is associated with the file type.
The Transformation Group allows to group multiple transformations and output one value which can be used in the following transformation group or business rule action. The Transformation Group enables you to loop through large amounts of tags, based on the same condition and triggers, e.g. check if the tag is X - will check the first tag, check the
We have many requests from customers wanting to split RAW files from JPEGs when they enter the system, for example over FTP. This topic explains how you can use the AutoRouting feature in Color factory to do just that. Thus the RAW files can be sorted out of the general workflow but still be kept for any period of time should there arise a need to r
Overview When starting FotoWeb on your iPad you will need to choose a FotoWeb server to connect to and specify your login credentials. Setting site and user credentials When starting FotoWeb for iPad after installing it from the App Store you will be required to enter a host name, a user name and a password. This information can be obtained from the
Applying status and rating filters Above the grid are two controls that let you apply filters for status and rating. These filters can be combined and applied to an archive or a search result. Important: These filters do not change the rating and status of the assets in your archives, they only control which files you actually see based on the filte
Choosing a different editor than default Several different metadata editors are available when using FotoStation. In addition to the installed editors, you can also create your own editor. To change to a different metadata editor, open the current editor, click on the editor’s File menu, and then choose one of the metadata editors from the list. Sel
The UnassignLayerAction unassigns a specific layer from content if the condition is met. Specific Definitions Type-ahead and select the Layer from the dropdown. The Layer ID is used in the Business Rule, so you can update the name anytime. Property Value kind UnassignLayerAction layerId The ID of the Layer to check. See Access Layer for details, b
Note: Windows Active Directory SSO is deprecated and should not be used in new installations of FotoWeb. For customers with existing systems configured with AD SSO (Legacy), we recommend switching to either SAML or Microsoft Entra ID, if possible. Known issues with Windows authentication Note: Windows Authentication is deprecated and has been super
What is SmartColor? SmartColor is a module for Color Factory Professional and Enterprise that automatically improves the color balance and contrast of images. It analyzes the pictures and applies processing to improve your photographs' contrast, colors, shadows, highlights, and natural color balance. Configuring SmartColor In Color Factory Settings,
Time-based scheduling You can schedule how often the task should occur (weekly or hourly), choose specific days of the week, and define the exact time for each occurrence. From the Frequency drop-down list, select Weekly or Hourly. Select the day (or several days) from the Days drop-down list. Enter hour and minute values (or use the clock icon) to
Users can comment on content and notify other users, e.g., by reviewing metadata before it is published or having questions about the content. Users now can comment on (master) content and notify users, e.g., for reviewing metadata or the content before it becomes available or to request access to the original content item if no such permission was
Flat structure QuickLists Flat structure QuickLists are simple text files that should be named ql_<field number> A typical flat QuickList for the default Keywords field (#025) should be called ql_025.txt and have content of this format: 1 Keyword 1 2 Keyword 2 3 Keyword 3 Hierarchical structure QuickLists (Thesaurus/Taxonomy) These QuickLists
When building a workflow system using Fotoware or integrating it into an existing workflow, Actions and Markers are the key components. Users can drop assets onto an action to transfer them to a destination, or to trigger a metadata operation or execute a webhook to integrate with other systems. Assets that are transferred to a folder can be tagged
These are the general settings that control how Color Factory assigns Image ID and Owner ID to processed pictures. By enabling the Image ID feature, Color Factory will write a unique ID in all pictures processed in the channel, specifically to the field called Unique Document ID in the Fotoware Reserved namespace. (Field ID 187) General ID settings
When a user logs in to Fotoware and a feature that requires Fotoware Plugins has been enabled, the web browser will check if Fotoware Plugins are installed. If it isn't, a banner will notify the user that the Fotoware Plugins are required for full functionality and allow the user to download and run the installer. After installation, the Fotoware Pl
Using the access list to control user and group access to archives Access lists in FotoWeb are evaluated from the top to bottom. If you add groups to the access lists (recommended), it is important to move the most specific groups to the top and the least specific groups, often those with the most members, to the bottom. That way, if a user is a mem
As soon as you are logged in you can click on your avatar image on the bottom left of your screen to access your profile. You have the following options when entering your profile settings. Log out Reset user settings Request deletion Change password. This is only possible if your user account is set to Picturepark IDS. Identity provider profile Edi
The Execution Scope SearchDoc, means the document in ElasticSearch (similar to a database table) that carries information of an item which is optimized for the usage in the Picturepark search. This includes information set to "include in search". The SearchDoc is optimized in several ways, including saving nested and hierarchical information in a fl
How alerts work Alerts, or search agents, as they're commonly called, are user defined queries that are stored and repeated at a set interval. This way, FotoWeb can be set to look for new content in an archive and give users a heads-up via email when new content that matches the search arrives in the archive. Alerts are issued by email to the regist
How to enable download and remote file operations. In Index Manager Settings, open the Advanced tab for the relevant index. Select Allow download and remote file operations. Select Save.
To upload a new version of an asset from the local computer, locate the asset in Fotoware and open it to view the Asset Details page. Next, drop the local file onto the preview to upload it to Fotoware. It is also possible to open the Actions menu above the preview and choose Upload new version. Note: Currently, only revisions less than 2 GB can be
Access Requirement: Viewing revisions requires that the user be given View revisions access in the archive via the archive Access List in the Fotoware Site Configuration. Note: Only the Editor user type can see version history. For more information about user types, see User types in the Fotoware solution. When browsing content in Fotoware, a user c
Access to view, restore, and manage revisions is set per archive. In the archive access list, highlight the group or user whose access to revisions you would like to change and choose from three permissions related to revisions: View revisions - Gives the user/group access to view all revisions of an asset and compare them. Users can also duplicate
Check Elastic Search Query Syntax for explanations of the syntax used in the following examples. Filter Query: And Filter (Solutions) Filter Query: Date Range Filter (Solutions) Filter Query: Exists Filter (Solutions) Filter Query: Geo Bounding Box Filter (Solutions) Filter Query: Geo Distance Filter (Solutions) Filter Query: Nested Filter for Mult
Overview Managing consent for the use of pictures and other media is central to many organizations and is often time-consuming. In FotoWeb you can get quickly see a complete overview of who has or has not given consent and you can easily keep track of consent form statuses and usage rights. By creating consent templates directly in FotoWeb, linking
Overview Bookmarks are shortcuts to a search you have performed or an archive you browse with additional filters applied. Filters include your choice of folders in the Folders panel, Taxonomy filtering, and Status and Rating filtering. Thus it becomes a dynamically updated collection of assets that are available through a single click. A site admini
You will require access to this area to create your API token if you are working on an integration. This requires special permission ("is a developer") for your Picturepark, which can only be set by Picturepark staff in the Cloud Manager. Request this setting before you start developing. Find here Picturepark API documentation: https://picturepark.
Overview FotoWeb for iPad lets you upload pictures and video from your camera roll to the FotoWeb server. You can also take pictures using the built-in camera and submit that to the server. Uploading files from the camera roll To upload files from your iPad, touch the Upload icon as shown in the screenshot. The upload window shows up, and you can st
Setting up consent management These instructions explain how to set up consent management for the first time. The steps must be implemented in the following order as each step is dependent on the previous step: Configure consent management for the user or user group. Note: Only Editors can configure consent management. This includes creating consen
The following settings for .jpg are additionally available. Property Description quality Compression quality. Must be in range [0,100] and defaults to 80. chromaSubsamplingEnabled Whether to use chroma subsampling or not. extension This property should not be overwritten, except for extensions that are identical like jpg vs. jpeg. Bear in mind that
Actions, used for workflows, can be configured to allow a user to add metadata to preset fields. This way, the metadata entered by the user is applied to all the assets in the selection. The system administrator may have configured actions that allow users to edit the metadata of the assets they're processing in the action. Both the source asset and
Versions provide a record of asset changes so that users can review the iterations of an asset through its lifecycle. Users with the required access can view and compare versions of an asset and, optionally, can restore an earlier version while retaining all other versions. In FotoStation, version control constantly monitors changes to assets and th
Metadata can be edited using keyboard shortcuts: Add (Insert): CTRL + I adding a new Layer Edit: CTRL + E start editing Save: CTRL + S save your edits Paging: ALT + arrow left / arrow right open the next or the previous item On Apple devices use Apple Key instead of CTRL. In Safari use the Option Tab to tab to the calendar icon and open it with Ente
Overview of Requirements, Acceptable Use and Agreements, Browser Compatibility, third-party software, deployment information and general system limitations. Acceptable use and agreements The Picturepark Acceptable Use Policy (AUP) defines the policies to which all end-users of the Picturepark Cloud provided via software-as-a-service must adhere. Ple
Releases (updates and hotfixes) Region Days Europe West I M,T,W,T,F,S,S Germany M,T,W,T,F,S,S US East Coast M,T,W,T,F,S,S Australia East M,T,W,T,F,S,S All time zones are without respect to daylight-savings time (DST). This means that, for example, in a country, state, or region that observes DST, maintenance can be performed at 04:00 local time duri
No special settings for all document files are available. The following output format settings are available for all file types. Property Description sourceOutputFormats Which output format should be used as a source for rendering. This allows you to render small thumbnails from formats other than the original to save rendering power and time. S
There are 2 Index Manager editions. The table below outlines the features and limitations of both Feature Index Manager Standard Index Manager Enterprise Simultaneous search by multiple clients No Yes Indexing of all file types Yes Yes Number of files in each index 100.000 3.000.0001 Number of files per server 1.000.000 3.000.0001 Number of indexes
Note: The Preview Agent API is deprecated and will be set to End of Life on July 1st, 2024. If you have integrations that display previews in real-time, we recommend looking into alternative solutions such as obtaining temporary preview links from the RESTful API. Introduction The Archive Agent File List XML document contains information about the f
Performing a basic search To perform a basic search, start typing words in the search box. This will execute a full-text search across all the entire definition of metadata fields. Example: beautiful beach By default, this will be construed as the precise string "beautiful beach". The way FotoWeb interprets searches that contain several words withou
All FotoStation clients that connect to an Index Manager or Color Factory server are displayed as a client. A client is defined as a domain user from any machine or a Windows or Mac user connected to the server. Administrators can remove clients from the list, but they will reappear the next time a FotoStation client connects. Open the Operations Ce
Yes, the Order and Approval module is available on the Team plan and up. This module makes it possible for users to place files in a shopping cart and check out an order. Additional admin approval of the order before delivery can be set up, and it's possible to integrate the solution with an electronic payment gateway as needed.
These queries only work in "Advanced Mode". Using these queries allows searching/accessing specific values in specific fields on specific layers. Check the individual syntax per field. Search: Search in Metadata and Document Fulltext (Solutions) Search: Find Users by Identity Provider (Solutions) Search: Find Users by Creation Date Range (Solutions
Question Is it possible to create a common, central FotoStation configuration that can be shared between Windows and Mac clients? Answer No, that cannot be done. Although the configurations can be downloaded from the same central location, Windows and Mac configurations in FotoStation work differently. So when working in mixed WIndows and Mac enviro
Fotoware Editors can publish content from Fotoware to an external Content Management System (CMS). This is a built-in feature that creates a permalink or an iframe from which the embed code can be copied. With the help of a developer, the Fotoware Selection Widget can be fully integrated with your CMS so that you can search, retrieve, and place cont
This article describes the JSON format that is used for sending a list of users to various requests (typically for adding and removing users to and from groups). It is similar to the user list representation, except it contains only links to users rather than information about each user. Requests with this representation in the request body are made
The higher Fotoware Veloz plans come with a Service Level Agreement. This is our guarantee of service availability, and the agreement outlines your right to reimbursement should we fail to meet the requirements stated in the SLA. You can find the exact details of the SLA on fotoware.com.
A password policy can be created in FotoWeb to ensure that all users have passwords of a certain complexity to aid security. The password policy applies: when users sign up for a FotoWeb account online. when users change their existing password. when users have forgotten their password and choose to reset it. The password policy does not apply to us
Albums are collections that users can create based on the content in the archives they can access. Users can create albums of frequently used assets for their own benefit or share them with other users of the Fotoware solution. Higher tiers also allow users to share albums with external people who don't have an account on the Fotoware system. Such p
Find here the desired function inside the matrix of User Role Permissions and Content Permission Set / Schema Permission Set Permissions User Role Permission Manage Metadata Schemas User Role Permission Manage List Items User Role Permissions Manage Content User Role Permissions Manage Content and Manage Transfer Create layer, list, f
The returned XML output from the Archive Agent can easily be converted to HTML that can be displayed by any web browser using a technique called 'XSL Transforms'. A sample XSL Transform document for showing thumbnails from the result of an Archive Agent is shown below: 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 <
An action can be configured to copy files from its original archive to another archive on the server. This is set up in the site configuration: Go to the Actions tab and create a new action. Then go to the Destination asset tab, choose Archive as the destination type, and choose the destination archive from the drop-down list below. Note: In Fotowar
Follow the steps below to manually create a user in FotoWeb. If you would rather import users and groups from your existing Active Directory or another identity provider, contact Fotoware. Adding a user From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon), go to Manage Users/Groups. In the view that opens, select Add new user. Setting basic user properties Enter the
This article provides an overview of all data files and folders created and used by FotoWeb and their requirements. It can be used to decide how to: Set up disks and symbolic links on a server system Set up backups Manage and monitor disk usage Folder Content Categories VALUABLE : Primary data store (i.e., cannot be rebuilt!). Needs backup! BIG : Hi
Framing images In Color Factory Settings, expand the relevant channel and select Pixel Edit. Open the Frame tab. The following dialog appears. By setting your preferences on the Frame tab, you can add a border around the image. Depending on whether the output image is in Grayscale, RGB, or CMYK, you can set the preferred color of the frame by enter
The following settings for .png are additionally available. Property Description extension This property should not be overwritten, as PNG makes no sense. A use case is extensions that are identical like jpg vs. jpeg. The following settings for images are available. Property Description kind ImageFormatBase colorProfile Color profile to use. Color
Show a simple text when the search returns no results. You may also show additional hints to your users. "missingResultsDisplayPatterns": { "en": "Your search has not delivered any results", "de": "Ihre Suche hat keine Resultate geliefert", "x-default": "Your search has not delivered any results" },
What is Ingestion? Ingestion is the process of adding assets to a FotoWeb archive through upload. Destinations To ingest assets, an application must specify a destination. This is typically a folder in an archive, but it can also be a different kind of collection, such as the user's upload area. Destination Lists The full API descriptor provides lin
Custom site branding is available in the Team plan and higher plans. The branding options include customization of: Browser favicon Login screen logo Main logo shown in banner on site homepage Mobile apps logo The Home Page background image The picture collection displayed on the site login screen Site CSS The Professional plan and higher plans also
Two modes of upload Upload permissions can be set in two places in FotoWeb: By enabling the Upload Area , authenticated users who are members of a group with upload permissions will be able to upload files to a common repository. FotoWeb can optionally store files from each user in a separate subfolder inside this folder. You can then configure Inde
This article describes the JSON format that represents an asset in the FotoWeb RESTful API. This is the application/vnd.fotoware.asset+json media type. It is also used as part of the representation of an asset list. Usage Representation of ... MIME type: Accept: application/vnd.fotoware.asset+json Resource(s): All asset resources have this represent
FotoWeb has a common upload area where users can upload files. When users upload files to this upload area, the uploaded files are tagged with their user name. That way, you can index the contents of the upload area and create an archive search filter that shows an authenticated user only their files. Permission to upload assets to the upload area i
To apply a user role, you have to access the detail view of a user and then scroll down to the section “Roles” You can add user roles by using the “Add role” button. If a user logs in via SSO and a fallback user role or group mapping is defined, the user will get this user role assigned. This can be defined in the settings. To read more about this t
Picturepark supports Open ID Connect providers, whereas the implementation of such a provider varies in terms of metadata or ACR values. Find a list of certified Open ID Connect implementations here: https://openid.net/developers/certified.
The DateMathTransformation allows us to pick a value from a variable and add/subtract something to it. The Date Math Transformation feature in our Business Rule Configuration represents a powerful tool that automates data manipulation and optimization. It's an incredibly versatile feature that enables you to add or subtract a specific interval from
Some Fotoware plans include a custom domain name. Without a custom domain name, your site will typically be available by going to https://yourcompany.fotoware.cloud However, with a Fotoware plan that includes a custom domain name, we can configure the site to be available via your existing registered domain, for example, using an address such as htt
Guide contents: Introduction to creating custom fields An overview of the metadata configuration program (MDC) Creating a new namespace Adding fields to a namespace Making all Fotoware servers and clients use a new metadata definition Exporting and importing namespaces in the Metadata configuration Enabling multi-language metadata support
Picturepark offers a User Guide to first-time users of the system. You can download the User Guide as a PDF below or navigate to the corresponding pages in the sidebar. Please keep in mind that the online User Guide contains more information than the PDF version and will always be up to date. User Guide (PDF) English: https://marketing.picturepark.c
Modifying common properties for a selection of users If you have a large user base in Fotoware and want to modify some common settings for all of them, you can do so in the User Management console. From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon), go to Manage Users/Groups. Select the relevant users. You can search by username, first name, and last name. Sele
The Fotoware API (Application Programming Interface) is a programmatic interface that allows computer developers to build custom integrations between the Fotoware solution and other third-party solutions. This can be very useful when you need to integrate with Fotoware in a way that the standard tools in the package will not allow.
Problem: Content Items couldn't be updated with Layer. Search for the ones that weren't updated to validate what went wrong. How to find items where the field is empty. Conclusion: These are the 5 Virtual Items to which I cannot apply the Layer. This is a layer setting which is called "Available for", which prevents the layer from being assigned t
A metadata view is a collection of metadata fields applied to an archive. The metadata view manages the fields that are in the different FotoWeb user interfaces and plugins and whether they are read-only or editable. Users can only edit metadata in an archive if they have been given permission to do so in the archive's access list, but at the lowes
Settings Host name / Archive Choose the host name of the FotoWeb server. Prefix the URL with https:// if you're connecting securely. To choose the archive, click on the Browse (...) button to open the archive browser. If this is your first time connecting to the FotoWeb server, a browser window will open and require you to authenticate on the site u
Virtual Types enable you to create content from within Picturepark that adheres to a defined structure, without having to worry about the output format of the content. Common to each of these (and other) Virtual Types is a defined structure e.g. Press Release (Structure: Headline, Subhead, Body, Footer), Landing Page (Structure: Title; Overview; Det
The use of Clarifai is now deprecated in Content Platform. Instead, we support auto-tagging using Azure. For more information, see Enqueue Tagging Action (AI Tagging) using Azure. The EnqueueTaggingAction allows to enqueue the auto-tagging. Editors can add the tagging model, language code (for tags to use), and match value (confidence value for ta
The FotoWeb Desktop plugin for Microsoft Office allows you to place files from a FotoWeb archive directly in a Word document or a PowerPoint presentation. Since the plugins work the same way in both Word and PowerPoint, the topic deals with both varieties and explains differences in operation where necessary. Note: FotoWeb Desktop is a suite of util
Permission sets assign multiple user roles to content or schema and allow you to control the level of access the user roles have on content or schemas. Permission sets applied to content/schemas are additive, all of them apply. Default content permission sets that are added to a content item on creation can be added by Picturepark Staff. Permission
Using the FotoWeb 8.0 Administration Console application found in the Start menu you can verify that the accounts used by FotoWeb have the necessary privileges on the Windows server. This check can provide valuable information when troubleshooting a system that encounters errors and will let you grant the necessary permissions as needed. Open the Wi
Problem When trying to log in to FotoWeb, the user receives the following message: "Your credentials are valid, but you are logged in elsewhere. Please log out from other browsers and try again." Cause The user has already logged in on another computer and that session is still active. Solution 1 If possible, locate the device or computer where the
The LookupCacheTransformation uses the input from transformations above to check against a named cache created based on a list of tags (a dictionary). Similar to TakeDictionaryValueTransformation with the difference that this lookup also works for data not directly assigned to the content. Caches You must create the cache upfront to have it availab
You upload file-based content like documents, videos, images, and audio. Drag and drop files or folders to Picturepark Content Platform for uploading. It does not need to be on a special menu. Wherever you are in Picturepark, drop your files and folders, and then the upload will start. Uploading requires appropriate permissions. If you are not able
Once the Fotoware Mobile app has been initialized and configured on your device once, it will store the server hostname you specified so you won't have to reenter it the next time you connect. You also have the option of specifying a custom domain. To do so: Sign out of the Fotoware Mobile app and sign in again. Select Custom domain. Enter your cus
How to upload files using the Selection widget After opening the FotoWeb Selection widget from your CMS, click on the Upload tab. Now drag one or more files from your desktop into the upload area (the dotted blue box) or click on the Browse link to locate the files on your computer. Previews are loaded for files (.png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .gif) under 2
The following predefined templates are available: Purging Upload using FTP group Upload using FTP group and apply metadata
Disclaimer Please read this disclaimer ("Disclaimer") carefully before using the http://picturepark.com Website (“Website”) operated by Fotoware Switzerland AG (“Picturepark”, "us", 'we", "our"). The content displayed on the Website is intellectual property belonging to us. You may reuse, republish, or reprint such content under the CC BY-NC-SA 4.0
You can search for terms that are similar but a bit "fuzzy". Therefore you can use the "fuzzy” operator which is a Tilde following your search term in the advanced search. quikc~ brwn~ foks~ The fuzzy search uses the Damerau-Levenshtein distance to find all terms with a maximum of two changes. Changes are added, removed, or replaced single character
Enabling users to upload files to individual archives When configuring an archive, you can add a user or a whole group to the access list and assign the Upload permission. This way, you can manage precisely who can upload files and where they're allowed to submit them. Presetting a destination folder for upload/copy and move operations to the archiv
Symptom When accessing the metadata editor in FotoWeb Pro, the panel does not load correctly, and will display an error message in the FotoWeb Pro interface saying "Error Retrieving editor config" Also, the upload utility in the web interface will fail to load any metadata fields and become unusable. Cause It may be that the archive's assigned metad
After installing the Fotoware Mobile app on your device, tap the Fotoware icon to open it. Select I'm new to Fotoware if you would like more information about the company and products Select Sign in here to begin the sign-in process. Select Fotoware domain or Custom domain, as appropriate, and enter your Fotoware site domain. The app remembers this
Problem When uploading assets to FotoWeb, the information about the uploading user and upload time (fields 360-362) is not added to the uploaded asset(s). Cause The archive's metadata set has been configured to show the fields containing the upload information, and Edit has been enabled for the fields. When the Edit property is enabled in the metada
When configuring your site to use the common upload area, you need to give users access to use it. This is done by adding them to a group and modifying the group's permissions to allow uploads to the Upload Area. If this property is not set, users may only upload to archives to which they have been given explicit upload access in the archive's acces
With Fotoware Mobile, you can upload files to FotoWeb via a wireless or mobile network. These can be pictures or video clips stored in the photos folder on your device, or you can take a picture or record a video clip and instantly upload it to a FotoWeb archive. To upload a file, tap on the Upload item on the main screen. The first time you go to t
Symptom When updating FotoWeb to a newer build, the upgrade wizard hangs forever at the point where it tries to start MongoDB Cause This happens when the MongoDB host is set to the server's actual host name rather than localhost. When FotoWeb runs using its own bundled MongoDB instance, the MongoDB server MUST be set to localhost. Otherwise FotoWeb
Removing files from an album If you are viewing the album's content on a separate tab in FotoWeb Pro, you can simply select the files you want to remove and press the Delete key on the keyboard to remove them.
Once FotoWeb has been initialized and configured on your device the first time, it will store the server host name you specified so you won't have to type it again the next time you connect. If, however, you would like to connect to another FotoWeb server, you can easily change the connection. To do so, follow these steps: Start FotoWeb Desktop on y
Every HTTP request contains a verb that specifies the operation to execute. The most common verbs are POST, GET, PUT, PATCH, and DELETE. Fotoware also uses custom verbs, which can cause issues with proxies or Web Application Firewalls (WAFs) that only support the standard HTTP operations. If, as a consequence, the WAF blocks such operations, it must
Each field has a set of attributes that affect how the field behaves. You configure the settings when adding the field to a Layer or Virtual Type, so different instances of the same Field Type can behave differently, depending on their specific settings. Some parameters are common to all the field types. Name (required) The Name setting is availabl
Uploading files using the Selection widget If you're using the Selection widget panel to place assets from FotoWeb in articles in your CMS, you can also upload files directly to FotoWeb from this plugin and then place them in your article. The way to accomplish this is described in detail in the CMS guide.
You can use webhooks to configure the Fotoware system to send notifications when assets change in an archive. From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon), go to Site Configuration > Integrations. Select Webhooks. Three asset events are available for notifications: Asset ingested - Used to post a notification when an asset enters the system via the Fotow
Vector file processing Where: Channel | Input File Formats | Other Formats tab Here you can configure how vector files should be processed. By default the files will be moved directly to the global UNKNOWN folder, but you may also copy the file to the output folder, applying all processing not including manipulation of the file data. Hence, files ma
Specific Settings for Fieldsets and Relations Property Description Settings Sort This field is not in use. Leave it empty. Common Settings for All Schemas Property Description Status Content & List Items Content search Index List Item search index The Status shows if the metadata, display pattern, and all content and list items, the infor
Problem When using a standard date field or creating a custom one you cannot set a date before year 100. If you type in year 99 in a date field, it will be automatically converted to 1999. Similarly, 21 will be converted to 2021. Suggested workaround A possible workaround will be to use a text-formatted field for storing such dates.
Overview What to do if you have upgraded to a newer FotoStation version and receive an error message when starting it. Problem FotoStation displays an error message on startup: "This version of FotoStation is newer than your product key allows! If you have signed a subscription agreement, you need to activate the license key for the subscription. C
Symptom When accessing the metadata editor in FotoWeb Pro, the panel does not load correctly, and will display an error message in the FotoWeb Pro interface saying "Error Retrieving editor config" Also, the upload utility in the web interface will fail to load any metadata fields and become unusable. Cause It may be that the archive's assigned metad
The following settings for .avif are additionally available. AV1 Image File Format (AVIF) is an image file format specification. AVIF supports animations, live photos, and more through multilayer images stored in image sequences. It offers better support for graphical elements, logos, and infographics, whereas JPEG has limitations. It provides bett
Public documentation of the Fotoware endpoints with Swagger (OpenAPI) is available at https://api.fotoware.com. Using this site you can authorize the site's connection to your Fotoware Veloz tenant and start exploring the entire API.
Important information about system logging All Fotoware applications report to the Fotoware Log Server installed alongside the server application. The communications between the server application and the log server uses UDP port 7000. Since the communications take place internally on the server, you do not need to open UPD port 7000 in your firewal
Overview How to quickly determine which version and build of FotoWeb is running on your server Resolution To manually check the FotoWeb version Log in Click on the “Powered by Fotoware” logo to get to the “about” page. To check the FotoWeb version using the REST API Use the private entry point as described in the API Entry Points topic.
Overview FotoWeb for iPhone or iPad will not let you access the camera roll to upload pictures. Resolution If FotoWeb for iPhone or iPad does not allow you to see the pictures in your photo and video library, you will need to enable location services for the FotoWeb app on your device: Open the Settings from the Home screen on your device. Go to Pri
Overview This article explains how you can reset the password that protects FotoStation's configuration if you have forgotten it. Password reset procedure The configuration file that contains your password in encrypted form is called fsSystemData.xml. In Windows, this files is usually found in your user profile folder, typically C:\Users\[Your usern
Symptom When choosing a custom location for storing the files placed in an InDesign document using the FotoWeb Desktop Extension, the location is not stored permanently. The next time you start InDesign, the path field is blank or incorrect, or it cannot be changed or stored. Resolution Exit InDesign, then delete the FotoWeb Desktop preferences file
Troubleshooting crashes As with other software, you may occasionally experience that FotoStation crashes quite unexpectedly. Below is a step-by-step procedure to help you isolate the cause of the crash to be able to troubleshoot it. Restart FotoStation Most of the time, simply restarting the program will solve the problem and you will not experienc
Symptom When uploading two or more files with the same name in a single batch using FotoWeb Desktop, the metadata that is added in the upload process is not applied to the files. Example: A user tries to upload company.ppt and company.doc in the same batch. The metadata entered is not applied to the files. Cause This happens when uploading two or mo
Resolution Where: Open the File menu (FotoStation Pro menu on the Mac), select Preferences, then Suppressed dialogs. From time to time, when performing an operation in FotoStation a dialog may appear that requires additional information from the user. Some of these dialogs have a checkbox that makes it possible to remember the choice you make and ne
If you receive an error message in FotoWeb when trying to share an album or export an asset to a CMS, there is a possibility that a proxy server on the network is preventing traffic. If you're uncertain if there's a proxy server in the network, talk to talk to IT in your organization and bring to their attention the points below. FotoWeb and proxy s
Configuring routing Routing rules are configured independently of folders and channels, which means that a routing rule can easily be applied to a number of channels after it has been made. It also implies that if you only want to make a small change in any of your routing rules, all affected channels are updated accordingly. To create a routing You
Where configuration files are stored To simplify the document, we replace the following base folders with some abbreviated names: PRIVATE_FOLDER ~/Library/Preferences/Fotoware Configuration files The base folders for the different configuration options are: When using a separate configuration for each user PRIVATE_FOLDER/FotoStation/Configuration
Apache web server support in FotoWeb 8.0 has been discontinued since July 2021 for security reasons and we recommend switching to Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS) as soon as possible and update to at least FotoWeb 8.0 Feature Release 15 as older versions still dependent on Apache for the internal configuration server. Please use the fol
If you experience performance issues logging on to FotoWeb using Active Directory integration, these points can help you troubleshoot. Note: Active Directory integration via LDAP in FotoWeb is set to End of Life from January 1st, 2024, and will be removed from our software in a future version. We strongly recommend switching your identity provider a
The Picturepark Online Demo (http://demo.picturepark.com ) features several concepts, like a media library and a product library, events, campaigns, press portal and a document library. The dashboard shall guide the users to the individual areas and also show the links to public portals. Instructions You need to be able to edit templates in Picturep
Overview How to rate and set the status of your assets using FotoWeb for iPad Rating an asset The rating control is located in the lower metadata overlay on the asset's preview. To rate the asset, touch the star rating once for every star you wish to add. To clear the rating simply touch until you get five stars and then touch the star rating contro
Property Description Filters Add These are the Filters that are displayed for List Items in the List Item Browser These should be adjusted using the UI. Edit JSON You can open the JSON Editor to see the filter configuration as JSON and maybe copy it for other lists. Edit You can edit existing filters, remove filters or re-order them via drag &
About workflows FotoWeb's workflows can be used to process in different ways or transfer them to a preset destination. Only destinations without interactivity enabled on the server will be available on your device. Picking files to process from the grid When browsing an archive, for example after you've performed a search, the most conventient way t
You can control which groups of users are allowed to review and manage annotations; this means that they can edit and delete annotations and annotation comments that other users have created. This permission is set on the group level in the Operations Center: Open a group's properties page and, in the Administrative permissions section, tick the opt
Having installed the app on your device you can start it by tapping on the FotoWeb icon on your home screen. When the app is started the first time, you will be asked to fill in a server host name and a user name and password to authenticate. Ask your FotoWeb administrator for help if you are unsure about this information. Tip: If you want to conn
Settings The Color Management sub action lets you convert images between different color spaces using standard ICC profiles. Convert To Choose the color space that you would like to convert the image(s) to – Grayscale, RGB, or CMYK. If you choose to convert to grayscale, you get access to some additional options: Advanced Options: Click on this butt
Overview How to browse an archive using FotoWeb for iPad Viewing the contents of an archive When FotoWeb for iPad has connected to a site, it will display all the archives you have access to on that site. To browse the contents of an archive, simply tap it to open it up. While you're browsing the archive you can: Browse the folder structure of the a
When creating a union, you can determine which users are allowed access to it. In the Index Manager Settings app, open the relevant index and go to the Access list tab. The default setting is to Allow everyone access. However, if you would like to specify access, select Specify access option and then select Add. In the view that opens, you can searc
Configuring SmartClean noise removal In Color Factory Settings, expand the relevant channel and select SmartClean™. The following dialog appears. The SmartClean™ filter is an optional module for Color Factory that is used for removing noise in pictures from digital cameras and scanners without blurring the end result. SmartClean™ is configured by c
Schedules can trigger Business Rules. Prerequisites Business rules you want to trigger via a schedule. Example: Business Rule: Notification for contents expiring in 10 days Specific Definitions Property Value Name (required) Choose a name that will be obvious to both yourself and any other admins - e.g. Content Items license expiration warning, Ever
What's required Note: You don't need a terminal server license when using Remote desktop to connect to FotoStation on a Windows client computer. However, when FotoStation is installed on a Windows Server, it will not start without a valid terminal server license. Note: A Terminal Server License is ONLY available if your software is covered by a vali
The following settings for .mp3 are additionally available. Property Description quality Gets or sets the encoding quality. This setting and the Bitrate are mutually exclusive. Values can be set in a range of 0 to 9, where a lower value is a higher quality. bitrate Gets or sets the encoding bitrate. This setting and Quality are mutually exclusive.
The file selection described below works the same no matter which view type you are currently using. Selecting files using the mouse When making selections with the mouse, you have the possibility to use modifier keys to make multi-file selection. The modifier keys work the same way they do in the Explorer in Windows / Finder on Mac and will adjust
Supported formats File format Remark JPEG EXIF Header Read/Write TIFF EXIF Header Read Photoshop PSD PSD files must be saved with the Maximize Compatibility option to allow the generation of thumbnails and previews in Fotoware. Photoshop EPS GIF Animated GIF is treated as a movie. PNG BMP TXT Free text search and metadata search. A preview is
The Geo Point Field has two number fields for adding longitude and latitude values. Applications like Google Maps use this kind of Geo-Information about a location. In Picturepark you can only use Geo Point values in Query Filters. Geo Point Overview Icon Behavior VIDEO: How Geo Point Behaves Your browser does not support HTML5 video. The behavior
LEGACY NOTE: This guide describes legacy functionality in FotoStation. In new versions of FotoStation configurations are maintained and downloaded to the client over FWP. Please refer to Creating and maintaining centralized FotoStation configurations for updated documentation. When to use multi-user configurations When used in a network environme
PSD layer handling Where: Channel | Input File Formats | Adobe Photoshop This tab lets you choose how Color Factory should handle PSD files with layers. Choose between Always merge layers, Merge layers when required by channel processing and Never merge layers. If you choose the second option, to merge layers only when required by the processing, yo
Username requirement Usernames must be unique across all groups.This ensures that each user has a distinct identifier within the FTP server. Password requirements Passwords must meet the following criteria: At least 16 characters long Include uppercase letters Include lowercase letters Include numbers Include special characters Password management S
Picturepark generates (renders) static (preconfigured, pre-rendered) and dynamic (on-demand rendered) formats. Both are available in the format selection dialogue which opens up when you download or share. Picturepark rendering is optimized to create formats fast and save rendering resources, reducing rendering times and failures. Picturepark does
When do I need this? Being able to define more than one site may be useful if your business has two FotoWeb sites, for example one with content for external users and another one that's for internal use only. You can then define hostnames and user credentials for both sites in FotoWeb for iPad and easily change between them. How to define another si
Adding a text block In Color Factory Settings, expand the relevant channel and select Pixel Edit. Open the Text Block tab. The following dialog appears. A text block can be added to the actual image data by expanding the image canvas. You can also put a logo within the text block, either to the left of the text or below it. In the Text extraction t
When adding document folders to an index, that folder may have a number of subfolders that can also be indexed. However, if you wish to exclude certain subfolders from the index, this can be done by adding a tilde character (~) anywhere in the folder name. When Index Manager encounters such a folder, it will ignore it and all its subfolders. Tip: Ad
The Produce Message Action is only used by Service Providers (via API) who can listen to this message to then further process the information e.g. Content Items with approved tags and copyright information can be sent to an agency for further graphical processing. Specific Definitions Property Value kind ProduceMessageAction "actions": [ {
Consent markers A consent status marker indicates the consent status of an asset. Most consent status markers are applied automatically as part of the consent management workflow. However, there are two consent status markers that you can quickly apply manually to indicate that: the asset does not need any consent (there may be no recognizable faces
Fotoware uses the XMP format to store metadata. This article explains the following: What's the difference between XMP and IPTC? How does Fotoware handle assets that have legacy IPTC metadata? How do I configure my Fotoware system to correctly read and convert IPTC metadata to XMP? Note: XMP has been the established industry standard for reading and
Authorization This section describes the process of authorizing a client from the user's point of view and the interactions between the client and the authorization server. It also describes how to implement each step in the client. Authorization works slightly differently for different kinds of applications. This is because, for example, a web appl
Filtering out pictures with clipped highlights or shadows For this scenario, we will create a channel that uses the AutoRouting feature to filter pictures by Contrast Quality. This allows us to specify which pictures should be filtered out because they have clipped highlights or shadows. If there are many light or dark pictures in your workflow, you
Using workflows from your mobile device In the Fotoware Mobile app, you can quickly select files in an archive and transfer them to a Fotoware destination. Note: Only destinations without interactivity enabled on the server are available on your device. From the grid view Having found the files you want to transfer to a workflow, select Select in th
Mac system requirements macOS X (Big Sur) or newer Intel or ARM (Apple Silicon) processor Minimum 4 GB of RAM, 8 GB or more is recommended Screen resolution of at least 1440 x 900 Windows system requirements Windows 10 or Windows 11 - 64-bit versions only 64-bit processor Minimum 4 GB of RAM, 8 GB or more recommended Screen resolution of 1280 x 102
Access requirement: To work with version control you need access to the index(es) and you must create an archive that points to the index(es) for which version control is enabled. In FotoStation, you can restore both the content and metadata for a version or restore just the metadata. You can use this functionality for all versions of an asset exc
What's in the FotoStation app bundle? FotoStation for Mac can be downloaded from the Downloads section of the Fotoware Customer Portal. It comes as a disk image (.dmg) that can be mounted on the desktop and contains a single file - the FotoStation app, a bundle containing all the components required to run FotoStation. When the application is launch
The AND operator can group different conditions e.g. Check for a specific layer AND a tagbox item that is assigned. Add multiple conditions To add multiple conditions for your Business Rule. Open Settings Open Business Rules Go to the panel Condition Press Add Select AND or OR condition first to define multiple conditions. Define the condition det
When browsing archives with documents (Word, PowerPoint, PDF, InDesign), users can go to Filmstrip or Preview views (keyboard shortcuts F and P, respectively) and preview the first page in the document. The preview contains navigation controls that allow the user to flick pages back and forth or type in a page number to jump to that page.
Basic channel settings To edit channel settings, go to Global Options > Process Channels. Select the relevant channel and open the Channel Settings tab. In the dialog that opens, you can adjust the name and priority of the channel, its input and output folders, and the output file format. You can also enable or disable the channel by selecting or
This topic explains how to configure a database connection using ODBC in FotoStation. Such a connection can be used to look up text records in a database, insert them into the metadata of the files in your archive, and write metadata back to the database. It can also be used to import text from a database for application to files in a certain folder
Assigning a processing profile to your archive You can choose if files downloaded directly from the archive should be given additional processing before delivery. Processing profiles can also be used to process a file that a user places in an InDesign layout using the FotoWeb Desktop Extension for Adobe Creative Suite. On the Archive details page,
Overview The quickest way to apply a template or macro to a selection of files is by using the Stamp tool. Using the stamp tool Having created some macros or templates, you can easily apply them to a selection of files using the Stamp function on the toolbar: Select the files you want to update Select the Stamp icon on the toolbar and choose which
The NOT Condition is an operator to negate a condition you define e.g. check if Layer is not assigned (NOT LayerAssigned). Triggers when the condition is not true. Add Multiple Conditions To add multiple conditions for your Business Rule. Open Settings Open Business Rules Go to the panel Condition Press Add Select AND or OR condition first to defin
To compare two revisions of an asset, open the Asset Details page and go to the Revisions tab. Then use the checkbox to select the revisions you would like to compare and select Compare. The two revisions open side by side and show both the asset previews as well as the metadata of both revisions. Use the links at the top of the comparison overlay t
About data mining Data mining is used to find files, sort files, and change the metadata for files. Data mining consists of two parts: the Calendar dates option (the files are grouped together based on date attributes) and the Word list option (the files are grouped together based on metadata). To access the data mining tool, select the icon on the
Tagging assets When sorting files in an archive, you might initially want to do a rough sorting. To this end, you can apply tags to selected files based on whether they're Tagged (for example approved for keeping), Rejected (files you don't want to keep), or Unclassified (assets you have not yet tagged for one or the other). How to apply tags Using
When are macros useful? If you want to add metadata to files and also want to be able to control how text should be inserted (if the text field should be cleared or not, if any new content should replace previous content, and so on), macros are more customizable than templates: Applying a macro Select the file for which you want to edit the metadata
Overview How to create advanced search queries in FotoStation. Advanced search If you would like to perform more advanced searches, such as searching for a string in a specific metadata field or searching for specific file attributes (size, last edited, and so on), you can use Advanced Search. This option is accessed either by selecting Search on th
Applying a macro to the original file Applying a macro to the original file when running an action can be very useful. You can, for instance, update a metadata field to indicate the location to which you sent a copy of the file as a historical reference. Note: If you apply a macro to the source asset AND use the Destination asset tab to configure co
Where can dynamic tags be used? Dynamic tags can only be used in pre-configured searches, such as in taxonomies and smart folders. You can use dynamic tags: in metadata macros in actions in search expressions (as independent terms and phrases) in marker conditions anywhere you generate a URL Note: Dynamic tags cannot be used for immediate searches,
Locking out a user Locking out an account means that the user will not be able to log on to the system. An administrator can lock a user out in two ways: by setting an account expiry date in the user properties in the user management console. After that date, the user will not be able to log in again until the lockout is removed. by opening the user
Picturepark bietet einen User Guide für Erstbenutzer des Systems an. Sie können den User Guide unten als PDF herunterladen oder auf die entsprechenden Seiten in der Sidebar navigieren. Bitte beachten Sie, dass der Online User Guide mehr Informationen enthält als die PDF-Version und immer auf dem neuesten Stand ist. User Guide (PDF) Englisch: https
Major Releases Major updates to the Content Platform are typically rolled out on a quarterly basis. A major release is announced via the Release Notes. The initial rollout date and time is also announced on the Content Platform status page. The release date marks the beginning of the rollout of the latest version to all customers: Firstly, a new IDS
Each named FotoWeb user can access the server on a maximum of 10 devices. Each device is registered with a special token when the user logs in to FotoWeb from a device the first time. If a user spends all their access tokens, they will not be able to log in on the 11th device. Should this situation arise, the FotoWeb server administrator can manuall
The condition Tagbox Item Assigned checks if a specific tagbox item ("a tag") is assigned in a specific field e.g. Check if the tag "Twitter" is assigned in the field "SocialMediaPlatforms" on Layer "CopyrightUsages" to then use this image on Twitter. The Business Rule checks if the provided Tagbox Item was assigned to any Content Item and triggers
A list of EXIF fields you can reference within FotoStation. A list of EXIF (Exchangeable image file format) fields that can be referenced when searching in Index Manager. EXIF codes EXIF Camera Info EXIF Field Code Original file name / Document name #EXIF010D Maker #EXIF010F Model #EXIF927C X-Resolution #EXIF011A Y-Resolution #EXIF011B Resolution Un
To set the status of an asset, select one or more assets on the thumbnail grid page (tip: use Shift and Ctrl-keys to make multi-file selections) and then click on the Set Status button in the Action bar. Finally, click on a status in the overlay to apply it to the selection of files. Setting status on the Details page When viewing an asset on the De
Query filters (Channel Filter or Filters in Fields) help to restrict the values available for tagging in a tagbox e.g. show only products for EMEA; or the Content Items displayed in a specific Channel e.g. only approved product marketing content. Those filters do not require user input, they have a fixed return set based on specific criteria e.g. sh
Settings Where: Expand the SmartReplacement node under the Metadata node in the program configuration Leading control character: Choose the character that is used to trigger the SmartReplacement code replacement. The default character is forward slash (/) Column delimiter: Choose the character that should be used to specify the column with the desir
Overview Learn what dummy pictures are and how they can help you organize your collections. What are dummy pictures? Dummy pictures are "mock" pictures containing text that a real image may later replace. This way, you can create a fully searchable digital archive even if the images are in a traditional picture archive. For example, the text in the
Overview See which history events FotoStation can write to a file to keep track of what's been done with it. About history logging in FotoStation FotoStation can keep a log of certain events, i.e. processes that have been applied to images or other files in an archive or other source type. This log is called History and can be viewed in the Text pan
Pools, or storage pools, are the storage repositories in Fotoware. Each archive you create in Fotoware is tied to a storage pool where content is stored when you upload it. Depending on your Fotoware plan, you may have access to one or multiple storage pools. From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon), go to Site Configuration > Pools. Currently, you c
HEIF (High Efficiency Image File Format - sometimes with the extension .heic) is a new format used by many mobile devices to store pictures and video. The technology uses the h.265 codec for encoding of the files. Support in macOS FotoStation supports these formats natively in macOS, as they are the default formats used by iOS-based mobile devices.
A Layer is a group of one or more fields. A Layer contains all metadata of a Content Item, the so-called metadata profile. Examples: Basic Information (title, description), Product Information (product name, family, etc.). The fields contained in a Layer become available when added to a content item. If the Layer is later removed, the fields it prov
The information on this page has moved. What are you looking for? Collection queries - Used to create queries through the FotoWeb API. Search expressions - A rich query language that can be used by API clients and regular users to make fine-tuned searches.
With FotoStation connected to Index Manager, you can perform very advanced searches. The following options are available. Note: FotoStation search syntax is very different from that of FotoWeb. For information about the search syntax in FotoWeb, see Searching for assets topic. The API and taxonomy search syntax topic may also prove useful. Extra s
What are markers Markers are visual indicators you can customize to alert users about files in your collections that meet certain criteria. For example, you can display a marker if a file contains a certain string in a metadata field to alert a user. Markers can be made interactive, so that clicking on a marker can execute a metadata macro, open a m
When you log in to Fotoware, the site's home page is displayed. There is a large search bar at the top of the screen. When you access an archive, the search bar is located on the top banner: If you are using Fotoware Pro, see Searching for assets in Fotoware Pro. Performing a basic search To perform a basic search, start entering words in the search
Major Releases Major updates to the Content Platform are typically rolled out on a quarterly basis. A major release is announced via the Release Notes. The initial rollout date and time is also announced on the Content Platform status page. The release date marks the beginning of the rollout of the latest version to all customers: Firstly, a new IDS
Enabling version control impacts storage capacity. The required storage increases with the size of the metadata (normally 2-10 kb) for each metadata change and a full copy of the file for every content change (when you upload a new version). By default, version control is not enabled, and when you enable it, you can select the archives to which it s
Multi-Collection Searches Some collection lists allow simultaneous search for assets in all collections in the collection list using a collection query. This is called a multi-collection search. A collection list which supports multi-collection searches is called searchable. The result of a multi-collection search is again a collection list, which c
Access requirement: To work with version control you need access to the index(es) and you must create an archive that points to the index(es) for which version control is enabled. Learn how to upload a new version of an asset from a local computer to FotoStation. When uploading a new version, you can keep the current metadata, if required. To do
Good practice for metadata requirements during upload When configuring FotoWeb for upload, it's important to enforce the addition of some information to the assets being uploaded so that they can be found and used by others as well. In that regard, it's essential to consider the types of assets users will upload. If you enforce a stringent scheme wi
Overview Projects are custom collections of files from different physical locations. Learn how to make them and what to use them for. Introduction to Projects In simple terms, projects are collections of files from different physical locations. You can create projects that contain files from different folders on your disk or network and make them ap
To allow tracking of users who have contributed files to the DAM system, FotoWeb writes information to all files uploaded to the system by authenticated users. A unique document ID is also added to each asset if it does not already exist. The fields are shown in the table below. Field ID Field name Content #187 Document Unique ID A unique ID will be
The condition Layers Changed checks if there has been changes made on the Layer. This does not include changes to the Layer itself but only to Layer changes on the Content Item. Triggers the moment any Layers were assigned or unassigned. Use Layer Changed in combination with AND/OR to add more conditions and further limit the number of affected Con
When users upload assets to FotoWeb, they are prompted to fill in metadata in the fields that are defined in the metadata set that is associated with the archive. When a user uploads files using the web interface after logging in to FotoWeb, the web upload module cannot determine if metadata already exists in the files placed in the upload queue. Th
How searching works To be able to search for files, you need to have a method for adding text, so-called metadata, to each file. Without metadata, you are only able to search for file properties such as file name and file date. By adding metadata to fields, you make it easier to find images because you can search for any information that you include
Fotoware archives have access lists to allow a manager to define the level of access users and groups have in each archive. These users and groups can be imported from an identity provider such as Active Directory, Azure AD, or any SAML-compliant provider. At times, it may be desirable to give specific users access to only a subset of files within a
Overview How to re-obtain the link to a previously made export to your CMS. Obtaining the link to an exported picture To obtain the link to a picture that has already been exported, click on the blue Clipboard icon in the list. Then either select the link and use Ctrl-C to copy it to your clipboard, or click on the little "book" icon to automaticall
Where does Fotoware store data? Fotoware Veloz is currently available in the following Microsoft Azure Regions: US East EU West Germany Australia East Data will not be moved outside these regions. Note: Under the General Data Protection Regulation, the EU/EEA is defined as a single zone, which means that a data center within the EU is sufficient to
Sharing an album To share an album you first have to open it on a separate tab in FotoWeb Pro by clicking its title in the Albums panel. Next, make sure Grid view is selected (press G to activate it) and click on the Share button to the far right in the album information panel above the grid. To share the album with other FotoWeb users or groups, si
Users with permissions to invite users (set on the group level) can invite users to sign up for a Fotoware account. Such invitations can be extended to individuals, organizations, or anyone with a signup link generated by the site administrator. Note: For user invitations to be available, online signup must be enabled. Creating an invitation From th
File Types are regular files (images, documents, videos, etc.) grouped into a hierarchy, to give you access to its extracted metadata. Therefore the name of the individual type is e.g. not “image” but “Image Metadata”. File (everything that has a file extension) Audio (e.g., mp3) Documents (e.g. doc, pdf) Images (e.g., jpg, png, gif) Video (e.g., mo
How to handle unknown file types Where: Channel | Input File Formats | Other Formats tab Files that Color Factory cannot recognize are by default copied to the UNKNOWN folder. However, you may also chose to copy such files to the channel’s output folder, using all channel features not involving manipulation of file data.
Enabling folder browsing Folder navigation implies that FotoWeb displays the entire folder structure in the indexed area and allows users to navigate the folder tree to view the assets stored in each folder. The top-level folder is displayed by default. You can remove this top-level folder from the folder hierarchy. Turn on the Folder navigation to
Overview This article describes how you can revert to an earlier version of FotoStation if your product key does not allow you to run the most recent version you installed. Symptom If you have updated to a version of FotoStation that is newer than your product key allows you to run, you will not be able to start it. Instead, the activation wizard wi
Enabling users to upload files to individual archives When configuring an archive, you can add a user or a whole group to the access list and assign the Upload permission. This way, you can control precisely who can upload files and where they're allowed to submit them. Presetting a destination folder for upload/copy and move operations to the archi
Overview Before an application can access private resources or change information in FotoWeb, it needs authorization. The preferred way to authorize applications in FotoWeb is OAuth 2.0. The OAuth 2.0 protocol is an industry-standard for authorizing an application to access a service on behalf of a user, where: the service is a FotoWeb site or tenan
Note: This feature is only available when using extended markers When configuring an extended marker, you can make it interactive so that when a user clicks it, a metadata macro is applied, or a metadata editor is revealed to let the user enter metadata in preset fields. This way, you can, for example, change the workflow state of the assets. Defini
XMP Mapping allows the extraction and import of XMP/EXIF data into Picturepark metadata fields and the exporting of data from Picturepark metadata fields into XMP based on field mappings. The XMP handling happens when importing files into Picturepark or exporting from Picturepark. XMP Mapping must be enabled for the required output formats via API s
Virtual Types enable you to create content from within Picturepark that adheres to a defined structure, without having to worry about the output format of the content. Common to each of these (and other) Virtual Types is a defined structure e.g. Press Release (Structure: Headline, Subhead, Body, Footer), Landing Page (Structure: Title; Overview; Det
Enabling HTTPS in FotoWeb Firstly, you need to configure FotoWeb to use the HTTPS protocol. Open the FotoWeb Settings app. Select Add. Select HTTPS. Select OK to save your changes. Enabling secure communications in IIS In IIS 7, you should start by installing the server certificate before you set up the HTTPS binding to the website: Creating or
Always upgrade servers before clients New servers work with old clients, so when migrating to a new version, always upgrade servers first. This is true for all servers; Index Manager, Color Factory, FotoWeb, and Connect. The process of migrating all clients to a new version typically takes longer, so you can keep running old clients connected to a n
Tags can be used for regions, locations, moods, colors, product categories, countries .... almost everything. I Picturepark tags are saved in lists, so the individual list items are tags. Examples of lists are: Season (fields: name) *simple one, with just the name of the season Person (fields: First name, Last name, birthday, department, title) *mul
To add annotations to a picture, click on it in the thumbnail grid to open it on the Asset Details page. Annotation tools When hovering over the preview, click on the Annotations icon to start adding annotations to the image. Several types of tools are available to allow users to highlight precisely the part of the picture that's of interest; rectan
The Tagbox Filter (Terms Relation Aggregator) is used to aggregate terms using a unique ID as a base, but instead of unclear IDs, it shows the specified translation (Display Pattern) in the Filter. This makes it easier for the user to really understand the Filters value. For a multi-value Tagbox (or multi-value Relationship, multi-value Fieldset), i
The UI required field setting determines whether or not an editor must provide a field value to save the Content Item in the UI. If a field is UI required and the user has not provided a value or deleted the existing value, Content Platform does not permit saving the item in the UI. This value can be changed at any time.The UI required field setting
Virtual Types enable you to create content from within Picturepark that adheres to a defined structure, without having to worry about the output format of the content. Common to each of these (and other) Virtual Types is a defined structure e.g. Press Release (Structure: Headline, Subhead, Body, Footer), Landing Page (Structure: Title; Overview; Det
Picturepark features a browser-based user interface that offers access to all the controls users and administrators need while keeping the most commonly used functions at the fore. The functions available in the interface depend on the connected user's role. Some Pictureparks have additional interfaces, also known as Microsites, that have been desig
The business rule trace log shows you which business rules have been validated and executed with details about each business rule. This helps you to easily debug the business rule, check conditions, or if the transformation failed or the action could not be completed and then update your business rule accordingly. You can enable tracing per business
There are mainly two ways of working with files in FotoStation. You can choose to browse any folder on your computer by using the Desktop tab, or you can browse one folder at a time by creating an “Archive” (a shortcut) in the Archives tab. Creating an archive makes it easy to locate and browse a folder. Archives also provide extra functionality suc
In the Text field, you can insert text, numbers, and special characters, which means unstructured information, as the user can write whatever they want - even High Valyrian, Valar morghulis, which almost nobody understands. Text fields, therefore, should have a clear label indicating their purpose, for example, Public social media description (avoid
An archive in FotoWeb is a connection to an index where additional filtering can be applied to control the content a user sees. This topic explains how to create such an archive in FotoWeb and some of the basic properties that have to be requiredto work as expected. To create an archive, go to the Archives tab in the FotoWeb site administration and
The Terms Query Filter can filter on multiple terms inside a field. For Tagbox or Fieldsets or Relationship with multiple value support this filter must be used within a NestedFilter. Similar to the Term Query Filter, but with the option to directly filter for multiple terms e.g. show only keywords that are approved and active.
The Terms Filter (Aggregator) is used to aggregate terms from strings (text) e.g. Text, Checkbox. It uses text as a base (e.g. Titles) which means that it does not aggregate similar text but only exact matches e.g. List Item "Joe Berrymore" may be present multiple times (e.g. Joe Berrymore, Jo Berrymore, Joe Berymore). We strongly recommend using th
The "View for all" permission makes all schemas by default visible to all users. You only have to configure the restrictions - so the schemas which you don’t want all users to see. This simplifies the permission management massively. Relationships and Fieldsets have the setting "View for all" applied by default, to ensure that users can see relation
When a user places an order via the Shopping cart in FotoWeb, an administrative notification can be sent using a webhook. Administrative users with access to approve orders can also see a list of orders in FotoWeb by opening the Tools menu (cogwheel icon) and choosing Manage orders. When orders are pending, there will be a blue indicator on the wren
The Tree view field allows users to model hierarchical data.
The Thumbnail Pattern constructs thumbnails for Virtual Types and the overlay on thumbnails for File Types and the tag preview in the cards.
A password policy can be created in Fotoware to ensure that all users have passwords of a certain complexity to aid security. The password policy applies: When users sign up for a Fotoware account online. When users change their existing password. When users have forgotten their password and choose to reset it. The password policy applies only to pa
Clipping path options In Color Factory Settings, expand the relevant channel and select Pixel Edit. Open the Clipping Path tab. The following dialog appears. Stroke clipping path: When selected, anything outside the clipping path is discarded and replaced with a canvas. The canvas color can be set by selecting Set background color. With GIF and PNG
From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon), go to Site Configuration > Archives.A dialog lists all the archives that are configured on the system. You can edit an existing archive or select Add archive in the top right corner to create a new one. Tip: You need to be a member of a group that has been assigned the Manage archives privilege to edit archive
Processing profiles are collections of image processing parameters that can be applied to images when they are downloaded or delivered to a workflow. The system administrator can create individual profiles or collect them in sets. Sets are useful when you want to give users several options (such as choosing different pixel sizes or file formats) to
Metadata can be edited using keyboard shortcuts: Add (Insert): CTRL + I adding a new Layer Edit: CTRL + E start editing Save: CTRL + S save your edits Paging: ALT + arrow left / arrow right open the next or the previous item On Apple devices use Apple Key instead of CTRL. In Safari use the Option Tab to tab to the calendar icon and open it with Ente
This topic explains how you can combine several indexes into a single large archive with a single entry point using unions in Index Manager Enterprise. For more information about unions, see How unions work. To create a union: In the Index Manager Settings app, open the Unions tab and select New Union. General Settings Enter the following informati
Fotoware uses several technologies to facilitate the management of large volumes of users. These methods can also be combined to cater for internal and external users who require access to the site. Integration with an existing corporate user directory: By connecting Fotoware to the existing directory structure, users and groups can be managed in on
Using the access list to control user and group access to archives Access lists in FotoWeb are evaluated from the top to bottom. If you add groups to the access lists (recommended), it is important to move the most specific groups to the top and the least specific groups, often those with the most members, to the bottom. That way, if a user is a mem
The Archive Agents communicate via HTTP URLs and return results as XML documents. The previews are returned in binary JPEG format. URLs are expected to be in the UTF-8 character format. Reserved characters should be encoded using the Quoted Printable standard. (More information can be found in the HTTP specification.)The XML documents returned from
Introduction The FotoWeb Desktop plugin for Microsoft Office is a part of the FotoWeb Desktop suite. When any of the FotoWeb Desktop permissions are assigned to a user or group through an archive's access list, the user will be prompted to install FotoWeb Desktop after logging in to FotoWeb if it has not already been installed. How to give users acc
For the input node, you specify which pool and search string should be configured. The search string uses DTSyntax, which is consistent with standards used in Color Factory and FotoStation. Dynamic tags conform to the same standards as those in FotoWeb. The following tags are implemented in Flow: {{date.now}}. Input options: From SaaS From FTP F
To locate similar images or duplicates within an archive Select the picture for which you would like to find duplicates Open the Search menu and choose Find Similar or Find duplicates If no similarity index has yet been created for the archive, FotoStation will start processing before displaying the result. Generating the similarity index is a one-t
Summary Relationship fields are used to link content together. There is no use case for adding relationship information to Display Patterns as the related Content Items cannot be previewed. You shouldn’t use relationship fields in Display Pattern. Setup in Picturepark Layer: Corporate Information Relationship Field: corporateLogo Field Value Access
The Include in filters field setting allows the field to be added as a filter for content (see Channels Configuration) and the field values to be edited in the Batch Editor (indexed fields). Picturepark checks this setting against the allowed number of Search-indexed fields in your subscription plan. While it may be tempting to include all fields in
The Date Range Query Filter is a filter on a date / datetime field, providing a range (from last month, to now). You can use this filter to only show Content Items created in the last month in a Channel, or in a Tagbox.
Adding files to an existing album Having selected a number of files you want to add to an album (you may have selected them in the grid, added them to the Pins bar or isolated them on a separate tab) you can drag those assets into the album in the right side panel. Tip: You can open an album as a tab in FotoWeb Pro by clicking its title in the album
Default groups These are groups that are configured in FotoWeb's SAML settings interface in the site configuration: Default groups and Linked groups. From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon), go to Site Configuration > Security > Single Sign-on.By defining at least one default group, all users who log in with SAML will be allowed access and placed
Drag&Drop folders onto Picturepark and Picturepark will upload all files inside the folder and keep the folder names available in the file metadata. Ensure that the file path of the folder and the files do not exceed 160 characters (a known Windows limitation).
Access all Microsite samples on Github: https://github.com/Picturepark/Picturepark.SDK.Samples Check the Live Demo Version here: Content Portal Demo Press Portal Demo Understanding Microsites Extending Picturepark access to websites and apps. A Picturepark Microsite is a portable and embeddable website page element or mobile app component that pull
Both users' interface views share the main menu. The main menu is on the left side. The main menu without additional permissions always contains the following elements: Logo The logo is displayed in the top left corner. In the collapsed state of the main menu, only the icon is shown. By default, the Picturepark Logo and icon are used, but the Logo
The condition Tagbox Item Assigned checks if a specific tagbox item ("a tag") is assigned in a specific field e.g. Check if the tag "Twitter" is assigned in the field "SocialMediaPlatforms" on Layer "CopyrightUsages" to then use this image on Twitter. The Business Rule checks if the provided Tagbox Item was assigned to any Content Item and triggers
The condition Tagbox Items Changed checks for any changes to the Tagbox Items. This does not apply to changes to the tagbox field settings or changes to the List Item in the List Browser. Triggers the moment of any change to the Tagbox. Use Tagbox Items Changed inside AND/OR to check if multiple tagboxes were changed (items assigned or unassigned).
New condition that can be used for checkboxes allows checking if a checkbox value is true or false even if it is unchanged, which triggers reminders to editors when they missed checking a checkbox that approves content, license, or gender-sensitive language, i.e. when the task was not done. expected value: true (checkbox)
What's a processing profile set? A processing profile set is a collection of processing profiles. This set can be added to an archive so that when the user downloads files or orders files for delivery, he will get the chance to choose from the available processing profiles in the set. It can also be used to offer users of FotoWeb Desktop for InDesig
To compare two revisions of an asset, open the Asset Details page and go to the Revisions tab. Then use the checkbox to select the revisions you would like to compare and click on the Compare button. The two revisions open side by side and shows both the asset previews as well as the metadata of both revisions. Use the links at the top of the compar
Supported formats when using processing profiles Processing profiles can be applied when a user downloads files and when a user sends a file to an action for which a processing profile has been enabled. They only support processing of image formats. When trying to download a non-image asset from an archive for which a processing profile has been ena
Unsharp mask In Color Factory Settings, expand the relevant channel and select Image Filters. Open the Unsharp Mask tab. The following dialog appears. The unsharp mask filter is used for high-end color correction. It sharpens the overall impression of an image by increasing the contrast of adjacent pixels. You can apply up to four unsharp masks to
On the Dashboard, you can delete workflows that are no longer needed. You can delete each workflow individually or select several workflows and delete them all at once. Note: This action permanently removes selected workflows and every action associated with them. You can't recover deleted workflows. Deleting a single workflow Select ... for the wo
Getting more details about an asset By selecting an asset in the grid, you navigate to the Details page, which displays more information about the asset. To the left of the preview, you can see the asset title, a preview of the caption, keywords, credit information, GPS location data (if any), file size information, and any comments added to the ass
Archives Archives are collections which represent physical folders containing physical files. Every FotoWeb site can have zero or more archives, which can be set up using the FotoWeb configuration interface. For more information, see here. The Archive List An API client can discover archives by requesting the archive list. The URL of the archive lis
IPTC codepage settings The preferences in this section are used to determine how IPTC metadata (which is in ASCII format, unlike XMP, which uses Unicode/UTF-8) without a defined codepage should be interpreted. Note: When using FotoStation in a network environment with Color Factory or Index Manager server applications from Fotoware, these servers ar
While you can add HTML and CSS to all display patterns, the HTML and CSS are not displayed correctly (rendered) in certain areas (such as when adding HTML to the Name display pattern of a layer). Sometimes, the area where the Display Pattern is used may not be suited for fancy stylings (e.g., adding a <br> (paragraph break) in the File Type Im
Overview An overview of the tools and menus in the image editor. The Toolbar Zoom level Click on the Zoom level button to choose a zoom level. To adapt the image to the screen size, select Fit in window. Arrow tool This tool is used to select lassos that you have drawn to make selective adjustment to the image. For example, if you want to delete a p
There are several ways in which you can import pictures (and video files) from your digital camera disk. What's typically important when importing the pictures you've taken is naming the files correctly (for example by job name or number) and adding some basic metadata to them so you can perform a search later and retrieve the entire collection. The
Ports and communications Index Manager works as the backbone of the Fotoware system, providing search and indexing services. To this end, client communication between clients (FotoStation and FotoWeb) and Index Manager is based on the SMB/Windows file sharing protocol. Several client operations in the Fotoware environment rely on SMB file share acce
The flagging service automatically identifies and flags the best Content Items for any purpose within your Content Platform. It can be tailored to customer-specific needs and criteria with guidance from Content Platform experts. Key benefits include: Efficiency & Time Savings: Automatically flags optimal images, eliminating the need for manual s
The display pattern and filters are written in Liquid Syntax, which is the Shopify templating language. It has objects (the field values), filters (manipulations like uppercase) and tags (if/else operations). Please make yourself familiar when you plan to update the display pattern with specific patterns. {% if %} {{data.layerid.fieldid | filter}} {
Note: FotoStation search syntax is very different from that of FotoWeb. For information about the search syntax in FotoWeb, see Searching for assets topic. The API and taxonomy search syntax topic may also prove useful. Extra search functionality with Index Manager When creating custom search strings in a Fotoware client application or using the Ar
Parameter Field Code Total pages in print job #PTO Current page number #PCU System formatted date string #DAT System formatted time string #TIM Folder name (Archive name) #FNA Name of registered user #UNA
The column names are the names of the columns in the CSV file exported from Fotoware. These are also the names that users are presented with when using, for example, PowerBI to create visual reports. In such tools, users must select from the list of columns to determine which data they want to include in their visualization. The exact set of fields
Access to the site configuration is granted to the site owner and other users who have been granted administrative privileges on the site via their group membership. Users who have been granted such administrative privileges can access the Site Configuration in the Tools menu. The Site Configuration provides access to the settings that the user has
The Open ID Connect implementation for One Login may suit the Picturepark implementation. One Login is not officially tested or supported.
Note: Before using this integration, you must complete some configuration steps in FotoStation and FotoWeb. The first time you load a FotoWeb taxonomy in FotoStation, you are prompted to log in to FotoWeb. Once you are logged in, the taxonomy is loaded into the QuickList dialog in FotoStation. You can close the FotoWeb browser window and continue wo
The .opt file is used to control which named users are granted access to check out user licenses for FotoStation clients from a Fotoware license server. The file can be created manually (you can download a sample opt file here), but in larger environments, it makes better sense to be able to automatically create a file based on an Active Directory (
Standard actions Standard actions are available to all users. They include all the functionality that was available to users in FotoWeb 7 and, in that respect, cover legacy functionality. With a standard action, you can: Delete the original asset Transfer an asset to a destination (File system / FTP(S) and as an email attachment) Optional interactiv
How it works The Fotoware extension for Photoshop lets you check out files from a Fotoware archive and edit it in Photoshop, and then upload your changes to the server when you're done. You can also create new content in Photoshop and upload that content to the Fotoware server using the plugin, i.e., there's no need to log in to Fotoware separately
Certain file formats do not allow a Fotoware system to store embedded metadata inside the file itself. To be able to store metadata in these files, you can create a sidecar file. The sidecar file has the same name as the file it accompanies, but with the .xmp extension . It is handled transparently by the system to accompany the master file it accom
Distributing the metadata configuration When a new field definition has been made, those changes are stored in the MetadataConfiguration.xml file in C:\ProgramData\Fotoware\Metadata on the server. All Fotoware server applications that run on the same server share this metadata configuration file. However, if there is more than one Fotoware server in
Content Platform supports AI auto tagging using Azure. The configured output of an image is sent to Azure for AI tagging. Tags are written into the Image Analytics Layer which will appear in the Detail view of images in your Picturepark Content Platform. Business Rule “Enqueue Tagging” The below Business Rule is an example where all images that are
Adaptive Metadata means to focus on the information required for the specific content. If your content model defines that your basic information should always include the address, then where does your product category live? You must define the lowest common denominator - like in mathematics but easier. What type of content will you manage? Input 1:
List Item Ids and Content Item Ids are not available in the search index, you can add them in the channel configuration as “Extended simple search fields”. This query does not work as long as you haven’t added those fields to the channel. By default Ids from List Items or related content in Relationship fields are not present in the search index and
When is the default language used? The Fotoware user interface is normally displayed in the user's preferred language. The preferred language can be configured using browser settings in all supported browsers. If the Fotoware user interface does not support the preferred language, then the next best language (according to browser settings) is chosen
You can create a custom page title for your site. By default, all pages on the site show Fotoware 8.0 in the title. Creating a custom page title From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon) go to Site Configuration > Appearance > Branding. On the Corporate branding tab, turn on the Custom Page Title toggle and enter the new page title. Select Save.
Central deployment of FotoStation Windows and Mac versions of FotoStation are deployed in different ways. In Windows, Group Policy is used to control the deployment, whereas on the Mac there are different tools that can be used. Follow the links below to learn how to deploy FotoStation for Windows and Mac. Deployment of FotoStation for Mac Deploymen
These dynamic operators can be used to create search queries, for example, when configuring auto searches in FotoStation or FotoWeb. For information about a similar feature in FotoWeb search queries, see Dynamic tags. Operators specific to FotoStation The operators listed below can be used in FotoStation to create configurations with archives that p
User sessions time out after a configurable amount of inactivity, even if a user has open Fotoware browser tabs. This prevents potential abuse of open user sessions when users leave their workplace without logging out. By default, Fotoware allows users to choose to stay permanently signed in, also known as a persistent login. In practice, this means
You can allow users to choose between light and dark modes as their interface style. This is a global site setting, and it handles the automatic adaptation of the user's operating system. To enable this option: From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon), go to Site Configuration > Appearance > Branding. On the Corporate Branding tab, scroll down to
The Fotoware site may have been configured with a number of asset markers. As a user, you need to understand what they are and how they work. What markers are Markers are icons that are displayed on the thumbnails of assets in archives. They are set by the system administrator and typically reflect the workflow state of individual assets - for examp
When an asset download is requested, either by a user or via the API, Fotoware delivers the file along with its metadata. However, in some circumstances, you may want to automatically strip certain information from the file before it's delivered to the client. You can do so by choosing the specific fields that should be included when users download
Connect can be configured to send files to an Index Manager archive over the FWP protocol. Select the Index Manager server you have created and then select Add folder to create a destination. Connect retrieves the available archives from the Index Manager server automatically. Enter the channel name and select Destinationas the Type. Choose the inde
With some Fotoware Veloz plans, it is possible to remove all 'Powered by Fotoware' badges from the user interfaces. That way the site can be completely branded according to company standards; this is also known as whitelabeling. How to remove all Fotoware branding From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon) go to Site Configuration > Appearance. On the C
The condition Layer Unassigned checks if a layer is unassigned e.g. Check whether an embargo layer ("LegalApprovalPending") is lifted which then allows to use and publish the content.
Find the public IP for your location. Location IP address Australia East 20.213.126.177 East US 20.172.131.49 Germany West Central 20.52.232.232 Western Europe 52.174.124.51
Hiding detailed error messages from users When Fotoware encounters an error it can deliver a detailed error message through the user interface. Such an error dump can contain a lot of information that may be more confusing than helpful to a non-administrative user on the system. You can disable such error details for users that are not site administ
Configuring the site so that users must accept terms and conditions when logging on From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon), go to Site Configuration > Security > Login and sessions. Select one of the following options in the Login section. Never: Never request approval of terms and conditions from users. Once: Users must accept terms and conditio
Symptom When using the video transcoder in FotoWeb, you may find that the proxy version ofthe video file is larger than the original file. Explanation If the original asset has already been heavily compressed (e.g. using H.264 High profile), the proxy file size will most likely be larger than the original asset.The H.264 encoder used to create the p
When ordering pictures, users can choose from different sizes and formats based on the processing profile set that has been assigned to the archive from where the asset is selected. To create custom sizes and formats, create a processing profile set that contains the "flavors" you'd like to offer users and assign it to the archives that users will o
CMYK processing options In Color Factory Settings, expand the relevant channel and select Color Management. Open the CMYK tab. In the dialog that opens, you can configure color management properties for CMYK input files. Note that conversion to Lab disables the choice of output profile and rendering intent. Rendering intent: Select the method used
Overview Learn how to add usage rights to your pictures with Creative Commons or PLUS usage licenses. Why use rights management? Using Rights Management you can stamp your pictures with usage rights to control their use. If you're a photographer, you can for instance add a license to pictures you have sold that explains how the buyer is allowed to u
Enabling writing of metadata to output files In the Color Factory Settings app, expand the relevant channel and select Metadata. The General tab opens. In the General Options group, select Save Metadata with Output File to preserve or add metadata in output files. If you would like to strip the file of all metadata, deselect the option. Note that i
The condition Content Relation Item Assigned checks if a specific content item or any content item has been assigned in a relationship field to another content item e.g. check if the Press Kit has a Logo (or the correct Logo) and a Hero Shot (or the correct Hero Shot). Triggers the moment an item is assigned in the provided Relationship Field, eithe
Use of the shopping cart can fire notifications using webhooks. This can for example be used to trigger an email alert to administrative users that have access to approve orders. Shopping cart notifications are configured in the Operations Center: Open the Settings tab, expand the Behavior node and choose the Firehose node. Here you find three event
The _refId is the unique identifier of a list item. Field attributes of List Items, like names, are not necessarily unique, e.g., I can have the same person twice in a list of persons, but they have different _refId. You cannot search for it in the Content Browser or List Item Browser as those are not available in the search index, but you can direc
To give a group of privileged users the right to edit and delete annotations made by other users, assign them to a group of "super users" and assign the Manage annotations administrative permission to it: Open the properties page of a group and, in the Administrative permissions section, tick the option to Manage annotations.
You can control which groups of users are allowed to review and approve or reject orders made through the shopping cart. This permission is set on the group level in the Operations Center: Open the properties page of a group and, in the Administrative permissions section, tick the option to Approve orders.
Users and/or groups can be assigned rights to place orders by enabling the Order permission in an archive's access list. With this permission set in any archive they can access, users will see the shopping cart symbol in the top menu when logging on to FotoWeb. A point to remember: The Shopping cart provides a way for users to order assets through a
The crop modification crops your rectangle dimensions, starting at the x:y coordinates. Property Value Details kind CropAction x Whole numbers, in pixel X-Coordinate of the top-left point of the cropping rectangle. y Whole numbers, in pixel Y-Coordinate of the top-left point of the cropping rectangle. width Whole numbers, in pixel Width of the cr
This feature is available both in Standard and Extended actions When a user runs an action that sends files to a destination, you might want to add information about the user that requested the processing.Fotoware can add this information to specific fields in the metadata of the processed files. In the properties of the action in question, go to th
If you successfully registered you can now try to log in on the start page. Depending on what login methods are configured on your Picturepark instance and what login method is defined for your user account, you can either log in via the normal login or via SSO. Login via Single Sign-On Login via Picturepark IDS login (with email and password) If yo
The following settings for .mp4 are additionally available. Property Description resizeAction Allows resizing of the video. audioCodec Gets or sets the encoding audio codec. preset Gets or sets the encoding codec preset. extension This property should not be overwritten, except for extensions that are identical like jpg vs. jpeg. MP4 is the correct
The Business Rule Trigger Create means the creation of a Content Item through upload (File Item) or creation (Virtual Item) in the Content Browser.
What is the Shopping Cart? The shopping cart lets users pick assets from their archives and order them for delivery. Users can be required to enter information about the assets' intended usage before placing the order. Placed orders are then put in a queue where an administrator with the right to approve orders can oversee the order queue and approv
At times it may be practical to clone an action to make minor modifications to an existing one. Here's how. Open the site configuration (Tools - Manage site) and locate the action you'd like to clone. Hover over the action and click on the Clone link to duplicate it. The cloned action will be added to the bottom of the list, and you can easily modif
To manage the order that actions are shown in the web browser user interfaces, move them up or down using the arrow buttons on the right hand side in the list. This also affects the order of Quick Buttons for workflows in the main FotoWeb user interface.
In the section My Profile you find logout, reset settings and delete. You see your Avatar (image) if you defined something for your email address on gravatar.com. My Profile uses the side-by-side view. You find the user details (name etc.) on the left and other settings (email notifications) on the right. The toolbar functionality is: Log out Reset
Requirements for upload Before a user can upload a file, the system administrator has to have granted upload access explicitly to the user or to a group that the user is a member of. Upload privileges can then be assigned to individual archives or to a global upload area. Access to upload to individual archives is given on the archive's access list,
The Child Query Filter allows filtering for all child elements.
Fotoware can be configured to issue an email notification when a workflow has been run using an action or an interactive marker. It is configured by editing the settings of the action or marker and going to the Notification tab. Enabling the option to Send notification message on successful completion, and then type in the email address, a subject l
Note: Actions are only available to Editor users. Also, the Editor user must be a member of a group that has the rights to manage workflows. From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon), go to Site Configuration > Workflows > Actions. Select Add action. Enter a name for the action and, optionally, add a description of what the action does. Select an ac
Archive management In Color Factory Settings, expand the relevant channel and select Image ID. Open the Archive Management tab. The following dialog appears. Color Factory can be configured to manage an archive by filtering out duplicates and optionally by updating the metadata of the file already in the archive using a metadata macro. The archive
The color conversion action is automatically applied in Picturepark when needed. This converts images from CMYK print usage to RGB web usage. Property Value Details colorProfile Enum: "AdobeRgb1998" "AppleRgb" "ColorMatchRgb" "EciRgbV1" "EciRgbV2" "Srgb" "SrgbColorSpaceProfile" "EuropeIsoCoatedFogra27" "EuroscaleCoated" "EuroscaleUncoated" "IsoCoate
This feature is only available when using Extended Actions. Extended Actions are only available to Fotoware Main Users and Fotoware Pro Users. Processing profiles can be used to process pictures before they're transferred to their destination. The processing is only applied to the transferred copies, not to the originals in the archive you're transf
Metadata updates to the source asset is only available when using Extended Actions. Extended Actions are only available to Fotoware Main Users and Fotoware Pro Users. Standard Actions offer functionality to update the destination asset's metadata only. FotoWeb actions can be configured in such a way that users are prompted to add metadata during the
Defining a crop frame In Color Factory Settings, expand the relevant channel and select Image Size. Open the Fixed Crop tab. The following dialog appears. Sometimes, you need to crop images, for instance, to remove a surrounding frame or a text block. On the Fixed Crop tab, you can define a percentage of the pixel width/height to remove or set an a
To set where files are copied when they are processed in an action, open the Destination asset tab in the Action configuration. Destination type Assets can be copied to file system destinations, Windows network shares, and to FTP/FTPS destinations as well as send as email attachments to one or more recipients. If you choose an FTP server as your des
Fieldsets are a group of fields treated as one field e.g a fieldset field "address" with the individual fields street, zip, and city. Relations allow us to link Content Items together and provide context about the relation e.g. linking two images to a document and declaring for one image that it is the hero shot and for the other image that it is th
The Boost factor field setting will boost the values in the search and help you define the relevance of the content for your users. The boost parameter increases the relative weight of a term (with higher boost values) or decreases the relative weight (with lower boost values), but the increase or decrease is not linear. In other words, a boost of 2
This feature is only available when using Extended Actions. Extended Actions are only available to Fotoware Main Users and Fotoware Pro Users. Open the action's properties and go to the Asset Actions tab. Select Go to URL and enter the URL.You can use dynamic tags to insert asset metadata in the URL string if you like. For more information about the
Is there a preferred way to organize users and groups in FotoWeb? In many Active Directory hierarchies, administrators group people by organizational department. This can (but not always) prove a challenge with FotoWeb, since more fine-grained access control is required. The example below offers a potential solution by expanding on the departmental
Renaming files with illegal characters Open the index properties and go to the Advanced tab. Select Automatically replace illegal characters in filenames in the File Options section. When to use this option If your system contains files from non-Windows systems that contain characters that Windows does not recognize, Index Manager can automatically
When you use an action to transfer files to a destination, you can define whether to rename the transferred files individually or as a group. Go to Site Configuration > Workflows > Actions. Open the Destination asset tab. Turn on the Enable interactive toggle. Turn on the Rename files toggle and select Per job or Per file. Per job - when you
MongoDB settings FotoWeb uses MongoDB to store metadata about the assets in the Fotoware system. By default it uses a built-in MongoDB instance running on the same instance as the FotoWeb server. However, FotoWeb can also be configured to connect to a MongoDB replica set, which offers redundancy and high availability. When using a MongoDB replica se
This feature is only available when using Extended Actions. Extended Actions are only available to Fotoware Main Users and Fotoware Pro Users. Applying a macro to the original file Applying a macro to the original file when running an action can be very useful. You can for instance update a metadata field to indicate the location to which you sent a
Index access rights In Index Manager Settings, open the Access list tab for the relevant index. The default setting is to Allow everyone access. However, if you would like to specify access, you can do so by selecting Specify access and selecting +Add. A Search directory opens where you can search for users and/or groups and give them access. Start
In Index Manager Settings, open the Advanced tab for the relevant index. Select Render transparency with white background. Select Save.
Note: This feature is only available in FotoStation Client. When creating QuickLists (regular "flat" ones or hierarchical ones) with predefined metadata for FotoStation's editors, it is possible to store these on a central web server and configure "proxy" QuickLists files in the FotoStation configuration that tell the metadata editors to retrieve ne
Index Manager can create thumbnails and previews of zip archives, provided that each zip file contains a "preview.jpg" file at the root level of the zip will be used for the Index Manager cache. When browsing indexed archives, FotoStation will then show the thumbnail from the preview.jpg file as a visual representation of the zip file.
Codepage mapping In the Color Factory Settings app, expand the relevant channel and select Metadata. The General tab opens. Select Character Codepage Conversion to enable global system preferences for character conversion in your system. By default, when this feature is enabled Color Factory will try to auto-detect the text format of the input imag
Using ImageMagick Learn how to use ImageMagick to create thumbnails and previews of image formats not natively supported by Index Manager. Download ImageMagick. You need the 64-bit Windows version with 8-bit processing. The Portable version (delivered as a zip file) works well without requiring installation. Note: ImageMagick version 7 is not compat
Disabling XMP sidecar creation In Index Manager Settings, open the Advanced tab for the relevant index. Select Disable XMP sidecar creation. Select Save.
Why use this? By default, data mining of a field extracts all the words from the string so that each word can be filtered out separately in the data mining tables in FotoStation. However, there may be some fields for which you would prefer "string" data mining. City names, such as New York, for example, would generate separate entries for New and Yo
Accent sensitivity When Index Manager builds an index, it is accent-aware by default. This way, users can search for both accented and unaccented characters and Index Manager will distinguish between them. You can, however, make Index Manager ignore accents: In Index Manager Settings, open the Advancedtab for the relevant index. Clear the Make sear
Why would I want to exclude fields from the index? If files in your archives contain sensitive information that you want to make unsearchable, or if certain fields in your files contain excess information that causes client searches to generate too many irrelevant matches, you may want to specify that these fields should not be indexed. Although thi
To categorize our content we can select to update product, event or corporate information. Lets focus on managing product information in Picturepark. Some content is about products. Some content is only about the product line, the industry, or the end-use sector. All files contain either the product name or just the industry or the end-use-sector. D
This topic explains how to activate the auto-tagging feature using a webhook. We recommend using auto-tagging on demand with interactive actions, but if you would like to automatically tag assets on ingestion, this topic explains how to do so. From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon), go to Site Configuration > Integrations > Webhooks. Turn on the
The print feature in FotoWeb Pro lets you print: A single image with metadata (Title, Description and Tags) The contents of an album in a grid layout (including the filename of each asset) Printing a single image Select an image in the grid and open the info panel (keyboard shortcut T). Click on the Print icon at the bottom of the info panel to open
In Index Manager Settings, open the Advanced tab for the relevant index. Select Set todays date on files after metadata update. Select Save.
With the Fotoware Extension for InDesign, you can find and place files from Fotoware archives into InDesign layouts. If the extension isn't visible after starting InDesign, open the Window menu and choose FotoWeb Desktop. If the extension isn't visible there, you need to add it using the Adobe Extensions Manager. Logging in When the extension is ac
The Fieldset field shows a group of fields configured as a Fieldset schema. For example, for an address, you need three fields: Street (text), Zip (number), and City (text), which you can group as one field (*fieldset) Address. This grouping allows you to have a set of fields for adding address information always available as one field (*fieldset).
Display Patterns are configurable templates in Liquid Syntax (used in Shopify). In these Patterns, you take metadata and other values and construct a nice piece of information. The thumbnail pattern for a list item (product) with a title and other product attributes. Code for Thumbnail Pattern List Item (Screenshot) {% if data.fruit.shortDescription
An extended marker can be clicked to apply metadata, execute a webhook, or navigate to a preset URL. To prevent modifying the asset's content in error, you can enforce a confirmation dialog when using such markers. Open the marker's properties and go to the Action tab. Turn on the Request confirmation toggle and add a window title and a message. The
Text extraction to file In Color Factory Settings, expand the relevant channel and select Metadata. Open the Extract Text tab. The following dialog appears. With Color Factory you can extract text from the input images and store the text file separately in either ASCII or XMP (XML) format. To do so, enable Activate text extraction and, optionally,
Accessing the configuration When Index Manager is installed, there will be a link to Operations Center Status and Index Manager Settings on the desktop. Operations Center Status displays the status and logs for all of the installed Fotoware apps on the server, while Index Manager Settings is used to configure the indexes and their settings. To open
Exporting an action FotoStation provides the possibility to import and export actions. This is useful if you for example need to share one or more actions, or if you would like to create several versions of an action where you only change a few settings. FotoStation will export the action configuration as an xml file with the extension .action. This
File Types are regular files (images, documents, videos, etc.) grouped into a hierarchy, to give you access to its extracted metadata. Therefore the name of the individual type is e.g. not “image” but “Image Metadata”. File (everything that has a file extension) Audio (e.g., mp3) Documents (e.g. doc, pdf) Images (e.g., jpg, png, gif) Video (e.g., mo
Creating a namespace Go to File > Configuration and select the Metadata node. Select Configure. Right-click on the Namespaces node and choose Add namespace. In the Name field, enter a descriptive name. In the Alias field, enter an alias for the namespace. Use lowercase letters only and no spaces. Tip: If you're uncertain about the alias, look at
Uploading files using FotoWeb Desktop FotoWeb Desktop is an application installed on your local computer that allows communication with the remote FotoWeb system. The upload module in FotoWeb Desktop lets you upload files from your desktop directly to any archive that you have upload permissions to. You can also modify the files' metadata before upl
Authorization is the process of verifying that "you are permitted to do what you are trying to do" by granting permissions. While authorization often happens immediately after authentication (e.g., when logging into a computer system), this does not mean authorization presupposes authentication: an anonymous agent could be authorized to a limited ac
Having configured a marker you can use the Access List tab in the marker setup to choose the groups and/or users that are allowed to see and use the marker. Also, the Archives tab in the marker setup lets you choose in which archives the markers should be visible. Thus, different archives can have different sets of markers. Users need "Workflow" arc
To get the permalink of an asset in FotoWeb pro, select the asset and press T to open the asset info panel, if it's not already open. Then click on the blue link next to the Permalink label to copy the full url to the clipboard. It can then be pasted into another application.
Note: This functionality is only available for extended markers. Open the marker's properties and go to the Action tab. Turn on the Go to URL toggle and enter the URL. Note: Getting the entire URL from metadata in a workflow action/marker is potentially dangerous and should only be done if metadata can be trusted at all times. Save your changes. Ti
Fotoware as a Service - March 2025 update Deployment This release is being gradually deployed and will be available on all tenants soon. Fixed issues The following issues are fixed in this release: Errors on the login page were not announced to the screen reader. Applying the editing metadata workflow action to batch assets failed with a server ti
What are markers? Markers are visual indicators you can customize to alert users about files in your collections that meet certain criteria. For example, you can display a marker if a file contains a certain string in a metadata field to alert a user. Markers can be made interactive so that selecting a marker can execute a metadata macro, open a met
Mirroring and rotation In Color Factory Settings, expand the relevant channel and select Image Size. Open the Mirror and Rotation tab. The following dialog appears. The Mirror and Rotation tab can be used to flip images vertically or horizontally, and you may set the default direction to rotate incoming images. You may even enter the rotational ang
Cause In both cases, the issue is caused by two settings in IIS (Internet Information Services). Solution Try this first First, try to remove the FotoWeb Site from IIS and then set up IIS again using the FotoWeb Administration Console: Open the FotoWeb Administration Console from the Start menu. Expand the Server node and right-click the Site node,
Modifying an alert To change the settings of an alert, select the Alerts link at the top of the web interface and then select the pencil icon next to the alert you would like to modify. You can now change the search string and the alert frequency.
Alerts, or search agents, as they're commonly called, are user-defined queries that are stored and repeated at a set interval. This way, FotoWeb can be set to look for new content in an archive and give users a heads-up via email when new content that matches the search arrives in the archive. Alerts are issued by email to the registered user's emai
If you don't receive alert emails as expected FotoWeb's alerts are based on the modification time of the files. When it triggers the alert the first time, it will send an email with information about all the assets that match the set criteria. Subsequent emails will only include assets with a newer modification date that those included the last time
Overview After deploying or installing FotoWeb Desktop, the "From FotoWeb" button is not available on the Insert Ribbon in Word and PowerPoint. Possible cause "Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 Tools for Office" has probably not been installed on the client.During a regular client installation, the installer downloads all required components, but this is
The configuration files for the Adobe Creative Suite / Creative Cloud plugins are stored in this location: Mac OS /Macintosh HD/Users/UserName/Library/Preferences/StageManager123456789/Local Store Windows C:\Users\<username>\AppData\Roaming\StageManager.BD123456789\Local Store Important: The StageManager folder can have a number of random char
Overview FotoWeb Desktop can be configured to work with more than one FotoWeb server. You can also specify proxy settings for the client/server communication. Adding a FotoWeb server or modifying server connection settings Right-click on the FotoWeb Desktop system tray icon (the leftmost blue icon as seen above) and choose Settings... to configure t
Overview How to create a taxonomy that lets users filter archive content by tags in the City metadata field. Enabling the taxonomy First off, you would go to the Site configuration in FotoWeb, open Metadata sheet under Site settings and enable taxonomies for the city field. You also need to type in a plural name, which will be used as the taxonomy's
This information only applies to accounts managed in Picturepark. If your Picturepark uses federated authentication, like log in with your company account, you must have a working company account that only your company can give you. Try to log in to find out. The Picturepark Content Platform admin interface is not available without a login, so yo
{% if data.audioStream.samplingRate %}Sampling Rate: {{data.audioStream.samplingRate}} {% endif %} {% if data.audioStream.bitRate %} - Bitrate: {{data.audioStream.bitRate}}{% endif %}
FotoWeb Desktop detection - what users will see When a user with access to FotoWeb Desktop logs in, they are asked to install FotoWeb Desktop if it has not been installed on the client computer. If the user chooses to ignore the message and not show it again, it will be hidden for the remainder of the session. Which user permissions require FotoWeb
Modifying an alert To change the settings of an alert, click on the Alerts link at the top of the web interface and then click on the pencil icon next to the alert you would like to modify. You can now change the search string and the alert frequency.
No special settings for a vector still image are available. No special settings for all vector files are available. The following output format settings are available for all file types . Property Description sourceOutputFormats Which output format should be used as a source for rendering. This allows you to render small thumbnails from formats o
Symptom After logging in and selecting a file in the FotoWeb web interface, the Edit, Crop, and/or Open buttons don't show, even though FotoWeb Desktop has been installed on the client. Possible cause and solution #1 After logging in, you need to dismiss the message that tells you to install FotoWeb Desktop, if it is already installed, by selecting
Exporting a single namespace If you've made a new namespace and need to duplicate its field definitions to other Fotoware servers and clients in the network, you can export a single namespace instead of duplicating the entire metadata configuration file: Go to File > Configuration and select the Metadata node. Select Configure. Right-click on th
If you don't receive alert emails as expected FotoWeb's alerts are based on the modification time of the files. When it triggers the alert the first time, it will send an email with information about all the assets that match the set criteria. Subsequent emails will only include assets with a newer modification date that those included the last time
Goal: Channel with only Microsoft Office Word Documents. Limitation This channel filter example uses File Type Metadata from Schemas > Files > Document (path: /schemas/file-types/DocumentMetadata). Picturepark Setup Layer: DocumentMetadata (System Schema available) Fields: ApplicationName, indexed Content Schema: DocumentMetadata In order to
Deleting an alert To remove an alert and stop receiving email updates, select the Alerts icon at the top of the screen. This opens the list of defined alerts. Select X next to the alert you want to delete.
The Sortable field setting defines if Picturepark uses the values of those fields for sorting List Items (in Lists). Sorting of contents based on fields in a Layer is possible via the channel configuration, which only considers fields marked as sortable. All fields except for Geo Point and Relationship fields are sortable. This can be changed after
When do I need this? Being able to define more than one site may be useful if your business has two FotoWeb sites, for example one with content for external users and another one that's for internal use only. You can then define hostnames and user credentials for both sites in FotoWeb for iPad and easily change between them. How to define another si
Accessing the metadata panel The metadata panel is available by clicking in the information icon in the upper right corner above the grid. This opens the Asset information panel. (Keyboard shortcut T.) When the panel is opened, the File Information tab is opened first. Here you find Title, Rating, Keywords, Notes and other relevant information about
Overview This topic explains where FotoWeb Desktop stores checked-out files and where it stores its control files. Settings file The settings file that is used by the Uploader, Office Plugin and the Adobe Extensions is found at:%USERPROFILE%\AppData\Roaming\Fotoware\FotoWeb Desktop\SitePreferences.xml The settings file with server and proxy setting
CCI NewsDesk XML In the Color Factory Settings app, expand the relevant channel and select XML & Job Request Files. Open the XML formats tab. The following dialog opens. Select Enable CCI NewsDesk XML to allow processing according to the CCI XML format. Note that the image file and XML from CCI are archived together in a zip file, which means t
You can open fields and values and test the behavior. There is no autosave. To change values, you must select Save (bottom right). Edits (updates) are only applied to the Content Items you see. If you plan to edit 50 items, filter by a Layer so you only see 20 items and then edit - you will only update the visible, filtered 20 items. Only the items
Goal: copy metadata from a migration layer to the correct metadata layer Trigger The trigger point (check Triggers in Business Rule Settings): Should trigger on a content modification -> Action Update We want to modify the document -> Execution scope Main doc Condition Goal: Should be executed when the date/time of the trigger field changes Fi
To rate assets in FotoWeb Pro, select one or more assets. Open the Asset information panel (keyboard shortcut T). Select the number of stars you'd like to assign. The rating is applied immediately - there's no additional saving involved. Tip: To quickly apply a rating to a selection, use the keyboard shortcut: Shift-1 up to Shift-5. To clear the ra
Print template parameter codes Parameter Field Code Total pages in print job #PTO Current page number #PCU System formatted date string #DAT System formatted time string #TIM Folder name (Archive name) #FNA Name of registered user #UNA
The ADFS sign-in page shows "An error occurred" rather than a sign-in prompt This usually means that either the FotoWeb or the ADFS side is incorrectly configured. Additional information about the error can be seen using Windows Event Viewer on the ADFS server, under Applications and Services Log → AD FS → Admin. If the error information is not help
Adding metadata from a taxonomy When adding metadata to a single or a whole selection of assets, some fields in the metadata panel may have a taxonomy associated with them. Select the taxonomy icon next to that field to open a view where you can select predefined metadata from a tree structure. Depending on how the metadata fields have been configur
The Print feature in FotoWeb lets you print: A single image with metadata (Title, Description and Tags) The contents of an album in a grid layout (including the filename of each asset) Printing a single image Click on an image to open the asset details page Click on the Print button above the preview, as seen in the screenshot. Printing the contents
Fotoware’s Archive Agent interface is an open standard for making document archives accessible from any otherapplication using HTTP/HTTPS. The interface is based upon known industry standards, which makes it easy to develop both server and client software for this system. Server and client software can be developed in any development language on any
Accessing the metadata panel The metadata panel is available by clicking the information icon in the upper right corner above the grid. This opens the Asset information panel (keyboard shortcut T). When the panel is opened, the File Information tab is opened first. Here, you findTitle, Rating, Keywords, Notes, and other relevant information about th
Overview Get tips for quickly adding tags to a number of files in a selection in the FotoWeb Pro interface. Adding tags quickly When you add metadata to a large number of assets, you may have found that many of the keywords you use are the same. To help you avoid having to retype them again and again, there are a couple of "tricks" in the metadata p
Note: The Fotoware Application Activation Wizard has been superseded by the fwlicensetool for managing activations. For information on how to obtain this tool and use it to manage software activation from the command prompt, see Command line activation of Fotoware applications using fwlicensetool. Considerations when deploying FotoStation When rolli
Die Suchergebnisse können nach einem bestimmten Wert sortiert werden. Dieser Wert kann in den Channel Einstellungen festgelegt werden. Wir empfehlen immer nach Relevanz zu sortieren, um die genauesten Suchergebnisse zu erhalten.
Das Menü kann durch einen Klick auf das Logo oben links aufgeklappt werden. Welcher Menüpunkt zu welchen Konfigurationen und Einstellungen führt, ist unten angegeben. Content Items Hier kann zum Content Browser gewechelt werden. Shares Ein Share ist eine Gruppe von Inhalten, die mit Personen ausserhalb Ihrer Unternehmung geteilt werden kann. Sie ben
User-centered conditions such as the “User in User Roles” condition allow you to automate processes based on actions performed by particular users or user roles, such as: Assign default permission when your agency uploads the content. Assign default tags and keywords when your photographers upload. Send out notifications to specific users or user
Ziehen Sie einen Ordner per Drag&Drop in die Anwendung. Picturepark wird alle Dateien innerhalb des Ordners hochladen und die Ordnernamen in die Datei-Metadaten schreiben. Stellen Sie sicher, dass der Dateipfad des Ordners und der Dateien nicht länger als 160 Zeichen ist (eine bekannte Windows-Beschränkung).
To add annotations to a picture, select it in the thumbnail grid to open it on the Asset Details page. Annotation tools When hovering over the preview, select the Annotations icon to start adding annotations to the image. Several types of tools are available to allow users to highlight precisely the part of the picture that's of interest: rectangles
The Tagbox field allows you to tag content, similar to tagging in social media, but with the option to configure the available tags. Tags work as a grouping of content. Tags are structured information because users cannot make typos when selecting from a predefined list. You can use Tags for regions, locations, moods, colors, product categories, cou
Overview Bookmarks are shortcuts to a search you have performed or an archive you browse with additional filters applied. Filters include your choice of folders in the Folders panel, Taxonomy filtering, and Status and Rating filtering. Thus it becomes a dynamically updated collection of assets that are available through a single click. A site admini
Mit der Medienoptimierung (IO) können Sie Bilder mit dem Medieneditor zuschneiden, in der Größe verändern, schärfen, die Transparenz ändern oder umbenennen. Dies erfordert eine Berechtigung zum Bearbeiten der Bildern (Rollenberechtigung). Die Bilder können dann in Websites, E-Commerce-Shops oder andere Anwendungen integriert werden. Content Delivery
Overview In this workflow, access lists are set on archives and coupled with individual filtering per access list entry so that different groups of users get access to different content in the archive. Groups We have three groups: Guests (unauthenticated guest visitors to the site) Staff (authenticated consumers of content on the DAM) Managers (cont
Overview This topic deals with the configuration of a workflow for approving assets for use. Regular users will only be able to see and use content that's been approved by the system manager. Uploaded content will have to be reviewed and released before users can access it. This is merely a demonstration workflow that can be expanded upon - the purp
You can share content from within Picturepark directly, enabling CDN (Fastly.com) for faster delivery and distribution. More details on Fastly CDN Delivery for Picturepark Content on the website. When creating a share, you can select metadata to be shared too. This shared metadata is displayed in the share viewer to recipients and others who access
You can download every content item from Picturepark to your local desktop if you like. You can download file-based content items in the desired output format, e.g., suitable for website or social media usage. Those are pre-configured for the system. Picturepark exports file-less content items as JSON. Picturepark generates (renders) static (preconf
Every action in Content Platform is displayed in the notification pane at the bottom, a so-called Toast. There, you can see how your upload, ingest, or edit is progressing. The toast also has icons for additional actions depending on the process running, for example, a user can cancel an upload or directly edit ingested files. The available actions
Media Optimization (IO) enables you to crop, resize, sharpen, change transparency or rename images using the media editor, requiring permission to edit images (role permission). Theimages can then be integrated into websites, e-commerce stores, or other apps. Content Delivery Networks (CDN) further improve global delivery and availability. If you
This will find all Content Items where the field is not present, but also those without the Layer assigned, so you must additionally check if the Layer present. -_exists_:fieldpath To check if a field is not available use exists and a dash in front of it: -exists (not exists) This functionality is similar to the NOT Filter with the Exists Filter Fin
Picturepark executes all actions (from the toolbar or context menu) on the result set. Without any selection, the result set is all content. Manual: Search, Filter, Find - the result set In Picturepark, you have 476 Content Items (videos, images, brochures, etc). You open the Product content channel. You see 28 Content Items. The channel filters all
View Content Statistics You can double-click a Content Item and see its statistics in the tab navigation. The actions shown here are only from Picturepark, not other API clients. The available statistics on Content Items are: Downloads Total (includes open the detail view) Downloads from a Share (includes open the detail view) Downloads from an Embe
Create a Field Open or create the schema where you want to add a field, such as a list, layer, virtual type, fieldset, or relation. Open schema settings by double-clicking on the schema. Select the Fields tab in the right column of the schema detail view. Add one or multiple fields, remove fields - make the necessary changes. Save your changes. Your
Overview Each asset has one or more preview images of different dimensions. Each preview image of each asset has a unique URL, which is used to request the actual image. The URLs, as well as other information about each preview image, is contained within the other information about an asset and can be found in the asset representations of a single a
When browsing an archive, or after you have performed a search, you will want to select files to do something with them. Selecting individual files Below each thumbnail is a filename and a checkmark. click on that checkmark to select an individual file. To select multiple individual files, you can press the Ctrl-key while clicking all the files you
Access all Microsite samples on Github: https://github.com/Picturepark/Picturepark.SDK.Samples Check the Live Demo Version here: Press Portal Demo Understanding Microsites Extending Picturepark access to websites and apps. A Picturepark Microsite is a portable and embeddable website page element or mobile app component that pulls content from the Pi
The content browser is the overview of all content items and is the first thing you see when logging in. You should be able to see the preview images of the files. Depending on the configuration, you should also be able to see some additional information on the file thumbnails, for example, what file type a content item has or what permission set it
How to brand a FotoWeb site You can make simple branding changes to the FotoWeb using industry-standard CSS. You can change the color scheme, fonts, and other design elements to fit your corporate profile. You can also replace the Fotoware logos on the site with your company logos and select a header image for the home page. Note: Branding using CSS
Prerequisites Make sure the server meets the system requirements. For more information, see Color Factory system requirements. Configure your network to allow communications between the server and client. Install Color Factory on your server and configure it using Color Factory Settings. Configuring the server network settings Having set up IIS, mak
The search results can be sorted by a defined value. This value can be defined in the channel settings. We always recommend sorting by relevance to get the most accurate search results.
About activation FotoStation is licensed on a two-devices-per-user basis. Any single-user license of FotoStation can be activated and run on two computers, allowing a user to run FotoStation on an office computer and a computer at home, for example. If you want to install and run FotoStation on a new machine, you must deactivate FotoStation on the o
Choosing an album cover Having created an album, click on the album title in the album list to open it on a new tab. When the tab opens, make sure the Grid view is enabled (press G) and then simply drag the picture you want to use as the cover image to the frame next to the album title and description.
Connect overview After installation on the server, Connect is configured using Connect Settings which can be found on the desktop or on the Start menu. Members of the Fotoware Operators group can start and stop the Connect service, while you must be a member of the Fotoware Administrators group to make changes to the Connect configuration. Status Th
LEGACY NOTE: This guide describes legacy functionality in FotoStation. In new versions of FotoStation configurations are maintained and downloaded to the client over FWP. Please refer to Creating and maintaining centralized FotoStation configurations for updated documentation. Uploading the configuration to a server Initial tip: If you want to st
A sequence of multiple operations performed on an asset, and all served as a single logical unit of work before the change is committed/saved back to the asset.
A filter that needs to be passed for a workflow to execute an asset. It can be applied on workflow, task, and trigger levels. We want to be able to perform different actions based on a changing state. For example, IF fileName.StartsWith('president') = TRUE Run action 1 ELSE Run action 2. The user should be able to define this somehow.
FotoStation has a search and replace function that lets you search for specific metadata within an archive and replace it with new text. To use the search and replace function: Open the Search menu and select Search and replace Enter the word or string to search for in the Find field. If you would only like to search for whole words matching the sea
What are albums? Albums are collections that you can create and add content to from FotoWeb. You can add assets from several archives into a single album. If you have permission to share albums, you can share with other users who have an account in Fotoware or with external users by adding their email address to the invite list. Video: Creating albu
Access requirement: To work with version control you need access to the index(es) and you must create an archive that points to the index(es) for which version control is enabled. Note: Deleting content changes impacts the preview for later metadata changes. This functionality is due to be changed in a later version. You can delete any version e
A picture with annotations can be printed complete with the annotations to any connected printer or as PDF output. How to print On the Asset Details page, select the Print button above the preview and choose Print with annotations. Next, choose which annotations to include in the printout by checking off the correct ones. Print Output The picture be
The sum of changes made to an asset during a workflow. You can have multiple workflows on assets in the transformation. Filter - what do you want to do with the incoming assets?
The Condition Layer Assigned checks if a layer with a specific ID is assigned to a content item e.g. Check if layer with ID "ProductInformation" is assigned to find all product related content.
You can import values via Excel. You can export values in Excel. This App was formerly called Data Exchange or Excel Roundtripping App. The Excel Roundtripping App is developed by Picturepark and saves you time when updating content or metadata. You can export data such as Content Items, content metadata, and List Items on a massive scale, editing t
New condition that can be used for checkboxes allows checking if a checkbox value is true or false even if it is unchanged, which triggers reminders to editors when they missed checking a checkbox that approves content, license, or gender-sensitive language, i.e. when the task was not done. expected value: true (checkbox)
Settings This sub action is used for processing files with the Fotoware Color Factory server. Normally, it is sufficient to set up a Copy File sub action and copy the file(s) to a Color Factory input folder. Color Factory will then process the file(s) according to the channel’s settings. However, by using the Color Factory job request sub action, yo
Options This sub action is used when you want to apply metadata to files that are processed in an action. When files are dropped on the action, FotoStation will display the metadata editor you've chosen and allow you to fill in the fields specified in it. You can configure the action to either append new text to existing text or to replace existing
The Picturepark Content Platform supports different kinds of metadata concepts, one is unstructured data input like free text and the other is structured data input similar to excel tables. Unstructured Data You can define for each and every content all required information as free text, also putting all information in one single field if you like.
Find the ID of the role in the URL when opening the role in role detail view Go to users > switch to advanced search mode Add this code (adapt the ID) -userRoles.userRoleId:1b611edb400c403498113523f1127580s Then you may batch edit the users and assign the role they did not have before. The ID is shown in the URL in the Role Detail View. VIDEO: Ho
Overview This sub action is used to automatically adjust the black and white point in an image. Settings This sub action is used to automatically adjust the black and white point in an image. This is a way of adjusting an image’s contrast by redefining the darkest and the lightest color in an image. If you are familiar with “Autolevels” in Adobe Pho
Overview This sub action is used to change the codepage of the IPTC metadata block of images. It has no effect on pictures tagged with XMP metadata. Settings This sub action is used when you would like to change the IPTC character set used when storing IPTC metadata in files. Since FotoStation will automatically detect (and display correctly) what c
The condition Content Permission Set Unassigned checks if a permission set is unassigned, which removes access e.g. Check if permission set "PartnerAccess" is removed to inform partners about usage restrictions for this specific content. Triggers the moment the selected Content Permission Set is unassigned from any Content Item. Use Permission Set
Overview Sub action used to check the quality of the pictures in your workflow. Settings This sub action is used to automatically check the quality of one or more images. It basically checks to see if there is sufficient data in the image to save or print it in the chosen resolution. Quality Check Options Set the Target screen resolution and the Min
Settings This sub action is used if the original image is a bit dark, and you would like to apply a digital flash to the image. It will make the darkest part of the image appear brighter, but it may also remove some of the contrast from the image. When you apply this sub action to an image, FotoStation will start analyzing the image to discover how
If you're using the Pro interface, learn how folder navigation works there. Folder navigation When you open an archive that contains a folder structure, that folder structure is displayed in the left panel above the Comments field. Note: The system administrator controls whether folder navigation is available in archives. You can click on a folder t
The condition Tagbox Items Changed checks for any changes to the Tagbox Items. This does not apply to changes to the tagbox field settings or changes to the List Item in the List Browser.
An administrator with user and group management privileges can force a user to change their password on the next login. This is done by opening the user's properties and enabling the Force user to change password option, as outlined below. Note that this option is unavailable for users imported to Fotoware from an identity provider such as Microsoft
Overview Fotoware search expressions are a rich query language that can be used by both regular users and API clients to get more fine-tuned search results. Some of its features are: Boolean operators (AND, OR, NOT) Search in specific metadata fields vs. "full text search" Date and numeric ranges Dynamic tag expansion Search expressions can be used
Settings This sub action lets you set the maximum file size of a JPEG file. Note that non-JPEG files are not affected by this sub action. This means that if you apply this sub action to a non-JPEG file (such as TIFF or GIF), the sub action will simply be ignored. It also means that after a Save file sub action that stores images in TIFF or EPS forma
Settings The FTP Upload sub action is used to upload files to an FTP server. Mac and Windows implementations are identical, so the features are the same whichever platform you're running FotoStation on. FTP Upload Options Enter the FTP server name or the IP address to the FTP server in the Host field and specify the port number. The default port num
Settings The Print sub action is used to print images. The printer setup and choice of print template is similar to that of the standard FotoStation Print feature, which is documented in the Printing topic. Setting Up the Print Action Start by clicking on the Setup print action button. In Windows, the standard printer setup dialog will open the firs
Overview See how you can send files as email attachments from FotoStation. Emailing files Using FotoStation, you can select files in your archive and send them as email attachments in your standard email application. You can choose to reduce the file size before sending (useful if the email server has email size limitations) or send the file as it
In the Browser View, you can select to view content in a Thumbnail or a List view. If you select Thumbnail, you can choose a small, medium, large, or extra-large thumbnail. The List View displays data in a configurable spreadsheet-style format. Using the Fields option in the sidebar, you can dynamically select the fields to display. The fields avai
Settings The Save file sub action is used for saving images in a folder and can be customized in a number of ways. The file saving process can be completely preconfigured so that there is no need for user intervention after the action has been activated, or it can be configured to prompt the user so that a folder and file name can be chosen manually
Settings The Sharpening Filter sub action is used to increase the sharpness of images. It is similar to the unsharp mask filter found in Photoshop and other image editors. In addition to applying a basic unsharp mask filter, the sharpening filter has three modes of action: You can choose between the Fotoware SmartSharp™ technology, a Smooth mode tha
Settings This sub action is used for tagging an image file with an ICC profile. It does not alter the image data in any way, it simply rewrites the file to include the ICC profile so that other systems can reproduce the image data correctly. What ICC profile should be used depends on the color space of the input image: Grayscale Profile: From the dr
Settings This sub action can be used if you wish to physically watermark your images, for instance as a copyright measure when publishing images on the web. Choosing a watermark is pretty straightforward. Enter the path to the image file you wish to use as a watermark in the Watermark image field, or click the browse button to locate it. Then choose
Entry points Public Album list /fotoweb/albums Private Album list /fotoweb/me/albums Syntax Public Album list GET /fotoweb/albums Accept: Private Album list GET /fotoweb/me/albums Accept: Note: Access to the private API in the second example above requires authentication, which means the client needs to send additional headers. API descriptor (Pu
Entry points URL Public Syntax Album GET /fotoweb/archives Accept: API descriptor (Album) MIME type: The API descriptor is the data that is returned when making a request to the entry point. cURL example for Album access
Use Fiddler to capture API requests and responses Fiddler is a debugging proxy. When running, it listens for HTTP requests on port 8888. If capturing is enabled, Fiddler changes the system proxy settings to route all requests through Fiddler. For example, all modern browsers will send requests through Fiddler if capturing is enabled, and so will all
Cause This error code can also be manifested as 76/61026 or 21/126. The problem is local to the machine. This is an issue with the FLEXNet licensing service. This error can also occur if antivirus software on the computer is blocking the activation routine. Solution Temporarily deactivate any antivirus software running on the computer and run the ac
Note: Event logging is performed on a best-effort basis and is not transactional. There is no guarantee that every action will be logged, as Activity Exports logs the event after it has been processed. However, this risk is minimal and if it does occur, it is most likely due to a larger background failure that affects more parts of the Fotoware syst
With the Activity Export feature, you can configure which activity events you want to log and set up one-time exports based on the selected events. You can then download the export as a CSV file (raw data) and use a third-party tool (such as Microsoft Excel or PowerBI) to visualize the results. You can also define users or groups to receive an email
Syntax PATCH asset URL Content-Type: application/vnd.fotoware.assetupdate+json Accept: application/vnd.fotoware.asset+json The asset URL is the URL of the asset. It can be obtained by browsing an archive, through a search result, etc. Requirements Requires authentication: Yes Required permissions: Edit Metadata on the archive containing the asset Re
Introduction This article was published after a webinar where Fotoware developers demonstrated how to get started using OAuth with Fotoware integrations. The questions under the video are from the Q&A session after the webinar. Watch the webinar Download the PDF You can download a PDF file that outlines how OAuth works with Fotoware. Questions
The concept of channels A Process Channel (commonly referred to as just a channel) essentially consists of an input folder, an output folder and a number of settings that determine how the files in the input folder are processed before they are stored in the output folder. Each channel can be configured in such a way that all files sent to the input
Property Description Layers Add Here you see the Layers that can be added to the selected Virtual Type. You can reorder the Layers in edit mode, which has currently no impact in Picturepark. General Settings for all Schemas Property Description Status Content & List Items Content search Index List Item search index The Status shows if the
The column names are the names of the columns in the CSV file exported from Fotoware. These are also the names that users are presented with when using, for example, PowerBI to create visual reports. In such tools, users must select from the list of columns to determine which data they want to include in their visualization. The exact set of fields
The FotoWeb Desktop plugin for Microsoft Office allows you to place files from a FotoWeb archive directly in a Word document or a PowerPoint presentation. Since the plugins work the same way in both Word and PowerPoint, the topic deals with both varieties and explains differences in operation where necessary. Note: FotoWeb Desktop is a suite of util
You need to have selected at least one asset-related event before you can select metadata here.Metadata is not logged by default. Metadata fields and values are only logged if the metadata has changed. The Metadata edit, Workflow, or Upload events can cause metadata to change. We recommend selecting the metadata fields that are likely to change with
To change the order of assets in an album, start by selecting the ones you want to move. Then use the four arrow keys in the action bar (right above the Actions button) to move them one step to the right/left or to the front or far back. If you select more than one asset and start moving them, they will be grouped together when you start moving them
Albums that are no longer actively used can be archived or deleted. By archiving an album, you "close" the project so content cannot be added or removed from it. The album will be hidden from view in your albums list, but you can still open and view its contents on demand by filtering the content on the Albums page to display archived albums. How t
The Business Rule Trigger Schedule allows customers to create a Schedule for how often/when a business rule should be run. Examples are: daily, weekly.
Problem If the Index Manager service isn't running when FotoWeb starts up, FotoWeb will not start. Solution Ensure the Index Manager service has started before starting the FotoWeb service.
Letting search engines find an archive From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon) go to Site Configuration > Archives. Select Edit for the relevant archive. In the Other section, turn on the Allow crawlers to index archive toggle. Select Save. This feature is enabled by default for all new archives that are created. How this feature works When web crawl
Each archive in FotoWeb represents a set of files you want to make available to one or more users. An archive connects to one of Index Manager's indexes and can contain anything from a few files up to several million files. The files themselves are stored on a server hard drive that is typically shared so that users can access the master files when
Note: The FotoWeb Reports module/Fotoware Custom Report Generator tool is deprecated and will be set to End of Life on April 1st, 2024. Overview This topic explains how you design a report with custom data. Accessing the report designer To create a custom report, click on the Design report button in the lower right corner of the Reports screen. Note
A site administrator can manually terminate a user's session, if necessary. Go to Site Configuration > Security > Login and Sessions. Select Terminate for the relevant user. Select Yes when you are prompted to confirm the termination. The session will be terminated and the user will be forced to log in again.
Powering the best of the internet | Fastly offers reliable, fast, and customizable options to deliver shared content from Content Platform. Fastly offers real-time observability, baked-in security, and programmatic control. The CDN (Content Delivery Network)can be enabled per customer to distribute email shares and embeds via Fastly CDN. Both defaul
Open the action's properties and go to the Source asset tab. Select Execute webhook and enter the webhook URL. From the Content type drop-down list, select the type of data to transfer from FotoWeb. Select Save.
No settings for a document still image are available. No special settings for all document files are available. The following output format settings are available for all file types . Property Description sourceOutputFormats Which output format should be used as a source for rendering. This allows you to render small thumbnails from formats other
Open the action's properties and go to the Asset Actions tab. Select Go to URL and enter the URL.You can use dynamic tags to insert asset metadata in the URL string if you like. For more information about the practical uses of URL navigation, see Navigating to a URL when executing an action or an interactive marker.
Note: This feature is only available when using extended markers. Extended markers are only available to Fotoware Main Users and Fotoware Pro Users. When configuring an extended marker, you can make it interactive so that when a user clicks it, a metadata macro is applied, or a metadata editor is revealed to let the user enter metadata in preset fie
The Required field setting determines whether or not an editor must provide a field value before being able to save the Content Item. If a field is required and the user has not provided a value or has deleted an existing value, Picturepark does not permit saving the item. This value can be changed at any time. You cannot set a field required on a L
Open the marker's properties and go to the Action tab. Turn on the Go to URL checkbox and enter the URL. Note: Getting the entire URL from metadata in a workflow action/marker is potentially dangerous and should only be done if metadata can be trusted at all times. Save your changes. Tip: You can use dynamic tags to insert asset metadata in the URL
Query filters (Channel Filter or Filters in Fields) help to restrict the values available for tagging in a tagbox e.g. show only products for EMEA; or the Content Items displayed in a specific Channel e.g. only approved product marketing content. Those filters do not require user input, they have a fixed return set based on specific criteria e.g. sh
An extended marker can be clicked to apply metadata, execute a webhook or navigate to a preset URL. You can enforce a confirmation dialog when using such markers to prevent modifying the asset's content in error. Open the marker's properties and go to the Action tab. Tick the Request confirmation checkbox and add a window title and a message. Thus,
Usage scenario In many businesses, there are established conventions for naming files. These can be prefixes that indicate the department at which they originate, the project they are a part of, and so on. In Color Factory you have the possibility to turn these filenames into meaningful metadata. Often this will be a two-step process: First, you map
You can add a custom welcome message for users who access the Fotoware site. It is shown on the site's home page above the list of public archives and albums when a user accesses the Fotoware site. If the site has no public resources and requires users to log in, the home page with the custom welcome message will be shown after logging in. Adding a
What are taxonomies? A taxonomy is a hierarchically arranged structure of descriptive metadata. This allows users to navigate and filter the content in their archives using these preset metadata structures. The content of a taxonomy can also be used when entering metadata to ensure vocabulary consistency and avoid misspellings and typos. Anyone can
Editing a single field You can only edit asset metadata if the system administrator gives you access to do so for the archive. Click on a thumbnail from the grid to open the Asset Details page. Then, click on the metadata field you want to edit. You can edit the contents of fields in the Quick Info section below the image title, and by going to the
An album that's marked as deleted will be purged permanently after 72 hours. Within this timeframe it is still possible to recover it as follows: Start by locating the Albums section in the right side panel. Click on the Filter button and choose My deleted albums. Now click on the title of the album you would like to undelete to open it on a separat
This topic explains how to control the metadata fields used throughout Fotoware.There are several unused fields of different types that can be customized with a user-defined label and used in your configurations to allow users to add any amount of metadata to the assets in your collections. Managing metadata handling From the Tools menu (cogwheel ic
Overview FotoWeb provides widgets to export assets to an external system, such as a Content Management System. These widgets are ready-made HTML controls that plug into your web application and enable you to search, retrieve, and export the assets you need. Available widgets Two widgets are available for custom integrations: The Selection Widgetcan
Stripping Photoshop resources from files In the Color Factory Settings app, expand the relevant channel and select Metadata. Open the Resources tab. Strip Photoshop resources from image: Select this option to remove all extra Photoshop data, such as clipping paths, image preview, and so on, from the file. This is useful if, for example, the images
Overview How to create a taxonomy that lets users filter archive content by tags in the City metadata field. Enabling the taxonomy First off, you would go to the Site configuration in FotoWeb, open Metadata sheet under Site settings and enable taxonomies for the city field. You also need to type in a plural name, which will be used as the taxonomy's
Overview Enabling drag & drop export of assets to a specific desktop application requires writing a custom-made integration for the each application. The integration must be built into the desktop application or a plugin or "proxy application" that talks to the actual desktop application. It must do the following: Receive and handle drag events
You can build your data model from scratch, as well as your permission sets. You are completely free in doing so but we suggest talking to a Picturepark solution specialist to get some best practice advice. If you decide to do it yourself, you should ask yourself several questions before starting to configure the Content Platform. A Simplified Model
Click here to learn how to add metadata to assets using taxonomies in the Pro interface. Adding metadata using a taxonomy If you have been given permission to edit the metadata of assets in an archive, you can do so on the Details page. Simply click on the Edit button in the top right corner to allow editing of the fields and then click in any field
An order list representation is a JSON document which represents part of a list of orders. Its MIME type is application/vnd.fotoware.order-list+json. A list of orders is represented as a paged list (see Paging). 1 2 3 4 { data: [{...}, ...], paging: {...} } where Attribute Type Description data Array of Objects Orders in the list. Each element is an
Users can comment on content and notify other users, e.g., by reviewing metadata before it is published or having questions about the content. Users now can comment on (master) content and notify users, e.g., for reviewing metadata or the content before it becomes available or to request access to the original content item if no such permission was
Advantages of configuring a local SMTP server FotoWeb requires an email server for many of its core functions. FotoWeb does not support Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) encrypted authentication to Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) servers, so you must set up an SMTP service on the FotoWeb server that can relay all emails sent by FotoWeb to your primary
Overview How to change the expiration date of a picture exported for use in a CMS. Changing the expiry date of an exported picture Sometimes, it can be practical to be able to change a picture's expiry date. For instance, you may be using purchased pictures on your website for which you only have usage rights for a certain period before the license
If you have been given privileges to delete assets in an archive, you can select the files and click on the Delete button in the action bar. To avoid unintentional deletion of files, you have to click the button twice. A deleted asset can be restored for a limited period of time before it is permanently removed from the server drives.
How Quick Renditions work If the site administrator has defined Quick Renditions for an archive, you can request a preview of an image asset at any size the administrator has predefined. FotoWeb will resize the picture on the fly and deliver it in an overlay window in the browser to allow you to drag it directly to your desktop. Note that the site a
Creating a custom editor Where: Open the program configuration (File | Configuration), expand the Metadata node, and select the Dialog builder node. Tip: To modify an existing metadata editor, open it and then hit Ctrl/Command-E to jump directly into edit mode. Follow the instructions below to modify the field layout. This functionality may have bee
Channels filter for specific content items. You can adjust the sort order and name of the channels in the settings. The content browser filters and displayed content items can be adjusted per channel
When a user searches for assets in Fotoware, it is possible to define additional search parameters to create very specific queries. To use the extended search, select the three dots beside the search field: Note: Extended search is only available to registered users. Unauthenticated guest users can only use standard search functionality. You can adj
Switching color management engine Note: This functionality is only available in Color Factory Enterprise If you're running Color Factory Enterprise, you have the option to switch from the standard ICM color management engine to the Adobe Color Engine. In Color Factory Settings, select Global Options and open the Process Environment tab. Select a val
The following settings for images are available. Property Description kind ImageFormatBase colorProfile Color profile to use. Colorspace is derived from the chosen profile. colorTransformationIntent The method of conversion for color spaces (e.g. CMYK to RGB). Further information can be found here: http://www.colourphil.co.uk/rendering_intents.shtm
Creating an index Tip: Take care not to confuse the index folder with the document folders. This index folder contains binary data that Index Manager uses internally, while the document folders are the folders that you want to make available to users of the system. Creating an index In Index Manager Settings, open Indexes. Expand the group you wou
Overview How to adjust hue and saturation in FotoStation's image editor Hue and saturation adjustment Click on the Hue & Saturation button on the toolbar. A separate dialog will let you adjust the hue, color saturation and luminance level of the image. These values can be adjusted for the Master channel, or you can pick a color channel using the
The type of field where you insert metadata, where Picturepark supports different data types, for example, text, numbers, or tags. You cannot change a field type once saved. You can only remove the field, update the Content and List Items index, and re-add the field using another type. Field values on Content Items are lost after deleting a field; p
The Nested Filter (Aggregator) is only used by the Picturepark backend when you create a filter for nested documents (e.g. Tagboxes). It is used for accessing nested documents and resolving the values. It is used in combination with a Terms Filter or Terms Relation Filter.
When configuring FotoWeb to use HTTPS, you will want to configure the server to only allow secure connections. To this end, a permanent redirect has to be made for all http requests to HTTPS. This article explains how to do that. This step is only needed for FotoWeb 8.0 versions: Install the URL Redirect extension for IIS from Microsoft: https://www
Overview Use this sub action to rename files that you send to a workflow. Settings The Rename file sub action makes it possible to rename files or change their file extension. The naming of files can be based on information in XMP or EXIF fields or specific file properties. It is also possible to add running numbers to files to ensure that all files
Only Items between 150 and 300 width { "kind": "NumericRangeFilter", "field": "fileMetadata.width", "range": { "names": { "fieldId.en":"low res", "fieldId.de":"low res" }, "from": "150", "to": "300" } } Basic Filter Filter content that has a numeric field value in the configured range. { "kind
Overview Using the order API, a client can make the following requests on behalf of the administrator: Query pending orders and get the number of pending orders Query order history, past approved orders and past rejected orders Approve or reject orders Modify pending orders This part of the API is called the order management API. A client can make t
The field path is the hierarchy of the field, which is the path where you can find the field. To configure filters or display patterns, you must access the value via field ID or field path. The field path always starts in lowercase. layerId.fieldId You can open Schemas > Indexing. There, you find the field path of every field of the schema. To c
The Relationship field allows relating content to other content, similar to hyperlinks (links) on the internet, and is especially useful for creating press kits, print packages, and landing pages by adding related visual content. For a press kit, you can link the hero image and the Logo. Relationship Overview Icon Behavior VIDEO: How Relationship B
Overview This topic explains how you can change the different date stamps on the files in your archives. Why redate files? When working with files it is often useful to be able to sort them by any of the date parameters, for example by their modified date. But sometimes the date stamp on one or more files is not the desired or even expected one. For
How FotoWeb uses emails FotoWeb uses email for several services: password resets, system notifications, shopping cart downloads, SMTP workflows, contact sheets, album invitations, alerts (search agents), etc. Your FotoWeb system MUST be configured with an SMTP server connection - in fact, there is no way to avoid configuring an SMTP server during th
OpenID Connect was published in 2014. The standard offers the best options in usability, simplicity, and security and considered all learnings from other standards like SAML and OpenID 1.0 and 2.0. The major benefits are: Easy consumption: The identity tokens are received as JSON Web Token (JWT), which are considered elegant and portable with a gre
Summary Construct the download file name for images and use a title and additional EXIF values. {{data.corporateLayer.title.x-default | replace: " ", "-" | append: "_" | append:data.imageMetadata.width | append:"x" | append:data.imageMetadata.height | append: "_" | append:data.imageMetadata.colorSpace | append: "_" | appen
Where to configure : Go to Site Configuration > Security > Single Sign-on. When setting up Fotoware with SAML SSO, you can define attributes on the Identity Provider (IdP) that are synchronized to Fotoware when a user is imported. Such attributes can include, for instance: Group membership Address information mapped to corresponding Fotoware
How Microsoft Office document indexing works Index Manager has built-in libraries that allow it to index Office documents. To enable it, you need to create an index and attach document folders containing Word and PowerPoint documents to that index. When scanning these documents, Index Manager will index their textual content and create thumbnails an
All Fotoware tiers come with basic rights management features included. This way, you have simple actions that control access to assets in the system based on the groups you have defined. What's actually happening is that we use metadata tags to control who sees and has access to what content - these can easily be tuned to fit the way things work in
The GeoPoint Within Polygon condition checks if the geoinformation inserted in Picturepark is within a defined polygon e.g. to check if the images shot were created in Aarau or more general to check if images were taken (GPS data from extracted metadata) near the headquarter address (polygon) and then assign the headquarter tag to them (action assig
In Business Rules, you can transform values, e.g., you get the EXIF values and extract a specific value like geo point and transform this into a tag you can assign from a list. You can request values from the Content, the metadata, or audit information. You request those values from implicitly defined variables. You can use these variables in transf
Settings Just like the regular resize function in FotoStation’s image edit mode and the Crop dialog, the Resize Image sub action is used for changing the document size or the physical (pixel) size of an image. Setting image size If you want to change the document size of the image, i.e. its size on print, without altering image data, simply enter a
The Condition Layer Assigned checks if a layer with a specific ID is assigned to a content item e.g. Check if layer with ID "ProductInformation" is assigned to find all product related content. Triggers when a Content Item is available which has the selected Layer assigned. Use Layer Assigned inside AND/OR to check if multiple Layers are assigned.
Stop words are words that Index Manager ignores when indexing content and cannot be searched for. In earlier versions of Index Manager, they were referred to as noise words. This topic explains how you can modify the stop words file to control which words Index Manager ignores and are kept out of the index. Adding or removing stop words Where: C:\Pr
Usage Representation of... MIME type: Accept: application/vnd.fotoware.assetlist+json Resource(s): All kinds of collections, such as archives, albums and search results. Part of ... Collection Example 1 2 3 4 { data: [...], paging: {...} } Attributes Name Type Description data array of objects List of assets in this part of the asset list. Each elem
Overview How to configure and use Image Edit Actions to automate processing in FotoStation's image editor. What are image edit actions? Using Image edit actions you can create special actions that are exclusive to the image editor. Setting up an image action in the editor is somewhat similar to creating a regular action, but differs in that it only
The Date Time field allows input of a date or a date and a time, which display and interpretation you can specify as format, e.g., show dates with year/month/day or day-month-year.
The condition Content Permission Sets Changed checks if there have been changes made to the Permission Set of a Content Item. This does not include any change to the Permission Set itself.
EXIF Camera Info EXIF Field Code Original file name / Document name #EXIF010D Maker #EXIF010F Model #EXIF927C X-Resolution #EXIF011A Y-Resolution #EXIF011B Resolution Unit #EXIF0128 Orientation #EXIF0112 Exposure time #EXIF829A F Number #EXIF829D Exposure program #EXIF8822 Spectral sensivity #EXIF8824 ISO Speed #EXIF8827 EXIF version #EXIF9000 Camer
Filters (sometimes called “facets”) are used to refine Content Items in the Content Browser or List Items in the List Browser. Those filters are shown on the right (sidebar) and help to refine your search for desired content e.g. Filters "Media type" allows the user to filter for all content tagged with a media type or Filter for "Department" allows
Locking out a user Locking out an account means that the user will not be able to log on to the system. An administrator can lock a user out in two ways: by setting an account expiry date in the user properties in the user management console. After that date, the user cannot log in again until the lockout is lifted. by opening the user's properties
Overview of Requirements, Acceptable Use and Agreements, Browser Compatibility, third-party software, deployment information and general system limitations. Acceptable use and agreements The Picturepark Acceptable Use Policy (AUP) defines the policies to which all end-users of the Picturepark Cloud provided via software-as-a-service must adhere. Ple
Property JSON Description Toolbar This will delete the Channel and all settings after you confirm your desire to delete. “Edit JSON” The JSON is the exact representation of the UI settings. This may be helpful for duplicating a Channel with adjusted settings. “Edit” This makes the settings editable. Settings ID id The Id of the Chann
An archived album cannot be modified in any way. If you want to reactivate an album you've archived, here's how. To reactivate an archived album, locate it by going to the Albums page through the link in the top banner and then filtering by archived albums. After opening the archived album, click on the box icon in the panel to the left to unarchive
Note: The specifiers in this article can be used from FotoStation. They can also be used in FotoWeb when adding search filters to a FotoWeb archive and when adding search filters to an FotoWeb archive's access list. For information about the search queries that can be used in FotoWeb, see Search expressions. The specifiers below refer to file proper
The filter editor can help you create very precise advanced search queries. You can access it next to the search bar via the filter icon. Your browser does not support HTML5 video. Available for: Channels Tagbox Filters Not available for: Dynamic View (as it includes liquid syntax) No mobile support, the icon will be hidden on mobile devices
Automatic printing Using the features on this tab, you can use Color Factory to print all images in a channel on a local or network printer. In Color Factory Settings, expand the relevant channel and select AutoPrinting. Open the Auto Print tab. The following dialog appears. When enabling Auto Print, the following options are available: Print templ
Symptom Some features in FotoWeb or the FotoWeb REST API are not working, because FotoWeb returns 405 Method not Allowed on requests with verbs such as PUT or DELETE. Typical symptoms (user point of view): Failure to create or delete taxonomy items Failure to delete albums Typical causes Proxy A proxy is blocking or not understanding requests with v
An album that's marked as deleted will be purged permanently after 72 hours. Within this timeframe, it is still possible to recover it as follows: Start by clicking on Albums in the top banner. This will take you to the Albums page. By default, you will not see deleted albums, so you must click on the trashcan filter icon at the top right to display
Access Requirement: Viewing revisions requires that the user be given View revisions access in the archive via the archive Access List in the Fotoware Site Configuration. Note: Only the Editor user type can see version history. For more information about user types, see User types in the Fotoware solution. When browsing content in Fotoware, a user c
How to remove files from an album First open the album: Click on the Albums link in the top banner and then open the album you want to remove files from. Next, select the assets you want to remove from the album and click on the Remove in the action bar to remove the files. Note: Removing files from an album does not delete the original files from t
To create an album a user has to be a member of a group that has been assigned permissions to create and optionally share albums. Learn more about assigning album rights to groups.
Creating an account in the Fotoware Customer Portal Go to http://account.fotoware.com. Enter your contact information and select Sign up. A confirmation is sent to your email address. If you do not receive the email within a few minutes, check your spam filter and add any addresses from fotoware.com to the spam filter's approved list. Use the link i
Will find all Content Items which have the date-time value "2022-02-1x". This query does not work with exact match. corporateInformation.embargoDate:2022-02-1* To search for a date you must provide the date-time fieldpath and the date in the format year-month-day e.g. 2022-05-0*
JPEG quality Where: Channel | Output File Formats | JPEG Quality tab In Color Factory Settings, expand the relevant channel and select Output File Formats. Open the JPEG Quality tab. The following dialog appears. Here you can adjust the output quality of JPEG files. It is also possible to adjust the chrominance settings for each quality level. Keep
The condition Field Value Change checks if a value in a specific field changed e.g. Check if the checkbox "LegalConcerns" changes which may require the removal of the content. This does not cover any changes to the field itself.
Video: Sharing an album For an introduction to sharing albums, watch this video, or scroll below for written instructions. Controlling access to the album When you have created an album you can share its contents with others. To do so, open the album using the Albums link in the top banner and select the Share link in the top right corner. To share
Browse tabs vs Search tabs When a user clicks on an archive in FotoWeb to view its contents, that archive's content is shown in a Browse tab. If the user wants to find specific content in that archive, he can use the search bar at the top of the screen and type in one or more words, then choose the in this archive tickbox. The search result will the
Adding assets to a workflow queue The workflow outputs, called actions, are located in the right side panel in the interface. When you have made a selection of files you can simply then across to an action to add them to the queue. You can also add more files to the queue if you wish, and you can remove individual files by clicking on the X that app
Default ICC profiles In Color Factory Settings, expand the relevant channel and select Color Management. Open the Default Profiles tab. The following dialog appears. Here you can choose default profiles for profiles for untagged images. Use the drop-down lists to choose profiles for Grayscale, RGB and CMYK images, or use Browse to locate an ICC pro
Opening and viewing an album Start by going to the Albums page by clicking on the Albums link in the top banner. This page shows all the albums you have created and albums that have been shared with you. To open and view the contents of album, share it and perform other operations, click on the album's cover art. Filters to help you find albums You
This query looks for the fieldId "fullName" from the connected List in a Tagbox (persons) that is on the Layer Corporate Information. You must use this syntax to get a specific value from the tag assigned: layer.tagbox.listfieldid:value corporateInformation.persons.fullName:Joe* You can access values from nested documents following the same approach
When an asset is added to an album, a "link" is made from the album to the original asset. This has the following implications when moving or renaming the original asset: If the original asset is moved to a different archive using FotoWeb , it will remain in the album as long as the destination archive doesn't have a custom ingestion folder. When re
Version: 11.0.0 Release: Weisshorn Release Release date: October 23th, 2021 Release Notes: picturepark.com/previewrelease Breaking changes Feature Endpoint/Contract Title Description Reference User UserRight, UserRole endpoints Removed user right ManageCollections All users are allowed to manage collections. Thus, UserRight.ManageCollections was rem
A custom footer can be added to the site to include information that you want to be visible at the bottom of each page on the site. Although extensive contact information can be added to an overlay window on the site, you may want to add certain information in the page footer. Adding a custom footer From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon) go to Site Con
The OR operator can group different conditions of which any must be fulfilled e.g. Check for a specific Layer OR a Permission Set.
Introduction Users expect a site to load in two seconds or less, and research shows that users tend to abandon a site that isn't loaded within three seconds. Google has carried out extensive testing on user behavior relating to page load times and the results show that users easily navigate away from a site if it becomes less responsive. With this i
Introduction This document outlines the rules and guidelines for configuring custom domain names in FotoWeb SaaS. Understanding the allowed configurations and limitations is essential to ensuring compliance with DNS naming standards. Domain structure Our system currently supports up to four levels in domain names. A typical domain name structure is
Settings This sub action is used for inserting a block of text in the image, for example to include copyright or contact information. You can also insert a company logo or other graphics. The text block will be appended to the actual image data as a border below the image. Note that while the text block sub action does add image data, it does not ch
Adding the Fotoware application to your SAML provider Example: Okta setup Okta is an Identity Provider, which is used as an example to illustrate how to configure Fotoware to work with an IdP. The procedure may vary slightly depending on the type of IdP being used. Create an application in your SAML provider's management console and set the followi
Version: 11.11.0 Status: Released Release: Pilatus Release Release date: May 29, 2024 Release Notes: 11.11 Previous Version: 11.10.0 Breaking changes Feature Endpoint/Contract Title Description Reference Content Search v1/contents/search Search in FullText Performing a search only inFullText and entering a SearchString that only contains fields spec
Settings The Move file sub action is probably one of the most frequently used sub actions. It offers the possibility to move file(s) to a predefined folder, or to a folder selected manually. In addition this sub action offers customization of several parameters to ensure correct file flow. Dialog Type When creating a Move file sub action, you can ch
Each named FotoWeb user can access the server on a maximum of 10 devices. Each device is registered with a special token when the user logs in to FotoWeb from a device for the first time. If users spend all their access tokens, they cannot log in on the 11th device. Should this situation arise, the FotoWeb server administrator can manually reset all
Version: 11.15.0 Status: Pre-release Release: Monte Zucchero Release Release date: May 21, 2025 Release Notes: 11.14 Previous Version: 11.13.0 There are no API changes in this release.
The condition Match Regex checks the input value for a specific field for a pattern, defined as Regex e.g. Check if the input is a valid email address or product code and otherwise remove access until this information is correct. This condition also applies the Regex to the value in the provided fieldpath and allows to either validate the value (reg
Version: 11.14.0 Status: Released Release: Shreckhorn Release Release date: February 19, 2025 Release Notes: 11.14 Previous Version: 11.13.0 Deprecation Feature Endpoint/Contract Title Description Reference Metadata Status v1/metadata/status ContentOrLayerSchemaIds and ListSchemaIds deprecated The properties ContentOrLayerSchemaIds and ListSchemaIds
FAQ: Do I have an inbuilt Identity Provider in Picturepark?
Version: 11.2.0 Status: Released Release: Bellavista Release Release date: March 5th, 2022 Release Notes: picturepark.com/releasenotes Previous Versions: 11.1.0 Breaking changes Feature Endpoint/Contract Title Description Reference Embeds PUT /v1/shares/{id} Order of contents when updating an embed When an embed is updated, the specified order of th
The condition Content Schema checks if the content schema is matching a specific schema e.g. Check if for audio and video files the permission set is assigned that gives access to the multimedia team or check for Content Schema "Images" to find all images.
Version: 11.4.0 Status: Released Release: Niesen Release Release date: Sep 03rd, 2022 Release Notes: picturepark.com/previewrelease Previous Versions: 11.3.0 Breaking changes Feature Endpoint/Contract Title Description Reference Metadata RelationUiSettings Renamed enum RelationView has been renamed to ItemFieldViewMode See PictureparkSwagger.json Me
Before you start This article is technical in nature and stipulates knowledge of the Episerver ecosystem. We recommend getting the assistance of someone experienced with Episerver integrations to set up and configure the add-on. Example Image Property and selection dialog from Fotoware Example: TinyMce Toolbox button How it works When an asset is se
Version: 11.3.0 Status: Released Release: Rigi Release Release date: Jun 11th, 2022 Release Notes: picturepark.com/previewrelease Previous Versions: 11.2.0 Breaking changes None Deprecation Might be removed in the next version of CP. None. Removed None. Features Feature Endpoint/Contract Title Description Reference Schema FieldSingleRelation, FieldM
Version: 11.8.0 Status: Released Release: Stockhorn Release Release date: September 09, 2023 Release Notes: 11.8 Previous Version: 11.7.0 Breaking changes Feature Endpoint/Contract Title Description Reference All All endpoints API request upper limit enforced As stated in the Subscription plan overview, a general system limitation of 3000 API calls
Version: 11.7.0 Status: Released Release: Piz Roseg Release Release date: June 24th, 2023 Release Notes: 11.7 Previous Version: 11.6.0 With the release of Picturepark 11.6, we introduced unique DNS name for API access. With the release of 11.7 integrations must use the new API host. Check if you use the correct API host shown in the customer info ta
Adding assets to the cart Make a selection of assets and click on the Add to Cart button on the action bar. The Shopping Cart symbol lights up and a notification tells you the number of assets that have been placed in the cart. Keep on placing items in the cart until you're ready to check out. Checking out your order Click on the Shopping Cart symbo
System requirements Make sure the server meets the system requirements. Required ports Your server must be configured to allow connections on the following ports: Protocol Port(s) Affected servers Details Fotoware client-server communications TCP 7000 / 7001 All Fotoware servers that run the Operations Center TCP port 7000 (unencrypted) or 7001 (TLS
Version: 11.9.0 Status: Released Release: Signalkuppe Release Release date: November 25, 2023 Release Notes: 11.9 Previous Version: 11.8.0 Breaking changes Feature Endpoint/Contract Title Description Reference User UserRight New ManageIngest user right New ManageIngest user right added, required to use the Ingest endpoints. N/A Search FilterBase Cla
The TakeArrayValueTransformation allows us to get the value from an array by providing the index (the position the value is stored) e.g. get the first value from array of assigned schemas. Arrays can be updated with values either at the next position (fill next value in position 2) or by updating the existing positions. Ensure you use the correct i
By adding search filters to an archive and/or an archive's access list you can fine-tune which assets are displayed in the archive, and which files individual users and groups have access to. How search filters work FotoWeb archives connect to a storage pool that is indexed in real time. When setting up an archive from scratch, the entire content of
The flagging service automatically identifies and flags the best Content Items for any purpose within your Content Platform. It can be tailored to customer-specific needs and criteria with guidance from Content Platform experts. Key benefits include: Efficiency & Time Savings: Automatically flags optimal images, eliminating the need for manual s
By assigning a metadata set to an archive, you manage which metadata fields users can edit in the archive (assuming they are allowed to edit metadata in the archive in question, of course) and which taxonomies they can access. In addition, users who are allowed to upload files to the archive will be required to fill in metadata in accordance with th
When configuring an archive, the manager can control where assets are stored when files are copied, moved, or uploaded to an archive. Note: This setting also applies to apps and integrations and uploading/ingestion using the API. When uploading using the API, the destination can only be the archive itself, and the folder is chosen automatically if
You can open a consent form in the Consent Forms view. From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon), go to Site Configuration > Manage Consent Forms. The Consent Forms view opens. Open a consent form by double-clicking the relevant photo in the Photo column or selecting the link in the Assets column. The selected consent form opens. The information pane
The System Information gives insight into your current version and the customer you are using. As you can use your very same account for multiple customers, the System Information helps to identify where you are currently working. Always include this information when you ask for assistance or support. Always check this version when looking for relea
The Terms Enum Filter (Aggregator) uses an enum as a base and resolving the enum translation to display in the filter. In comparison to IDs, enums are constant identifiers, usually defined as readable text and not large number-character-combinations. Enums in Picturepark are collection types or share types. The explanation for enums on Wikipedia: ht
For the creation of a filter, only two things must be checked, highlighted in red. Other settings could be useful but can be left as is or empty. Field Leave as is! You can change this to another field if you have changed your mind and wish to add a different field to the Filters. Edits here could be accessing specific field information e.g. field.e
The Term Query Filter lets you filter on one single term inside a field. For Tagbox or Fieldsets or Relationship with multiple value support the Term Filter must be used inside a NestedFilter. This query filter has multiple and most common usage when filtering for specific tagbox values e.g. show only active keywords, show only active employees or s
A metadata view is a collection of metadata fields that is applied to an archive. The metadata view controls the fields in the different FotoWeb user interfaces and plugins and whether they are read-only or editable. Users can only edit metadata in an archive if they have been given permission to do so in the archive's access list, but at the lowes
What are SmartFolders? SmartFolders help users perform advanced predefined searches in an archive with a single click. Similarly to the folder navigation that can be enabled on archives, it provides a way to create a meaningful structure of "folders" that, when clicked, in reality execute a predefined search on the server and returns the result. A u
Having an FTP group as input in a workflow means that the workflow will process any assets uploaded by users within that group. This workflow is particularly useful when receiving assets from external sources, such as freelancers or other external contributors who require a transfer channel to upload files to your system. The following limitations
I want to display a country list with regions. To do so I create a tree view field that references the country tag box: [ { "fieldId": "country", "allowRecursion": false, "levels": [ { "fieldId": "regions", "allowRecursion": true, "levels": [] } ] }
About watermarks in FotoWeb Using watermarks is a common way to protect assets from illegitimate use. When you assign watermarks to archives in FotoWeb, they are only applied to the thumbnail and/or preview renderings that users see in the user interfaces. The original assets remain unscathed. However, it is also possible to apply watermarks to copi
When you subscribe to software from Fotoware, you receive an email with the license information required to run the software. To retrieve license keys for the products purchased, you need to do the following: Create a user account on the Fotoware Customer Portal if you do not already have one. Log in and tie the agreement to the account. You can fi
Accessing Fotoware Depending on how the Fotoware system has been configured, a user who accesses the system may or may not be automatically logged in. For more information, see Logging in. After logging in After a user logs in, they are typically presented with the home page - an overview of all the archives they can access and any albums they have
There are two ways to add users to FotoWeb: create individual users in the Users configuration in the FotoWeb site configuration connect FotoWeb to Microsoft Entra ID (formerly Azure Active Directory) and sync groups to your FotoWeb configuration. This article explains how to manually create users in FotoWeb. Follow the steps below to manually crea
From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon), go to Site Configuration > Archives. Select Add archive to create a new archive or select Edit to open the properties for an existing archive. Tip: You must be a member of a group that has been assigned the Manage archives permission. Identification An archive in FotoWeb is identified by its name, which must b
Whitelabeling is available in the Professional and Enterprise plans. It makes it possible to remove all Fotoware badges and branding from the tenant, leaving it entirely up to the customer how they want to brand the site.
Deleting an alert To remove an alert and stop receiving email updates, first on the Alerts bell link at the top of the screen. This opens up the list of defined alerts. Now click on the X next to the alert you wish to delete.
Where to configure Color Factory Color Factory is configuredin Color Factory Settings, while service activity is monitored through the Operations Center Status. If you just need to monitor what goes on on the server, you can access the Operations Center Status. You can also start and stop the service in Operations Center Settings, but any configurat
Filter for Content Items that have the Layer "Product Inflormation" assigned. { "kind": "TermFilter", "field": "layerSchemaIds", "term": "CopyrightInformation" } The special field: layerSchemaIds has the Layer names stored as a value for easy access.
The Number Filter (numeric aggregator) is used for showing numbers in ranges. You can build filters based on the filesize or DPI of an image, and users can easily filter for numbers as ranges, e.g. Small-sized files or Medium-sized files.
The Trigger field you can use to trigger a business rule with the benefit that it stores the information about the user who clicked the field and when (date and time), whereas a checkbox "start business rule" would not have any information about user and time.
Sie können Dateilose Inhalte wie Press Kits erstellen. Öffnen Sie den Content Browser im Hauptmenu Wählen Sie + (Hinzufügen) Wählen Sie “Erstellen” Wählen Sie das entsprechende Template aus (Mit vordefinierten Feldern, Sie können hier die Suche verwenden) Fügen Sie die Werte des Inhaltselements ein. 👉 Bitte Klicken Sie hier um mehr über die Virtual
Overview Learn how to add a note to an image or an asset in your archives. Notes are visual "sticky notes" that show on the thumbnails in the archive. Feature Choose the Notes option in the context menu. A small window (a sheet on the Mac) will open. Type in the desired note in the text field. When you are done, click on the OK button. A small yello
The condition Content Permission Set Assigned checks if a permission set is assigned, which will give access to specific user roles e.g. Check if permission set "SocialMedia-AllAccess" is assigned to ensure that publication information (platform, date, tags, post) is updated.
Accessing the FotoWeb site When a user accesses the FotoWeb site (http://sitename.com/fotoweb) the system configuration (guest access/single sign-on or manual login) determines the page the user is presented with. Single sign-on The user is automatically authenticated when accessing the site and taken to the home page that shows the archives and alb
Reassigning colors and labels Status is a special metadata field with a value ranging from 1 to 8. The default labels and their color codes can be changed by clicking on the Edit status button in the Metadata configuration (by clicking on the Metadata node in the configuration tree). By selecting one of the status levels in the list you can replace
How to use the File Format sub action The File format sub action is used to apply changes made to an image by a preceding image processing sub action. The changes are stored in a temporary folder. This way, a file operating sub action that comes later in the sub action chain can for example copy, move, or upload the edited image to a new location. W
Letting search engines find an archive Open the Archive properties (Tools > Manage site > Archives), open the properties sheet of an archive,and go to the General page. In the Other section, turn on the Allow crawlers to index archive toggle. This feature is enabled by default for all new archives. How this feature works When web crawling is e
You upload file-based content like documents, videos, images, and audio. Drag and drop files or folders to Picturepark Content Platform for uploading. It does not need to be on a special menu. Wherever you are in Picturepark, drop your files and folders, and then the upload will start. Uploading requires appropriate permissions. If you are not able
Creating new fields Right-click on the namespace you created and choose Add new field from the context menu. The following dialog opens: Select one of the following values from the Data type drop-down list: Text - Allows any text or combination of text and other characters and numbers to be input in the field. You can set the maximum number of cha
Symptoms FotoStation creates thumbnails and previews very slowly on systems that have been calibrated with X-Rite color management tools. Cause FotoStation has a known incompatibility with X-Rite color management profiles. Hence, if FotoStation is set to use any X-Rite color management profile or is configured to use the system default profile (whic
Prerequisites A created Notification informing the owner that their content will expire in 10 days. A created Schedule for when you would like this Business Rule to be carried out with the following filter. Adjust the term of the filter to the GUID of the permission set you use for archiving: { "kind": "NotFilter", "filter": { "kind": "TermFilter",
Editing user roles can be done in the same menu in the “Roles” tab. To open the detail view and edit a user role, you can double-click on one. The most important part of this detail view is the section “User Rights”. Here you can edit all permissions. All available permissions are displayed below.
How to brand a FotoWeb site You can make simple branding changes to the FotoWeb using industry-standard CSS. You can change the color scheme, fonts, and other design elements to fit your corporate profile. You can also replace the Fotoware logos on the site with your company logos and select a header image for the home page. Note: Branding using CSS
Searching for the description, which is a translated text field, in advanced search mode: _exists_:productInformation.description.en
When SmartFolder navigation is enabled in an archive, all users can navigate its contents using the SmartFolders that have been set up. To allow specific users or groups to create and modify SmartFolders, you need to modify the archive's access list: Go to the Access list tab in the archive properties and choose the group or user in the access list
An administrator can configure the Fotoware site to allow users to sign up for an account if they don't already have one. On public sites with no central identity provider to manage user authentication, it can be practical to allow users to sign up for an account themselves. From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon), go to Site Configuration > Security
Access requirement: To use this feature, a user needs to have Manage revisions access set in the archive properties. To delete one or more revisions of an asset, locate the asset and click on it to navigate to the Asset Details page. Next, open the Revisions tab to list all the asset revisions, and finally click on the Delete link (Red Trashcan icon
You can enable comments by opening an archive's properties and, on the General tab, selecting FotoWeb in the Other section. FotoWeb comments are available within FotoWeb only, and a user needs to be authenticated to be allowed to comment on assets in the archive. In addition, users need to have Comments rights in the archive's access list to leave c
Sometimes you might need to duplicate one or more assets in an archive, for example, if you intend to edit a file and want to retain a copy of the original. To do so, select the file or files, and open the File info panel by selecting T on the keyboard. Select the Duplicate icon. To avoid the unintentional duplication of a large selection of assets
PowerPoint uses Slide Masters to let you create templates for your presentations. Slide Masters use so-called placeholders for storing content; this topic discusses how FotoWeb Desktop for Office works with placeholders. Placeholder priority concerns When using placeholders in your master slides, the Picture placeholders have priority over the Conte
Custom workflows are available on the Team plan and up. They allow you to create tailored workflows using actions and markers that can, for instance: Update the metadata of assets based on which stage they're at in a workflow and reflect this using visual markers for identification Transfer files to external systems Integrate Fotoware with external
A custom page title can be created for the site. By default, all pages on the site show Fotoware 8.0 in the title. From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon) go to Site Configuration > Appearance. Select Branding. Turn on the Custom Page Title toggle and enter the new page title in the field that opens. Select Save.
The document types in Picturepark are entities, different type of digital works (objects) you can have in Picturepark. Picturepark knows the documentTypes "Content", "ListItem", "Schema", "User", "ContentPermissionSet", "Owner". Content are Content Items visible in the Content Browser (images, videos aka File Items) and also items without a file (ak
The Dynamic View field allows relating content to other content based on metadata or other criteria, for example, relating content with the same document number or relating content with the same product number or the same event. This is especially useful for creating language versions of documents, product packages, or other content collections.
At times it may be necessary to assign a common access list for a number of created archives. This can be accomplished by going to the Site Configuration (in the Tools menu) and accessing the Archives node. Select the archives that the access list should apply to and click on Set access list, as seen in the screenshot. Now, assign access as usual. R
The ProjectionTransformation takes all values of a list and applies the configured transformation to each item e.g. take each tag from auto-tagging and match it against the keyword list to later assign all keywords in the descriptive information. Example input of group: [ "Adult", "Männlich", "Male", "Erwachsen" ] ProjectionTransformation: TakeDic
Ordering actions The order in which actions appear in the side panel in FotoStation can easily be changed using the program configuration. Go to File > Configuration. (FotoStation > Configuration on the Mac - keyboard shortcut Command-comma.) Open the Actions node Select the action you would like to move and use the Move up and Move down butto
This topic deals with the various access permissions you can assign to an archive using the access list and how permissions are applied. Finding the archive access list From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon), go to Site Configuration > Archives. Open the properties of the archive in question. Navigate to the Access list tab. Using the access list
Choosing source and destination folders on the local server After you have configured the local server settings, you can specify folders that you want to use as the source or destinations for your channels. In Connect Settings, go to Servers > Default > Local Server. Open the Folders tab and select +Add folder. Double-click the new folder that
The Geo Distance Filter (Aggregator) is not supported as Content Browser Filters or List Item Filters (facets). You can however create Query Filters for geo points e.g. show Content Items created in Aarau (GeoBoundingBoxFilter) +100km distance (GeoDistanceFilter). You can also access and use Geo Points via API.
When you want to find content in Picturepark you can try one or all of the following. The channel dropdown, search & suggestions, and the sidebar filters. Open a channel (a filtered set of items, the channels query filter). The channel has a name and a filter, e.g. show only items with Layer A assigned. This channel filter is independent of the
Check Elastic Search Query Syntax for explanations of the syntax used in the following examples. Filter Query: And Filter (Solutions) Filter Query: Date Range Filter (Solutions) Filter Query: Exists Filter (Solutions) Filter Query: Geo Bounding Box Filter (Solutions) Filter Query: Geo Distance Filter (Solutions) Filter Query: Nested Filter for Mult
Supported formats File format Remark JPEG EXIF Header Read/Write TIFF EXIF Header Read Photoshop PSD PSD files must be saved with the Maximize Compatibility option to allow the generation of thumbnails and previews in Fotoware Photoshop EPS GIF Animated GIF is treated as a movie PNG BMP HEIC HEIC files are classified as images. TXT Free text s
The Produce Notification Action produces a Picturepark toast notification when the conditions for the Business Rule are met e.g. inform about new images, inform about new Content Items with approved copyright information, or recalled Content Items.
FotoStation lets you make a backup copy of the active configuration for safekeeping, for example on a backup disk or a memory stick. By default, it will suggest storing the backup configuration on the local disk, but you can choose any location you want. What's included in the backup? The backup contains your entire configuration (archives and actio
The permission that allows users to create and modify taxonomy content is set on the group level. Therefore, all users who need this permission must be added to one or more groups to which the Manage taxonomies privilege is assigned. The privilege is set in the group management console: From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon) menu, select Manage Users/
Tree View Overview TERMS:Tree View Field| TreeViewField The Tree view field allows users to model hierarchical data. Behavior Tree view fields can be enabled for an instance in the License tab in the cloud manager. Please contact support to do this for you. It's a view-only field. The administrator who creates the field defines the filter. You canno
Note: This functionality is only available for Editor users. Mac users: to use the Fotoware plugin in Photoshop with Apple Silicon, you must run Photoshop with Rosetta. After installing the Fotoware plugins, you can enable the Adobe Creative Cloud plugins. Right-click the Fotoware tray icon and choose Install Fotoware Extensions for Adobe CC... Th
The menu can be expanded by clicking on the logo on the top left. What menu item leads to which configurations and settings are declared below. Content Items You can switch to the content browser by clicking on the loupe. Shares A share is a group of content items that can be shared with people outside your company. You do not need access to Picture
The location of job files used for the Acquire function is set on the General node in the configuration tree under Miscellaneous. By opening the Miscellaneous node under the General section in the program configuration you can choose a default location for job files created when acquiring files. By placing the job folder on a shared network volume a
When making selections, it can be practical to quickly mark files so they can be reviewed later or to keep a selection of your favorite assets. This can be accomplished using pins. Your pinned assets are personal, so different users can create their own collections of favorite assets. To pin an asset in the thumbnail grid, select the pin icon on the
Chossing your configuration type Where: The FotoStation Configuration node in the configuration dialog. Note: If you are using FotoStation Pro, you can only select User a separate configuration for each user, the other options are not available. Use a separate configuration for each user - This option makes it possible for each user with their own u
FotoStation has two available color schemes. By default it will launch with a dark appearance after installation, but that can easily be changed: In the program menu, choose File | Configuration (FotoStation | Configuration... on Mac). Expand the General tab and choose the Miscellaneous node.Then choose the color theme in the Appearance section. You
Who can access Operations Center Settings? When Operations Center Settings is installed, it creates a local Fotoware Administratorsgroup on the server. By default, members of the localAdministrators group on the server are automatically members of this group. All users with server access, with RDP (Remote Desktop Protocol) for example, can access t
Customizing Classify views A Classify view is a column view that lets you change the Classify state of files (the content of a particular metadata field) by dragging and dropping them from one column to another. When you move a file from one column to another, FotoStation changes the value of the Classify state field. By assigning labels to the valu
Overview Fotoware Mobile is enabled for MDM (Mobile Device Management) deployment for any MDM solution able to forward/list apps from the public App Store (i.e., any app listed and available for everyone on Google Play/Apple Store). It uses native networking capabilities and is, therefore, capable of using any VPN tunnels configured on this layer th
Picturepark knows two types of filters, the sidebar filters (facets) you find in the sidebar of your Content or List Browser (and other areas) and the filter queries that you use in channels and tagboxes to filter for specific Content or List Items. 👉 Sidebar Filters (Filters in the sidebar, aka facets) 👉 Query Filters (Filters for channels or field
The NOT Condition is an operator to negate a condition you define e.g. check if Layer is not assigned (NOT LayerAssigned). Triggers when the condition is not true.
Cause This error code means that your license key is no longer valid. It has likely been replaced at some point by an agreement renewal. Solution Log into your account here: https://licenses.fotoware.com/licenses. Your licenses are listed; select a license to display more information about it, including its license key. If the key is the same as th
Customizing the Rich List Clicking on the Rich List node under the Views node in the configuration tree lets you customize the size of the rows and columns in the Rich List view. The Rich List view is built up of four text templates that define its contents. Their content can be altered and the Rich List view configuration lets you adjust the height
The Number field contains only numbers. If you are unsure if the expected values may contain text, then use a text field. Otherwise, use the Number field. The benefit is that you can calculate with numbers but not with text. For example, 2+2=4, but "Content" + "tent" is nothing.
A node is an element in the workflow: trigger, action, input, and output.Each node can have a subtype. For example, purge and edit metadata are subtypes of an action. Each flow can consist of multiple nodes that, when connected, define what happens in the application. For example, you can have a Flow consisting of a SaaS Core pool as the input node,
Problem A video or audio file fails to transcode correctly. Solution Users with the Re-transcode permission in an archivecan attempt to re-transcode the original asset. Re-transcoding a file in FotoWeb Select the asset that should be re-transcoded in the grid, then choose the Re-Transcode option in the Action bar. Re-transcoding a file in FotoWeb P
Removing Camera RAW XMP data In the Color Factory Settings app, expand the relevant channel and select Metadata. The General tab opens. Select Metadata Filters and choose Remove Camera Raw fields from XMP. Use this feature to strip all Camera Raw metadata from the files processed in the channel. This removes all information contained in the Camera
Overview This document lists the changes made to IIS during the installation and configuration of Fotoware. FotoWeb automatically creates the following objects in IIS: The application pool FotoWeb The application pool FotoWebConfigServer The application pool FotoWebApi which runs the .NET API (applies to FotoWeb version 8.1 and later) The website _F
Fotoware as a Service - June 2021 update Deployment This release has been fully deployed to all tenants Summary Initial release of Consent Forms
Problem The document preview in Picturepark (Thumbnails, preview, presentation mode) shows weird characters. I cannot read the text. Solution Picturepark must know the font to render it correctly. You can solve the problem by changing the font. In PowerPoint > Open Master > change font to a common font (e.g. Calibri, Arial, Roboto) In Word >
About security Where: In the FotoStation Configuration, expand the General node and select Security. A system administrator may want to limit access to certain program features. This can be done from the program configuration, where it is possible to password protect the entire configuration dialog, as well as prevent users from accessing certain ty
Revisions, sometimes called Versions, are the recording of asset changes so that users may review the iterations of an asset through its lifecycle. Users with the required access can view and compare versions of a visual asset and optionally restore an earlier version while retaining all other versions as well. In Fotoware, revisions constantly moni
This solution shows how to configure a filter in the field “Dynamic View” based on a multi-tagbox. Instructions You add the Dynamic View field You add the filter for a single tagbox: { "kind": "TermFilter", "field": "pictureparkNiesen114Release.documentNumber._refId", "term": "{{data.pictureparkNiesen114Release.documentNumber._refId}}" }
Registrierung Bitte öffnen Sie Ihre Picturepark Einladung und registrieren Sie sich entsprechend. (User Guide Kapitel 1.1) Anmeldung Melden Sie sich nun mit dem konfigurierten Identitätsanbieter an. (User Guide Kapitel 1.2) Upload Versuchen Sie nun, eine Datei in Ihrer Picturepark Instanz hochzuladen. (User Guide Kapitel 4.1) Erfassung Listeneintrag
This part of the configuration lets you set preferences related to color management with ICC profiles. Where: Expand the General node in the configuration tree, then click on Color Management. Default profiles Use Fotoware default profile for thumbnails and previews: When enabled, this program function uses a default Fotoware profile for rendering o
On the Dashboard, you can use filters to narrow your search results. Select the Filters icon and select values as necessary, or to filter the contents of a column, select ... in the column title. The list is automatically updated based on your filter input.
The condition Tagbox Item Unassigned checks if a specific tagbox item ("a tag") is unassigned in a specific field e.g. Check if the tag "Twitter" is unassigned in the field "SocialMediaPlatforms" on Layer "CopyrightUsages" to then remove this image from Twitter. The Business Rule may check if the tag "Dealer Portal Europe" was unassigned to then e.g
Choice of unit Where: Expand the General node in the configuration tree and select Miscellaneous. This part of the program configuration lets you choose the standard unit of measure used in the program. The choices you make here will be reflected in program dialogs for setting image sizes, among other things. Choosing a unit for width and height Wid
The FotoStation user interface has been translated to several languages. These are the currently supported languages: Danish Dutch English Finnish French German Hebrew Italian Norwegian (bokmål) Portuguese (Brazilian) Spanish Swedish How to change the language? Learn how to change the program language.
What are albums? Albums are collections that you can create and add content to from FotoWeb. You can add assets from several archives into a single album. If you have permission to share albums, you can share with other users who have an account in Fotoware or with external users by adding their email address to the invite list. Video: Creating albu
The Monaco Editor is a browser-based code editor that also powers Microsoft VS Code. Thanks to IntelliSense features, you can get suggestions by pressing Ctrl + Space, which will reveal some code hinting. A red line marks code errors like missing commas or unnecessary ones. The Monaco Editor is used for JSON configurations, e.g. Filter Query configu
The Relationship field allows relating content to other content, similar to hyperlinks (links) on the internet, and is especially useful for creating press kits, print packages, and landing pages by adding related visual content. For a press kit, you can link the hero image and the Logo.
The source of the asset on which the workflow will be executed. This can be an asset file, a pool, or an archive in FotoWeb.
You use the Date Range Filter (Aggregator) to create a sidebar filter on dates. This will show dates in date ranges. You can build filters based on the creation date or release date of an image, and users can easily filter for dates as ranges, e.g. Today, Yesterday, Last Week, Last Month.
Picturepark accounts are named, meaning that each account should be created for and used by only one individual. The benefits of named accounts include Users can share content from their email addresses, own content, and collaborate with others. Personalization features improve the user experience of named users. System logs and statistics can accur
Remarks Node subtype is a predefined list of all possible node subtypes.Subtypes are always connected with a given type.For example, for the Action type, possible subtypes could be Delete, EditMetadata, and similar.
In the settings section of your Picturepark you will find status, which shows: Content and List Items (schema modifications concerning field removals or text field calculated values) Display Patterns (Display Pattern changes on schemas) Search Indices (Index for Content Item values or List Item values optimized for searching) Nested values are flat
Overview How to search for assets on the FotoWeb server using FotoWeb for iPad Searching To search for files, tap in the search field in the top bar and type in a search word. If you type in several words, FotoWeb will search for files that contain all of the words, but not necessarily in the exact order that they were typed (also known as an AND-se
What are taxonomies? A taxonomy is a hierarchically arranged structure of descriptive metadata. This allows users to navigate and filter the content in their archives using these preset metadata structures. The content of a taxonomy can also be used when entering metadata to ensure vocabulary consistency and avoid misspellings and typos. Anyone can
You can use the share option in Picturepark to send a link (by email) to a selection of Content Items and Virtual Items to one or multiple users. Picturepark users have share available in Picturepark, others only in their mail. The link can be opened without login for the specified time. When you send the share to yourself, you won’t get an email bu
The OR operator can group different conditions of which any must be fulfilled e.g. Check for a specific Layer OR a Permission Set. Add multiple conditions To add multiple conditions for your Business Rule. Open Settings Open Business Rules Go to the panel Condition Press Add Select AND or OR condition first to define multiple conditions. Define th
A template is a predefined workflow (set of actions) configuration with set nodes that are easy to configure. Templates can be used as a start when you create a new workflow. Nodes cannot be added or removed from a template. For more information about templates in Flow, see Using predefined templates.
The flexible Open ID Connect implementation supports variations of metadata and ACR values. Although Google supports Open ID Connect the authentication fails due to a different approach of handling "offline_access", a scope required to refresh the token. Google is not officially supported or tested.
In accordance with the GDPR legislation, all data subjects have the right to obtain confirmation as to whether or not personal data concerning them are being processed, and where that is the case, access to the personal data together with additional information regarding use and storage. This is covered by the "Right to access" and described in Arti
Initial notes Fotoware works with clear routines and measures regarding data security and storage. We appreciate that customers trust us with their data, and we take seriously our responsibility for safeguarding that data and being open about how we process it. When Fotoware moved to the cloud, we decided to partner with Microsoft. They demonstrate
A specific, repeatable step in a defined workflow. For example: delete, move, and crop.
Finding the MAC address of your server Start by opening the Windows command prompt. Enter the following and press Enter: 1 ipconfig /all Locate the entry for the server's Ethernet card in the list of available interfaces: 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Ethernet adapter Ethernet: Connection-specific DNS Suffix . : yourdomain.net Descrip
Ordering archives The order in which archives appear in the side panel in FotoStation can easily be changed using the program configuration. Access the configuration through the program menu: File | Configuration. (FotoStation | Configuration on the Mac - keybopard shortcut Command-comma.) Click on the Archives node Select the archive you would like
What the proxy configuration is used for Where: Expand the General node in the configuration tree and select Proxy settings. Since FotoStation 7.0 supports connections to remote archives it may be necessary to utilize a proxy to establish a connection. To this end, you can configure FotoStation's proxy settings on this page in the configuration. Cho
When Consent Management is enabled for the archive and assets are linked with one or more consent forms, each asset displays a consent status marker. This marker is displayed in the Fotoware asset grid and on the asset details page and indicates the consent status of the asset. This allows you to easily track whether or not you have consent to use a
Asset linking is an integral component of consent management. In FotoWeb you can link assets to a consent form both directly from an archive (as described below) and from the consent form itself. You can quickly view the consent status for an asset and keep track of consents on a per-asset level. Note: Before linking assets and consent forms, there
Overview Explains how you can filter content in your archives to display only specific content. Configuring File Filters File filters can be applied to an archive to determine which files it should include or exclude from view. Certain files, such as the thumbnail files generated by Windows Explorer and icon files created by the Mac OS Finder may be
Wenn Sie sich erfolgreich registriert haben, können Sie nun versuchen, sich auf der Startseite anzumelden. Je nachdem, welche Anmeldemethoden auf Ihrer Picturepark Instanz konfiguriert sind und welche Anmeldemethode für Ihr Benutzerkonto definiert ist, können Sie sich entweder über das normale Login oder über SSO anmelden. Login via Single Sign-On L
When connecting FotoStation to Index Manager or a Color Factory workflow, you will be asked to authenticate with a username and password. Typically you can use your network username and password, but ask your system administrator if you're unsure which credentials to use. FotoStation stores the authentication information and reuses it the next to yo
Note: The specifiers in this article can be used from FotoStation. They can also be used in FotoWeb when adding search filters to a FotoWeb archive and when adding search filters to an FotoWeb archive's access list. For information about the search queries that can be used in FotoWeb, see Search expressions. The specifiers below refer to file proper
The condition Content Permission Set Unassigned checks if a permission set is unassigned, which removes access e.g. Check if permission set "PartnerAccess" is removed to inform partners about usage restrictions for this specific content.
When migrating content to Fotoware, it may be desirable to preserve the original date and time of the assets that are uploaded. This can be accomplished in two ways: Using the web uploader to upload files to an archive where the associated metadata set has the option Preserve modification time set. Note: This setting is currently honored only by the
Summary A slug is an SEO friendly title you use for images, videos, or complete press kits when sharing them on social media. Picturepark can create the slug for you using any value from any field, replacing spaces with dashes, and even pretending the correct domain. {{data.corporateLayer.title.en | replace: " ", "-" | prepend: "picturepark.com/" }
Your Fotoware solution gives you access to a minimum of one archive and one pool. A pool is a physical storage container for content - for all practical purposes you can think of it as a hard drive that has a certain amount of space available for storing all your assets. A single pool may have several archives associated with it; each archive then p
This will find all Content Items where the field is available but has no value, where no Permission Sets are applied. -_exists_:permissionSetIds This will find all items of the specific Permission Set. permissionSetIds:787eb87f4c914ec5ba359cc8d8a1d0af The Permission Set Id is shown in the URL in the Permission Set Detail View:
To create a custom search for a taxonomy node you need to use Search Expressions syntax. By defining a custom search for a taxonomy item it is possible to expand or narrow the scope of the query to fine-tune the results a user sees when selecting a taxonomy item. As an administrator, you can use the syntax examples below to adjust a taxonomy query t
Picturepark uses accounts and an Identity Server to identify users. Accounts control only whether the account holder may connect to Picturepark to access and edit that user's profile. Once connected, the Roles and Permission Sets of the account determine access to content and other parts of the system. Pictureparks Identity Server handles the accoun
Content Statistiken ansehen View Content Statistics Mit einem Doppelklick auf ein Content Item können Sie dessen Statistik in der Tab-Navigation einsehen. Die hier gezeigten Aktionen sind nur von Picturepark, nicht von anderen API-Clients. Die verfügbaren Statistiken für Content Items sind: Downloads insgesamt (beinhaltet das Öffnen der Detailansich
The Download File Name is used to construct the name of the downloaded items. These are only used for virtual and file items that can be downloaded. They are configurable for each file type and each virtual type.
When setting up FotoWeb to use Internet Information Services (IIS), once the site is up and running you can access the site at e.g. http://fotoweb.yourcompany.com/fotoweb. Simply going to the domain, omitting /fotoweb in the url will typically only display a generic IIS graphic to let users know that IIS is running on that server. Microsoft has crea
Access requirement: To use this feature, a user needs to have the View revisions, Copy from, and Copy to access permissions set in the archive properties. At times it may be desirable to create a duplicate of a certain revision of an asset. This can be accomplished in the following way: Locate the asset and click on it to go to the Asset Details pag
OpenID Providers are implementations based on Open ID Connect, like servers or services or libraries. Open ID Providers are listed on the official Open ID Connect page: https://openid.net/developers/certified. Popular services like Google, Microsoft, or Amazon support Open ID, but each Open ID Provider can define different metadata describing the Op
The below table gives an overview of the different connections and protocols that are available in FotoStation and their possibilities and limitations. Type of archive/connection Read / Write Access Comments Local folder Both File access can be limited by imposing disk security settings (NTFS) Network share Both File access can be limited through sh
Each Fotoware product installed on the server has a shortcut to its configuration placed on the desktop and the Start menu during installation. To configure a server application, open the shortcut to the application.
The Picturepark Search is visible in all areas in Picturepark. In the Content Browser or List Item Browser, Picturepark offers search suggestions from the filters of the Channel or List settings that have search fields configured. The Picturepark Search supports three modes: AND, OR, Advanced with specific query syntax. You can construct complex adv
The AssignTagboxItemsAction assigns a specific tagbox item to the tagbox field specified e.g. update copyright holders with creators from Dublin Core. This requires the layer where the field is found to be assigned already, therefore combine with "AssignLayerAction" and/or "LayerAssignedCondition". The Business Rules are not executed after one anoth
What does this imply? If your email address registered with Fotoware starts with any of the prefixes listed below, you need to register a new account with Fotoware so we can be sure you receive all necessary information from us. Another consequence is that key reset requests and NFR keys cannot be correctly processed if they're associated with any o
Channels are virtual dividers that separate, filter, and isolate content. Channels are like global filters that affect what content users see when working. If the Channel's configuration permits a given piece of content, it can be shown; otherwise, the content is neither findable nor visible in the Content Browser, regardless of the connected user's
Generally, there is no need to change port numbers, but if you need to do so, go to Operations Center Settings > General. You can manually set the port number in the Server port section. Select Save after you make your changes. Note:When changing the communication port you need to manually restart the Fotoware server applications that run on the
Changing the size format in the main user interface To switch between them, select on an image to go to the asset Details page. Then go to the File Details tab above the preview to find the Image size (in cm or inches) and Resolution (pixels per cm or inch). Click on the arrows next to the measurements to toggle between metric and imperial view. Cha
Accessing FotoWeb Depending on how the FotoWeb system has been configured, a user who accesses the system may or may not be automatically logged in. Learn more about how to log in. After logging in After a user logs in, they are typically presented with the home page—an overview of all the archives they have access to and any albums that they have c
To use Fotoware's cloud services and allow automatic geotagging of files processed in Color Factory, you need a valid Agreement. In Operations Center Settings, select General. Enter your agreement number in the Fotoware Cloud Services section and select Save. This enables the cloud service support. If your agreement expires, your access to the cloud
When activating a Fotoware application, a license certificate is downloaded from the Fotoware server and installed in trusted storage on the machine. Trusted storage consists of 2 encrypted files that contain binding information to the hardware on the current system. We recommend including these license files in the backup schedule. In the event of
The requirements for running FotoWeb vary depending on user load and the number of assets in the system. This topic details the server software requirements and outlines some example configurations that can serve as a starting point for choosing hardware. Hardware requirements - example configurations Minimum configuration Medium configuration Large
FotoWeb can transcode and play audio and video files in your archives. To play a video or audio file, select the Play icon on the thumbnail in FotoWeb Pro. Use the slider at the top right of the screen to adjust the grid size to get a larger video thumbnail. Additional playback control in Filmstrip and Preview mode By going into Filmstrip or Preview
To make it easy for administrators and operators to access the Operations Center and the configuration panels for all installed server applications, we recommend that you enable single sign-on Enabling SSO You can enable SSO by using Edge as your web browser and adding the Operations Center server to your list of local intranet sites. You can access
Picturepark IDS (short: PIDS) is the Picturepark Identity Server, which serves as the default trusted Identity Provider of your Picturepark Content Platform. All identity information (e.g. user attributes) are saved in the Picturepark IDS. You can access multiple Pictureparks with the same identity. Whenever Office 365 needs to verify a user, for ex
Channels filtern nach bestimmten Inhaltselementen. Sie können die Sortierreihenfolge und den Namen der Kanäle in den Einstellungen anpassen. Die Filter des Inhaltsbrowsers und die angezeigten Inhaltselemente können pro Channel angepasst werden.
Giving users access to configure the server When Operations Center Settings is installed, it creates a local Fotoware Administratorsgroup on the server. By default, members of the localAdministrators group on the server are automatically members of this group. All users with server access, with RDP (Remote Desktop Protocol) for example, can access
Using metadata to visualize the content in your collections A user who accesses a DAM system for the first time may only have a vague idea of what type of content they can expect to find. Your Fotoware DAM system can be set up to give users visual clues as to how they can use it: A taxonomy shown next to the thumbnail grid can expose file types, cat
Where: Expand the General node in the configuration tree and select Image cache. This configuration page lets you make changes to image cache settings. You may set the size of thumbnails and preview, for instance if you want greater quality, and it is possible to adjust the maximum size of the cache folder. When the maximum size is exceeded FotoStat
Summary Show red text “Public” if the first permission set is “Public”. Please keep in mind that you do not know if Public is assigned as first or 2nd permission set. This example shows the usage of arrays in Display Pattern. {% if contentPermissionSetIds[0] == "e2d0dfd6b07546aeafeaf5a48946c7cf" %} <font color="#ff5576">Public</font> {%
Der Content Browser ist die Übersicht über alle Inhalte und ist das Erste, was Sie sehen, wenn Sie sich anmelden. Sie sollten hier in der Lage sein, die Vorschaubilder der Dateien zu sehen. Je nach Konfiguration sollten Sie auch einige zusätzliche Informationen auf den Vorschaubildern sehen können, z. B. welchen Dateityp ein Content Item hat oder we
Operations Center Settings is the app used to configure all the Fotoware applications that are installed on a server. It provides a fast and convenient way to get an overview of server activity and provides system operators with easy access to start and stop services and enable or disable channels in installed server applications. Because it runs in
Permission sets can be set exclusive, which means only this one exclusive Permission Set applied. Exclusive Permission Sets are additive too, which means the combined set of permissions from all exclusive Permission Sets applies.
The available applications in the Operations Center Status app vary depending on which Fotoware applications you have installed on the server. Each installed Fotoware application plugs into the interface to allow an administrator to read out information about the server applications's activity and configure it. To be able to configure the server app
The Name setting is available for various items in Picturepark, for example, fields, schemas, and business rules. This value defines what appears in the Picturepark interface. You can change the name anytime and translate it into any configured metadata language. To add a translation for the name, select Add. IDs and Names need to be the same or at
FotoWeb can transcode and play audio and video files in your archives. To play a video, select the asset's thumbnail in the grid to open the Details page. Select Play button in the preview to start playback. Playback controls Play / Pause buttons - Start or pause playback Volume control - Controls the output volume. Use the system control panel to c
Search Analyzers define how text is processed or manipulated. These analyzers give you control over how your text data is used in the search. The goal is to standardize text, for example lowercasing or converting special characters (diacrititcs) or handling of singular/plural in translations (e.g. men, man). Search Analyzers are available for string
Mithilfe von Filtern kann nach Inhalten gefiltert werden. Sie können Filter für Tagboxen, Zahlenfelder oder Datumsfelder erstellen. Bitte beachten Sie, dass es nicht möglich ist, Filter für Textfelder zu erstellen und dass Filter für Datumsfelder nur in vordefinierten Bereichen abgebildet werden können. Um möglichst genaue Resultate zu erhalten, emp
Die Detailansicht enthält alle relevanten Informationen, Berechtigungen und Metadaten einer Datei. Wenn Sie auf die Detailansicht einer Datei zugreifen, indem Sie auf die Datei doppelklicken oder einen Rechtsklick machen und “Details” auswählen, können Sie zwischen den folgenden 4 Abschnitten wählen. Metadaten Im Bereich “Metadaten” sehen Sie alle L
Hardware Minimum 1 2.5 GHz Processor. More cores or physical CPUs are better. Minimum 2 GB RAM for Color Factory exclusively. This depends greatly on the size of the images being processed. For example, a 1 GB PSD may require 10GB of available physical memory. For more information, see the Scalability section below. Operating system Windows Server
In certain environments where software activation over the Internet is not possible, Fotoware can deliver a license file to use instead. The Fotoware software reads the license information from this license file when starting up. The license file contains encrypted information about the Fotoware applications that are licensed to run in the network.
Enabling Activity Exports in Site Configuration is the first step in setting up the overall Activity Exports functionality. Once Activity Exports is enabled, you can configure which events to log and, if relevant, what metadata to log for the selected events. To access this feature, you need to be a member of a group that has been assigned the Manag
Legacy note: This feature was discontinued on July 1, 2021. Versions released after that date don't contain this feature. What are screens? Using a computer in your network you can access your FotoWeb server (it has to be the same server that your iPad is connected to) and create a "Screen" from the login page. Anyone can then use FotoWeb on their i
Good practice for metadata requirements during upload When configuring FotoWeb for upload, it's important to enforce the adding of some some information to the assets being uploaded so that they can be found and used by others as well. In that regard it's important to consider the types of assets users will be uploading. If you enforce a very strict
A Business Rule can execute actions when certain conditions are met. For each business rule you define general information (name, id, tracing, status), one or more trigger points (update or creation of content items, replacing of a file or via schedules), conditions (what should the business rule check e.g. metadata changed), transformations (e.g. t
Channels assets to different recipients/outputs. Output - The asset that gets output, and where you want it to be output to.
How to delete an album in the main interface First, open the album you want to delete. Click the trashcan icon in the left side panel and then click it again to delete the album. This will mark the album as deleted. Users with access to the album will no longer be able to open it and view its contents, and the album itself will be permanently purged
Where configuration files are stored To simplify the document, we replace the following base folders with some abbreviated names: PRIVATE_FOLDER C:\Users\<Username>\AppData\Roaming\Fotoware COMMONFILES_FOLDER C:\Program Files\Common Files\Fotoware Configuration files The base folders for the different configuration options are: When using a s
Uploading assets to Fotoware Note: The maximum file size you can upload is 25 GB. Select Upload in the top banner to display the Upload window. Drag one or more files from your desktop into the upload area (the dotted blue box) or click on the Browse link to locate the files on your computer. Previews are loaded for files (.png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .gi
Sometimes you might need to duplicate a file in an archive, for example, if you intend to edit a file and want to retain a copy of the original one. To do so, select the file, or files, and then select Duplicate in the action bar. To avoid the unintentional duplication of many files in the archive, you must select Duplicate twice to confirm. Tip: T
Fotoware Support has received input from Fotoware users questioning the security of exposing the video URL to the user. This is the reassuring reply from our developers: In order to play a video, you need a URL of the video so your browser can download it. Also, if you can play a video, you can theoretically download it and pass it on to anyone. Thi
What are collection queries? Collection queries are search queries for assets in a single collection. The correct way to make a collection query request is to: Look for the searchURL attribute in the collection's JSON representation Replace the placeholder {?q} with the query. If the searchURL attribute is null, it means that the collection does no
When to use a license server? You need a license server if: you have a redundancy license for a server application you have licensed a client application for use in a Terminal Server or Citrix environment Installing and setting up the license server The process of installing and setting up the license server consists of the following steps: Obtaini
Overview Learn how to browse the folder structure of a FotoWeb archive using FotoWeb for iPad. Folder browsing When you've opened up an archive a folder icon will show in the top bar next to the FotoWeb logo. Tapping on this opens up the folder menu where you can drill into the folder hierarchy. When browsing folders you only see files in the exact
With FotoWeb Desktop, you can check out files from a FotoWeb archive and download them to your local file system. They can then be opened in a locally installed application - for instance, you can edit images in Photoshop and videos in Premiere. FotoWeb Desktop also has built-in functionality for high-resolution image editing and cropping/resizing p
When users export an asset for use on a CMS, they can make modifications to the exported asset. These are: Image crop, size and rotate Applying enhancement filters Adding an image caption Setting click action behavior Enabling Ken Burns effect Adding publication information A site administrator can choose which of these features users have access to
How alerts work Alerts, or search agents, as they're commonly called, are user-defined queries that are stored and repeated at a set interval. This way, FotoWeb can be set to look for new content in an archive and give users a heads-up via email when new content that matches the search arrives in the archive. Alerts are issued by email to the regist
Regardless of how you prefer to make your selections, you will find the different view modes beneficial. You can switch modes using the icons above the grid next to the grid size slider. The available types are Grid (use the slider to adjust the grid size), Filmstrip, and Preview. Shortcut View G Activates Grid View. F Activates Filmstrip View. E an
EXIF codes EXIF Camera Info EXIF Field Code Original file name / Document name #EXIF010D Maker #EXIF010F Model #EXIF927C X-Resolution #EXIF011A Y-Resolution #EXIF011B Resolution Unit #EXIF0128 Orientation #EXIF0112 Exposure time #EXIF829A F Number #EXIF829D Exposure program #EXIF8822 Spectral sensivity #EXIF8824 ISO Speed #EXIF8827 EXIF version #EXI
How PDF document indexing works Index Manager supports PDF document indexing natively. To enable it, you need to configure an index and attach folders containing PDF documents to that index. Index Manager will then extract metadata and textual content from these documents and generate thumbnails and previews that will be shown in FotoWeb and FotoSta
FotoWeb transcodes and plays audio and video files in your archives. To play a video, select the asset's thumbnail in the grid to open the Details page. Select Play in the preview to start playback. Playback controls Play / Pause buttons - Start or pause playback. Volume control - Controls the output volume. Use the system control panel to choose be
An administrator needs to configure the following to enable the use of annotations on the Fotoware system: Enabling annotations in an archive From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon), go to Site Configuration > Archives. Open the General tab. For all users with access to the archive to be able to see the annotations that have been created on assets, t
The GeoPoint Within Polygon condition checks if the geoinformation inserted in Picturepark is within a defined polygon e.g. to check if the images shot were created in Aarau or more general to check if images were taken (GPS data from extracted metadata) near the headquarter address (polygon) and then assign the headquarter tag to them (action assig
If you have been given permission to rotate pictures in an archive, you can select one or several pictures and use the Rotate buttons in the action bar to rotate them in steps of 90 degrees. You don't have to worry about quality loss in JPEGs since the rotation is based only on EXIF data. This makes it possible to rotate even very large files quickl
When you work with your assets, you will likely want to copy or move certain files to other folders or even to completely different archives. The permissions that control which archives you can copy and move to and from are set on the server side, so this topic deals with how you use the main web interface to select and reorganize your files. Organi
This topic contains a list of FourCC (aka. 4CC) codes and their associated file extensions. More information about FourCC codes can be had at http://www.fourcc.org. FourCC codes can be used when searching for file types using Index Manager. File extension FourCC code JPG JPEG JPEG JPEG JIF JPEG JPE JPEG JP JPEG FDP JPEG TIF TIFF TIFF TIFF EPS EPSF P
Sometimes you might need to duplicate a file in an archive, for example, if you intend to edit a file and want to retain a copy of the original one. To do so, select the file, or files, and then select Duplicate in the action bar. To avoid the unintentional duplication of lots of files in the archive, you have to click the Duplicate button twice fo
If you have permissions to download files from FotoWeb, you can simply select one or more files and click on the Download button in the action bar. Depending on how the archive has been configured, you may be given the possibility to choose a processing profile that can resize a picture or perform other types of server-side processing before the fil
Who is it for? Q: Who can use the Fotoware mobile app? A: All licensed Fotoware Main Users can log in and use the app with their site. Q: Does the mobile app work with both Fotoware in the cloud and On-Premises? A: Yes, the app is available for both SaaS and On-Premises. If you have Fotoware hosted on your own servers you need to choose Custom domai
How upload from mobile devices works You can use the Fotoware Mobile app for iPhone or Android to upload photos and videos from your smartphone or tablet using the FotoWeb app. Note: The maximum file size you can upload is 25 GB. Some mobile devices can store pictures from an SD card in its camera roll using an SD card adapter, in which case you can
The authentication flow is the definition of how the tokens to identify users are exchanged. Picturepark external Identity Provider must support Authorization Code Flow with PKCE. PKCE, pronounced “pixy” is an acronym for Proof Key for Code Exchange, which does not require users to provide a client_secret. The standard Authorization Code flow would
File system metadata When you store a file somewhere, be it a text document, a spreadsheet, or any other type of file, the file system automatically adds quite a lot of information about the file: the file name the type of file extension (tells you which type of file it is) the name of the folder it is stored in, even the entire path if the hierarch
Um Ihr Passwort zurückzusetzen, gehen Sie bitte wie folgt vor. Öffnen Sie die Picturepark URL Wählen Sie “Hilfe benötigt?”. Geben Sie Ihre E-Mail Adresse ein Schicken Sie die Anfrage ab Sie sollten nun eine E-Mail mit einem Link zum Zurücksetzen Ihres Passworts erhalten. Falls Sie Ihre E-Mail-Adresse nicht bestätigt haben, wird eine Bestätigungs-E-M
You can modify the properties of an existing user in Fotoware in the User Management console. From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon), go to Manage Users/Groups. Use the Search field to locate the user and select Edit for the relevant user. In the Edit dialog that opens, make the necessary changes. Select Save.
Uploading files using FotoWeb Desktop FotoWeb Desktop is an application installed on your local computer that allows communication with the remote FotoWeb system. The upload module in FotoWeb Desktop lets you upload files from your desktop directly to any archive that you have upload permissions to. You can also modify the files' metadata before upl
XMP metadata Some file formats support embedded XMP, while others don't. For the file formats that support embedded XMP, the metadata will be stored in the asset file and travel with that file when it is copied or moved around in the system. Many image formats support embedded XMP, and all XMP-compliant software will be able to read and modify the X
Crop sizes are used when users check out files from an archive using FotoWeb Desktop. As an administrator you can choose the sizes and aspects available for the user to choose from when cropping pictures. Open the archive properties and go to the Export and Import tab. Locate the Cropping section and choose a crop profile set from the drop-down menu
A picture that has been revoked can be permanently removed from the CMS Exports list. To do so, first make sure the picture is revoked, then click on the orange Trashcan icon next to it. To avoid mishaps, you cannot remove a picture without revoking it first. Note: Permanent deletion of exports is only available to users who have been granted the ad
Integrations and applications can download assets from a FotoWeb site using the FotoWeb RESTful API. The same download options are available as for interactive users. This means that Download is controlled by permissions. An API client that impersonates a user can only download assets for which the impersonated user has download permission. Availabl
If you're using the Pro interface, learn how folder navigation works there. Folder navigation When you open an archive that contains a folder structure, that folder structure is displayed in the left panel above the Comments field. Note: The system administrator controls whether folder navigation is available in archives. You can click on a folder t
Um auf die Picturepark Content Platform zuzugreifen, besuchen Sie bitte die entsprechende Picturepark-Startseite und registrieren Sie sich, in dem Sie die folgenden Schritte befolgen. Öffnen Sie die Picturepark URL Ihres Unternehmens (Die URL ist in der Regel wie folgt aufgebaut: https://Unternehmen.picturepark.com) Wählen Sie “Registrieren” Füllen
To search for a particular album or albums, go to the Albums page and use the search field in the top menu bar. You can search for the album name, description, and any tags you've added to it. Note: The search results will display only the first 100 album hits.
Activation with a license server In certain environments where software activation over the Internet is impossible, Fotoware may deliver a license file hosted on a license server. The Fotoware software connects to this license server when starting up to check out an available license from this server. This document does not deal with the actual setu
The FWP protocol is used for connections between Fotoware applications. Starting with version 8.0 build 760, FotoStation, Index Manager and Color Factory make full use of FWP 2.0, which provides full client-server functionality so that clients do not require SMB or AFP access to the network shares. Client-server communications via FWP Metadata handl
A license expiry information message appears in the Operations Center Status app when the license for one of your products is nearing expiry. The message appears briefly each time you open the Operations Center Status app and it states how may days remain before the named product expires. A message is first displayed 14 days in advance of the expiry
Die Benutzer können zu Content Items Kommentare verfassen und andere Nutzer benachrichtigen, z. B. indem sie die Metadaten vor der Veröffentlichung überprüfen oder Fragen zu den Inhalten stellen. Nutzer können nun zu (Master-)Inhalten Kommentare verfassen und Benutzer benachrichtigen, z.B. um Metadaten oder den Inhalt zu überprüfen, bevor er verfügb
Settings This sub action is used to change the metadata for one or more files. Select either Use a text macro (to use a text macro to insert the text) or Use a text template (to use a text template). Select the macro or template from the drop-down list underneath. Note the difference between a text macro and a text template. A text template is stati
Sobald Sie angemeldet sind, können Sie auf Ihr Avatarbild unten links in der Content Platform klicken, um zu folgendem Bereich zu gelangen. Abmelden Benutzereinstellungen zurücksetzen Löschung beantragen Passwort ändern. Dies ist nur möglich, wenn ihr Benutzer auf Picturepark IDS gestellt ist. Identity Provider Profil Benutzerinformationen anpassen
How it works The Fotoware extension for Illustrator lets you check out files from a Fotoware archive and edit it in Illustrator, and then upload your changes to the server when you're done. You can also create new content in Illustrator and upload that content to the Fotoware server using the plugin, i.e. there's no need to log in to Fotoware separa
An album owner can choose an image as the album cover to help others with whom it's shared see what it contains. First, go to the Albums by following the link in the top banner. Then click on the album for which you want to choose a cover. Find the asset you want to use as the poster and select it by clicking on the checkmark next to its filename. N
LEGACY NOTE: This guide describes legacy functionality in FotoStation. In new versions of FotoStation configurations are maintained and downloaded to the client over FWP. Please refer to Creating and maintaining centralized FotoStation configurations for updated documentation. Configuring FotoStation to use the network configuration To configure
Settings The SmartContrast™ sub action is used to improve the contrast and color balance of images. This sub action has no effect on non-image files. SmartContrast™ options This sub action doesn’t have any options associated with it. By adding this sub action to a chain of other sub actions, the contrast and color balance of the image is improved au
A configuration overview of the FOFA demo: Arrange a Picturepark Demo | Picturepark Channel Content Portal (portal) No Virtual Items Media library Product Library (product) Content Items with Product Layer assigned Media Type either “Main shot” or “Technical Product Sheet” Press Portal (pressPortal) Only Virtual Items Events Projects & Campaigns
Search Analyzers define how text is processed or manipulated. These analyzers give you control over how your text data is used in the search. The goal is to standardize text, for example lowercasing or converting special characters (diacrititcs) or handling of singular/plural in translations (e.g. men, man). Search Analyzers are available for string
When you access your Picturepark for the first time, there are defaults already configured. Picturepark sets these defaults on the creation of your instance, based on definitions and subscription plan. You cannot change this inside your Picturepark. So whenever you lack the option to add something, check these defaults here. Please contact your Pic
Which features do the apps offer? Upload of pictures and videos:Take pictures or record videos and upload them to the Fotoware server. Add metadata to the files you upload to make them easy to retrieve once they're on the server. Search for assets: Search and retrieve assets that are stored on the Fotoware server. Zoom and preview metadata: Zoom in
Feature Fotoware browser requirements The most updated versions of Microsoft Edge, Mozilla Firefox, Apple Safari, and Google Chrome have been tested and verified to work. We expect Fotoware to work on most browsers. Screen resolution 1280 x 1024 or higher Note: Fotoware works without any browser extensions or manual changes to browser settings. The
You can upload files to Fotoware using the Fotoware Mobile app (once you have a wireless or mobile network connection). Most mobile devices can store pictures from an SD card in their camera roll using an SD card adapter, in which case you can transfer pictures and videos taken with your DSLR to the mobile device and then upload them to FotoWeb. You
Overview Archives you have created can be exported and imported so other users can connect to the same archives as you. Exporting an existing archive If you would like to export a configured archive (not the actual files in the archive, but the path to the folder and all related settings) to a file for use on another computer running FotoStation, th
For more information about licensing and use rights, see fotoware.com.
Resetting your password If you have forgotten your password and cannot log in to FotoWeb, you can easily reset the password if you can access the email address associated with your FotoWeb account. On the FotoWeb login screen, select the Forgot Password link and enter your email address. You will receive an email with a link to reset the password. F
Uses of the API The API can be used for the following purposes: Building custom user interfaces Building custom mobile apps Automating workflow Analytics These are only examples. Any application that needs to read data from a FotoWeb server and maybe manipulate some of this data can make use of the FotoWeb API. Introduction to HTTP and REST An appli
Authentication is the act of proving that "you are who you say you are" usually done via passwords. The act of verifying the identity of a computer system user. Identity providers offer user authentication as a service. See Wikipedia Authentication.
Some of the Fotoware plans include a guest portal. This makes it possible for people to access your site from the Internet and see content that you've made available for public use without logging in. So, if you have a collection of files that should be available for the press, for example, you can make these files public and allow all visitors to y
Fotoware as a Service - Hotfixes 2022 Deployment These releases are gradually deployed and the latest release will be available on all tenants soon. The releases are listed in chronological order, with the latest on top. December Fixed issues The performance issues related to excessive preview requests for SVG files are fixed. A placeholder icon is
Customizing the Thumbnail Grid Clicking on the Thumbnail Grid node under the Views node in the configuration tree gives you access to the various configurable aspects of this view. Display file name under each thumbnail: Turns file name display on or off. Display a sort value or a custom value under each thumbnail: Makes it possible to display eithe
To clean your duplicates, please navigate to the channel “Admin” or “Administration” . In this channel, there should be a filter called “Duplicates (Hash)”. If there is no such filter, you could either try to add this filter by yourself or contact [email protected]. If you expand this filter, you should be able see the sha1hash codes of all fi
More general details about Display Pattern Display Pattern File Type Pattern The following code fragments can be used: <cp-overlay-box-top-left style="..."></cp-overlay-box-top-left> <cp-overlay-box-bottom-left style="..."></cp-overlay-box-bottom-left> <cp-overlay-box-bottom-right style="..."></cp-overlay-box-bottom
The ID field is the ID of your field, which is used to link to this field. The field ID is always lowercase. The field's ID is set when creating a new field using camel casing. You need the field ID for the configuration of filters or display patterns. The ID is automatically created from the name you insert: Example: You insert the field name "My N
Fotoware as a Service - October 2024 update Deployment This release is being gradually deployed and will be available on all tenants soon. New functionality HEIC files are now supported, which means you can upload, index, store, and view HEIC files just as you can with any other supported file type. There are some known issues with this functionali
FotoStation can be configured to check for and download updates automatically. Different editions of FotoStation deal with automatic updates differently: FotoStation edition Auto update enabled by default Comments FotoStation (version obtained at fotostation.com) Note: fotostation.com is deprecated and will soon become unavailable. Yes Auto-update i
With the help of a share you can share content with external users. To access a sharing you don’t need to have a user account on the Picturepark Content Platform. You can share content by right clicking on a content item and selecting “Share”, but you can also select all relevant content items in the content browser and then select share. It is also
Users with permissions to invite users (set on the group level) can invite users to sign up for a Fotoware account. Such invitations can be extended to individuals, organizations, or anyone with a signup link generated by the site administrator. Note: For user invitations to be available, online signup must be enabled. Creating an invitation From th
Fotoware as a Service - May 2021 update Deployment This release has been fully deployed to all tenants Summary Added the possibility to create User Interface Integrations to extend the functionality of a Fotoware system Added the possibility to force a user to change password on the next login.
The Excel Roundtripping App is developed by Picturepark and saves you time when updating content or metadata. You can export data such as Content Items, content metadata, and List Items on a massive scale, editing the data within Excel or other spreadsheet tools and then re-importing it for the update of existing data in the Content Platform. The ap
Setting the index delay In Index Manager Settings, open the Advancedtab for the relevant index. Enter a value in the Index delay field. Select Save. What this setting does The index delay determines the number of seconds it takes from when a file updates until Index Manager updates the index accordingly. In an archive with much I/O it may be a good
Yes, the maximum file size you can upload is 25 GB.
Use the Status filter to display files you've given different color codes based on their status. You can click the colors in the filter menu directly below the toolbar or use the keyboard shortcuts to apply filters. To use keyboard shortcuts, press Shift-1 to show files with the lowest status setting, going up to 9 for the assets with the highest st
If you're working on the console of the server where you installed the Fotoware server application(s), there will be a shortcut to the Operations Center Settings on the desktop. Double-click to open it. You can also access the server remotely by entering the server URL in your web browser, for example: http://servername:7000 Using a secure connectio
Identity providers (short: IdP, IDP) are systems that manage and maintain identity information (e.g. user attributes). Identity providers offer user authentication as a service. Picturepark outsources the user authentication to the Picturepark Identity Server as the default trusted identity provider and is thus a relying party application to it. See
A poster image is used on the tile that represents the archive on the home screen in the FotoWeb main interface and helps users identify the contents of the archive. Note: You can only set a poster image for an archive if you have been given certain administrative privileges. Choosing a poster image After logging in, click on the archive you want to
Use the rating filter to display files you've rated with one to five stars. By ticking several rating values, all files with those ratings will be shown. You can also quickly show files with a certain rating using the keyboard shortcut: Press Ctrl-Shift 1 to display files with a rating of 1, Ctrl-Shift-2 to display assets with a two-star rating and
A regular expression (usually called regex or regexp) is a sequence of characters that help you search in text (strings). Various systems use Regex for field validation and find or find & replace operations in text (strings). Regex is common in computer science. See Wikipedia Regex for more details. Regex is used in Picturepark Business Rules or
Fotoware as a Service - February 2021 update Deployment This release has been fully deployed to all tenants Summary Added the possibility to search for albums - convenient for users with lots of albums. Improvements to the Taxonomy API, allowing pinning and searching for taxonomy items in the UI.
Unique Request ID Every web request sent to the Fotoware API is assigned a unique ID, the request ID, when handled by the server. The request ID is then returned in the response as a custom header: 1 X-RequestId: LDAp_ietQQVthEV0SlhQkw The request ID is a random and unique string of ASCII characters. It may also be interpreted as a BASE64URL-encoded
Goal: Show various tags, for example, products or keywords, in a display pattern. Use the push tags code example for simpler, maintainable, faster code. Prettify with Push Explained When you have a Display Pattern with lots of values, you can prettify your code using the following logic. 1. Create an array (name: tags) for looping through terms {
Color Management for grayscale pictures In Color Factory Settings, expand the relevant channel and select Color Management. Open the Grayscale tab. The following dialog appears. Here you can configure how Color Factory handles incoming grayscale images. By default, grayscale images are processed without involving Color Management settings. However,
Die Picturepark Suche bietet 3 Suchmodi, sowie Suchvorschläge aus den Listeneinstellungen.Wann welcher Suchmodus zu verwenden ist, wird unten erklärt. AND Suche Die AND Suche sucht nach Inhalten, die alle eingegebenen Suchbegriffe enthalten. Wenn Sie zum Beispiel nach “Stock shot” suchen, übersetzt Picturepark dies in Stock AND shot und sucht nach B
Fotoware as a Service - September 2023 hotfix Deployment This release is being gradually deployed and will be available on all tenants soon. Fixed issues Previously, there were problems when uploading large files. The maximum upload file size is now increased to 25 GB. After the last update in July, an unrequired Built In Fields dialog was display
A picture that has been revoked can be permanently removed from the CMS Exports list. To do so, first make sure the picture is revoked, then click on the orange Trashcan icon next to it. To avoid mishaps, you cannot remove a picture without revoking it first. Note: Permanent deletion of exports is only available to users who have been granted the ad
Symptom: FotoStation program windows behave erratically, or FotoStation does not start at all. Certain diaogs may not appear as expected. Solution: The symptoms appear rarely, but can be remedied by clearing the FotoStation user preferences file from the file system. Clearing the FotoStation user preferences file should remedy the issue Where are th
About the Fotoware license tool When rolling out a number of FotoStation instances in a network environment it can be useful to automate the activation of the license on each computer using a logon script. This can be done by creating a logon script that runs on every computer where FotoStation has been installed. FotoStation includes an executable
Overview Using a so-called watch window you can keep an eye on new files that arrive in a different archive than the one you're currently working in. Monitoring an archive using a Watch Window If you right-click on an archive and choose Open as watch window, FotoStation will display a small, resizable thumbnail strip that is set to update automatica
Fotoware as a Service - August 2019 Update Summary With this release we're introducing self-service management of workflows! This means that you can configure your own Actions and Markers without having to request the assistance of Fotoware Support or a Fotoware Partner. What's required to start using the new features? To manage Actions and Marker
Fotoware as a Service - July 2024 update Deployment This release is being gradually deployed and will be available on all tenants soon. New functionality Unified user-facing messages when deleting assets. In the Main and the Pro Interface, users now get the same UI information when attempting to delete an asset. In addition, the message now always
Sharing an album To share an album you first have to open it on a separate tab in FotoWeb Pro by clicking its title in the Albums panel. Next, make sure Grid view is selected (press G to activate it) and click on the Share button to the far right in the album information panel above the grid. To share the album with other FotoWeb users or groups, si
Fotoware as a Service - September 2021 update Deployment This release has been fully deployed to all tenants Summary Dark Mode toggle available in Fotoware and Fotoware Pro UI High-res zoom introduced for PDF and some other document types Various bug fixes and improvements
Fotoware as a Service - July 2019 update Summary This release sees a number of improvements that improve upload stability, as well as improvement to the OAuth 2.0 authentication mechanism, as well as the usual roundup of bug fixes. Upload improvements Stability improvements for asset uploads as well as an improved Upload API: Ingestion Changes to Co
Products, events or projects & campaigns are stored in Picturepark in Lists as List Items. For integrating external systems e.g. PIM or event platforms or webshops you can get all list items from Picturepark via get Get Many List Items https://demo.picturepark.com/Docs/Rest/index.html#operation/ListItem_GetMany VIDEO: Get List Item from Picturep
PDF processing Where: Channel | Input File Formats | Adobe PDF tab By default, Color Factory moves PDF files directly to the UNKNOWN folder. However, you may choose to process PDF files, allowing in-place color management and optional conversion to postscript. Splitting multi-page PDFs into single-page documents After enabling PDF processing, you ma
Problem "App not registered" and kitten when opening /fotoweb/widgets/selection! Cause You are trying to use the widget in the legacy way (without any URL parameters (no access token)) when it is not enabled. Remedy See Using embeddable widgets. Problem "App not registered" and kitten when opening the FotoWeb OAuth URL (/fotoweb/oauth2/authorize/...
FotoWeb may reject authorization because the user does not have permission to use a client as requested or because the client is not registered or allowed to be used with FotoWeb, for example. Authorization may also fail due to network or server issues, and it may be aborted or discontinued by the user, for example, because the user is unable to log
For mobile devices download the Confluence Cloud mobile app. You can also visit the temporary page: Picturepark Administration Manual. Version: Schreckhorn (11.14) Date: 19-February-2025 Platform: {name}.picturepark.com Main changes: Tree view and reworked Batch Editor. The Picturepark Content Platform serves three main use cases: Standalone Con
Collections are a group of content items that have been collected by a user and saved for further refinement, review, or processing (sharing, editing, etc.). You create a collection in the Content Browser or the Content Browser toolbar. You can also prepare collections for using in the Content Picker in integrations or via Relationship field. Create
Detail Pattern Detail Display Pattern The Detail Pattern displays summary information in Content Item Detail View and List Item Detail View. The Detail Pattern is used for a summary or description shown below the preview (if available) for file and virtual items (1), as well as list items (2). Download File Name The Download File Name is used t
This step-by-step guide describes creating a selection widget integration with FotoWeb API. The guide involves: Application registration and authorization Request new access tokens using refresh tokens Widget URL for FotoWeb API Using the widget First (1) follow the Web Application or API authorization guide to register the application and obtain re
In some cases, you may want to manually revoke an exported picture immediately. This can be done by opening the exports manager and selecting Revoke. This will immediately remove access to the picture. If you change your mind, you can select Publish to restore access to the picture using the settings that were originally selected when the export was
By enabling a workflow, you activate it to process assets based on the configured triggers and actions. When you create a workflow, it is disabled by default. You can edit workflows only when they are disabled. If you disable a workflow while it is running, the process is immediately stopped and the operation will not finish. You can enable a workf
Overview FotoWeb for iPad lets you upload pictures and video from your camera roll to the FotoWeb server. You can also take pictures using the built-in camera and submit that to the server. Uploading files from the camera roll To upload files from your iPad, touch the Upload icon as shown in the screenshot. The upload window shows up, and you can st
The JavaScript Object Notation (JSON) is an open-standard file format or data interchange format that uses human-readable text to transmit data objects consisting of attribute-value pairs and array data types (or any other serializable value). JSON knows numbers, strings (text), boolean, arrays and objects; as well as NULL. Find more about JSON on W
The Monaco Editor is a browser-based code editor that also powers Microsoft VS Code. Thanks to IntelliSense features, you can get suggestions by pressing Ctrl + Space, which will reveal some code hinting. A red line marks code errors like missing commas or unnecessary ones.
The item detail design grid contains the following areas Item Name (outlined in green below)showing the name of the selected item from the browser, for example, the name of a content item or the name of the list item (configurable via name display pattern) Item Paging (outlined in red below) allowing to page to the next or previous item or close th
When adding metadata to a field, you can add a fully qualified web URL, such as http://www.fotoware.com/ or https://www.fotoware.com/, which will automatically become a clickable link. Notes: The URL has to be the only content in the field To be recognized as a URL, the URL must end with a forward slash (/) after the domain name. Valid examples: htt
Network servers are Windows file-sharing compliant servers in your network operating on the SMB (Server Message Block) protocol. This means that you can easily use this protocol to transfer files to and from Windows servers as well as Mac OS servers with Windows file sharing enabled or Unix or Linux servers running SAMBA. Configuring a Network Serve
In accordance with GDPR legislation, all data subjects have the right to the erasure of personal data without undue delay (the right is not absolute and only applies in certain circumstances). This is covered by the "Right to Erasure" and described in article 17. In short, this means that any user can request their personal data to be deleted. This
Scenario description This is an example sorting workflow that can be used to sort files that are ingested into the archive by a user. That user may be adding the file to the archive using an action in FotoWeb or FotoStation that copies or moves it into Color Factory's input folder. Color Factory can then pick up the file and store it in a subfolder
From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon),go to Site Configuration > Archives. Open the Export and Import tab. You can edit, clone, or remove an archive by selecting the corresponding link. When you clone an archive, the archive will be assigned a new archive ID and added at the bottom of the archive list (provided that the archive is sorted by archive
The List Pattern displays in list view mode of the Content Browser as a summary of Layer and Fieldsets in Content Item Detail View. It is used for tagbox suggestions in edit mode and as a title of the tagbox card view.
Adding document folders to an index Up to 32 document folders can be added per index. Each of these document folders can contain any number of subfolders, so long as the hierarchy does not produce a path length that exceeds 225 characters, including folder path, file name, and extension. In some languages, a character is composed of several bytes an
This article describes how to use the API to extract renditions (images) of assets, which have sizes and other attributes (such as quality and watermark settings) which can be set by the system administrator. This allows an integration to export large numbers of images from a FotoWeb system into a third-party system, such as a web shop or gallery. C
What are the Classify views for? This view, accessible from the Views button on the toolbar, can be used for sorting images and organizing them in predefined categories. When you use Classify View, you are actually modifying the content of metadata field number 225: Classify state. This topic deals with the two predefined classify views, Basic and
About slideshows The Slideshow option is an excellent way of browsing through images, both for viewing and selecting images that require editing or cropping, or finding images that aren’t up to your required quality level, and so on. Creating a slide show To run a slide show, select some images from the current source (select all images that are sho
Export Um Ihre Listen zu aktualisieren, können Sie erneut zu "Listen" navigieren und auf die Liste klicken, die Sie aktualisieren möchten. Klicken Sie dann auf die 3 Punkte und wählen Sie "Exportieren". Sie können dann auswählen, welche Felder Sie exportieren möchten. Der Excel Export sollte dann alle Felder beeinhalten. Auch die Picturepark ID. Upd
Um einem Benutzer eine Benutzerrolle zuzuweisen, müssen Sie die Detailansicht eines Benutzers aufrufen und dann zum Abschnitt “Rollen” scrollen. Über den Knopf “Rolle hinzufügen” können Sie Benutzerrollen hinzufügen. Wenn sich ein Benutzer über SSO anmeldet und eine Fallback-Benutzerrolle oder ein Group Mapping definiert ist, wird dem Benutzer die e
Die Bearbeitung von Benutzerrollen kann im gleichen Menü auf der Registerkarte “Rollen” erfolgen. Um die Detailansicht zu öffnen und eine Benutzerrolle zu bearbeiten, können Sie auf eine Rolle doppelklicken. Der wichtigste Teil dieser Detailansicht ist der Abschnitt “Benutzerrechte”. Hier können Sie alle Berechtigungen
Fotoware as a Service - February 2025 update Deployment This release is being gradually deployed and will be available on all tenants soon. Improvements You can now edit search terms in the Pro interface as you already could in the Main interface. This allows you to make quick adjustments to search terms directly in the search box. For more informa
Software requirements Note: Ensure all Windows updates are applied before installing Fotoware on the server. Windows Server 2022, 2019, or 2016 - only 64-bit versions are supported. Internet Information Services (IIS), minimum version 10.0 (this is installed automatically by FotoWeb unless you are doing an offline installation) .NET8 is required fo
The following settings for .tiff are additionally available. Property Description alphaPremultiplied Specifies whether color channels should be premultiplied with alpha (associated alpha) or not (unassociated alpha). compressionType Specifies the compression type to use. includeUnspecifiedTiffExtraChannels Preserve (including size affecting changes
Note: This is a preview release containing new features that are still under development. For more information about Flow, contact [email protected] . How Flow works Flow is an automation toolkit that handles tasks such as ingestion, download, and transformation by triggering actions based on time or events. You can create, view, edit, and manag
Basic searching When delivering a basic search without a field specification, the search is performed across all fields in the Metadata configuration. The following is an example of a basic search: 1 Summer holiday 2010 The search is interpreted as a string that has to appear in the files' metadata exactly as is. It may be more practical to search
The privilege to allow users to create and modify taxonomy content is set on the group level. Thus, all users who need this privilege should be added to one or more groups to which the Manage taxonomies privilege is assigned. The privilege is set in the group management console: Open the Tools menu and choose Manage Users/Groups. Locate and edit the
No settings for a document still image are available. No special settings for all document files are available. The following output format settings are available for all file types . Property Description sourceOutputFormats Which output format should be used as a source for rendering. This allows you to render small thumbnails from formats other
Azure storage input With Flow, you can connect an Azure Blob Container to your workflows and use it as an input source. Configuration Create a connection using a SAS URL. In the When an asset is uploaded to Azure Storage node, you can create a connection by providing a SAS (Shared Access Signature) URL. Event handling: The flow is triggered wheneve
Overview When you make selections in the Pro interface, there's a multitude of ways that you can temporarily store that selection to isolate it and further narrow it down or contribute files to it. Learn more in this topic. Adding assets to the pin bar Having made a selection of files you can drag the entire selection to the pin bar at the bottom of
Problem After you have downloaded and installed an updated version of your Fotoware software, the program will not start. It keeps asking for activation even though a license key has already been activated. Cause The most likely cause of this problem is that you have installed a newer version than your current license key allows you to run. However,
What are indexes? As the name implies, Index Manager uses what we refer to as indexes - containers where it stores all the metadata it has extracted from the assets you add to the system. You can think of an index as a collection of files, or assets - Archives are set up in FotoStation and FotoWeb, and connect to the index and display its contents.
Enabling or disabling features In Color Factory, select the relevant channel and open the Enable Features tab. Select from the list of features that are available for the selected channel. Alternatively, you can right-click on a channel and select Enable Features or Disable Features from the context menu.
How authentication works By default, a user connecting to an index on the server has to authenticate. An index can have an access list assigned to it, in which case only users/groups in the access list have access to the index. If an index does not have an access list associated with it, users still need to authenticate, but any user with a valid us
Lists are lists of keywords or tags. Lists are primarily used to serve for tagging content. A list is your controlled vocabulary, your taxonomy, used for tagging with multidimensional information. That means a list can only have tags with a name or tags that have further information, such as synonyms, translations, broader terms, narrower terms, etc
Text fields in Picturepark have an additional option to render Markdown , a well-known syntax supported by various systems. Using Markdown in text fields allows basic formatting of descriptions, press kit content, or product descriptions to highlight specific areas or structure longer text areas. Picturepark uses the following component: https://ma
Introduction Use the Annotations API to create integrations that create, update or delete annotations. Methods GET annotations href: /fotoweb/archives/5001-News-archive/30/car.jpg.info.annotations/ method: GET accept: [application/vnd.fotoware.annotation-list+json, application/json] GET number of annotations href: /fotoweb/archives/5001-News-archive
Connect can use email servers both as source and destination. With an email source, Connect strips the email attachments from the message and processes the attachments through a channel. With email servers used as a destination, Connect sends each file processed in a channel to an SMTP server as an attachment to a number of email addresses. You can
Configuring basic server settings The Color Factory service is configured using the Color Factory 7.0 administration program. By default, the service will be set to start automatically when the system boots up, but after installation the service will remain stopped to let you configure the system before starting it. You can change the automatic star
Tips for dealing with OAuth 2.0 errors can be found in Handling OAuth 2.0 Errors. Most of these errors are returned as error responses to the redirection endpoint of the application. The application should handle them by displaying an appropriate, friendly error message to the user. Other errors are unexpected due to incorrect configuration, applica
Before configuring any workflows in Connect, you should configure global virus scanning options. Connect can be configured to scan all processed files for viruses to avoid transmitting an infected file to a destination. All source folders have the option to enable virus scanning, where you can choose how any infected files should be handled. They ca
To rename an asset, first select it in the grid. Then open the Asset Information panel(keyboard shortcut T) and click on the Pencil button at the bottom of the panel to rename the file. In the dialog that opens, you can enter a new name for the asset. Select Rename to save the change. Note that the asset's original extension will always be preserved
The Flow FTP server provides both FTPS and SFTP protocols for secure file transfers. To access the FTP configuration, go to Settings > FTP Server. The Hostname of your FTP server is auto-generated by Flow. The SFTP Port is used for the SFTP protocol, and the FTPS Port is used for the FTPS protocol. You can't customize these ports since Flow h
Authentication using the RESTful API requires an API key, as explained in the API authentication topic. The API key is set in the FotoWeb Site Configuration. Note: Legacy Widget and API Key Authentication are deprecated and will be set to End of Life on January 1st, 2025. If you have implemented custom integrations with FotoWeb, such as CMS integrat
Azure Computer Vision is a cloud service by Microsoft that uses machine learning (AI) to identify objects, faces, and other artifacts in pictures. Note: Fotoware does not use or develop Facial Recognition technology, and does not support the use of integrations for facial recognition purposes, in any Fotoware solutions, products, or services. Accord
The AssignLayerAction assigns a specific layer to content if the condition is met. This requires the layer to be available to the specific content type (Available For in Layers). Specific Definitions Type-ahead and select the Layer from the dropdown. The Layer ID is used in the Business Rule, so you can update the name anytime. Property Value kind
The AssignTagboxItemsinLayerAction assigns Tagbox Items from the defined cache to the corresponding Layer and the fields where the values are allowed to be added. This requires a cache of type SchemaTagboxFilterLookupNamedCacheConfiguration to be present. Specific Definitions Property Value kind AssignTagboxItemsinLayerAction namedCache Named cache
The UnassignTagboxItemsAction unassigns a specific tagbox item from the tagbox field specified e.g. remove flagged content tags from public keywords. This requires the layer with the field and the tag to be present on the content, therefore combine with "LayerAssignedCondition". The Business Rules are not executed after one another. If one Business
Authentication All requests to the order API require user authentication. Clients of the order API can make requests on behalf of a user that manages and approves orders, who in this documentation is called administrator. a user that has a shopping place order, who in this documentation is called customer. Note Management and approval of orders req
Setting the properties of the local file server In Connect Settings, go to Servers > Default > Local Server. Configure the following, as required: Name: The name cannot be changed for the local server. It is based on the computer name given to the server on the network. Description: Enter additional information about the server, for instance
This documents the Job Request File format that third-party systems can create integrate with a Color Factory server. It also includes the specs of the PRF (Process Results file) that Color Factory returns to allow the other system to pick up the output file and determine whether the processing succeeded. About Job request files The Job Request File
The Trigger field you can use to trigger a business rule with the benefit that it stores the information about the user who clicked the field and when (date and time), whereas a checkbox "start business rule" would not have any information about user and time. Trigger Overview Icon Behavior VIDEO: How a Trigger Behaves Usage Instead of working with
Color Factory is a high-efficiency server application that has been specifically designed to automate the processing of large volumes of digital images and PDF documents. Color Factory automates many routine operations in the production process and ensures that the production of images for print is seamless and efficient. The software performs workf
By default Fotoware will download background images for use on the login screen from a Fotoware repository on the internet. If you would rather use your custom collection of background images that comply with your corporate profile, you can do so by changing the setting in the Fotoware site settings. Note: You cannot use a collection (album or archi
When a file is uploaded or transferred into Picturepark, Picturepark chooses the most suitable File Type and provides a core set of fields (file metadata) to the newly created File item. You see entries in these fields under Extracted in each file item. You can open the Main menu > Schemas > File Types in Picturepark to see the various File Ty
Changing the location of the disk cache From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon) go to Site Configuration > Server Configuration > Cache. To change the location of the folder where proxy files are stored, enter the new lcoation in the Cache folder field. After changing the path you should copy any existing content from the old cache folder to the n
About uploads There are several ways to upload files to FotoWeb: from FotoStation using an HTTP upload through a web browser after a user has logged in to FotoWeb from the FotoWeb Desktop Uploader for Windows or Mac OS from FotoWeb for iOS and Android In addition to the methods listed above, files can be delivered to the server over any SMB/FTP or o
Using webhooks you can configure Fotoware to send notifications to third-party systems when a user has signed up for an account online, and/or when the administrator approves a pending signup. Configuring a signup notification Open the Fotoware site management (Tools - Site Configuration), expand the Integrations node and choose Webhooks. where you
Metadata processing in Color Factory Color Factory can automate many of the metadata operations in a workflow. A complete overview of all the metadata features that are available can be found in the Managing metadata guide. XMP field codes Note: Fields in the Fotoware Reserved namespace should not be used for custom content - these are required by F
From the Tools menu (cogwheel icon) go to Site Configuration > Appearance > Renditions. Thumbnails and Previews You can manage the quality of the thumbnails and previews that FotoWeb generates in these sections. All asset representations smaller than 200 pixels in size are rendered using the Thumbnails settings on this page. Representations ab
Files that are transferred to a destination using an action can be renamed when they are sent. Go the the Destination asset tab, enable the Interactive checkbox and then choose Rename files. Files can be renamed per job or per file. When the user executes the action, he will be shown a dialog box where he can enter a new file name to which the serve
When adding metadata to a field, you can add a fully qualified web url, for example in the form http://www.fotoware.com/ or https://www.fotoware.com/, and it will be automatically become a clickable link. Notes: The url has to be the only content in the field The url has to end with a forward slash (/) after the domain name to be recognized as a url
FotoWeb can be configured to issue an email notification when a workflow has been run using an action or an interactive marker. It is configured by opening the properties of the action or marker and going to the Notification tab. Enabling the option to Send notification message on successful completion, and then type in the email address, a subject
Setting up consent management These instructions explain how to set up consent management for the first time. The steps must be implemented in the following order as each step is dependent on the previous step: Configure consent management for the user or user group. Note: Only Editors can configure consent management. This includes creating consen
Note: The Preview Agent API is deprecated and will be set to End of Life on July 1st, 2024. If you have integrations that display previews in real-time, we recommend looking into alternative solutions such as obtaining temporary preview links from the RESTful API. URL http://servername/ArchiveAgentPath/FileInfo Parameters Id[ 1 . . . * ] Valid ID(s)
Overview Get tips for quickly adding tags to a number of files in a selection in the FotoWeb Pro interface. Adding tags quickly When you add metadata to a large number of assets, you may have found that many of the keywords you use are the same. To help you avoid having to retype them again and again, there are a couple of "tricks" in the metadata p
Adding assets to the cart Make a selection of assets and click on the Add to Cart button on the action bar. The Shopping Cart symbol lights up and a notification tells you the number of assets that have been placed in the cart. Keep on placing items in the cart until you're ready to check out. Checking out your order Click on the Shopping Cart symbo
Note: The Preview Agent API is deprecated and will be set to End of Life on July 1st, 2024. If you have integrations that display previews in real-time, we recommend looking into alternative solutions such as obtaining temporary preview links from the RESTful API. URL http://servername/ArchiveAgentPath/Search Parameters Search[1] The string to searc
To get the JPEG RGB previews of the files reported by the Archive Agent, you can use the URL provided by the ‘PreviewURL Id’ node if the XML returned by the ‘Search’ and ‘FileInfo’ methods. Note: The Preview Agent API is deprecated and will be set to End of Life on July 1st, 2024. If you have integrations that display previews in real-time, we recom
FotoWeb users can preview and browse the individual pages of several document types. Users with access to download Quick Renditions from an archive containing such documents can request a bitmap rendering of a certain page in the document and then drag it to the desktop in JPEG format. Here's how: Find the document from which you'd like to extract a
Settings The Launch Application sub action is usually used to open external applications (such as Photoshop or Microsoft Word) from FotoStation. The available options are: Application to Launch: Enter the path to the application you would like to open. You can choose between adding the path directly into the text field (for example, C:\Program Files
When running an action that has the crop feature enabled you will be presented with the a crop window that allows you to apply a crop frame and size the image before proceeding. If several pictures are processed in the action, you can crop the images one by one. Cropping and sizing Set the crop by dragging a frame around the area you'd like to keep.
The condition Content Permission Sets Changed checks if there have been changes made to the Permission Set of a Content Item. This does not include any change to the Permission Set itself. Triggers the moment any Content Permission Set is assigned or unassigned from any Content Item. Specific Definitions Select the condition. Property Value kind Co
Using webhooks you can configure Fotoware to send notifications to third-party systems when a user has signed up for an account online, and/or when the administrator approves a pending signup. Configuring a signup notification Open the Fotoware site management (Tools - Site Configuration), expand the Integrations node and choose Webhooks. where you